Home

Page 123 - GLG Toolkit

1. Locate the attribute resource you want to add the alarm to and click on it to select it Click on the 4dd Alarm button Enter values for the alarms s attributes in the Edit Alarm dialog To edit an alarm attached to an attribute bring the Attribute dialog and click on the Edit Alarm button to activate the Edit Alarm dialog Alternatively click on the A button on the right side of the attribute row in the Properties dialog The Edit Alarm dialog lists the alarm s attributes The AlarmLabel field may be used to assign a custom alarm name and the Enabled field may be used to enable or disable the alarm For range alarms the high and low ranges are also displayed Deleting an alarm To delete an alarm attached to an attribute object follow the following steps 1 2 3 Use Object Alarms to see a list of alarms Locate the alarm you want to delete and click on it to select it Click on the Delete Alarm button in the Edit Alarm dialog 256 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Alternatively display the Attribute dialog for the attribute or resource the alarm is attached to click on the Edit Alarm button to display the Edit Alarm dialog and click on the Delete button The A button on the right side of the attribute row in the Properties dialog may also be used to access the attribute s alarm dialog Animating a Drawing Animation brings the drawing to life by linking a source of data outside th
2. Save Object Print Save Object saves the currently selected object to a file Save Object differs from File Save because 1t lets you save a selected part ofa drawing For example by including objects in a group and then using Save Object on the group object you can isolate part of an object hierarchy When you select an object and then select Save Object the Builder prompts you to enter a file name using the standard file selection dialog The usual file name extension for a GLG drawing is g though it is not required To add a saved object into an existing drawing use File Load Object see page 298 To edit the saved object use File Open to open the saved object as a separate drawing file see page 297 The object is saved using the same format as for File Save to change the format for saving drawings and objects use Options Save Format see page 357 For Linux UNIX users Print saves a PostScript image of the current drawing into a file For Windows users Print sends the current drawing to the printer using the standard Windows print facilities Use Export PostScript to save a PostScript image of the drawing to a file The Print toolbar button can be configured to perform either task using the ToolbarPrint configuration file variable Printuses the print configuration set by the File Print Configuration options Ifediting focus is set 1t prints the focus viewport instead of the whole drawing Export PostScript Exp
3. The Run mode may be used to prototype the tooltips in the Builder At run time tooltips are handled automatically with no application code required The Tooltip event is generated every time an object tooltip is activated or erased Refer to the Tooltip Message Object section on page 364 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual for more details In the C environment balloon tooltips can be enabled by setting the GlgNativeTooltip global configuration resource described on page 342 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual Chart and Axis Tooltips Chart and axis objects support integrated tooltips displayed when the mouse hovers over a chart or an axis object The tooltip displays information related to the mouse position over the chart or the axis For a chart object the tooltip contains information about the data sample selected by the current mouse position If the mouse hovers over the chart s X or Y axis the tooltip displays the time or the Y value corresponding to the mouse position For an axis object the tooltip converts the mouse position to a corresponding axis value and displays it in the tooltip The content of the tooltip is controlled by the chart s and axis s TooltipFormat attribute see page 116 The chart tooltip is defined by a tooltip action with the Tooltip ChartTooltip attached to the chart object and Tooltip 8Axis Tooltip is used to attach a tooltip action to an axis object Custom Tooltip Formatters
4. U The week number of the current year as a decimal number range 00 to 53 starting with the first Sunday as the first day of week 01 Not supported in Java and C NET W The day of the week as a decimal range 0 to 6 Sunday being 0 See also u Not supported in Java W The week number of the current year as a decimal number range 00 to 53 starting with the first Monday as the first day of week 01 Not supported in Java and C NET For example the Time X nDate x may display the following label in the US locale Time 12 49 13 PM Date 02 06 2013 MilliSec Format time axes only Specifies a double precision C style format for an optional display of fractional seconds in the form of milliseconds at the end of the axis labels It may be set to an empty string to suppress milliseconds display For scrolling axes with relative time the default setting is 03 0f which will display 270 5 milliseconds as 270 For scrolling axes with absolute time MilliSecFormat is set to an empty string by default and is not displayed in the Builder s Property dialog The attribute can still be accessed via the Resource Browser using the MilliSecFormat resource name Label Format non time axes only Specifies a double precision C style format for axis labels non time axes only For example the x 0f format will display 12 5 as x 12 Major Interval Specifies an interval between major ticks A po
5. List of Values The list of attribute values to use which may be edited Index The zero based index controlling which value from the list is displayed For color attributes with the list transformation attached the transformed color value is calculated by adding the color value specified in the list to the value of the attribute When the transformation is attached in the Builder the first color in the list is set to the attribute s color and the attribute s color value is set to a black color 0 0 0 to prevent interference The SList transformation is similar to the list transformation except that it uses a string as an input variable instead of a list index The value of the string input is compared with the entries in a provided list of strings and if it matches the corresponding entry in the list of values is used as the output Ifno match is found the value of the last entry in the list of values is used Same as the list transformation the SList transformation may be attached to attributes of any type D S or G The SList transformation has the following attributes List of Values The list of attribute values to use It may have one more entry than the list of strings this last entry is used when no match is found GLG Objects 167 List of Strings The list of strings to compare the input string with String Value The input string controlling which value from the list of values is displayed Threshold The Threshold
6. ResetAllItemsState Deselects all selected items This message has no parameters GetSelectedItemList Returns a list of selected items This message has no parameters and returns a group object containing integer values GlgNOption The native option menu handler encapsulates the behavior of native option menu X Windows and combo box Windows widgets allowing to use them in a cross platform way It may be attached to a viewport object with the OPTION MENU WidgetType The option menu s selection may be changed by setting the value of the SelectedIndex resource The GlgSendMessage method may be used to add delete or query option menu s entries InitItemList This resource is a list of strings to be displayed in the option menu or combo box widget on initial appearance It may be edited in the Graphics Builder ItemList A group object created by the option menu handler which contains the current list of option strings displayed in the widget InitSelectedIndex This optional resource D type provides a zero based index of an item to be selected on the initial appearance of the option menu Messages GlgMenu Input Objects 209 SelectedIndex The value of this resource is set to the 0 based index of the selected option item when the selection is made Setting this resource from a program changes the displayed selection SelectedItem The value of this resource is set to the string of the selected option item The
7. Use Marked Template Replaces a template of the selected SubDrawing or SubWindow object with the template marked with the Mark Template option The template will be shared between all subdrawings or subwindows that use this option The option is enabled only for SubDrawing and SubWindow objects that use included templates Replace Parent s Template For a series or reference object Replace Parent s Template lets you use a different object as a template Use the following procedure 1 Select Traverse Hierarchy Down to open the series object 2 Select or create a new template object 3 Select Traverse Replace Parent s Template GLG Graphics Builder Menus 323 When you go back up the hierarchy the series or reference is drawn with the new template object The old template is discarded If the template is a simple object a polygon for example this option may be used to add more objects to the template by replacing the polygon with the group containing other objects as well Legend Contains options for managing chart legends Mark Legend Marks the selected legend object Set Chart Legend Sets a previously marked legend object as a legend of the selected chart Reset Chart Legend Resets a legend of the selected chart object GIS Zoom Mode Provides options for setting the zoom mode of a viewport to the GIS Zoom Mode Set as Parent Viewport s GIS Object Sets the GIS Zoom Mode of the GIS Object s parent
8. Icon use in a palette drawing 303 Palette 106 Widget 84 106 use in a palette drawing 304 wildcard character 139 resource browser entry 246 resource browser entry 247 pls file 303 resource browser entry 246 gt gt resource browser suffix 246 resource browser entry 246 1D Frame 112 255 Color Display 359 2D Frame 112 3D Frame 112 3D rendering 89 A Action Object 176 ActionType 179 Activate message 203 ActiveArea 196 ActiveState 195 ActOnPress 202 203 adding aliases 351 custom property 349 Adding Custom Palettes to the Builder 305 Adding object to the template 323 AddItem message 207 209 advanced objects 66 alarm 340 adding 255 deleting 255 alarm editing 255 Alarm Label 174 Alarms 39 343 alarms 63 Aliases 274 aliases 247 342 marking and replicating 259 Aliases attribute 70 aligning objects 356 363 Index alignment mode bounding box 235 control points 235 alignment operations 234 alpha blending 69 142 ambience 42 defining 150 AmbientCoefficient 150 Anchor 76 80 133 anchor path 107 Anchor Point 156 157 Angle 153 AngleType 74 animation 28 256 343 to 344 354 to 355 dynamic transformation 256 lines and surfaces 270 337 to 338 using history object 353 to 354 Annotation 119 AntiAliasing 72 78 arc Object 74 328 Arc Path 271 arc path 66 ArcFillType 74 Arm action 175 ArmedState 202 arrow heads 70 72 77 78
9. NET environment as described in the Scalar Formatting Format D section on page 164 Some conversion specifications may not be supported on Unix platforms other than Linux such as Solaris HPUX AIX etc Refer to the manual page of the native strftime function for information on the supported conversion specifications for these Unix platforms a The abbreviated weekday name according to the current locale A The full weekday name according to the current locale b The abbreviated month name according to the current locale B The full month name according to the current locale c The preferred date and time representation for the current locale d The day of the month as a decimal number range 01 to 31 D Equivalent to m d y e Like d the day of the month as a decimal number but a leading zero is replaced by a space F Equivalent to Y m d h Equivalent to b GLG Objects 127 H The hour as a decimal number using a 24 hour clock range 00 to 23 I The hour as a decimal number using a 12 hour clock range 01 to 12 j The day of the year as a decimal number range 001 to 366 k The hour 24 hour clock as a decimal number range 0 to 23 single digits are preceded by a blank See also H l The hour 12 hour clock as a decimal number range 1 to 12 single digits are preceded by a blank See also I m The month as a decimal number range 01 to 12 M The minute as a decimal number range 0
10. Rounded Rectangle A rectangle with rounded corners a sub class of polygon Arc Represents shapes with round edges such as arcs and circles A sub class of polygon Ellipse An ellipse rendered as a special case of a rounded rectangle Spline A multi point Bezier or Catmull Rom cubic spline used to render free shape curves Text For placing text in a drawing Marker A small design for marking a point position Image For placing GIF JPEG PNG and BMP images in the drawing GIS Object An integrated map object for embedding images generated by the GLG Map Server into a GLG drawing and automatically handling Map Server requests and user interaction Viewport This is the drawing surface for a GLG drawing and a container for other objects This object controls the view a user has of all the objects within it Screen Controls aspects of a viewport s appearance You can use the simple graphical objects to create a wide variety of drawings that include elaborate animations However the simple objects do not use many of the advanced features of the GLG drawing structure The advanced objects allow a user to define complex collections of simple 66 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference objects which can then be manipulated as if they were simple objects This ability to add layers of complexity to a drawing is the key to the power of a GLG drawing The list below shows the advanced graphical objects Group Used to assemble a collection of
11. The Color Blinking dynamics alternate an attribute s color between the two specified colors It has the following properties Enabled Enables or disables blinking When set to 0 the blinking is disabled and the OffColor is displayed Interval The blinking interval in seconds OnColor The first color OffColor The second color Color Alert The Color Alert dynamics change an attribute s color when the monitored value goes out of the specified range It has the following properties ActivateOnEqual If set to 1 True the color is changed when the input value is equal to or exceeds the specified range If set to 0 False the color is changed only when the value exceeds the range InputValue The monitored value Interval The blinking interval in seconds OnColor The first color OffColor The second color RangeHigh The High range RangeLow The Low range Color Blinking Alert The Color Blinking Alert dynamics alternate the attribute s color between the default and alarm colors when the monitored value goes out of the specified range It has the following properties 170 List Threshold GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference ActivateOnEqual If set to 1 True blinking starts when the input value is equal to or exceeds the specified range If set to 0 False blinking starts only when the value exceeds the range ColorOK The default color to use when the value is inside the Low High range ColorWarning
12. because the point values are rounded off Snap To only affects mouse selection 226 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference GLG Objects Although the menus and buttons in the GLG Graphics Builder show a wide variety of different drawing possibilities the underlying graphical types are more restricted in number Many of the buttons are provided for convenience and do not represent separate object types The available object types are e The text object which presents string data e Simple graphical objects which are just shapes such as polygons parallelograms arcs and markers e Advanced objects which are specialized arrangements of objects that provide special behav iors The advanced objects are viewport group reference series square series polyline poly surface connector and frame objects see page 265 Complete descriptions of all the GLG objects appear in the GLG Objects chapter on page 65 Selecting an Object The simplest way to select an object is to click on it with the mouse When you select an object its control and resize points appear The move point appears at the object s center it s a dynamically calculated point provided for convenience in the Builder only You can reposition an object precisely by Shift clicking on the move point and using the arrows in the Object Move Point dialog To avoid accidental movement while you are selecting an object use Shift click to select the object For les
13. s Manual and Builder Reference Distributes objects horizontally with equal distance between the objects centers Distributes objects vertically with equal distance between the objects centers Select Anchor Select Anchor defines the anchor object Select this option then click on the object with the mouse to define it to be the anchor The anchor selection will be preserved until the currently selected group is unselected Align Points More Object Create Polygon When this toggle is checked the objects control points are used to align objects If the toggle is unchecked the objects extents will be used This option is equivalent to the Layout Toolbox option it brings the Layout Toolbox for more alignment and layout options The Object Menu provides options to let you create and manipulate objects within the drawing The options under the Create option let you add new objects to the drawing Most of the options under the Create submenu correspond to the buttons in the Object Palette on the left side of the Builder window You can create the object by choosing its type from this menu or by clicking on the corresponding button in the palette If an object has an icon in the drawing primitives palette the icon is shown next to the object description If an icon is not displayed the object may be created only by using the Object Create main menu See page 225 for basic instructions on drawing objects
14. 248 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Adding and Deleting Resources Naming an object automatically adds it to the resource hierarchy its location is controlled by the HasResources flag of its parent object When you delete an object from the drawing it is also deleted from the resource hierarchy Adding an Object to the Resource Hierarchy To add an object to the resource hierarchy 1 Select the object 2 Use Object Properties or use the Properties button to see the attributes of the object 3 Type a name for the object in the Name box The new name appears in the resource hierarchy A set of default resource names for the object s attributes are also added they are automatically placed below the object even if the HasResources flag is set to NO The object s attributes can also be named by selecting the attribute s ellipsis button and entering a name into the Name box of the Attribute dialog For named resources both the user defined name and default resource name will appear in the resource browser The default names will always appear as the resources of the object The location of the user defined names will be controlled by the object s HasResources flag If the flag is set named attributes will appear as resources of the object otherwise they 1l appear as resources of the closest parent with its HasResources set to YES Defining the Hierarchy Using the GLG Graphics Builder 249 Use the HasReso
15. A custom tooltip formatter can be set using the G gSetTooltipFormatter function A custom tooltip formatter is invoked every time a tooltip is activated and provides a string that will be displayed in the tooltip This enables an application to generate dynamic context dependent tooltips at run time Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing 49 Tooltip Colors and Appearance Tooltip colors are controlled by the GlgTooltipLabelColor and GlgTooltipBG Color global configuration resources described in the Appendix A Global Configuration Resources chapter of the GLG Programming Reference Manual on page 341 If these resources are not set the default colors inherited from the respective run time environment are used to render a tooltip Multi line tooltips are supported if a tooltip string contains line breaks it will be rendered as a multi line tooltip The GlgTooltipTextAlignment global configuration resource may be used to specify alignment of rows in a multi line tooltip By default the rows are aligned to the left of the tooltip box Integrated MouseOver and MouseClick Actions Various MouseClick and MouseOver actions can be added to an object in a drawing using an integrated action object The following describes available action types and examples of their use Refer to the the Action Object chapter on page 176 for a detailed description of the action object s attributes MouseOver Highlight The GLG drawing supports object highlighting
16. Coordinate Systems The graphical objects in a GLG drawing are all defined by points in three dimensional space The coordinates of any point indicate a position for that point relative to some origin It is possible however that two different points can be defined relative to different origins and that their coordinates can have altogether different meanings The position of the origin the units and the directions of the unit vectors all define a coordinate system Components of a single drawing can refer to several different coordinate systems each related to another through a series of implicit and explicit transformations There are several layers of geometrical transformations that affect the way the object is rendered The transformations may be attached to the object s control points to the object itself as well as to any of the object s parents In addition there may be user defined viewing transformations attached to the viewport as well as internal transformations that control the viewport s integrated zooming and panning Finally there is a world to screen transformation used by a screen object to map the world coordinate system of the drawing to the changing viewport size Each transformation changes the coordinate system by transforming all objects affected by it according to the transformation type thus defining a new coordinate system In GLG the following types of coordinate systems are defined Parent Coordinate
17. CustomData A slot for attaching one or more optional Custom Data Properties A group is used to attach a list of properties The list is accessible by using the Edit Custom Properties buttons on the Object Menu The attribute assumes the value of NULL if no Custom Properties are attached In order to minimize memory consumption custom properties may only be attached to graphical objects polygons viewports text objects etc Rendering A slot for attaching an optional Rendering object to control an expanded set of rendering attributes such as gradient fill cast shadows fill level and arrow heads The rendering object is accessible by using the Add Edit Rendering buttons in the Object Properties dialog To delete the rendering object use the Delete Rendering button in the Rendering Object properties The attribute assumes the value of NULL if no rendering object is attached See the Rendering section on page 140 for details When a rendering object is added to all objects in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added rendering objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used Common Attributes of Attribute and Data Objects Global This attribute is used to establish the relationship between the attributes of an object and the attributes of copies of that object In general the global attrib
18. Defines the latitude and longitude of the map to be displayed in the center of the GIS Object This attribute is of the geometrical G type and is a set of three values The first two values supply the longitude and latitude correspondingly while the third value must be set to zero The attribute is automatically adjusted when integrated GIS panning is performed If the GIS object with a map in the RECTANGULAR projection is clipped by the viewport s visible area the actual used center may be different from the value of the G SCenter attribute The actual used center may be queried at run time using the G SUsedCenter resource G GISExtent Defines the extent of the map visible in the GIS Object This attribute is of the geometrical G type and is a set of three values The first two values supply the X and Y extents while the third value must be set to zero For the rectangular projection the extents are measured in degrees of the longitude and latitude For the orthographic projection the extents are specified in meters as dictated by the Open GIS Standard The default extent value for the orthographic projection is 14 000 000 which is slightly bigger than the earth s diameter The attribute is automatically adjusted when integrated GIS zooming is performed If the GIS object with a map in the RECTANGULAR projection is clipped by the viewport s visible area or if the GIS object s G SStretch is set to OFF the actual used extent may b
19. Defines the type of the action performed when the action is triggered may have one of the following values SEND EVENT Generates a custom event with the event label defined by the action s EventLabel attribute The custom event provides backward compatibility with the custom event handling code from previous releases of the Toolkit Additional custom data needed by an application may be held in the ActionData container which can be accessed via the Add Data or Edit Data button in the Builder The action also allows the user to define an arbitrary set of action data which is different from the SEND_COMMAND action that uses predefined sets of data for each command type If ProcessArmed ARMED the custom event will be sent only if the Control key was held down If ProcessArmed ARMED and UNARMED the event will be sent regardless of the state of the Control key but the SubAction resource of the message object in the input callback will be set to Armed if the Control key was pressed Refer to the Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time section on page 188 for information on using command actions in the application code at run time SEND_COMMAND Generates a command event with a Command object containing command type as well as data required to execute the command The command data are held in the Command container which is accessible via the Edit Command button in the Builder When a command action
20. FILL EDGE Shading FILL ONLY z AntiAliasing INHERIT Add Rendering ER Dynamics Add Edit Delete 3 To edit an attribute change its value The top panel of the properties dialog contains attributes common for all graphical objects such as an object s Name Type Visibility HasResources etc The middle part of the dialog contains object attributes that vary depending on the object type At the bottom of the dialog there are buttons for adding and editing geometrical transformations such as move scale or rotate The Properties dialog of special objects such as rendering attributes text box attributes font tables and viewport light attributes objects also contain the Mark button to facilitate an easy reuse of these objects The Add or Use Marked Object option of the Edit menu described on page 309 may be used to reuse these objects If an object has custom properties attached the Custom Properties button at the top of the dialog provides access to the custom property editing dialog Using the GLG Graphics Builder 231 While a value of an object attribute may be edited right in the Properties dialog most attributes are objects themselves and have other properties in addition to the value For attributes that are objects an ellipsis button lets you open a separate Attribute dialog for editing the attribute value and other attribute properties Attribute objects may also have transformations alarms and tags attach
21. FillColor Line Width MM lt Axisicon gt gt Visibility XYRatio ZoomF actor Select Clear Close Composite resources that contain other resources are annotated with the gt gt suffix added to the resource name You can navigate between the hierarchy layers by double clicking on the entries with the gt gt symbol at the end gt gt following a resource name means that it is either a geometrical object i e polygon arc etc with a set of default attributes or it has its HasResources flag set to YES and may contain other named resources In either case double clicking on such a composite resource opens another level of hierarchy showing the resources inside of it Entries with no gt gt symbol are usually attributes of objects Clicking on such entries selects them showing the Resource Object dialog for editing that attribute The selection box at the top of the Resource Browser shows the resource path of the currently selected resource using to separate hierarchy levels This notation lets you specify a path to a resource just as you would specify a path to a file When the Resource Browser is used in the Builder the path may start with one of the following symbols top level resources of the whole drawing area the selected object resources resources of the viewport with the current editing focus as a result of the Set Focus button config global configuration resources of the Bu
22. Fora control point use Shift click to see the Control Point dialog and click on the Add Dynamics button 2 Foran object or control point click on the Transformation Type list select Use Marked and the cloning type Selecting Full Clone creates a new transformation with the same attribute values but without constraining Selecting the Constrained cloning type creates a new transformation with attribute constrained to the original transformation The Strong clone type constrains attributes of the transformation whose Global flag is Global or Semi Global and Weak clone constrains only Global attributes For attributes click on the Use Marked button and then select a clone type from a popup menu 3 For an object or control point click on the Apply button to attach the marked transformation s The marked transformation s stay marked until you mark another transformation When the drawing is reloaded the attributes of the marked transformation point to the attributes of the old drawing Therefore you can still reuse the transformations using Full Clone but can t reuse constraints implied by the rest of the cloning types Marking Rendering and Text Box Attributes Fonttables and Light Objects Rendering and Text Box Attributes as well as viewport s Fonttables and Light Objects can be marked for reuse by using the Mark button in the Properties dialog for these objects To reuse the marked object select Edit Add or Use Marked Objec
23. If it is set to RESIZE the original ratio of the viewport s height to width is not preserved and things may look distorted when the viewport is resized If turned off set to NO the ratio is preserved In this case PushIn attribute controls the rest of the mapping The RESIZE AND ZOOM setting allows to stretch the viewport on both resizing and zooming For more details about the mapping from view coordinates to window coordinates see the Coordinate Systems section in Structure of a GLG Drawing PushIn Controls which parts of the viewport are visible when Stretch is turned off If PushIn is set to YES the screen scaling factor is chosen in such a way that the viewport frame a rectangle defined by two points with coordinates 1000 1000 and 1000 1000 is completely visible in the window Some other parts of the drawing may be visible as well depending on the screen ratio If PushJn is set to NO the screen scale factor is chosen as an average of the horizontal and vertical scaling factors defined by mapping the viewport frame to the window s border Depending on the screen ratio some parts of the viewport frame may be clipped off OpenGLHint Controls the use of the OpenGL renderer for the screen s viewport If set to OFF a native GDI renderer is used otherwise the OpenGL renderer is used if available The flag is ignored in the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit The flag may have several ON values with different renderin
24. The second time the change is written to GraphBar I Height and the third time to GraphBar2 Height This continues until there are no more matches for the mask at which point it starts over again with GraphBar0 Height Setting the scroll type to SCROLLED creates similar behavior but all changes are initially made to the first object in the series However each time the first object is changed the second object takes the old value of the first and the third takes the old value of the second and so on The last data value in the series is discarded A history may be attached to an object in the Builder by using the 4dd History button in the Object Menu The history object has four attributes ScrollType Controls how changes are made to the resources that match the input mask Using the WRAPPED type changes in the entry point are made to each of the objects in the series in turn Using the SCROLLED type changes are only made to the first object in the series but with each change in the entry point the second object takes the old value of the first object the third takes the old value of the second and so on The value of the last object in the series is discarded VarName The input resource name mask Use a percent symbol for the variable position For example GraphBar Height will become GraphBar0 Height and GraphBarl Height and so on in turn All resource names are relative to the position of the history object itself That is if
25. VALUE or INDEX modifiers Specify an interpretation and formatting of the values displayed in the scrolling axis s labels Depending on the used modifier the values are interpreted and displayed as either a time stamp a double value or an integer sample index 124 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference LOCAL UTC or RELATIVE Modify behavior of a scrolling time axis to display either an absolute date and time LOCAL or UTC or a time interval elapsed since the time specified by the TimeOrigin attribute RELATIVE CENTER modifier Controls positioning of the axis s major and minor ticks If present ticks are positioned in the middle of the tick intervals as opposed to being positioned at the end of each tick interval The actual axis type is a combination of the constants listed above The following demonstrates a few common examples An ABSOLUTE TIME SCROLL axis type defines a scrolling time axis that displays a span of time defined by the Span attribute The end position of the displayed time span is controlled by the EndValue attribute An ABSOLUTE TIME RULER SCROLL axis type defines a scrolling time axis that displays ticks and labels at fixed pixel intervals regardless of the axis s length The RulerScale attribute controls the seconds to pixels mapping For example if RulerScale 1 each pixel will correspond to one second If RulerScale 5 the length of one second interval will be 5 pixels e A RANGE axis type define
26. When editing large groups with a lot of control points set the selection display to show just the resize box to speed up group selection The Options Selection Options Control Points Display menu can be used to enable or disable display of control points of the object s dynamics To select an object with no fill click on its edge The FillType attribute controls this aspect of an object s appearance To select objects that are located close to each other use Shifi click to bring a menu that allows you to select an object out of several potentially selected objects If the Properties dialog is open the arrow button in the upper right corner of the dialog may be used to select an object when several objects are potentially selected The move point rotate point and the resize box s points are provided for convenience in the Builder only The control points on the other hand are real object points and may be accessed as object attributes or ifnamed resources For objects with a fixed number of control points the points may be also accessed using the point s default resource name Pointl Point2 Point3 etc For objects with a variable number of control points such as a polygon and its subclasses the points can be accessed at run time by using the GlgGetElement function or method without naming the points in the Builder In the Windows environment some viewports require special treatment to move For instructions on dealing with
27. as well as comments lines starting with the character By default on Unix the Builder searches for the palettes pls file in the GLG s widgets directory by using the widgets path relative to the Builder s directory or relatively to the current directory On both Unix and Windows the value of the GLG_DIR environment variable if it is set is used as a name of the directory that contains the widgets directory You can change the default place where the Builder searches for the palettes pls file by setting the GLG_PALETTES LOCATION environment variable to point to either a new palette file name or a new directory where the palettes pls file is located The Edit Menu provides options that let you make and manipulate copies of objects These options operate on the selected object To operate on several objects at the same time use the menu options for selecting multiple objects then use editing options The Cut Copy and Paste options add and remove objects The Clone options let you position and transform the added objects as they are created Undo reverts the effect of the last editing operation such as changing geometry or an attribute value of an object or group of objects changes to object s control points layout and alignment operations zooming and panning and others The undo button displays the last editing operation that can be undone and changes its label to Redo after performing the Undo opera
28. as well as for GLG applications using the GLG C C library On Windows the OpenGL driver can also be used for GLG applications that use the GLG ActiveX Control If nested groups or other objects with DepthSort NO are encountered while a parent s OpenGL based hidden surface removal is active these objects will be drawn in a separate pass after all objects with DepthSort YES have been rendered and will appear on top If OpenGL hidden surface removal is active any semi transparent objects must be rendered last on top of all opaque objects to achieve expected transparency effect which is an established OpenGL technique In GLG this can be easily achieved by placing all semi transparent objects in a group with DepthSort NO which will cause the group to be drawn last on top of all other objects The GlgOpenGLZSort global configuration resource controls the number of passes used by the OpenGL hidden surface removal The default setting of 2 enables two pass technique which helps to eliminate pixel artifacts for polygons that have both fill and edges The edges are rendered in a second pass using an offset defined by the GlgOpenGLDepthOffset global configuration resource 100 be default If polygons have only fill or only edges GlgOpenGLZSort can be set to 1 to use a single pass for increased performance Setting the resource to 0 disables OpenGL hidden surface removal and resorts to the slower non OpenGL depth sorting technique Refer to page
29. depending on the transformation you select You can also switch to creating a static or dynamic transformation using the Action option in the dialog Specify the values to use in the transformation by typing them in the boxes Alternatively use the buttons on the right to supply the values using the mouse the Builder prompts you for each required value Click on the Apply button to change the definition of the object by applying the transformation to the object To undo a transformation right after you apply it use the Reverse button to specify an inverse transformation and click on Apply again Transforming the points changes the object definition permanently but does not add a transformation object to the object hierarchy Creating a Transformation Object To create a transformation object attached to a graphical object 1 Select the object and use Object Add Static Transformation or Add Dynamics Alternatively open the Selected Object Properties dialog for the object and click on the Add Dynamics button or click on the Add Dynamics toolbar icon A dialog for specifying the transformation appears its title depends on the transformation you selected Select the transformation type using the Transformation Type option The content of the dialog changes depending on the transformation you select You can also switch between transforming points and creating static or dynamic transformation using the Action option in the dialo
30. e Filled circle 0 A circle is a many sided regular polygon Its Resolution attribute specifies the number of sides used to render the circle At low Resolution values the shape no longer resembles a circle for example a circle with a Resolution of 5 is a pentagon To define a circle click on the center point then on a point to define the radius In GLG both circles and arcs are rendered using an Arc object type A circle is a special case of an arc with a StartAngle of 0 and an EndAngle of 360 Circles and arcs have an arrangement of control points different from other graphical objects Each circle has two control points that initially appear superimposed at the center of the circle The move point is moved slightly away from the center to avoid confusion The two points define a line to Ellipse Spline Marker GLG Graphics Builder Menus 329 which the circle is perpendicular The length of the line is ignored This means that you can grab one of the control points and tilt the circle by moving it However a circle has no control points on its perimeter for resizing it to change its radius change its Radius attribute or use the Resize Box e Control Point 1 Control Point 2 The Control Points of a Circle The Ellipse options let you create the following kinds of ellipses e Ellipse e Filled ellipse An ellipse is a rounded rectangle with rounded corners taking the whole extent of the rectangle Its Resoluti
31. examples illustrate input handlers use by creating basic toggle and slider widgets from scratch Refer to the following section for detailed description of the resources used in the examples Here are the steps to create a simple toggle button 1 Create a drawing with a viewport and an object in the viewport such as a small rectangle that will be the indicator of the toggle state You can also place a text label next to the rectangle Bring the rectangle s properties dialog click on the ellipsis button next to the Visibility attribute and name the attribute OnState Set the viewport Handler attribute to GlgButton Make sure that the Disablelnput attribute is set to NO Prototype this drawing using the Start toolbar button and select Skip Command in the Animation Command dialog The G gButton handler will toggle the rectangle s Visibility the OnState resource every time the button is pressed Use the Stop toolbar button to exit the Run mode Here are the steps to follow to create a simple horizontal slider 1 Create a drawing with a viewport and an object in the viewport that is to be the indicator of the slider motion This can be any shape or group of shapes We will call this object the active element Assign a move transformation to the active element Name the Factor attribute of the transformation ValueX and make sure that this attribute is visible at the top level of the viewport Set the vi
32. formats The mage options let you create the following kinds of images e Fixed Size Image e Scalable Image To create an image select the type of the image fixed size or scalable define its position one control point for the fixed image and two points for the scalable image and select the image file For images of fixed size the Anchoring attribute may be used to control the image s position relative to its control point The Text options let you create the following kinds of text objects e Fixed Text presents a string To create a fixed text object click in the drawing to define the text s position then type the string in the text entry box e Scaled Text presents a string within a bounding box Resizing the bounding box changes the font size of the string To create a scaled text object click on two points to define the diagonal corners of the bounding box then type the string in the text entry box Note that the text is scaled by selecting different size fonts from the viewport s font table not by changing the dimensions of the characters Depending on the selection of sizes defined in the font table this may appear to give incorrect results when the text object is resized jae e Spaced Text presents a string within a bounding box with flexible orientation Changing the box repositions the string To create a spaced text object click on two points to define a line then click on a third point to define the height
33. glg disable hardware opengl GLG_DISABLE_HARDWARE_OPENGL If set to True disables hardware OpenGL If the OpenGL driver is enabled only the software based OpenGL renderer will be used GLG_DISABLE_SOFTWARE_ OPENGL Disables software OpenGL If the OpenGL driver is enabled only the hardware based OpenGL renderer will be used GLG_DEBUG_OPENGL If set to True generates extended diagnostic output for the OpenGL driver GLG_DISABLE_TIMERS Disables timer transformations in the drawings for debugging purposes GLG_WIDGET_EDITING_ MODE If set to True widgets loaded from the palettes with Ctrl click may be saved into the original drawing files facilitating convenient editing of widgets in the custom widget palettes Without this option a copy of a modified widget is saved in the current directory by default to avoid permanently overwriting widgets in the GLG Builder palettes Note Environment variables that control diagnostic output and driver rendering modes modify the behavior of both the GLG Builder and the GLG applications at run time To modify only the Builder s behavior use the corresponding global environment variables settings in the Builder configuration file if possible Refer to the Appendices chapter on page 341 of the GLG Programing Reference Manual for a full list of global configuration resources and environment variables Builder Configuration File The g g config configuration file contains the most common initia
34. or S for geometrical double precision and string respectively A G value contains three double precision values It usually represents a point in a Euclidean space but it can be used for any data stored in triples RGB color values for example A D value is a single number also called a scalar rendered in double precision and an S value is simply a standard character string Role Determines the type of transformations that will affect the object This is a creation time attribute whose possible values include GLG_GEOM_XR geometrical and GLG_COLOR_XR color The GLG_GDATA_XR GLG_DDATA_XR and GLG_SDATA_XR values may be used with G D and S attributes respectively for attributes other then points and colors Value Where the actual attribute value is stored Note that Value is omitted from a resource name when the value of the attribute is accessed For example MyPolygon LineWidth resource name is used to access the line width of a polygon and not MyPolygon LineWidth Value NULL may be used as a resource name to access the value of a data object from its object ID as shown in the following example GLG Objects 137 GlgObject attr_obj attr_obj GlgGetResourceObject polygon LineWidth GlgSetDResource attr_obj NULL 2 XfValue A read only attribute value as it was transformed by the transformations attached to the attribute The transformed value is valid only after the drawing
35. prior to v 3 5 while providing a better encapsula tion and more precise activation conditions Custom event actions may contain additional custom data as part of the action object At run time the input callback will be invoked with Format CustomEvent when the cus tom event is triggered Refer to the Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time section on page 188 for information on using custom event actions in the application code at run time Mouse feedback action Mouse feedback actions are used to change appearance of an object without writing any application code For example it may be used to highlight an object on mouse click or mouse over by changing its LineWidth or FillColor attribute Mouse feedback actions have a State parameter the value of the parameter is set by the action depending on the requested mouse activation condition To change an object s appearance the State parameter of the action should be constrained to some attribute of the object For example to change the object s color on mouse over State can be constrained to the index of a color list transformation attached to the object s 178 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference FillColor attribute There are several types of available feedback TRACE STATE Traces the state of the mouse click on the object or the mouse being over the object as requested by the action s Trigger parameter by setting the act
36. rectangular region into which graphical objects can be placed You can think of it as the drawing surface for a GLG drawing Unlike a simple rectangle however the viewport object contains the objects that appear in front of it which can include other viewports This creates a convenient way to group objects in a GLG drawing A viewport can control the resizing of its member objects as well as the magnification angle and lighting with which a drawing is seen A viewport also differs from a simple rectangle in that it always appears in the plane parallel to the screen You cannot view a viewport from an oblique angle The viewport has its own coordinate system with the origin at the center of the viewport and the Z axis perpendicular to the plane of the viewport s rectangle The corners of the viewport are 1000 1000 and 1000 1000 in the viewport s coordinate system and this mapping is maintained when the viewport is resized The viewport s coordinate system is used to interpret the coordinates of any objects drawn in the viewport When the viewport is resized all objects within are resized as well Panning and zooming affects the mapping of the viewport s coordinate system For example if the viewport is zoomed in to by a factor of 2 the corners of the viewport will correspond to 500 500 and 500 500 instead of 1000 1000 and 1000 1000 without zooming To add objects to the viewport the editing focus has to be moved
37. specified in the order of increasing their values ValueN or TextStringN Attribute values or text strings to be used where N is a zero based value or string index GLG Objects 171 Blinking The Blinking dynamics alternate an attribute s value between the two specified values It may be attached to any attribute of D type double including the object s visibility It has the following properties Enabled Enables or disabled blinking When set to 0 the blinking is disabled and the OffValue is displayed Interval The blinking interval in seconds OnValue The first color OffValue The second color Range Alert The Range Alert dynamics changes the attribute s value when the monitored value goes out of the specified range It has the following properties ActivateOnEqual If set to 1 True the attribute s value is changed when the input value is equal to or exceeds the specified range If set to 0 False the value is changed only when the input value exceeds the range InputValue The monitored value ValueOK The value to use when the value is inside the Low High range Value Warning The value to use when the value goes outside of the Low High range ValueAlarm The value to use when the value goes outside of the LowLow HighHigh range RangeHighHigh The HighHigh range RangeHigh The High range RangeLow The Low range RangeLowLow The LowLow range The ValueWarning RangeHighHigh and RangeLowLow properties a
38. that indicates its current position and changing the slider s Value resource Depending on the handler type an input handler recognizes a certain set of resources that control the handler s behavior An input handler is attached to a viewport with the viewport s Handler attribute This attribute is a character string identifying which of the available handlers is to be used To use the handler you must also set the viewport s Disablelnput attribute to NO default To use a handler you must equip the viewport with the resources the handler needs to operate A knob widget for example must have a Value resource controlling some aspect of the drawing in such a way that changing the resource value in the range from 0 to 1 rotates the knob from the preferred minimum to maximum angle You may also define optional resources that provide additional information to the handler such as Increment or Granularity These resources may be added to the widget s viewport as custom properties using the Object Custom Properties Add Custom Property menu in the Enterprise Edition of the Builder In the Basic and Professional Editions named resources in the drawing may be used The sections below describe each of the available handlers and list the resources they control 194 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Examples of Creating Custom Input Widgets While the GLG Control Widget Set provides a variety of ready to use input widgets the following
39. which may include city or road name city population road type and other application specific GIS attributes Refer to the the GIS Object chapter on page 80 for more information Integrated Tooltips GLG drawings supports integrated object tooltips as well chart and axis tooltips Custom tooltip formatters can also be used for generating context dependent tooltip strings Object Tooltips A tooltip action may be added to any object via the Object Tooltip Add Tooltip menu option in the Enterprise edition of the GLG Builder A tooltip will be displayed when the mouse hovers over the object Old type prior to v 3 5 tooltips are enabled by adding the TooltipString resource to an object 48 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The first found tooltip action of the object or its nearest parent is used to display the tooltip For example if the object is a group the tooltip will be displayed every time the mouse moves over any object in that group If the object inside the group has its own tooltip action that object s tooltip action will be used to display the tooltip instead of the group s tooltip action To activate processing of object tooltips in the viewport the viewport s ProcessMouse attribute has to include the Tooltip mask If it is set to Tooltip Named Objects tooltips will be activated for all named objects and the object s name will be used to display the tooltip instead of the object s tooltip action
40. 00 UTC GLG Objects 117 input_x_string input_x text Replaced with a string showing the time or X value corresponding to the cursor s horizontal position in the format of the X axis s major tick labels The final string is then formatted with the supplied string format The input_x_string also removes any line breaks to form a single line string sample_x_string sample_x_text Replaced with a string showing the time or X value of the selected sample in the format of the X axis s major tick labels The final string is then formatted with the supplied string format The sample_x_string also removes any line breaks to form a single line string input_time Replaced with a string showing the time or X value corresponding to the cursor s horizontal position in the format of the X axis s tooltip The final string is then formatted with the supplied string format sample_time Replaced with a string showing the time or X value of the selected sample in the format of the X axis s tooltip The final string is then formatted with the supplied string format input_x_time time charts only Replaced with a string showing the time corresponding to the cursor s horizontal position formatted with the supplied time format sample_x_time time charts only Replaced with a string showing the time stamp of the selected sample formatted with the supplied time format input_time_ms time charts only Replaced with the value showing the number of
41. 225 Selecting an OD di dais 226 Edite Obeso 228 EditIMg AUTIDULES ud iii a diia 229 Editing Control Point 204 A E AAA 233 Object Layout and Alignment cccccccccssesseceseceeceeseeesecseecsaeseceeeceseecseecseceseeseeeseeessenseseeeeeeeass 234 Creating Constraints ereinen a AE n A E A E a TE EREE ARO i 235 Constraining Similar Attributes cccccccecsceseessecssceseceeeeeseecaseeseseeeeeaeesaecsaeceeesereseeeesaeessees 236 Constraining Different Attributes cc ecccescsscessecseceeceeeeeeceeseecsaensecseceseeeseceaeeeseeeeeeeaeeasees 237 Constraining Control Pots dida dt Ideas 238 Constraints Trac Ng to dai 238 Defining Transformations and Adding Dynamics cccecccessesseesteceteeeeceeeceseecsecesecneeeneenaeensees 238 Adding Geometrical Dynamics and Transforming an Object cc eceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeees 239 Adding Attribute Dynamics arrier innst arn aet ert e a iaraa a deraan ae a ona 241 Editing Transformations ieee a e e ea E e E E a a E E EE EE 243 Deleting Transformations nesioneiniisinniesiascinsis iriennerien eie sinisi ii ceiaio nos 244 Traversing Transformed Objects advanced ooooooonoccoccconcconnnonanoncnnnonnonononn nono nconnconoconanannonnnos 244 10 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Using View and Screen Transformations of the Viewport advanced ooocoonnooniocnnonconncononoos 245 Using Resources ssi sie selsrscast aten 245 Guidelines for Naming Resources cccsccssessssessceee
42. 238 may be useful for debugging constraints defined in the drawing Note that there is no precedence or hierarchy associated with a constraint When two attributes are constrained to each other they behave as the same attribute object with the same name value and flag settings This means that one of the original objects the one being constrained and all its attributes name value etc are thrown away There is no concept of master or slave attributes the resulting attribute may be accessed using any path in the resource hierarchy For example both cube PY1 FillColor cube PY2 FillColor and cube fill_color names may be used to access the constrained fill_color attribute of the above cube example In the following figure the Fi Color attribute of one of the polygons is constrained to the FillColor of the other Now that the constraint has been established there is no way to tell which object was thrown away and which kept Unless one of the original Fil Color attribute objects was named in which case you can tell from the name of the remaining object In general the object you constrain is thrown away and the one you constrain it to is kept GRP LineType Other Attributes Other Attributes LineType FillColor An Object Hierarchy Modified by a Constraint Graphical Objects In explaining the structure of a GLG drawing we have made several references to graphical objects The following sectio
43. 345 in Appendices for more information When the OpenGL hidden surface removal is active the fill of polygons is not anti aliased To anti alias polygon edges use polygons with FillType FILL_EDGE and Shading FILL_EDGE_ SHADING The two pass technique described above helps eliminate polygon edge artifacts If the GDI driver is used setting the attribute to YES or SPECIAL activates a depth sorting algorithm that renders objects in the order which depends on their position in the 3D space Setting the attribute to NO or any other value disables depth sorting The SPECIAL setting uses a faster depth sorting algorithm which uses objects bounding boxes for determining the drawing order of objects The YES setting performs slower and more detailed tests The algorithm used to sort objects is known not to work in complicated cases when objects intersect Since any depth sorting algorithm slows down the update procedure for a drawing use it only when necessary GLG Objects 91 The INHERIT and PARTS settings of the attribute have no meaning for viewports but are used for other objects that use this attribute such as groups A viewport cannot inherit the DepthSort attribute KeepEditRatio Ifset to YES preserves the X Y ratio of the viewport while editing its content in the Builder by going down into it using the Hierarchy Down button For example the width of a viewport representing a toolbar is much bigger than its height When Hierarch
44. 91 Arrow Type 142 Arrowhead 142 arrowheads 228 adding 271 ArrowShape 142 attribute common 68 constraining 235 to 238 copying value 259 default names 30 definition 25 distinction from resource 27 editing 229 to 232 339 to 341 object 26 transforming 242 Attribute Clone Type 360 Attribute object 67 attribute object 136 Attribute Type 136 Attribute Value 136 364 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference attributes marking and reusing values 259 user defined names 248 AutoLayout 132 AutoScroll 114 Axis 123 axis 356 tooltip 48 visibility 123 axis labels disabling 128 Axis object 123 axis ticks disabling 128 axis tooltip conversion specifications 131 format 131 AxisLabelAnchor 132 AxisLabelOffset 132 AxisLabelPosition 132 AxisLabelString 129 AxisPosition 124 AxisType 123 B background color palette 304 balloon tooltips 48 Bezier 75 Bezier cubic spline 329 Binding 108 bindings 104 bitmask transformation 163 BMP image 79 boolean transformation 162 BOTTOM text alignment 76 Box Attributes 143 reuse 143 Box Attributes object 77 143 BoxEdgeColor 143 BoxFillColor 143 BoxOffset 143 B SPLINE 75 Buffer 167 BufferSize 115 BufferXSpan 115 Builder configuration file 280 environment variables 279 building custom input widgets 191 Bumblebee 22 BUTTON MS Windows control 215 C cast shadows 70 72 77 78 91 228 Catmull Rom 75 Center 153 158
45. A D value is a single number also called a scalar rendered in double precision and an S value is simply a standard character string Value Where the actual data value is stored Note that Value is omitted from a resource name when the value of the attribute represented by the data object is accessed For example my_object Angle resource name is used to access an object s Angle parameter and not my_object Angle Value NULL may be used as a resource name to access the value of a data object using its object ID as shown in the following example GLG Objects 135 GlgObject data_obj data_obj GlgGetResourceObject my_object Angle GlgSetDResource data_obj NULL 90 XfValue A read only data value as it was transformed by the transformation attached to the data object If no transformations are attached to the object the transformed value is the same as Value The transformed value is valid only after the drawing hierarchy has been setup For G data representing points the transformed value is in world coordinates The following example queries the transformed value of an object s attribute double xf_value GlgGetDResource my object Angle XfValue amp xf value TagObject An optional tag object that may be attached to the data object to mark it as a global resource or to define database connectivity for its data value If a tag object is present the data object inherits all tag attributes
46. Apply button when you have finished specifying the transformation Add Static Transformation Add Static Transformation creates and applies a matrix static transformation to the selected object The transformation is saved as part of the object You can delete a static transformation using Object Delete Dynamics see page 344 A matrix transformation cannot be edited directly If several matrix transformations are applied they are merged in a single matrix transformation that has a combined effect of all applied matrix transformations Therefore the only way to change a matrix transformation is to modify its matrix by applying another matrix transformation GLG Graphics Builder Menus 347 To see the object without transformations use Traverse Transformation Down see page 314 For an explanation of the difference between static and dynamic and a description of the possible transformations see the GLG Objects chapter The Matrix Transformation Dialog The Matrix Transformation dialog lets you define a matrix static transformation to attach to the selected object Keep in mind that a matrix transformation cannot be edited directly To specify the transformation use the Transformation Type option which lists the transformations for geometric data See the GLG Objects chapter for specifications of these transformations When you select a transformation the content of the dialog changes providing appropriate text entry box
47. Attributes line_type fill_color 4 A and th se are N This polygon is its resources fill color resource transparent Other Attributes A Possible Naming Hierarchy Note that the name of a resource transparent polygon is not used to access any of its named resources but may still be used to access its named or unnamed attributes using their default names Also the default names of the PY2 polygon attributes such as FillColor will still appear as resources of that polygon This can be experimented with using the Builder s Resource Browser The Alias object may also be used to map a short logical name to an arbitrary resource hierarchy defining custom shortcuts Refer to the Alias section on page 140 for details The Builder s Resource Browser provides controls to browse named resources default resource names and aliases in any combination Organizing resources in hierarchies is a great way to simplify the complexity of a large drawing When such drawing is browsed in the Builder using the Resource Browser only the top level resources will be visible on the drawing s level and their sub resources will be displayed only when a particular resource is selected GLG does not have any limit for the depth of the resource Structure of a GLG Drawing 31 hierarchies and each of the sub objects in the drawing may have its own hierarchy of resources inside it and so on Whil
48. Builder by going down into it using the Hierarchy Down button Persistent Controls persistency of attribute settings for the series instances If set to VOLATILE default only the series template will be saved and the instances will be created from the template on hierarchy setup performed at loading time Any settings of the local attributes of the instances will be lost If the PERSISTENT setting is used the instances will be saved in the drawing preserving current settings when the drawing is loaded If the number of instances is increased by changing the series row and column factors the additional instances will be created by copying the template The existing instances and their attribute settings will be preserved Keep in mind that the instances are numbered sequentially and the row and column of the preserved instances may change if the ColumnsFirst attribute or the series row or column factors are modified Recreate Instances This button is present only in the Builder and may be used to discard the instances by recreating them from the template To discard the instances at runtime set the series row or column factor to zero and call GlgUpdate Like a one dimensional series a square series has a template object that is replicated to form the series As with the series created instances of the template are differentiated by the zero based index added to the name of the template Instances are numbered using one sequential i
49. Factor the additional instances will be created by copying the template The existing instances and their attribute settings will be preserved which may be used for setting line attributes of multi line and other multi set graphs in the Builder Recreate Instances This button is present only in the Builder and may be used to discard the instances by recreating them from the template To discard the instances at runtime set the series Factor to zero and call GlgUpdate PathXform PathXform defines the shape of the path used by the series The type of the PathXform transformation Move Rotate etc is defined when the series object is created The path transformation s parameters may be edited at any time Instances of the template are created by the series after the drawing hierarchy has been setup To differentiate the instances a zero based index is added as a suffix to the name of a template to construct the name of an individual copy For example if the name of a template is Label the produced copies of it have names Label0 Labell Label2 and so on Each of these names appears in the resource hierarchy as does the name of the original providing access to both the template and its instances The instances may be accessed only after they ve been created after the drawing hierarchy has been setup The Global flag of the template s attributes may be used to constrain attributes of its instances If an attribute s Global flag is s
50. File lif See the GLG Map Server Reference Manual for details GISArray A group object used as a container to hold graphical objects that will be drawn on top of the map GLG objects added to the GIS Object in the Builder are placed into this group The content of the group is rendered in the GIS Rendering Mode which interprets coordinates of the objects control points as lat lon coordinates The objects may be added programmatically either to the GIS Object or directly to its G SArray When objects are added to the GIS Object they are placed into its G SArray group GISVerbosity May be set to a value from 0 no debugging output to 10 maximum debugging output to assist debugging of the Map Server setup It may also be set to a negative value in the range from 1 overall performance data to 3 the most detailed per tile performance data to display performance measuring information The attribute may also be set to a value of 1001 or 1002 to display tile extents This attribute has no effect in the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit GISDiscardData Controls Map Server data caching If set to NO default the Map Server data is cached resulting in faster image generation For map images that are generated only once or very infrequently the attribute may be set to YES to discard data after generating the image saving memory This attribute has no effect in the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit The GIS Object may be prototy
51. GIS Object seamlessly integrates Map Server functionality into the GLG drawing both in the application and in the Graphics Builder The GIS Object displays a map image in a selected GIS projection and transparently handles all aspects of interaction with the Map Server automatically issuing map requests every time the map is resized panned or zoomed GLG Objects 81 The GIS Object supports integrated zooming and panning as well as integrated scrollbars In the GIS Zoom Mode zoom and pan controls zoom and pan the map displayed in the GIS Object instead of zooming and panning the viewport s drawing The map can also be dragged with the mouse which works best with either fast CPUs or not very complex maps In the Builder the GIS Zoom Mode may be set by using the Arrange GIS Zoom Mode Set as parent viewport s GIS Object menu option while the GIS Object is selected The GIS Zoom Mode is persistent and is saved with the drawing The map displayed in the GIS Object can also be zoomed and panned programmatically via the GlgSetZoom method Refer to the description ofthe Pan and ZoomEnabled attributes of a viewport object on page 85 and page 86 correspondingly for details of the integrated GIS Zooming The GIS Object can be used as a container that holds dynamic icons polylines and other graphical objects The objects added to the GIS Object are drawn on the map in the GIS Rendering Mode in which the X and Y coordinates of the objects control points
52. GLG Objects 133 By default AutoLayout is set to YES and the legend wraps a row when one of the following conditions is satisfied e MinRowSize 0 and a row extends beyond the box defined by the legend s points e MinRowSize is greater than zero a row extends beyond the legend s box and the number of entries in the row is greater or equal to MinRowSize e MaxRowSize is greater than zero and the number of entries in the row is greater or equal to MaxRowSize If AutoLayout is set to NO and MaxRowSize is not zero wrapped legends will ignore the minimum row size and wrap rows only when the row size reaches the maximum row size even if legend rows extend beyond the box defined by the legend s points If the legend s labels use scalable text the legend may also use a smaller font for rendering labels if the legend s content does not fit the legend s box Anchor Specifies the anchoring type of the legend s content relatively to the box defined by the legend s points Row Anchor Specifies the anchoring type of individual rows of a multi row legends with rows that have different pixel length Min Row Size Specifies the minimum number of elements in a row for wrapped legends If the number of elements in a row is less than the minimum a new row will not be started even if the row does not fit into the legend s box Max Row Size Specifies the maximum number of elements in a row for wrapped legends If the number of elements in a row
53. GoTo command contains a DrawingFile parameter that specifies the drawing to navigate to The use of input actions makes it possible to attach well defined commands to input objects instead of using input object names for handling user interaction In the previous releases of the Toolkit prior to v 3 5 an application code in the input callback had to use input object names and the Action SubAction parameters of the message object to determine the action to be performed Using input actions the code can handle a set of predefined commands that are completely defined in the drawing making the code more generic and independent of object names Refer to the Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time section on page 188 for information on using input actions in the application code at run time TOOLTIP for tooltip actions only Displays a tooltip when the mouse is hovering over an object The value of the attribute is set at the creation time when the tooltip action is attached to an object and the Trigger attribute is not shown in the tooltip action s properties 182 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference ProcessArmed mouse actions only Modifies an action s activation condition to check the state of the Control key In mission critical applications the Control key is always used to arm the action so that it could be activated armed only if the Control key is held down and inactiv
54. If a container is used as a node it s template s control points are protected and the container s single control point may be conveniently used for positioning or attaching connectors to Containers may also be used to preserve center of rotational dynamics when objects are moved SubDrawing is used to replicate a single shared template in different locations in one drawing or in multiple drawings The subdrawing object has a single control point that defines its position All subdrawing instances can be changed in one place by editing the subdrawing s template This is useful when constructing drawings that contain many copies of the same object that needs to be edited in one place The template may be included in the drawing or stored in an external file The Source parameter of the subdrawing defines where the template is stored At runtime attributes of each SubDrawing instance may be changed independently or made global for all instances This is controlled by setting a Global flag of a particular attribute in the template If the flag is set to LOCAL the attribute may be changed independently for each instance at runtime If it is set to GLOBAL changing the attribute of any instance or the template will affect all of them For example if the template has a resource LabelColor which is GLOBAL changing this resource for one instance will affect all subdrawing instances in the drawing Any changes to the attributes of a subdrawing
55. MinValue Max Value The spinner s minimum and maximum values optional Wrap If this resource is present and non zero the spinner will wrap around when the value is incremented or decremented past its low or high values Increment Increment for changing the value by using Increase and Decrease buttons Pagelncrement Increment for changing the value by using Pagelncrease and PageDecrease buttons Increase Decrease If buttons with these names are embedded into a spinner each press of a button changes the spinner s value in the direction indicated by the button s name and by the amount defined by 206 Messages GlgNList GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference its Increment Pagelncrease PageDecrease If buttons with these names are embedded into a spinner viewport each press of a button changes the spinner s value in the direction corresponding to the button s name and by the amount defined by its Pagelcrement IncreaseKeys DecreaseKeys These S resources define a list of characters that will be used as keyboard accelerators for incrementing or decrementing the slider s value by its Increment PagelncreaseKeys PageDecreaseKeys These S resources define a list of characters that will be used as keyboard accelerators for incrementing or decrementing the slider s value by its Pagelncrement TextInput An optional text entry widget that may be used to display spinner s value Slider An optional slid
56. Next When you select a member of a group with a mouse click you select the entire group If you want to edit only one member of the group you can use Select Next to select it This option selects members of a group that exist at the next lower level of the object hierarchy That is if one of the members of the group is itself a group when you choose Select Next and then click on a member of that sub group you select the entire sub group If you are editing nested groups you can use Select Bottom to select objects at the bottom of the hierarchy of nested groups When a permanent group is selected the Ctrl Shift click on an object in the group selects the object acting as a shortcut for Select Next When an object inside the group is selected using Select Next the boundaries of its parent group are highlighted with a dotted line to provide visual feedback for the traversal of the group hierarchy To change attributes that are common to all the members of a group use Traverse Edit All or the Edit All button on the group s Properties dialog To delete a group object and separate its members for independent editing select the group and use Arrange Explode Object Alternatively you can select the group and use Traverse Hierarchy Down to move to the hierarchy level that shows the individual objects in the group At this level you can select and edit each member of the group independently To return to the hierarchy level that shows the
57. Refer to the GLG Programming Reference Manual for information on using the Input callback for handling custom events Refer to the Custom Event Message Object section and the Command Message Object section of the GLG Programming Reference Manual on page 360 for more information on the message objects Input Object Set and Reset Actions Certain actions such as setting or resetting the value of an attribute do not require any application code and may be defined at design time using the Enterprise edition of the Builder To attach this type of actions to an input object in the drawing use the Object Actions Add Input Action menu option and set the action s ActionType attribute to SET_STATE RESET STATE or TOGGLE STATE The SET_STATE action type sets the value of the action s State attribute to 1 when the input action is activated The RESET_STATE action type sets the State attribute s value to 0 and TOGGLE_STATE toggles the attribute between 1 and 0 every time the action is activated For example a drawing may contain two buttons a Start button with the SET_STATE input object action and a Stop button with the RESET_STATE action If the State attribute of each input action is constrained to the Enabled attribute of a timer transformation that drives a drawing animation the animation may be started or stopped by using the buttons without a need to write any supporting application code The InputAction attribute of the input action defines
58. Source attributes of subdrawings may be constrained making it possible to change the template storage type of all subdrawings from the referencing a separate file to including a template object in the drawing and back by setting the Source attribute of a single SubDrawing object SourcePath For subdrawings that use a template stored in an external file Source File the attribute defines the location of the drawing file containing the template When the file is loaded the object named Drawing or Widget is used as the template object If neither named object is found the whole drawing is used as a template Note When a subdrawing is created in the Graphics Builder a file browser is used to select the subdrawing file and an absolute path is stored in SourcePath To allow the application to be moved to a different directory or a different environment web or Java without adjusting subdrawing paths it is recommended to edit stored SourcePath to make it relative to the location of the drawing If SourcePath defines a relative file name the system tries to resolve it in the following order attempting to load the file relative to the directory of the drawing trying to locate the file in one of the directories defined by the GLG_PATH environment variable or the GigSearchPath global configuration resource attempting to load the file relative to the current directory as the last resort Cross Platform Use Note For cross platform Java
59. The Polygon options let you create the following kinds of polygons e Open polygon Al GLG Graphics Builder Menus 327 e Closed polygon gt e Filled polygon A To create any type of polygon click on each point to be used as a vertex then click the right mouse button or use the Esc key to complete the polygon For the closed and filled polygons the Builder joins the first and last vertices closing the polygon Rectangle The Rectangle options let you create the following kinds of rectangles e Rectangle Ol e Filled rectangle al Although the GLG object set does not include a rectangle object the Rectangle options are provided for convenience Drawing a rectangle actually creates a specialized parallelogram with perpendicular sides The sides are not constrained to remain perpendicular though they remain parallel unless you explode the object To create a rectangle click on two points to define the diagonal corners of the rectangle Rounded Rectangle The Rounded Rectangle options let you create the following kinds of rectangles e Rounded Rectangle e Filled rounded rectangle To create a rounded rectangle click on two points to define the diagonal corners of the rectangle It creates a parallelogram with perpendicular sides and rounded corners The size of the rounded corners is controlled by the object s Radius and Radius2 attributes Parallelogram The Parallelogram options let you create the following kinds of
60. The entries with the Fixed 296 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Scale option use the screen coordinate system and objects in the drawing do not change their size when the drawing is resized Instead more or less of the drawing area is shown when the window is resized If the grid is ON the grid interval is adjusted to match the selected Resizable or Fixed Scale option Widget Resizable New Widget Resizable starts a new resizable drawing by creating a new widget and placing editing focus into it The widget s resize policy resizes all objects in the drawing when the widget is resized If the drawing area already contains objects they are not saved The Builder asks if you want to discard the current drawing but it does not prompt you to save any changes to the current drawing You must explicitly save the drawing using File Save A new drawing area contains two objects MMDrawingArea and MMAxisIcon which are visible in the Resource Browser and Properties Dialog of the drawing area MMDrawingArea represents the drawing area itself and MMAxisIcon displays the three axes to shows the orientation of the view MMAxisIcon is only displayed when the drawing area s Axis attribute is turned on These objects are not part of the drawing but part of the Builder To create objects use the buttons in the object palette or the choices in the Object Create submenu To use pre built objects use the Palette menu to load the palettes
61. Zooming and Panning All viewport objects support integrated zooming and panning The panning or scrolling is controlled by the viewport s Pan attribute If panning is enabled the viewport displays integrated scrollbars that allow the drawing to be scrolled when it extends beyond the boundaries of the viewport s visible area The Pan attribute allows the user to enable X and Y scrollbars independently to scroll the drawing area in only one direction or in both directions The Pan attribute also provides settings for displaying the scrollbars only when needed so that they appear only when the drawing extends outside of the visible area and may need to be scrolled In addition to using the scrollbars the drawing can also be scrolled by dragging it with the mouse Integrated zooming includes support for Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom To and other zoom actions At run time the integrated zooming and panning can be performed by a single call to the GlgSetZoom method described on page 89 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual If the viewport s ZoomEnabled attribute is set to YES the viewport object also handles keyboard accelerators for zooming and panning Refer to the Viewport section on page 84 for the complete list of keyboard accelerators If ZoomEnabled is set to NO the accelerators are disabled but the integrated zooming and panning is still available at run time via the GlgSetZoom API method Performing zoom and pan operations on a viewport
62. a command or a custom event to be triggered and has parameters that control what type of user interaction triggers the action An input action also contains data needed to execute the command The use of integrated actions attached to input objects at design time simplifies the application code that handles user interaction Instead of processing low level input events and relying on hard coded input object names for determining the type of action to be performed the application code receives and processes an input action message containing detailed action data Integrated actions make it possible to process commands associated with input objects in a generic fashion and handle arbitrary drawings created by the user For example a button in the drawing may issue a GoTo command when it is clicked on while another button may issue a Quit command The nputAction attribute of the input action defines the type of input activity that triggers the action Input actions are always processed and do not depend on the settings of the viewport s ProcessMouse attribute At run time an application s Input callback receives an input action message when the action is triggered The message contains the action object together with any associated action data which are processed by the application code The source code of the GlgSCADAViewer demo provides examples of handling input actions in the application code 54 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference
63. a drawing its resource hierarchy The resource hierarchy is not the same as the object hierarchy it contains only those objects that you have named and defined as having or being resources See the Structure of a GLG Drawing chapter for more information Giving an object a name adds it to the resource hierarchy The object s position in the hierarchy is controlled by the HasResources flags of its parent objects If a parent object has the HasResources flag set to YES the object is added to the hierarchy below the parent If the object has no ancestors in the hierarchy it appears at the highest level The HasResources flag defines hierarchy levels similar to directories of a file system When naming an object it s also convenient to consider the settings of its HasResources flag at the same time To see resources of an object select it and use either Object Resources menu option or the Resources toolbar button to bring the Resource Browser dialog see page 341 To see resources of the whole drawing unselect the object by pressing the Esc key Selecting another object while the Resource Browser is active will show its resources in the Resource Browser 246 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Resource Browser dialog shows the resources organized like a file and directory structure with levels of hierarchy corresponding to the HasResources YES settings Selection y Filter F Haned F Default F Aliases EdgeColor
64. a way to replace the whole item list UpdateltemList Updates the widget s display after changing its temList The message has no parameters GetltemCount Returns a number of option menu items This message has no parameters A menu widget is a container used to manage a set of buttons When a button within a menu is pressed it issues an Activate message object The menu converts this Activate message of the button into an Activate message for the menu supplying the logical button number in the message This 210 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference allows an application program to ignore the presence or absence of specific buttons in the menu and to deal only with a menu as a whole The menu widget also supplies information about the selected button s label and assigned value by placing this information into the menu s message object The buttons placed in the menu are recognized by their names The name of the first button must be Button0 the name of the second Button and so on Buttons may be pasted into the menu and positioned inside it using the GLG Graphics Builder Alternatively a series object may be used to create a required number of buttons from the series template as shown in the menu widgets provided in the Special Widgets set With either method a menu widget manages the geometry of the buttons resizing them proportionally when the menu is resized If a menu contains toggle buttons buttons with OnState re
65. also provides three toggles which can be used to control what resources are displayed in the browser named resources default resources aliases or any combination of them By default all three resource categories are displayed For a discussion of the basics of object resources see the Structure of a GLG Drawing chapter Tags brings a Tag Browser that shows a list of tags of the selected object or of the whole drawing if no object is selected Selecting a different object updates the Tag Browser to display the object s tags The Tag Browser Dialog The Zag Browser dialog displays a list of tags defined in the drawing or the selected object Tags are global and have a flat hierarchy therefore all tags of either the whole drawing or the selected object will be listed in the tag browser Each tag entry shows the tag s TagName and TagSource attributes separated by the character Tags are attached to the data resources to enable an application to access data via tags When a tag entry in the tag browser is selected with the mouse two dialogs are displayed one to edit the attributes of the tag object and another to edit the resource object the tag is attached to The Sort by toggle of the tag browser may be used to sort the tags by the value of their TagName or TagSource attributes The Filter field may be used to display only a subset of tags matching a regular expression that may contain the any character and any sequence of
66. an effect only if the number of colors is equal to 1 ColorCorrection Controls the color correction for the colortable If it is set to YES color intensities are corrected to produce a bigger number of light colors in the colortable If it is set to NO there are more dark colors Color correction affects only the RAINBOW color distribution When a color table is added to a group of objects using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added color table objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used GLG Objects 147 Font Table The font table object controls the selection of fonts available for use in a viewport The font table contains a list of font families and each family contains a list of fonts of different font sizes A Text object in a drawing is rendered using fonts from the font table of the drawing s viewport The text object s FontType attribute defines a font family index in the font table and the FontSize attribute defines the font size index within the font family When a viewport is created it inherits a default font table A font table has the following attributes NumTypes Defines the number of font types in the font table Each combination of font family weight and style corresponds to a different style For example Courier Bold Italic represents a type NumSizes Defines th
67. and Their Equivalences 215 X Win Motif in GEG Midgerype wage bal aA a TA ae ae ali Arrows XmArrowButton Push style BUTTON AWT Button with a label Left Right Up with Left Right Button with a label and Down Up or Down label Swing JButton with a label Scale XmScale SCROLLBAR AWT Scrollbar HScrollbar Horizontal Swing JSlider or Vertical VScrollbar Scrollbar XmScrollBar SCROLLBAR AWT Scrollbar HScrollbar Horizontal Swing JScrollBar or Vertical VScrollbar Text XmTextField EDIT single line AWT TextField TextBox Swing JTextField Text Edit XmText EDIT multi line AWT TextArea TextBox Swing JTextArea Label XmLabel Text style STATIC AWT Label Label Swing JLabel Option Menu XmOptionMenu Drop down List style AWT Choice ComboBox COMBOBOX Swing JComboBox Separator XmSeparator WINDOW AWT Panel UserControl Swing JPanel List XmList LISTBOX AWT List ListBox Swing JList Bulletin XmBulletinBoard WINDOW AWT Panel UserControl Swing JPanel Form XmForm WINDOW AWT Panel UserControl Swing JPanel Dialog Area XmDrawingArea WINDOW AWT Panel UserControl Swing JPanel If you are using the Xt Wrapper Widget instead of the Motif based Wrapper Widget the Drawing Area widget is of the Composite class and the other Motif native types are not available The user interface controls widgets such as PUSH BUTTON SCROLLBAR TEXT LIST and others are used in con
68. and web based deployment use as a path delimiter even on Windows On Windows the Builder converts to V automatically when necessary To implement subdrawing dynamics a List transformation may be attached to the SourcePath to specify a list of drawing files If the index of the List transformation changes a different template drawing will be displayed The ObjectPath attribute described below may be used for even more efficient object dynamics For subdrawings that use a palette Source Palette the attribute defines a resource path for accessing the palette inside the drawing The palette is usually a viewport that contains a collection of objects used for object dynamics If the SourcePath is not set the default Palette resource name is used If an application loads the drawing using a LoadWidget method the resource path must be relative to the Widget viewport ObjectPath Defines an object to be displayed in the subdrawing by specifying a resource path of the object within the template If ObjectPath is set and points to an object inside the template only that object will be displayed in the subdrawing The template may have several named objects and changing ObjectPath to a different object name will display a different object The ObjectPath is relative to the template If ObjectPath is not set the whole template will be displayed For subdrawings that use an external file Source File the template is loaded fr
69. are interpreted as degrees of longitude and latitude and Z coordinate is interpreted as an elevation above the Earth surface in meters This allows positioning of icons and lines on the map by defining their lat lon coordinates directly without any coordinate conversions When the map is zoomed or panned the objects drawn on the map will be automatically adjusted to zoom and scroll with the map The GIS Object also provides utilities to convert from screen or world coordinates to latitude longitude in the selected projection and vise versa The Graphics Builder supports the GIS Editing Mode for interactive creating and editing objects drawn on the map In this mode dynamic icons polylines and other objects can be drawn or positioned on the map with the mouse in the lat lon coordinates The Builder automatically converts the mouse position from the screen to lat lon coordinates which are stored in the object s control points The Builder transparently handles GIS projections which allows the user to draw polylines on top of the globe displayed in the orthographic projection To start the GIS Editing Mode select the GIS Object then press the Hierarchy Down button to go down into it In the GIS Editing Mode you can draw and position objects on top of the map with the mouse as well as edit attributes of the previously created objects All objects added to the GIS Object in the GIS Editing Mode will be contained in its G SArray and will be saved
70. are listed in the dialog the same way as object attributes are listed in the Properties dialog described on page 339 For predefined transformations their public properties are listed the same way an object s public properties are listed in the Public Properties dialog described on page 341 A button in the upper right corner of the dialog may be used to switch display between the public properties and the full display of the predefined dynamics Each attribute or property row has an ellipsis button that provides access to editing the attribute or property as well as adding tags alarms and second level transformations to it For convenience of editing the dialog also lists a name of each attribute or public property The Up and Down buttons on the right of the transformation list allow the user to change the order of the transformations by moving the selected transformation up or down the list The Mark Object and Mark List buttons may be used to mark the dynamics for reuse The Mark Object button marks the selected transformation while Mark List marks the whole list in case if it has more than one transformation To reuse the marked dynamics use the Use Marked option when adding dynamics to an object The Back button may be used to return from recursive editing of the second level transformations attached to the attributes of the main transformation When editing transformations attached to the attributes of the main transformation the
71. attribute of a graphical object controls whether the object is displayed or not This attribute is a floating point value that can range between 0 and 1 A value of indicates that the object is visible a value of 0 makes the object invisible The values between 0 and 1 make the object transparent with the object transparency increasing as the visibility value decreases The transparency effect does not apply to the viewports Negative values of Visibility have a special meaning and are handled as dimming A visibility value between 1 and 0 causes object colors to be dimmed by decreasing their GLG Objects 69 saturation The closer the value is to 0 the duller the object colors become If the visibility value is negative but its absolute value is bigger than 1 the object s colors will be brightened The dimming effect may be used to change appearance of icons when they are desensitized The dimming and transparency of a container object are inherited by all its children The child s visibility may further alter the child s rendering with the effective visibility value calculated by multiplying the child s visibility value by the visibility values of all its parents For environments with the OpenGL support and also Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit the transparency is rendered as true alpha blending For the GDI versions of the Toolkit the transparency is supported only in the Unix environment where it is simulated usin
72. attributes Tag Based Data Access and Database Connectivity Tags provide an alternative way to access dynamic attributes defined in the drawing A data tag may be attached to any dynamic parameter or object attribute to define data connectivity It may also be used to store user defined information associated with the attribute The tag s TagSource attribute provides a way to map resources of the drawing to database fields which is commonly used for data connectivity in process control applications While the resources are hierarchical and require the application to know the exact resource path of each resource the tags are global and are accessed in an application as a flat list This enables the application to query and use the tags defined in the drawing without the need to know the exact structure of the drawing The tags may be assigned to object attributes in the Builder The Builder also provides a Tag Browser for browsing and editing tags defined in the drawing With the Tag Browser a user can edit each tag by assigning a database field to its TagSource A custom Data Browser may be integrated with the Builder to allow the user to browse and select a TagSource from a list of available database tags The TagName and TagComment attributes of the tag object help the user identify the tag in the Tag Browser or attach custom information to the attributes Using Tags as Global Resources At run time an application may use tags as global r
73. b Fora control point use Shift click to see the Control Point dialog Using the GLG Graphics Builder 261 2 Click on either the Unconstrain button If an attribute has a transformation attached to it the Attribute Clone Type entry in Options controls cloning type of the transformation s attributes The default is Constrained Clone which means that while the attribute itself is unconstrained the transformation s parameters will still be constrained Marking a Transformation You can mark a transformation in a way that parallels the marking of an attribute however the two mechanisms are entirely separate The Builder lets you copy the definition of a transformation from one graphical object to another You can also copy the definition from one data object to another ifthe two data objects use the same data type Marking a transformation for copying is similar to cutting and pasting with a clipboard In the object hierarchy reusing a transformation definition produces another independent transformation object attached to the object you select The parameters of two transformation objects may be constrained by the reuse operation as described below producing linked transformations changing synchronously and transforming several objects by changing just one controlling parameter To mark a transformation definition 1 Select the object to which the transformation is currently attached 2 Show the list of transformations for
74. buttons for adding tags the DT button for adding Data Tags and ET for adding Export Tags If a data or export tag has been added to the attribute the corresponding button s label changes to DT or ET to indicate the presence of a tag If a tag is present it may be edited by clicking on the corresponding button The export tag s TagName attribute defines the name of the public property This name will be displayed as a property name for the attribute in the Public Properties dialog The export tag s TagType attribute may have the following values EXPORT Used to mark the attribute as a public property EXPORT_DYN Used to mark the attribute as a public property of predefined dynamics action commands and action data sets Refer to the Custom Predefined Dynamics section below for more information When accessing attributes of an object via resources the export tags may be accessed only for resources that use default attribute names and not for named resources Public properties are global all public properties appear in the object s public properties list regardless of the hierarchy level they are defined at The G gQueryTags and other GLG API methods may be invoked with the tag_type parameter setto GLG_EXPORT_TAG to query object s public properties Public Properties Public properties defined in the OEM version of the Builder are used by the HMI Configurator If an object has public properties defined via export tags the object m
75. can be accessed via the corresponding resource names Both the default input object message and the action message are passed to the input callback and the application can decide to handle one or another or both InputSubAction input actions only Specifies an optional input object s subaction that triggers execution of the Input Action If InputSubAction is defined the action is activated if both InputAction and InputSubAction match the corresponding resources of the input object s message If JnputSubAction is not defined only InputAction is checked The nputSubAction attribute is not shown in the action properties but can be accessed as an action s resource via the Resource Browser in the Builder or via the GLG API at run time By default the value of the attribute is set to an empty string Add Data Edit Data SENT_EVENT actions only A button in the Action Properties dialog for accessing ActionData of the SEND_EVENT action The ActionData container holds any action data that may be needed for processing the action When action data are added the Builder displays a choice of a predefined custom data set or adding data elements one by one manually The predefined custom data set contains the DataSetType parameter set to Custom as well as several string and numeral parameters named ParamS ParamS1 ParamS2 and ParamD ParamD 1 ParamD2 Predefined custom data sets are edited the same way as the command data described be
76. characters wild cards The regular expression will be applied to either the tag names or tag sources as controlled by the Source Names toggle on the right side of the Filter field The toggle also controls the Selection field allowing the user to select a tag by typing its TagName or TagSource The Display Both One toggle switches the view to display both the ZagName and TagSource or just one of them based on the current sorting setting If tags are sorted by the tag name the TagName is shown in the Display One mode If tags are sorted by the tag source the TagSource is displayed The Unique Tag Sources Names toggle controls the display of tags with identical tag sources when sorting by tag sources or tag names when sorting by tag names By default the toggle is unchecked and all instances of tags with the same tag source or tag name will be displayed in the tag browser If the toggle is checked only the first instances of tags with the same tag source or tag name will be displayed To add a tag click on the Add Tag button in the Attribute or Resource Object dialog To delete a tag click on the Delete button in the Data Tag dialog Alarms GLG Graphics Builder Menus 343 For a discussion of the basics of attribute tags see the Tags for Database Connectivity chapter on page 31 and the Zag Based Data Access and Database Connectivity chapter on page 60 Alarms opens an AlarmBrowser that shows a list of alarms attached to the selected
77. codepage but does not provide the UTF 8 system locale Creating a drawing using the UTF 8 system locale on Linux Unix can create problems when deploying the drawing on Windows To avoid portability problems with drawings created in the UTF 8 system locale set the UTF8Encoding flag to YES for all string attributes that use non ASCII characters and use ASCII characters for strings that are not objects such as object names tag name and tag sources The gconvert utility s set utf8 command line option may be used to set the UTF8SEncoding flag of all string objects in the drawing see page 326 In some linux distributions the locale a command lists UTF 8 locales as utf8 When setting UTF 8 locale make sure that UTF 8 is spelled exactly this way all caps and with a dash otherwise Motif will not recognize the UTF 8 locale For example set LANG en_US UTF 8 for English UTF 8 locale Localization Support The String Export and Import features provide a way to translate all text strings defined in the drawing into a different language either at a design time using the Builder or at run time using the GLG API functions to import the string translation file The String Export feature is used to export all strings defined in the drawing into an ASCII string translation file The string translation file contains an entry for each exported string and may be edited using a text editor Each string entry contains the name of a string
78. controller that controls the motor and a Stop Motor button will write the value of 0 OutputTagHolder D This attribute is a placeholder for an attached output tag The ZagSource attribute of the tag specifies the tag field of the process controller to write the value to A data browser if provided may be used to select the tag source from a list of available tags Value D The value to be written to the tag specified by OutputTagHolder Params S An optional string parameter ParamD D An optional numerical parameter Write ValueFrom Widget CommandType S Command type set to WriteValueFromWidget This command is used to write the current value of the input widget such as a numerical text input box a spinner or a slider into the process database OutputTagHolder D This attribute is a placeholder for an attached output tag The TagSource attribute of the tag specifies the tag field of the process controller to write the value to A data browser if provided may be used to select the tag source from a list of available tags ValueResource S The resource name of the resource inside the input widget that contains the value For example Value may be used as a resource name for accessing the value ofa GLG spinner Params S An optional string parameter ParamD D An optional numerical parameter Custom CommandType S Command type set to Custom This command may be used to define additional custom commands by
79. course this would not reflect the reality of the object hierarchy but you can arrange a GLG drawing this way by modifying the resource hierarchy We have here renamed the attribute for reasons explained below To make the resources of the child polygons appear to belong to the parent group you can make the polygons resource transparent The resources of a resource transparent object appear to belong to its parent This way the color attribute of the polygons will appear to be an attribute of the group itself Whether or not an object is resource transparent is controlled by an attribute of that object called the HasResources flag This flag indicates whether an object has resources of its own HasResources YES or if its resources appear to belong to its parent HasResources NO More specifically a resource transparent object s resources appear to belong to the first object above it in the resource hierarchy that is not itself resource transparent Note that an object s default attribute names appear in the resource hierarchy as its children no matter if the object is resource transparent or not That is even if PY is resource transparent its FillColor attribute will appear under it If we name the attribute fi _color we can make it appear at different places in the resource hierarchy by modifying the resource transparency of the parent object Since resource names are used to access objects all resource names on the same level of hi
80. custom popup dialogs and handling user interaction To check the proto DLL s functionality run the run_proto_example script to start the Builder then start the Run mode The DLL will load and display the popup dialog from the dialog g file updating 1t with the status information using resources The DLL receives and processes all input events When the user presses the Stop button the DLL stops the Run mode of the Builder and returns to the Edit mode A custom proto DLL can be deployed via the proto lib command line option as shown in the README file via the CustomProtoLib variable of the glg config and glg hmi_config configuration files or by placing a DLL with a default name in the directory of the GLG Editor executable In addition to the cross platform GLG based dialogs the module may also use native dialogs based on Windows Win32 API or Xt Motif on Linux Unix Custom Editor Options and Dialogs DLL The custom editor options DLL may be provided for adding custom icons menu options and dialogs with application specific logic to the GLG editors The module may also be used to verify the drawing against a custom set of rules before saving it into a file as well as remove unwanted editor icons and menu options The example is located in the editor_extensions data_browser_example directory and works with both the GLG Graphics Builder and the GLG HMI Configurator The run_data_example script in the example s directory may be use
81. e Cloning the object which copies it and applies an offset or a transformation e Saving objects to a drawing file and using them as sub drawings with reference objects refer to the Reference section of the Advanced Graphical Objects chapter for more details e Using an objects as a template of a reference object for replicating instances of it in the draw ing refer to the Reference section of the Advanced Graphical Objects chapter for more details e Saving objects to a drawing file and adding them to the Custom Object palette Copying or cloning an object that is a named resource adds a duplicate branch to the resource hierarchy If the duplication causes a naming conflict rename the copy To copy more than one object in a single operation first create a group object that contains the objects using Arrange Group When you have finished the operation select the group and use Arrange Explode Object to delete the group object and restore the independence of the objects A temporary group may also be used by either selecting objects by dragging a rectangle with the mouse or by using Ctrl click to add or delete objects from the selection The temporary group is automatically destroyed when it is unselected If you are copying the objects because you want to create a set of identical objects that can be edited in one place as a single object you should consider using a series reference or other advanced object see page 265 Savi
82. edited using the OEM version of the Enterprise Edition of the Builder use the oem command line option to start the Builder in the OEM mode 288 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference When finished copy the drawing to the main directory of the GLG installation The command templates command line option may also be used to supply the drawing containing a custom predefined commands template for the Builder or HMI configurator command templates lt glg dir gt ditor_extensions drawings custom_command_templates g The drawing containing a custom commands template can also be specified in the GLG configuration file using the CustomCommandTemplates variable or by setting the GLG_CUSTOM_COMMAND_TEMPLATES environment variable The predefined command template drawing contains three groups of objects Commands group defines available commands for the SEND COMMAND actions EventDataSets group defines predefined data sets for the SEND EVENT actions e CustomDataSets group defines predefined data sets used for adding custom data to objects Each object in the group defines a command or a predefined data set and the name of an object will be used as a label displayed in the list of choices in the Builder The order of commands or data sets in the list is defined by the drawing order of the objects in each group not by the visual order of their appearance in the drawing The Arrange Reorder menu options may be used to change the drawing order
83. elaborate customization the OEM integrator may provide custom components with a predefined set of properties for use with the GLG HMI 282 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Configurator For even further customization loadable DLLs may be provided to extend GLG editors with custom OEM functionality such as connecting to a custom data source or supplying application specific menu options toolbar icons and dialogs Custom Color Palette In addition to the default color palette GLG editors provide a custom color palette The custom color palette may be activated by using Options Color Options Swap Color Palettes If the color palette is displayed Ctr click on it also toggles the displayed palette To supply your own custom color palette edit the custom color palette template drawing provided in the editor_extensions drawings custom_color_palette g directory of the GLG installation and copy it to the main directory of the GLG installation The custom color palette command line option may also be used to supply a custom color palette drawing for the Builder or HMI configurator custom color palette editor_extensions drawings custom_color_palette g The custom color palette drawing can also be specified in the GLG configuration file using the CustomColorPalette variable or by setting the GLG_CUSTOM_COLOR_PALETTE environment variable The template drawing contains a GLG palette widget with the GlgPalette interaction handler The w
84. equally along a path Create a set of replicated objects from a Square Series template arranging them on a grid Provide a container with one control point for Container holding objects Reference Replicate instances of a template object Object Reference Replicate instances of a sub drawing File Reference Create a line with a defined number of points Polyline or a segmented line Create a patched surface Polysurface Create a frame to which other objects may be Frame constrained Connecting points or nodes with a recta linear Connector or arc path Rendering gradient fill arrowheads cast Rendering shadows and fill dynamics Rendering a box around a text object Box Attributes Scrolling matching attributes of a collection of History objects Rendering GIS map data GIS Object Attaching custom properties No dedicated object type Defining logical resource names Alias 266 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Associating Objects Together To associate objects you create a group object that acts as a container A Group object does not contribute to the drawing visually it is primarily an editing tool with three main purposes To keep a set of otherwise unrelated objects together The members of a group are spatially associated and move together To let you act on a set of objects collectively The action you perform is applied to every mem ber of the group e To apply animation to a set of obj
85. flag to YES changes the path to the Circle object from Widget Circle to Widget Group Circle Deleting a Resource from the Hierarchy To delete a named resource from the resource hierarchy simply unname it To remove the name from a named attribute object follow the following steps 1 Use Object Resources or click on the Resources button IR to see the resource hierarchy 2 Locate the resource you want to delete and click on it to select it 3 Delete the characters from the Name box of the Resource dialog The object will no longer appear in the resource hierarchy The above procedure will work only for named attributes To remove the name of a geometrical object i e polygon arc etc select the object and remove the name from the Name box in the Object Properties dialog If the HasResources flag of the unnamed object was set to YES its resources will disappear from the hierarchy and will not be accessible through the resources mechanism Using Tags Data Tags To simplify data access for process control applications a data tag containing a TagName and TagSource may be assigned to any dynamic parameter or object attribute Once a data tag is added the data can be supplied to the attribute by using its TagSource Unlike resources which are hierarchical the tags are global and have a flat hierarchy with all tags visible at the top level The tags can be accessed by their TagSource attribute without a need to know the hierar
86. for setting the value of the attribute For text strings it also con tains a text edit box for entering multi line text e A set of buttons on the right of the palette for manipulating the attribute object which are grayed if they are not relevant to the attribute The Add Edit Alarm button at the bottom can be used to add or edit an alarm to monitor the value of the attribute e A Value entry field for changing the attribute s value The value is a double precision number for D attributes a triplet of numbers for G attributes and a text string for S attributes If the text attribute contains a multi line string the Value field is read only and the text edit box should be used to edit the string e An XfValue field showing the final transformed value after any transformations attached to the attribute are applied The Dynamics buttons at the bottom of the Attribute dialog provide the only method of attaching a transformation to the attribute The Add Edit Tag button at the top of the dialog can be used to add a tag for database connectivity GLG Graphics Builder Menus 341 The Control Point Dialog You edit a control point s attributes by Shift clicking over the point The Control Point dialog is similar to the Attribute dialog However it includes a set of arrow buttons for positioning the point and a Position text entry box showing the position of the control point after all transformations have been applied This field may also b
87. for the whole period is bigger by one For example for the default period value of 2 the value alternates between the minimal and maximum value The complete period takes 3 iterations value Min Value iteration 0 value Max Value iteration 1 value Min Value iteration2 but the number of intervals is equal to two see the picture below Divide Linear GLG Objects 161 iteration 0 iteration 1 iteration 2 value Min Value value Max Value value Min Value The period may be set to a positive or negative value The sign of the period value defines the timer s behavior when it is disabled The detailed description is provided below Interval The interval of periodic updates in seconds default value is 1 second Min Value The minimum data value MaxValue The maximum data value Enabled Disables the timer if set to 0 enables the timer if set to 1 The timer is active only at run time or in the prototyping mode It is disabled in the editing mode for convenience Internally the timers are cached for efficiency and only one native timer is used for each collection of timers with the same period This also synchronizes blinking of objects with the same timer intervals When the drawing is initially loaded or reset the timer always starts with the minimum value For timers with a positive Period the timer is always set to the minimum value Min Value when disabled For inversed behavior simply switch the maximum and minimum value
88. generates Zoom and Pan events which can be handled in a program Refer to the Appendix B Message Object Resources section on page 348 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual for more details There are several zoom modes In the default Drawing Zoom Mode zooming and panning operations zoom and pan the objects displayed in the drawing In addition to the default zoom mode there are specialized zoom modes for zooming and scrolling charts and maps as described below Chart Zooming and Scrolling The Chart Zoom Mode is used to zoom and scroll data plotted in real time charts In the Chart Zoom Mode the zoom and pan operations zoom and scroll data plotted in the chart and integrated scrollbars scroll the chart in the horizontal or vertical direction The chart can also be scrolled by dragging it with the mouse Zooming to an area of the chart with the mouse is also supported At run time the integrated zooming and panning can be performed by a single call to the GlgSetZoom method described on page 89 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual The Chart Zoom Mode of a viewport can be set in the Builder by using the Arrange Chart Zoom Mode Set as Parent Viewports Chart Zoom Object menu option while the chart object is selected or by using the GlgSetZoomMode API method at run time The Chart Zoom Mode is preset for all charts in the Real Time Charts palette Zooming and Panning GIS Maps The GIS Zoom Mode is used for zooming and panning a map dis
89. icons and controls for performing various align and layout operations See the Object Layout and Alignment chapter on page 234 for more information Align The Align submenu provides options for aligning objects Align Left Align Left aligns the left edge of each selected object with the left edge of the anchor object If no anchor object is selected the left most selected object is used as an anchor Align Horiz Center Align Horiz Center aligns the center of each selected object with the center of the anchor object horizontally If no anchor object is selected the left most selected object is used as an anchor Align Right Align Right aligns the right edge of each selected object with the right edge of the anchor object If no anchor object is selected the right most selected object is used as an anchor Align Top Align Top aligns the top edge of each selected object with the top edge of the anchor object If no anchor object is selected the highest selected object is used as an anchor Align Vert Center Align Vert Center aligns the center of each selected objects with the center of the anchor object vertically If no anchor object is selected the highest selected object is used as an anchor Align Bottom Align Bottom aligns the bottom of each selected object with the bottom of the anchor object If no anchor object is selected the lowest selected object is used as an anchor GLG Graphics Builder Menus 325 Make S
90. if a viewport with a fixed drawing is used as a popup menu Destination S The name or the resource path of the subwindow object to load the popup menu drawing into It may be different from MenuResource in cases when a viewport MenuResource is used as a popup menu and a subwindow Destination inside the viewport is used to load different context dependent menu drawings Title S Specifies an optional title string to be used by an application as needed ParamS S An optional string parameter ParamD D An optional numerical parameter ClosePopupDialog CommandType S Command type set to ClosePopupDialog is used to close a popup dialog DialogType S Specifies a type of a previously displayed popup dialog to be closed in cases when an application uses several popup dialogs ParamS S An optional string parameter ParamD D An optional numerical parameter ClosePopupMenu CommandType S Command type set to ClosePopupMenu is used to close a popup menu MenuType S Specifies a type of a previously displayed popup menu to be closed in cases when an application uses several popup menus ParamS S An optional string parameter ParamD D An optional numerical parameter GLG Objects 187 Write Value CommandType S Command type set to WriteValue This command is used to write a value into the process database For example a Start Motor button may be used to write a value of 1 into the tag of the process
91. individual object s anchoring defined in the ObjectPath A special feature of the SubDrawing objects is that any number of copies of the object may be made with all copies using the same template object Thus subdrawings become useful in any drawing where there are a large number of identical or nearly identical objects Editing the template will affect all instances of it in the drawing If a subdrawing uses a template stored in an external file all instances of the subdrawing may be changed by editing its template file Rebinding may be used to modify the local copy of the template as described in the Rebindings section above 110 Polyline GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Global flag of a template s attributes may be used to constrain attributes ofindividual instances If an attribute s Global flag is set to GLOBAL in the template changing this attribute will change all instances in the drawing Ifthe flag is set to LOCAL the attribute of each instance may be set independently allowing for independent dynamics The constraining behavior of the reference object is also controlled by its CloneType attribute Ifthe Global flag is setto BOUND the attribute is rebound and its value is taken from the rebinding table as described above Rebound attributes must be named When a container is copied each copy will have its own independent copy of the template If SubDrawing or Container objects are used to represent conne
92. input callback to update the top level or sibling viewport that contains the constrained object if required Refer to the Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time section on page 188 for more information e Tooltip action Activates a tooltip when the mouse hovers over an object Advanced At run time the drawing traces the mouse position and the state of mouse buttons processing appropriate actions for all objects selected with the mouse If an object has several actions that match the mouse event all of them will be executed the mouse feedback actions will be processed first then the custom event actions and the command actions will be processed last For TRACE_STATE SEND_EVENT and SEND_COMMAND actions if several actions of the same type are attached to an object only the first action of each type will be executed For the SET_STATE and TRACE_STATE actions all actions attached to an object will be executed In cases when several intersecting objects are potentially selected the objects drawn on top are processed first If both a group and its elements have actions attached the objects at the bottom of the object hierarchy group elements are processed first before processing the group s actions For each combination of an action type custom event action command action or mouse feedback action and Trigger type mouse click or mouse over action processing stops after finding the first object wit
93. instance are volatile and not saved with the drawing When the drawing is loaded each subdrawing instance is created by copying the subdrawing s template and all attributes of an instance are initialized to the values of the corresponding template attributes Bindings may be used to make some attributes persistent and to specify unique attribute values for each instance of the subdrawing An attribute is made persistent by setting its Global flag to BOUND in the template Any changes to the BOUND attributes of a subdrawing instance are saved with the drawing Refer to the Bindings section on page 108 for more information 104 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference A subdrawing may be used for icons that change their shapes depending on the icon type For example an icon representing an airplane can display different shapes depending on the airplane type This functionality may be achieved using subdrawing dynamics or object dynamics Subdrawing dynamics changes the drawing file used as a template to display a different drawing Object dynamics uses a single template that contains several objects and provides a mechanism for selecting the object to be displayed This achieves the same effect as subdrawing dynamics without loading a different drawing file Refer to the description of the Reference object attributes below for further details Subdrawings may use a template stored in an external file or included in the drawing Like a container
94. is selected either its control or constrained points are highlighted depending on the state of the Options Show Frame Points option which may be used to access the constrained points A connector object inherits polygon attributes EdgeColor LineWidth and LineType but also has the following attributes EdgeType A read only attribute defining the object type of the graphical object used to render the connector It is set to GLG_POLYGON for recta linear connectors or GLG_ARC Direction Defines the orientation of the first segment of a recta linear connector GLG_VERTICAL or GLG_HORIZONTAL PointList A list of a connector s control points recta linear connectors only Allows changing the order of points in the connector as well as adding and deleting them The series object is used to produce multiple copies of the object defined as its template A series object has a variable number of control points One point controls the location of the first instance s origin while the others control the location of the line along which the series instances are distributed An arbitrary transformation may be used to position the series instances instead of 100 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference a linear path For a straight line series there will thus be three control points two to define the line and one at the first object s origin Note that when a linear series is created in the editor the object s origin point is constr
95. items when finished The Set temList message provides a way to replace the whole item list Deleteltem Deletes a list item The first message parameter may contain GLG_TOP or GLG_BOTTOM to specify the item to be deleted If the parameter is NULL the default GLG_BOTTOM value is used The UpdateltemList message must be used to update display when finished The SetltemList message provides a way to replace the whole item list 208 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference UpdateltemList Updates the list s display after changing its temList The message has no parameters GetItemCount Returns a number of items in the list This message has no parameters SetItemState Sets the item specified by the zero based index passed as the first parameter of the message to the state True or False specified by the second message parameter GetItemState Returns the state of the item specified by the zero based index passed as the first parameter of the message SetItemStateList Sets the state of all items of a multiple selection list The list of new item states is supplied as the first parameter of the message and must be a group object containing integer values The number of items in the list must match the number of displayed items in the list widget GetItemStateList Returns a list of item states of a multiple selection list widget The list of states is returned as a group object containing integer values This message has no parameters
96. lowest 3 These priorities are used at runtime to determine the type of the OpenGL renderer hardware or software to use for each viewport The hardware renderer is used for viewports with higher priorities while the software renderer is used for viewports with lower priorities The GlgOpenGLHardwareThreshold and GlgOpenGLThreshold global configuration variables control the runtime mapping of the OpenGL priorities All high priority viewports with priority values less than or equal to GlgOpenGLHardwareThreshold will be rendered using the hardware OpenGL renderer Low priority viewports with priority values between GlgOpenGLHardwareThreshold and GlgOpenGLThreshold will be rendered using the software OpenGL renderer Viewports with priority values equal 0 disabled OpenGL or greater than GlgOpenGLThreshold will use the GDI renderer The glg opengl hardware threshold and glg opengl threshold command line options as well as GLG OPENGL HARDWARE THRESHOLD and GLG OPENGL THRESHOLD environment variables may also be used to define the runtime mapping Introduction to GLG 21 The global configuration resources and command line options allow the user to change the runtime mapping on the fly For example if an application uses a small number of viewports it can decide to use the hardware renderer for all its windows at runtime If an application uses a large number of viewports it can use software renderer for icon buttons and secondary viewports whi
97. makes it easy for the user to persistently identify the tag regardless of the changes to its TagSource To change the database mapping the user can browse tags select the tag whose database connection needs to be changed and edit its TagSource The tag object also contains the ZagComment attribute that may hold any user defined information associated with the tag If the attribute the tag is attached to has a range transformation the tag editing dialog will also allow entering values for the JnLow and InHigh parameters of the range transformation The TagAccess Type and TagEnabled attributes provide additional control over the use of a tag in an application Refer to the Tag section on page 137 for more information At run time the application will receive data change events from the database and will set the new value for tags defined in the drawing every time the corresponding database fields change Since tags are global the tag value can be set via its TagSource without the need to know any path names If several attribute objects have tags with the same TagSource all of them will be updated when a new tag value is supplied at run time GLG provides API to supply data using both tags and resources Refer to the Tag Based Data Access and Database Connectivity chapter on page 60 for details of different ways of using tags for accessing data Tags should be used for updating the drawing with data from a process database or other similar source Fo
98. not visible at the top level directly but only through the aliases For input widgets that do not have ranges such as toggle buttons the dentity transformation is used to enable the use of aliases in a similar way The new input objects were redesigned to support the functionality described above The old widget design is still supported for backward compatibility 218 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 219 Chapter 6 6 Using the GLG Graphics Builder The GLG Graphics Builder is a tool that provides an interactive way to create or modify a GLG drawing The Builder enables you to add new objects to a drawing and to manipulate the graphical objects in the drawing It provides access to the attributes of the graphical objects and their transformations The Builder also includes a facility for testing the animation of a drawing Before you begin to use the Builder we strongly recommend that you familiarize yourself with the structure and contents of GLG drawings see the the Structure of a GLG Drawing chapter and the GLG Objects chapter It is also recommended to go through the GLG Builder and Animation Tutorial to familiarize yourself with the basic editing operations This guide explains how to use the GLG Graphics Builder outlining some of the basic tasks in creating and editing GLG drawings Task Page Visualize the structure of a drawing page 219 Start the Builder and identify its features page 221 Create a drawing and add
99. object Edit All Select allows you to choose a set of attributes to edit This may be convenient when the group contains objects of different types with different sets of attributes When you select this option the Builder prompts you to select an object that has the attributes you want to change The changes you make to an attribute in the Properties dialog apply to all the objects in the group that have the attribute GLG Graphics Builder Menus 317 For example consider a group that contains two circles a parallelogram and a fixed text object Select Edit All Select and then select a circle The Properties dialog shows the attributes for a circle object Resetting the Resolution affects both circles Resetting the LineWidth affects both of the circles and the parallelogram However the text object doesn t have a LineWidth attribute and is not affected Ifa Font Table Color Table Rendering Attributes or Box Attributes are added to an object in a group in the Edit 411 mode constrained copies are added Changing any attribute will affect all copies Individual or all attributes of added copies may be unconstrained Use the Unconstrain button in the Attribute dialog to unconstrain selected attributes of the constrained objects in Edit All mode the attribute will be unconstrained from all copies Arrange The Arrange Menu provides options to let you change the relationships between objects Create Permanent Group Create Permanent
100. object inside a permanent group for editing in place To select an object inside the selected permanent group select this menu option then click on an object in the group This activates what is called group zooming To select other objects in the group with the group zooming active simply click on them with the mouse To abort group zooming press Escape or click on an empty area in the drawing The Ctrl Shift click shortcut may also be used as a faster alternative Refer to the the Select Next section on page 315 for more information Select All selects all objects in the drawing Cut removes the selected object from the drawing and places it on the clipboard The cut object remains on the clipboard until you replace it by performing another Edit Cut or an Edit Copy operation You can retrieve the cut object by using Edit Paste Copy places a full copy of the selected object on the clipboard without removing it from the drawing The copied object remains on the clipboard until you replace it by performing an Edit Cut or Edit Copy operation You can retrieve the copied object by using Edit Paste Paste Delete GLG Graphics Builder Menus 307 Paste gets a cut or copied object from the clipboard and adds it to the current drawing Pasting an object does not delete the object from the clipboard so you can paste the same object repeatedly If an object is cut and then pasted repeatedly the first paste places the object itsel
101. objects in its drawing area Because only part of the object hierarchy is composed of visible graphical shapes the Builder can only present a partial view of the object hierarchy The Builder shows the graphical shapes that make up the visible part of the drawing polygons lines and the like in 1ts drawing area As you draw shapes in the Builder set their attributes and add transformations to them you are constructing the hierarchy of objects that make up a drawing The Builder uses dialogs to provide access to the other non graphical objects that are subordinate to the graphical objects such as transformations and attributes In general the Builder restricts the use of the term object to visible selectable shapes that appear in the drawing area An object immediately below such a shape in the object hierarchy is described as an attribute though it is usually an object too An object may be defined as a resource by naming it A member of an advanced object such as a group may be called a subobject In the Builder the words attribute and property are synonymous Viewing the Object Hierarchy Because the Builder is a visual and interactive tool it presents the drawing as a set of visible shapes that can be selected and edited This focus on graphical objects the shapes that make up the drawing has the effect that the complete object hierarchy can be difficult to visualize in the Builder interface Although there is no single r
102. objects to it page 219 Edit an object including changing its geometry and setting its attributes page 228 Create constraints between object attributes page 235 Add dynamics to objects and attributes page 238 Define objects as resources and arrange them in a hierarchy page 245 Add tags for database connectivity page 250 Add alarms to monitor data values page 253 Animate a drawing page 256 Work with advanced objects page 265 Creating and animating objects a tutorial example page 274 The GLG Builder also provides scripting capabilities for creating and editing drawings in a batch mode Refer to the GLG Programming Tools and Utilities chapter ofthe GLG Programming Reference for details on using the Builder in scripting mode Creating a Drawing Before you start the Builder we suggest that you determine the general content and overall organization of the drawing you plan to create Identify the parts you want to animate and the resources you intend to name Planning your drawing makes the drawing more efficient and saves you time Viewing a GLG Drawing A GLG drawing is an abstract hierarchy of objects The hierarchy defines the relationships between the objects in a drawing and their attributes which define their appearance and behavior 220 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference When you open a GLG drawing in the Builder the Builder reads the object hierarchy information in the drawing using it to render a set of visible graphical
103. of Contents 7 Integrated Alarms for Value Monitoring ceececeeceeseeeecescesecaeeseeeeeseesecaaeeaeeaeeseceecaeeaeeeeeereeaeeaes 63 Public Properties for Creating OEM Compomnents ccceccescessssseeseeseeseceeceaeeaeeneeseceaeeaecaeeeneeneeaes 63 Chapter 4 GLG ODJOCES icono iseobali 65 COMMON A tI DUES ias senan pate adi ade 68 Simple Graphical Objects cisme riinan zens oaadeawasgeesn cesses sess eenegeveons licencia 71 PO Y RN O 71 Parallel Practico calls ban decreto dilatada iaa dba sone 73 Rounded Rectangle and Ellipse cecceseesscesseeseeeseceseceseeseeeeeeescenseceseceseeeseeesecaeceeeseeeesaeesaes 73 PAU oot sacks Ii IA a LE E E Peat ded eave adi ths 74 SLINGS sss a A A A Aa 75 OR sss A AAA E alta AREAS AS 75 Markers moree A nA SE SES AE E tetas N A a Sebastes Ra 78 Image n eina eE E EE E eis vated A O 79 GIS Object arna E O 80 MIEDO ii 84 O a A a o octal tai oe 93 Advanced Graphical Objects cccccsccsccssscssseesseesseeseceeceseeeseeesecaeceseseeeseseesaecsaeceeeseeeeeeecseeenseneeaes 97 TOUR E EEEE ETE E TEE 97 Connector EPERE E Ae E E E EA T 99 MS EEA AE E EE Os 99 SUM Series otsoni etii A A ta 101 Reina AAA Ar 103 PO Mot AAA AAA A E AER seed AAA A 110 Polyscias 111 Brame encer a AE A As 112 Chart OBJ eCts E TE E E E E S 113 E ttet t E EAEE A A A EAE 113 Pr E E E EE A E Sica 119 IRA E EEE A O E A A E A oncane eatiatwaesTesatina wea 122 Nao AE E E E E A NN 123 NN 132 Non Graphical OD ects eeii dit di d
104. of a tag The default DATA tag type is used for data connectivity The other tag types EXPORT and EXPORT_DYN are used by the OEM version of the Graphics Builder to define public properties of components for the GLG HMI configurator and properties of custom dynamics respectively The EXPORT DYN tag type is also used to define public properties of action commands and action data sets Refer to the OEM Version of the Graphics Builder chapter on page 282 for details TagName A string used to identify the tag during browsing Having a separate TagName attribute provides a persistent tag identification regardless of the changing TagSource attribute TagSource Defines the database field to use as a datasource for the data object the tag is attached to A typical application queries a list of TagSources defined in the drawing on application startup and uses it to subscribe for data updates from a process database When data changes the application sets the new data values by invoking the GlgSetTag method passing the TagSource and the new data value for each tag as shown in the source code of the Tag Example The TagSource attribute is used only by the DATA tags 138 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference TagAccessType Specifies an access type of the tag may have the following values INPUT An input tag that may be updated with incoming data This is the default OUTPUT An output tag used to send data back to the process controller The output tag i
105. of objects in a group Each object in a group has a custom data attached to define a corresponding command or data set The custom data attached to each object define data elements of the corresponding command or data set Data elements of command or action data sets use export tags to define public properties visible in the Edit Command or Edit Action Data dialog The export tag s TagName defines the property name that will be shown in the edit dialog The export tag s TagType must be set to EXPORT DYN to export the attribute as a public property of the predefined data set Refer to the OEM Version of the Graphics Builder section above for more information on export tags The Options Selection Options Edit Action Data as List menu option toggles the way action and command data of the SEND COMMAND and SEND EVENT actions are displayed for editing as a public properties dialog or a list of properties that allows adding and removing individual properties A button in the upper right corner of the Action Properties dialog provides a convenient shortcut To allow accessing data elements of each data set via resources each data element is named For the command and action data sets the name is the same as the public property name specified by the TagName attribute of the export tag Adding Custom Commands and Custom Data Sets To add or delete commands or custom datasets add or delete objects from the corresponding group in the command template dr
106. of the axis while keeping its Low High ranges This may be used to display only a part of the whole axis as it is done for the axis of the boolean plot in the GLG Real Time Strip Chart demo The axis for the boolean plot shows only a small part of the axis corresponding to the 0 1 interval The offsets are defined in relative units in the range from 0 to 1 LowOffset specifies an offset at the low end of the axis and HighOffset at the high end The sum of the low and high offsets should not exceed 1 For example for a range axis with Low 0 High 100 LowOffset 0 1 and High Offset 0 2 only a part of the axis from 10 to 80 will be displayed 10 at the low end of the axis and 20 at the high end will be truncated due to the settings of the low and high offsets The following lists the equations for determining the location of the visible ends of the axis when High is greater than Low visible low Low LowOffset High Low visible high High HighOffset High Low visible interval High Low 1 LowOffset HighOffset The following equations can be used to calculate the low and high offsets based the required values for the visible ends of the axis LowOffset visible low Low High Low HighOffset High visible high High Low Rounded Placement Ifset to YES the axis places major ticks and labels at positions corresponding to values that can be evenly divided by the major tick
107. of the bounding box Finally type the string in the text entry box ra The third control point is used for line positioning when the text object has several lines A text object is a graphical object that presents a string The text object itself just sets the boundaries of the text The text object s data attribute defines the string that appears in the drawing You can transform the text object itself using the transformations that apply to geometric data the transformations affect the bounding box that contains the text You can transform the text object s String attribute using any of the transformations that apply to string data they can be used to display a numeric value or another string For a complete list of transformations and details on text object types see the GLG Objects chapter Font Availability GIS Object Group GLG Graphics Builder Menus 331 All the text objects can display any font that is available in the GLG Graphics Builder The final appearance of the string depends on the font table attributes of the viewport that contains the text object To set the font table attributes 1 Select the viewport and use Object Properties to see the viewport s attributes In the Selected Object Properties dialog for the Viewport object click on the ellipsis button for More to see the attributes of the Screen object In the Selected Object Properties dialog for the Screen object set the Default Fonts attrib
108. of the editor or the API however it is the organization and internal structure of these drawings that gives GLG its power Because of this it is important for you to be familiar with the general structure of a GLG drawing before trying to use the Builder or the API Fortunately though the GLG approach presents arich set of possibilities to the user the structure is not a complex one 18 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The organizing philosophy of the GLG system might be described as a process of relentless abstraction Wherever possible GLG uses the same data structure to describe similar objects For example a point in space uses three numbers to specify its position its X Y and Z coordinates Similarly a color is described as a collection of three numbers the red green and blue values In GLG these two kinds of data are represented using the same data structure Similarly a straight line segment and a complex polygon appear similar within GLG After all a line is simply a two point polygon In addition to keeping the size ofa GLG application small this object oriented approach provides a tremendous amount of flexibility An operation defined on a polygon for example may equally well be applied to only one of its vertex points or to a neighboring object or to the properties of any other object including a color On the other hand with this flexibility comes some complications The approach can create some unexpected
109. of this vector you can see the arc twist in space The length of this normal vector is not used only its orientation in space Since the arc vector is perpendicular to the arc plane the vector point of the arc coincides with its arc s center point in the main projection Also visually the vector point is on top of the center point so selecting the point in the center of the arc and moving it rotates the arc s vector instead of moving the arc s center point To access the center point use Shift click and the point selection arrows in the Control Point dialog and use the Object Move Point to move the arc Like the parallelogram the arc is simply a special case sub class of the polygon so it has the usual polygon attributes like LineType and FillColor In addition an arc has the following attributes ArcFillType Defines the type of the arc GLG_CHORD GLG_SECTOR or GLG_BAND AngleType Defines the way the arc s angles are defined Possible choices are GLG START AND ANGLE and GLG START AND END StartAngle and EndAngle Define the angular position of the start and end points of the arc relative to its center The angles are measured in degrees counter clockwise The StartAngle is always measured from the 3 o clock position The EndAngle is measured relative the StartAngle if AngleType is set to GLG_START AND ANGLE and relative to the 3 0 clock position if the value of AngleType is GLG_START_ AND END A circle is represented a
110. one to edit by activating the arrow buttons in upper left corner of the Control Point dialog when the point is selected with the Shift click Object Layout and Alignment The Layout Toolbox provides point and click access to the align and layout features and can be activated using Layout Layout Toolbox or pressing the Layout Toolbox E button in the toolbar The toolbox is split into two areas the top panel contains icons for operations that does not require any parameters Align Top Set Same Width Distribute Evenly Across etc while the bottom panel contains icons and controls for operations that requires a parameter such as Set Width or Set Horizontal Distance The toolbox s buttons have tooltips that show actions associated with buttons icons The following picture shows the Layout Toolbox ES FM o Fe Ob Ee k ry A oo as 8 0100 E est Group Width 200 El Ok Increment 10 y The icons in the top panel of the Layout Toolbox operate on several objects and are active only when multiple objects or a group is selected The first button in the second row the Select Anchor Object button has a bright red color and may be used to select the anchor object the rest of the objects will be aligned relatively to the anchor object s extents To select an anchor for several selected objects click on the button then click on one of the selected objects When the anchor object is selected the color of the icon t
111. page 298 Using the GLG Graphics Builder 225 If you were editing objects inside the viewport saving the drawing will bring you back to the top level of hierarchy To return back to editing objects in the viewport select the viewport and click on the Hierarchy Down button You should save your drawing frequently so you can back out changes by reverting to the last saved version of the file The Builder also provides an explicit Undo function but some of the advanced operations such as exploding or changing constraints can not be undone Drawing an Object Once you have created and opened a viewport you can draw other objects within it AD D bh To draw most GLG objects you use the options on the Object Create submenu mo or pick a shape from the Object Palette in the upper left of the Builder window 000 The buttons in the Object Palette have tooltips that provide information about SYA each button s function n Bs sE amp 2 Not all the buttons on the palette correspond to distinct GLG object types Some cS of the buttons are shortcuts to producing an object with particular attribute TA XR Gls o f Ao settings provided for convenience For example both the Arc and Circle buttons Create an arc object but the angle of it is preset to 360 degrees when the Circle Object Palette button is used The Status Panel at the bottom of the Builder window prompts you to specify the geometry and or parameters o
112. parallelograms e Parallelogram e Filled parallelogram To create a parallelogram click on one point and then click on two other points The second and third points define two vectors from the first point they specify the angles and lengths of the opposing sides The opposing sides of the parallelogram remain parallel when the object s control points are moved To remove this constraint explode the object 328 Arc Circle GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Arc options let you create the following kinds of arcs e Arc A e Chord arc NI e Segment arc Bl Filled chord arc NI e Filled segment arc A An arc is a many sided regular polygon like a circle however an arc does not encompass 360 A simple arc is just the segment of a circle s perimeter connecting the points you choose A chord arc closes the shape with a straight line from one end of the arc to the other A segment arc closes the shape with two straight lines from each end of the arc to the center like a wedge of pie To create any type of arc click on the center point a point to define the radius and a point to define the angle of the sector You can convert an arc to a circle by editing its StartAngle or EndAngle attributes The control points of an arc or a circle are unusual for graphical objects See the description of a circle below for an explanation The Circle options let you create the following kinds of circles e Circle Ol
113. part of the GLG drawing s infinite coordinate space will be visible on the screen Although the Builder allows you to draw objects in its Drawing Area without a viewport you must use a viewport as a container for a drawing if you want to display the drawing in a program When the Builder first starts it creates a default viewport names it Widget and brings editing focus into the viewport which is equivalent to the File New Widget menu option You ll see this viewport when you save the drawing When you start a new drawing using the File New menu option we recommend that you draw a viewport first to act as a container for other objects To draw the viewport 1 Use the Object Create Viewport menu option or click on the Viewport button in the object palette in the upper left of the Builder window then click on two points in the drawing to define the viewport s corners To draw objects inside the viewport we need to open it to get inside 2 Ifthe viewport is not selected select it by clicking on it with the mouse 3 Use the Traverse Hierarchy Down menu option or click on the down arrow in the hierarchy controls in the lower left of the Builder window Once you have created and opened a viewport you can draw objects within its boundaries To use the viewport in program it must be named Widget Saving a Drawing As you work on a drawing use File Save or Save As to save the drawing to a file see
114. rendering attributes The rendering object is attached to the object or accessed if it already exists using the Add Edit Rendering button in the Object Properties dialog It has the following attributes GradientType The type of the gradient fill which determines both the gradient geometry as well as the colors used for rendering The following types of the gradient geometry are supported LINEAR a fill gradient with color changing along a line SPHERICAL a fill gradient in the form of a sphere ELLIPTICAL same as the SPHERICAL but stretches with the object CONICAL a fill gradient in the form of a cone GLG Objects 141 eLINE WIDTH a line gradient for rendering 3D lines The color gradient changes in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the line Only the Gradient Color and Gradient Length attributes are used with the LINE WIDTH gradient The gradient color usage can be DIRECT the color changing from object color to gradient color or INVERSED from gradient color to object color The LINEAR gradient can also be ACYCLIC the color changing from the first color to the second color or CYCLIC from the first color to the second color and back to the first one The CONICAL gradient can be relative or absolute For the relative conical gradient the center is defined in relative coordinates as described below For the absolute gradient the center is defined using the world coordinates which makes it possible to keep
115. resource which helps identify how the string is used and two copies of the string Each item in the string entry is separated by two separator characters The name of the string resource and the first copy of the string are used to identify the string and should not be changed When the file is translated the second copy of the string may be replaced with a new string representing the text in the local language and local character set The String Import feature is then used to load the translated file and replace strings in the drawing with the new translated strings from the string import file The strings in the exported translation file are separated with a two character separator Two double quotation characters are used as the default separators but that can be changed by defining the GLG_STRING_SEPARATOR environment variable to supply a two character string to be used as a separator In the GLG API separator characters are supplied as function parameters 6666 The following is an example of the string conversion file using the default separator characters HEADER GlgStringConverter 2 Comment Translated Strings Resourcel Stringl Strokal Resource2 Label2 Metka2 Resource3 Multi line Text Tekst b dve stroki The first line of the file contains version information and should not be modified Any characters between the string s terminating separator and the separator at the beginning of the next string
116. selected chart The legend has two control points that define its bounding box The legend content may extend beyond the box if it does not provide enough space to lay out the legend s entries The legend may be placed in a separate viewport if it is desirable to clip the legend s content when it becomes too long When a legend is placed in a separate viewport that viewport and not the legend itself must be used for marking the legend with the Arrange Legend Mark Legend menu option The legend has the following attributes that control its appearance and layout Layout Type Specifies the type of layout used for positioning legend entries can be one of the following HORIZONTAL Legend entries are laid out left to right along a single horizontal line HORIZONTAL WRAPPED Legend entries are laid out horizontally If the legend extends beyond the box defined by its control points it is wrapped to start a new horizontal row below the previous one VERTICAL Legend entries are laid out top to bottom along a single vertical line VERTICAL WRAPPED Legend entries are laid out vertically If the legend extends beyond the box defined by its control points it is wrapped to start a new vertical line to the right of the previous one Auto Layout wrapped legends only Controls row wrapping behavior of the legend as described below The term row is used for both horizontal and vertical lines of legend entries regardless of their direction
117. setting is used On Windows the default font table uses the charset of the current system locale or the charset defined using the G gFontCharset global configuration resource In the X Windows environment the default font table provides fonts with the ISO Latin1 extended ASCII character set ISO 8859 1 A custom default font table may be supplied by an external file specified by the GlgDefaultFontTabeFile global configuration resource see page 345 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual Colortable The color table defines the colors available for use in a viewport If not defined the color table is inherited from the parent viewport or the default GLG color table is used if there is no parent On TrueColor systems with more than 256 colors and also in Java and C NET the color table is not used for rendering it is used only to define the number of colors in the Graphics Builder s color palette The Add Edit Color Table button may be used to add a custom color table to the viewport or edit color table parameters if it already exists To delete the color table use the Delete Table button in the color table properties See the Colortable section on page 144 for details When a color table is added to all viewports in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added color tables the attributes are constrained if the default Constra
118. side effects linking colors to positions in space is just one example and one of the important consequences is that there are usually several different ways to solve the same problem The following sections describe the components of the GLG Toolkit in greater depth The GLG Graphics Builder The GLG Graphics Builder is used to create modify and test GLG drawings It is the most sophisticated graphics animation editor available in its class and lets you create elaborately structured animated drawings and to test them with intricate animation data generated or real Since all aspects of the object s appearance and dynamics are encapsulated as data most of the object dynamics and behavior may be defined and prototyped in the Builder without any programming Elaborate constraints between objects attributes may be created to define complex object behavior and timer transformations may be used to animate objects without programming The Builder s data generator may be used to animate objects in the drawing with simulated data in the prototype mode and the Builder s resource browser presents the user with resource interface to the drawing the same interface the application will use at run time The GIS Zooming Mode of the Builder assists in the setup and prototyping of the integrated GIS mapping object OpenGL or GDI Native Windowing System Renderer OpenGL Open Graphics Library is a standard specification defining a cross lang
119. strings txt file to UTF 8 unicode which can be used with any UTF 8 locale native2ascii reverse encoding UTF8 strings txt strings2 txt The converted strings2 txt file may then be used with the Java program To convert from Unicode back to ASCII with lu encoding run the native2ascii utility without the reverse option 60 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Data Connectivity Features Resource Based Data Access All objects and object attributes are inherently dynamic and may be accessed and changed at run time by using the API s SetResource methods Not only the properties such as colors or line width but also resources that define rotation angles move distances scale factors thresholds and many others may be set from a program via programming API by specifying the resource name and a new value as shown in the following example GlgSetDResource drawing Meterl Value 25 GlgSetSResource drawing Meterl Label MPH GlgSetDResource drawing Group1 Polygon1 LineWidth 3 GlgSetDResource drawing Group1 Polygon2 RotateAngle 30 GlgUpdate drawing The GlgUpdate method is invoked at the end to update and render the drawing with the new resource values The Toolkit s resource based access to data provides a unified and compact programming API which is ideally suited for applications that need an access to all objects defined in the drawing and complete control over the objects
120. such as TagName TagSource and TagEnabled UTF8Encoding data objects of S type only A boolean flag that defines the encoding used for storing the string If it is set to YES the string value will be stored using the UTF 8 encoding otherwise it will be stored using the default encoding defined by the system locale For the text objects with the UTF 8 encoded strings to be rendered properly regardless of the system locale setting the text object should use a UTF 8 font with MultiByteFlag set to UTFS8 Refer to the Font section on page 148 for more information If the UTF8 setting of the text string and the font used to render it do not match the appropriate encoding conversion will be automatically performed The characters that are not present in the font will be replaced with the default character In the Java and C NET environments the UTF8Encoding flag is used only for proper string decoding when the drawing is loaded Once loaded the string is stored in memory in Java or C internal representation which is using the UTF 16 version of UNICODE This ensures proper rendering of the string regardless of the system locale and the MultiByteFlag of the font is ignored When the UTF8Encoding flag is changed in the Builder the string s encoding is automatically converted from UTES to the system encoding or vice versa depending on the flag s state If some characters in an UTF8 encoded string can not be represented in the system locale
121. switch If the resource is absent the slider may take any value between the lower and upper limits DisableMotion If this resource is present and non zero the control is disabled IncrementOnClick If this resource is not present or is set to zero the slider moves to the location of the mouse click If the resource is present and non zero the alternate behavior is used for mouse clicks outside of the slider s ActiveElement Each click moves the slider by its Page ncrement in the direction of the mouse If the mouse button is held down the slider keeps moving until the button is released or the slider reaches the mouse position RepeatTimeout Defines a timeout in seconds after which the slider with IncrementOnClick starts moving when the mouse button is held down If the resource is not defined the default value of 250 ms is used RepeatInterval Defines how fast a slider with IncrementOnClick repeats the slider movement when the mouse button is held down If the resource is not defined the default value of 100 ms is used Stateless If this resource is present and non zero the slider has no state That is each time a move operation is completed the slider values moves back to the center of their range and delivers the final move coordinates to the application program via the message object The view sliders in the GLG Graphics Builder are stateless This allows the sliders to control an unlimited range Plane The slid
122. table definition Remember that the color limit also applies to other applications that may be running at the same time and may have color tables of their own The results are not easily predictable if you try to define more colors than your machine can display GLG Objects 145 The colortable object is created automatically every time a viewport is created and has the following attributes Type Defines the type of the color distribution STANDARD or RAINBOW The STANDARD distribution allocates evenly distributed colors in the RGB color space The RAINBOW distribution uses an algorithm that allocates colors in a rainbow like palette and makes dithering nicer ColorFactor Defines the number of colors for the STANDARD colortable or the number of hues for the RAINBOW colortable If set to 0 a default value is used A value equal to 1 may be used to simulate a greyscale or monochrome display This is an index into a table of predefined values For the STANDARD colortable the values are Color Factors for Standard Color Table ColorFactor Number of Colors 4 256 default i 256 a 8 3 64 256 maximum The ColorFactor values of 0 and 1 are mapped to 256 colors instead of 1 because it does not make any sense to have a colortable with just one color If ColorFactor is greater than 4 the number of colors is still limited to 256 on 8 bit color machines The ColorFactor mapping for the RAINBOW color tabl
123. the right and up to match the direction of the axes in the default WORLD coordinate system The coordinate mapping does not change when the viewport s window is resized keeping the size of the objects in the drawing constant If the Resizable attribute is set to NO SCREEN CENTER the world coordinate system s origin is always positioned in the center of the viewport s window and the X and Y axes are directed to the right and up respectfully When the viewport s window is resized the coordinate mapping changes to keep the origin in the center of the window but the size of the objects in the drawing is kept constant 42 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference When a new widget is created the Resizable attribute of the widget s viewport is set automatically depending on the selected Stretch Resize option for creating a new widget For example the GLG SCREEN setting 1s used for a widget created using the File New Widget Fixed Scale menu option Refer to the the Screen section on page 93 for more information on the Resizable attribute GIS Coordinates The GIS coordinate system is a special type of the world coordinate system used to render objects on top of the map in the GIS Rendering Mode In this mode X and Y coordinates are specified using the GIS longitude and latitude respectively The GLG Toolkit provides an integrated GIS Object for rendering GIS maps in the GLG drawing Any graphical object added to the GIS Obj
124. the Selected Object Proper ties dialog and click on the to see the Attribute dialog Finally click on the Delete Dynam ics button Alternatively click on the X button on the right side of the attribute row in the Properties dialog then click on the Delete button in the Edit Dynamics dialog e For a control point use Shift click to see the Control Point dialog and click on the Delete Dynamics button To remove a selected transformation from a list of transformations e Display a list of transformations as described in the Editing Transformations chapter e Select the transformation in the list to delete e Click on the Delete button at the bottom of the Transformation List dialog If you added several matrix transformations consecutively they are merged into a single matrix transformation and are all deleted together Traversing Transformed Objects advanced For an object with at least one transformation attached to it the Builder lets you view the untransformed object The Builder s main window shows the transformed object and you use Traverse Transformation Down and Traverse Up to move between the transformed and untransformed view of the object Using the GLG Graphics Builder 245 Using View and Screen Transformations of the Viewport advanced A Viewport uses two sets of transformations the outside transformations are used to position the viewport itself and the inside transformations are use
125. the attribute you marked is applied to the other attribute For example constraining the FillColor attribute of a yellow circle to a control point of a green polygon makes the circle change color when you move the control point Constraining Control Points Control points are constrained just like other attributes Use Shift click to see the attributes for the control point then use either the Constrain All or the Constrain One button and select the control point to constrain to Constrain One is enabled only if activated in the glg_config file Constraints Tracing To trace constraints for a given attribute mark the attribute as Mark0 in the Attribute or Resource Object dialog and activate tracing via the Options Selection Options Trace Attribute Constraints for Mark0 menu option To find objects in the drawing that have attributes constrained to the attribute marked with Marko select each object with the mouse If the selected object has attributes that are constrained to the marked attribute the Status Panel fields that display the object s Name and Type will be highlighted in red If the object has a geometric transformation an action or custom data whose attributes are constrained to the marked attribute the corresponding buttons in the Status Panel will also be highlighted To narrow the search follow the highlighted items and their properties The attributes constrained to the marked attribute will also be highlighted with a red
126. the chart is reset To discard the samples accumulated in the chart s data buffer at run time without resetting the whole chart an application can set BufferSize to 1 and invoke the G gUpdate or GlgSetupHierarchy methods to flush the buffer then set BufferSize to a previous or new value 116 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Y Axes Offset Specifies an offset used for the layout of multiple Y axes A negative value defines a pixel offset between the Y axes A positive value defines an absolute pixel width used by each Y axis If an axis s width exceeds this positive value it may overlap the neighboring Y axis A negative value defining a pixel offset between the axes may be used to let the chart automatically lay out Y axes However it may cause a jumping effect if the change of the axis s ranges changes its labels which in turn changes the width of the axis s box and cause other axes to move To avoid this effect an absolute axis width may be specified using a positive value Tooltip Mode Specifies the sample selection priority when processing the chart tooltip or processing a chart selection via an API method Possible values are NONE Disables chart tooltips X Selects the data sample closest to the cursor in the horizontal direction XY Selects the data sample with the minimal distance from the cursor Tooltip Format Specifies a custom format for a chart tooltip The tooltip format can contain ordinary
127. the clone types Paste Clone Type Paste Clone Type defines the clone type to use when copies of an object are pasted into the drawing using the Copy Paste or Clone operations For the Copy Paste sequence the clone type must be set before Copy The default setting is Full Clone and the attributes of the pasted copies are not constrained If the setting is changed to Strong Clone all attributes of the pasted object that are Global or SemiGlobal will be constrained to the corresponding attribute of the original object GLG Graphics Builder Menus 361 Refer to the GlgCloneObject method on page 137 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual for more details on the clone types Subdrawing Traversal Subdrawing Traversal controls the interface for loading and saving subdrawings when the subdrawing is entered using the Hierarchy Down button and exited using Hierarchy Up By default it is set to Verbose Save Prompt which displays confirmation dialogs when loading and saving the modified subdrawing The Silent Auto Save option eliminates confirmation dialogs to automatically load and save the subdrawing It may be used to simplify the process for beginner users Appearance Detach Palettes Detach Palettes frees the button palettes from the main Builder window Detaching the palettes increases the available area for viewing a drawing The palettes can be iconized and resized independently of the main Builder window Detaching the palettes doe
128. the list widget SelectedIndex In the single selection mode the value of this resource is set to the 0 based index of the selected list item SelectedItem In the single selection mode the value of this resource is set to the string of the selected list item ItemStateList In the multiple selection mode the list creates this resource to hold the selection state of its items The resource is a group object containing integer values The G gNList interaction handler supports the following messages that can be sent using the GlgSendMessage method SetInitItemList Updates the list widget with the new items from the viewport s InitltemList after changing items of the nitltemList resource The message has no parameters SetItemList Updates the list widget with the items from the item list passed as the first parameter of the message The passed item list must be a group object containing item strings The message does not alter nitItemList GetItemList Returns a current list of items displayed in the list widget This message has no parameters and returns a group object containing a list of strings AddItem Adds a new item to the list The new list item is passed as the first message parameter and the second parameter may contain GLG_TOP or GLG_BOTTOM to specify the place to add the item to If the second parameter is NULL the default GLG_BOTTOM value is used The UpdateltemList message must be used to display the new
129. the object a Fora graphical object use Object Edit Dynamics or click on the Xform button in the Status Panel to see a list of transformations b For an attribute use Object Properties to show the Selected Object Properties dialog and click on the 2 to see the Attribute dialog properties that have a transformation attached are annotated with an X on the right side of the property in the Properties Dialog Finally click on the Edit Dynamics button c Foracontrol point use Shift click to see the Control Point dialog and click on the Edit Dynamics button 3 Inthe Transformation List dialog use the Mark Object button to mark a single transformation or use Mark List to mark all transformations in the list The transformation s you marked can be reused for any graphical or data object with the same data type 262 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference To reuse marked transformations 1 Select the object to which you want to attach the marked transformation s a Fora graphical object use one of the transformation options on the Object Menu or the Toolbar Transform Points Add Static Transformation or Add Dynamics b For an attribute use Object Properties to show the Selected Object Properties dialog and click on the to see the Attribute dialog properties that have a transformation attached are annotated with an X on the right side of the Properties dialog Finally click on the Add Dynamics button c
130. the time string in the form of milliseconds For example 03 0f will display 270 5 milliseconds as 270 It may be set to an empty string to suppress milliseconds display Time Input Supplies the time to be displayed measured as the number of seconds since the Epoch i e since 1970 01 01 00 00 00 UTC When the drawing is loaded or reset the attribute value is set to the current time and then stays constant until the value of the attribute is set using GlgSetDResource To display current time use a negative value the display will be updated with the current time every time the property is set to a negative value To automatically update display with current time use the Time Display and Date Display predefined transformations described on page 173 Time Display Specifies how to interpret the value of the Time Input attribute If set to RELATIVE the value of the Time Origin attribute will be subtracted from Time Input to display time interval elapsed since the Time Origin If set to LOCAL or UTC the time will be displayed as a local or UTC time respectively Time Origin Specifies the start time to be subtracted from Time Input to display relative time Refer to the description of the axis object s Time Origin parameter on page 130 for examples of relative time usage 166 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference String Concatenation The string concatenation transformation replaces the transformed string with the concat
131. ticks drawn in the direction specified by the trailing LEFT or RIGHT keyword VRIGHT LEFT VRIGHT RIGHT A vertical axis is positioned along the right edge of the rectangle defined by the control points with ticks drawn in the direction specified by the trailing LEFT or RIGHT keyword When a chart s X or Y axis is edited in the Builder only the options applicable to the selected axis type are included in the menus for editing the axis s position Inversed If set to YES inverts the axis direction The default direction is left to right for a horizontal axis and bottom to top for a vertical axis Draw Outline Controls the drawing of auxiliary decorations can have the following values NO_OUTLINE No additional decorations are drawn AXIS_LINE A line is drawn along the axis BOX_MINOR Draws a box around minor ticks BOX_MAJOR Draws a box around major ticks BOX_ALL Same as BOX_MAJOR and BOX_MINOR used together LINE_MINOR Draws a line along the outer ends of minor ticks LINE_MAJOR Draws a line along the outer ends of major ticks LINE_ALL Same as LINE_MAJOR and LINE_MINOR done together FillType and FillColor of the Ticks and Outline attributes may be used to draw filled outline boxes End Value scrollable axes only Defines the value that corresponds to the end of a scrolling axis An axis is scrolled by dynamically changing the value of this attribute Span scrollable axes only Defines the extent in axis units from the begi
132. title of the Edit Dynamics dialog displays the level of the transformation being edited Delete Dynamics The Delete Dynamics submenu provides options to let you remove static or dynamic transformations from the object or it s subobjects This option is grayed when neither the selected object no its subobjects have transformations attached Delete Object s Transformation Delete Objects Transformation removes either the first or last transformation in the list from the selected object If you are using the object s coordinates to view the drawing see page 312 the last transformation in the list is deleted Otherwise the first transformation in the list is deleted Note that this order applies even if the Edit Dynamics dialog is open and a different transformation is selected Delete Sub Object s Transformation For a group or other composite object Delete Sub Object ss Transformation removes a transformation from an individual object in the group 346 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Transform Points Transform Points changes the coordinates of the control points of the selected object Transforming an object s points changes the object permanently by changing the coordinates that define its points This kind of transformation is not saved as part of the object but is applied immediately Therefore it will not appear in the object s transformation list If the object s MoveMode is set to STICKY MODE this
133. to Objects and dynamics points but also displays control points of dynamics attached to the control points Reference Resizing This option controls the reference resizing modes when the reference object is stretched using the resize box e Resize Box mode resizes relative to the box This is the general way objects are resized e Around Point mode uses the control point of the reference object as the center of scaling mak ing sure the control point position does not change when the reference is resized This may be used to resize reference objects used as nodes the node will resize without changing the posi tion of its attachment point Show Frame Points For a selected frame object Show Frame Points toggles between its control points and its frame points Only one of the two sets of points is available to be selected at any time because several of these points may coincide on a frame all of them for a free frame or a point frame This option also affects the recta linear connector object displaying the control or constrained points If you want to move or resize a frame or connector object use their control points If you need to constrain other objects to the frame or to the middle point of a recta linear path they should be constrained to the constrained points GLG Graphics Builder Menus 359 Edit Action Data as List Edit Action Data as List toggles the way action and command data of the SEND_ COMMAND and SEND_EVEN
134. to an object s control point and not to the object itself It has the following attributes Anchor Point Specifies the coordinates of the anchor point This attribute can be constrained to another point to use that point as an anchor X Offset Offset along the X axis in the world coordinates GLG Objects 157 Y Offset World offset along the Y axis Z Offset World offset along the Z axis To add the world offset transformation use World X World Y or World XY offset type options in the Add Dynamics dialog All of them add the same type of the world offset transformation the difference is that they initialize unused offsets to 0 for convenience Moving a point with the worlds offset transformation modifies X Y and Z offset parameters of the transformation instead of changing the point s coordinates Screen Offset The Screen Offset transformation is similar to World Offset but allows the user to define an offset in either the world coordinates or screen pixels If a pixel offset is used the transformation maintains a constant pixel offset when the drawing is resized however the offset is still a subject to other transformations and will change together with the drawing when the drawing is zoomed or the object is scaled Same as the World Offset this transformation may be attached only to an object s control point and not to the object itself It has the following attributes Anchor Point Specifies the coordinates of th
135. to be their parent object An object contained in some parent object is said to be its child object We have already seen one example of this since attributes represented by data objects are the children of the parent objects they describe Other objects such as the group are designed to be containers of other objects This arrangement of parent objects and their children defines the object hierarchy about which more is said below 26 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference In addition to a polygon there are several other GLG graphical objects such as circles markers viewports and text objects These are the objects that make up the visible aspect ofa GLG drawing GLG differs from other drawing systems however in its assortment of non graphical objects You cannot see these objects but they are a crucial part of the organization of the drawing For example a group object acts as a container for other objects a series object defines a group of identical objects a frame defines a set of anchor points to which other objects may be attached and a transformation object contains directions for modifying the object to which it is attached Resources and Objects To access an object at run time it has to be named A named object becomes a resource which can be accessed by its name using the programming API Resource mechanism provides a convenient way to manipulate objects in the drawing at run time In the Graphics Builder the Resou
136. transformation compares an input scalar value with the list of thresholds and selects an attribute value from a matching list of values For example a threshold transformation containing a list of two threshold values and a list of three colors may be attached to the Fill Color attribute of an object and the threshold s Value used to control what color is displayed the value less than the first threshold value will display the first color the value between the first and the second threshold value the second color and the value bigger than the second threshold the third color Notice that the number of colors is one bigger than the number of threshold values The threshold transformation may be attached to attributes of any type D S or G For example the list of attribute values may be a list of strings to be displayed in a text object s String attribute or a list of line widths for the polygon s Line Width attribute The attributes for this transformation are as follows List of Values The list of attribute values to use which may be edited The number of values in the list must be bigger than the number of the threshold values by 1 Thresholds The list of threshold values to use which may be edited Since a threshold list is processed sequentially using LESS THAN or LESS OR EQUAL comparison each threshold in the list must be bigger than the previous one Value The value that after mapping to the list of thresholds controls
137. used for animation when the flow is enabled FlowEnabled Enables of disables the flow animation When set to 0 the flow is disabled FlowInterval Controls the flow speed by defining a timer interval in milliseconds between the flow updates The default value is 0 1 FlowInversed Inverses the flow direction if set to 1 The default value is 0 direct flow Alarm Object The alarm object can be attached to a data or attribute object to monitor its value The alarm object defines the normal range of the monitored value and generates an alarm message when the value goes outside of the normal range There is also a type of alarm that generates a message every time the monitored value changes Internally the alarm object is implemented as a special type of a transformation object and its attributes follow the same convention for the default attribute names While alarm attributes depend on the type of alarm as described in the following sections all alarm objects share the following common attributes Alarm Label Contains a user defined label used to identify the alarm Enabled Used to enable or disable the alarm by setting its value to 1 or 0 respectively The rest of the alarm attributes depend on the alarm type and are described in the following sections Alarm Messages Alarm objects generate alarm messages when changes of the monitored value trigger a specified alarm condition Alarm messages are processed by an alarm handler whi
138. value The property name will be used for accessing the property e Add more properties using the above steps When finished use the Resource Browser to browse them as resources 274 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Data button of the Status Panel may be used to access a list of custom properties of the selected object Defining Logical Names using Aliases An alias object may be used to define logical names for arbitrary resource hierarchies For example 1t may define a logical ValueHighlight name for accessing the Group1 Object3 FillColor resource hierarchy The application can then access the resource using a logical resource name instead of a complete path name The alias can also be used to create convenient shortcuts for long path names To define an alias for a resource hierarchy e Select the object whose resources you want to reference using the alias The resource path will be defined relative to this object The HasResources flag of the object must be set to YES to enable access to its named resources e Select Object Add Alias The Builder adds an alias displays the Alias List and the attributes of the added alias e Enter the logical name into the Alias attribute field Enter the resource path you want to assign to the alias into the Path attribute To define the path using the Resource Browser select the ellipsis button for the Path attribute select the resource and press Select e R
139. view are positioned only with X and Y coordinates with their Z coordinates set to zero Using the mouse to edit objects in the default view only affects the X and Y values for the objects the Z dimension is unaffected The Builder saves the current view for a viewport as part of the drawing The view has no effect on the definition of the objects in the drawing however To change your view of a drawing use the options on the View Menu or the Pan Zoom and Rotate controls 264 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Changing the View Projection The Builder uses a view projection to transform the drawing from its three dimensional definition into the two dimensional rendering that appears in the drawing area Your access to objects is limited by the view projection the objects you draw are drawn in that plane To get access to other planes for drawing you change the view projection The Builder includes a set of six predefined view projections but you can also define and use your own Use the options on the View Set View submenu to switch between predefined projections see page 310 To define your own projection use either View Adjust View see page 311 or the buttons and sliders on the lower left side of the Builder window The menu option gives you precise control over the projection but the sliders let you change the projection interactively Note that these view sliders are stateless The middle of the slider range alway
140. viewport If the child viewport has double buffering set to YES the excessive increase of the size causes the graphics server to exhaust memory trying to allocate a huge off screen pixmap The GLG Toolkit driver tries to catch this condition and disables double buffering producing an error message if the viewport size becomes too big But it may be too late in some cases Turn double buffering off for the children viewports if planning to zoom into the parent viewport with big zoom factors When the OpenGL driver is used the OpenGL s double buffering capabilities are used instead of the off screen pixmap which reduces memory consumption and increases rendering speed Resizable Controls whether or not objects in the viewport are resized when the size of the viewport s window is changed This attribute may be accessed programmatically using the CoordSystem resource name and may have the following values YES WORLD GLG_worRLD_coorD_systTEM API constant A default GLG coordinate system used to define the objects geometry The extent of the visible part of the viewport is 1000 1000 in the world coordinates and all objects in the viewport are resized when the viewport s size is changed The world coordinate system s origin is positioned at the center of the viewport with the X axis pointing to the right the Y axis pointing up and the Z axis pointing to the viewer The exact coordinate mapping is affected by the screen s Stretch and
141. viewport by setting the currently selected GIS Object as the parent viewport s GIS Object In the GIS Zoom Mode the zoom and pan controls of the viewport zoom and pan the map displayed in the GIS Object instead of zooming and panning the viewport s drawing The GIS Zoom Mode is persistent and is stored with the drawing To unset the GIS Zoom Mode use the Unset GIS Zoom Mode option described below Unset GIS Zoom Mode Resets the GIS Zoom Mode of the selected viewport to the Drawing Zoom Mode Chart Zoom Mode Provides options for setting the zoom mode of a viewport to the Chart Zoom Mode Set as Parent Viewports Chart Object Sets the Chart Zoom Mode of the chart s parent viewport by setting the currently selected chart object as the parent viewport s chart object In the Chart Zoom Mode the zoom and pan controls of the viewport zoom and scroll the data displayed in the chart object The Chart Zoom Mode is persistent and is stored with the drawing To unset the Chart Zoom Mode use the Unset Chart Zoom Mode option described below 324 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Unset Chart Zoom Mode Resets the Chart Zoom Mode of the selected viewport to the Drawing Zoom Mode Layout The Layout Menu provides options to align and layout objects in the drawing It may also be used to view or set the objects width and height using the Layout Toolbox option Layout Toolbox This option activates the Layout Toolbox which contains
142. with the GIS Object Dynamic icons and other graphical objects may also be added to the GIS Object programmatically at run time using one of the GlgAddObject methods The GLG GIS Demo and GLG AirTraffic Control Demo may be used as source code examples of adding dynamic icons at run time The two control points of the GIS Object define the size of the map image When the GIS Object is used to provide a background map for the drawing its points values may be set to 1000 1000 0 and 1000 1000 0 to cover the whole drawing in the Builder Shift click on the control point with the mouse to enter exact coordinates The following attributes of the GIS Object provide easy resource based access to the underlying Map Server functionality refer to the GLG Map Server Reference Manual for more information FillColor Defines the color of the map s background which is visible when the map is sufficiently zoomed out 82 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference GISDisabled Disables the GIS Object for quick editing GISProjection Defines the projection used to render the map GLG_ RECTANGULAR PROJECTION or GLG ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTION The rectangular projection displays the world as a rectangular region and is convenient for displaying detailed maps where parallels and meridians appear as straight lines The orthographic projection maps the whole world onto a sphere and is often used for the top level globe like views GISCenter
143. with this RGB color value will be rendered as transparent By default the attribute is set to a value which disables transparency 1 1 1 in the default color mode or 255 255 255 value in the 255 Color Display mode When a transparent GIF image is deployed in a GLG drawing in Java and C environments both the transparent color defined by the TransparentColor property and the transparent color defined in the GIF image are enabled In the OpenGL Java and C NET environments PNG images with an alpha channel transparency may also be used with or without the use of the TransparentColor attribute Windows GDI Note For transparent GIF images with the GDI driver on Windows the TransparentColor setting overrides the transparent color defined in the GIF image If TransparentColor is set to the disabled value described above the transparent color defined in the GIF image is used Windows Note the transparent color mode is supported on OS versions that support the TransparentBlt method Generic Logic provides a GIS Map Server product designed for real time rendering of high resolution maps with millions of objects There are a variety of applications that might need to display a map in the background as contextual information and place GLG objects on top of the map to represent dynamic or static icons Such applications need to provide map zooming and panning functionality handle window resizing and user interaction with the icons The
144. 0 to 59 n A newline character p Either AM or PM according to the given time value or the corresponding strings for the current locale Noon is treated as PM and midnight as AM r The time in a m or p m notation In the POSIX locale this is equivalent to 1 M S p R The time in 24 hour notation H M For a version including the seconds see T below S The second as a decimal number range 00 to 60 The range is up to 60 to allow for occasional leap seconds t A tab character T The time in 24 hour notation H M S x The preferred date representation for the current locale without the time X The preferred time representation for the current locale without the date y The year as a decimal number without a century range 00 to 99 Y The year as a decimal number including the century YZ The time zone as hour offset from GMT YL The time zone or name or abbreviation 128 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference A literal character The following conversion specifications are supported only in some environments C The century number year 100 as a 2 digit integer Not supported on Windows P Like p but in lowercase am or pm or a corresponding string for the current locale except on Windows where it is the same as p s The number of seconds since the Epoch i e since 1970 01 01 00 00 00 UTC except on Windows where it is the same as c
145. 10 111 DrawOrder 118 DrawOutline 125 DrawTicks 199 dynamic transformation 38 240 343 to 344 dynamics visualizing 358 Dynamics editing control points display 358 E EDGE 72 edge 103 EdgeColor 71 EdgeType 99 EDIT MS Windows control 215 Edit Axis Label 132 Edit Background 114 133 Edit Grid 114 118 Edit Labels 133 Edit Level Lines 114 Edit Plots 114 Edit SelectionMarker 118 Edit Ticks amp Outline 129 Edit Ticks Labels 129 edit toolbox 229 Edit X Axis 114 Edit Y Axes 114 Editing aliases 352 custom properties 350 ellipse 73 74 ELLIPTICAL gradient 140 Enabled 119 122 161 174 Enabled action 175 EndAngle 74 200 EndPoint 153 EndPosition 197 EndValue 125 EnforceRange 204 entries palette 304 entry point 139 EntryPoint 139 EntryPoint resource 272 353 environment variables 279 GLG_CONFIG FILE 279 GLG_ CONFIG _FILE_X Y 279 GLG_DIR 279 GLG_DIR_X Y 279 GLG_HMI_CONFIG_FILE 279 GLG_HMI PALETTES LOCATION 279 GLG_LOG_DIR 279 GLG_OPENGL_MODE 279 GLG_PALETTES LOCATION 279 GLG STRING SEPARATOR 58 62 GLG_VERBOSE 279 GLM_LOG_DIR 279 Equal Flag 160 167 ExactColor 95 explode parallelogram 73 exploding objects 320 Export Strings 301 Export Tags 301 ExportTag 137 extending GLG editors 151 242 284 F Factor 100 110 153 158 Factor attribute 152 File SubDrawing 269 333 FILL 71 Fill Dynamics adding 271 fill dynamics 228 f
146. 105 106 spaced text object 76 Span 125 Spanx 95 SpanY 95 special effects 150 SPHERICAL gradient 140 spline 75 SplineResolution 75 SplineType 75 SQUARE marker type 78 Square Series Object using 268 square series object 267 268 309 322 336 numbering of instances 102 square series objects 101 STANDARD color distribution 145 Start 196 213 Start message 213 Start Scale 154 START _AND_ ANGLE 74 START_AND_END 74 StartAngle 74 200 StartAngle of a rotate transformation 153 StartPoint 153 StartPosition 197 Stateless 196 200 STATIC MS Windows control 215 static transformation 38 240 346 to 347 editing 38 stock transformations 151 284 Stop 213 Stop message 213 storing application specific data 63 Stretch 94 String Concatenation transformation 166 string concatenation transformation 166 string data type 26 String Encoding 56 string formatting transformation 164 string transformation object 164 String Value 167 strong clone 258 308 SubDrawing 66 103 269 333 subdrawing loading 361 subdrawing dynamics 66 104 106 subdrawing loading 361 Subdrawing Traversal 361 subdrawings 106 SubWindow 66 104 SUBWINDOW REF 105 supplying data 28 surface graph 111 Swap Color Palettes 359 system integrators 151 242 284 T Tag 135 tag 31 60 340 adding 252 deleting 253 tag editing 253 Tag object 67 tag object 137 tag type DATA 137 EXPORT 137 EXPORT DYN 1
147. 16 would produce an output value of 0 5 By default the two sets of bounds set up the mathematical relation between input and output they do not impose limits That is the input bounds merely set the ratio of input to output An input value outside the given bounds is mapped to a comparable output value outside the output bounds That is if the range transformation is set up to map the interval from 0 to 1 to the output interval 100 to 200 than an input value of 5 will map to an output value of 600 Similarly the low and high bounds of the input range can be flipped with the low higher than the high In this case the mapping too will be flipped The transformation s Truncate parameter may be set to force the values inside the bounds The transformation ignores the attribute s Value and uses the transformation s Input Value parameter as input The converted output value is assigned to the attribute s transformed value XfValue The attributes for this transformation are as follows In Low The lower bound of the input data range In High The upper bound of the input data range Out Low The lower bound of the output data range Out High The upper bound of the output data range Truncate If set to YES the output value outside the OutLow OutHigh range will be adjusted to fit inside the range InputValue The input value to be converted to a new range Backward Compatibility Note A Range transformation was used in releases pr
148. 199 CENTER text alignment 76 Chart 113 chart assigning a legend 323 attaching or deleting a legend 132 cross hair cursor 118 flush data 115 legend 132 selection marker 118 tooltip 48 zooming and scrolling 45 Chart object 113 Chart objects 67 chart selection marker disabling 118 chart tooltip conversion specifications 116 format 116 chart tooltips disabling 116 Chart Zoom Mode 45 child object 25 CHORD 74 chord arc object 74 circle control points 34 CIRCLE marker type 78 circle object 74 CIRCULAR timer update type 160 CloneType 100 102 107 111 112 cloning 258 to 259 307 to 309 constrained 308 to 309 offset 259 307 transformation 259 307 color RGB format 280 Color Correction 146 color palette number of colors 280 color RGB changing range 359 color tables marking and replicating 259 ColorFactor 145 Colortable 96 colortable objects 144 ColumnFactor 102 111 ColumnsFirst 102 COMBOBOX MS Windows control 215 command adding data 184 adding new command types 184 deleting data 184 Command actions 177 command actions 348 common attributes 68 CommonRange 114 compare transformation 162 composite objects 66 concatenate transformation object 156 configuration file 280 282 285 CONICAL gradient 140 Connector 99 Connector object using 271 connector object 358 constrained points ofa connector 99 constraint cloning with 258 308 to 309 creating 235 to
149. 238 constraints 32 lack of precedence 33 of points 33 one way 167 tracing 238 359 Container 66 268 Container object 103 container object 97 Container reference 332 CONTAINER REF 105 control point 34 editing 233 341 specifying 225 transforming 243 346 Control Point Dynamics 242 control points 70 71 access 227 arc object 74 circle 74 number in a series 99 square series 101 365 Control Points Display 358 control points of a connector 99 CoordFlag attribute 69 coordinate system 40 coordinate systems 264 312 CoordSystem 93 copying attribute value 259 object 258 306 transformation 261 copying objects 70 CornerResolution 74 CROSS marker type 78 cross hair cursor disabling 118 C SPLINE 75 curve rendering 75 329 Custom Color Palette 282 custom color palette 359 Custom Components 284 custom controls creating 194 custom data DLL 138 custom dynamics 137 Custom event actions 177 Custom Events 52 custom events 348 mouse over 89 object selection 89 Custom Font Tables 54 custom input widgets creating 194 creating from scratch 216 Custom Objects adding 302 custom objects marking and replicating 259 Custom Palettes 303 305 adding 303 Custom Predefined Dynamics 284 Custom Properties 273 custom properties 63 custom scrollbars 46 Custom Tooltip Formatters 48 Custom Widget Palettes 281 Custom Widgets 303 CustomData attribute 70 cus
150. 25 overview 65 transformation 36 object coordinate system 40 object dynamics 104 106 107 object extent finding 235 object hierarchy 28 220 traversing 314 object palette 225 object selection custom events 89 Object Selection Events 51 ObjectPath 106 OEM command line option 282 284 287 288 OEM Editor Extensions 289 372 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference OEM Version of the Graphics Builder 282 OEM version of the Graphics Builder 282 284 287 288 Offset 155 On action 175 OnState 202 Opacity 144 open polygon 71 OpenGL 3D rendering 89 compatibility profile 19 core profile 19 depth buffer 89 hidden surface removal 89 shaders 19 OpenGL diagnostics and renderer information 361 OpenGL driver troubleshooting 361 OpenGL renderer 18 OpenGLHint 94 OpenType 72 optimization double buffering 93 Optimus 22 optirun 22 Origin 109 155 Out High 159 Out Low 159 OwnsInputCB 91 P PageDecrease 197 201 206 PageDecrease message 198 199 201 206 PageDecreaseKeys 197 201 Pagelncrease 197 201 206 Pagelncrease message 198 199 201 206 PagelncreaseKeys 197 201 206 PageIncrement 197 198 205 Palette Description File 303 Palette Description File Format 304 palette drawing 303 Palette scrolling 304 Palette SubDrawing 269 333 palette subdrawings 106 PaletteObject 212 Pan 85 Pan attribute 45 Panning 92 panning 45 86 panning view area 265 313 paralle
151. 37 TagAccessType 138 TagComment 138 TagEnabled 138 TagName 137 TagObject 137 Tags 342 tags 250 TagSource 137 Template 100 102 104 template 99 template object 99 temporary groups 266 Text Box 77 text box attributes marking and replicating 259 text object 75 330 limitation of transformations 78 TextColor 76 TextObject 205 TextString 76 204 205 TextType 76 threshold transformation 167 Thresholds 167 TickLabelOffset 130 Time Display 165 Time Format transformation 165 375 TimeEntryPoint 119 TimeFormat 126 165 Timelnput 165 TimeOrigin 130 165 timer transformation 160 TimerState 213 TimeString 213 title palette 304 Toggle Custom Xform Flag 286 TokenValue 203 Tooltip 347 Tooltip action 176 Tooltip Colors 49 TooltipFormat 116 131 TooltipMode 116 tooltips 47 multi line 49 TooltipString 47 202 TOP text alignment 76 tracing constraints 359 transfer transformation 167 transformation 35 239 to 244 340 animating using 256 attach to point 36 attribute 242 cloning 307 control point 243 copying 261 deleting 244 345 dynamic 38 240 256 343 to 344 editing 243 344 example 37 geometric 35 list 156 modelling 39 object 36 239 parametric 38 points 240 346 scaling parameter 152 static 240 346 to 347 string 164 using to transform object points 38 variable name 152 view 39 viewing 244 311 transformation object default attribute names 1
152. 51 scalar 158 transformations 376 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference marking and replicating 259 Transformed attribute value 137 Transformed data value 135 transformed value 158 query 135 137 transforming constrained objects 37 Transforming object points 38 transparency 34 TransparentColor 80 trasparency 68 traversing object hierarchy 314 TRIANGLE timer update type 160 Trigger 181 Truncate 159 two dimensional series 101 U ndo 305 JNICODE 56 Jnicode UTF 8 56 nitType 73 197 Jp message 198 Jpdate Type 160 pdateltemList message 208 209 JpLeft message 198 pRight message 198 se Value 168 175 SE FILE 105 SE PALETTE 105 JSE_TEMPLATE 105 ser Defined Properties 284 TF 8 56 TF8 148 TF 8 Locale 57 TF8Encoding 135 caca eaccacas aoe amp 4 accacads lt ValidEntryPoint 120 Value 167 199 204 205 206 query 134 136 ValueEntryPoint 119 ValueFormat 204 ValueHour 213 ValueMin 213 ValueParam 216 ValueSec 213 ValueX 195 ValueY 195 VarName 139 verbose mode 21 VERTICAL connector 99 VERTICAL text 76 VERTICAL ROTATED LEFT text 76 VERTICAL ROTATED RIGHT text 76 view coordinate systems 264 customization 310 to 313 main 41 panning 265 313 scaling area 265 transforming 311 312 zooming 312 View Transformation 92 view transformation 39 245 viewport object 84 224 333 3D shading attributes 149 colors 144 editing focus 314 f
153. A frame has a number of control points defining its own geometry and position and an array of constrained points frame points used for constraining the geometry of other objects When the frame is selected either its control or frame points are highlighted depending on the state of Options Show Frame Points option Frame constrained points can not be edited independently since their position is determined by the frame s control points The control points may be moved to change the position of the frame points but the frame points themselves cannot be moved directly Anything constrained to the frame points moves with the frame To access the constrained points use Options Show Frame Points see page 358 There are several types of frames 1D Frame has frame points positioned along the line defined by two control points 2D Frame has frame points positioned inside the parallelogram defined by three control points 3D Frame has frame points positioned inside the parallel prism defined by four control points Free Frame is simply a collection of arbitrarily positioned frame points A point frame is the special case of a free frame with one point Except for the free frame the number of frame points is indirectly defined by the frame s factor The factor defines a number of intervals between the frame s frame points along every frame s axis A frame object has the following read only attributes FrameType Defines the numbe
154. Add D Property Creates a D data property for holding a double precision value Add S Property Creates a G data property for holding a triplet of XYZ or RGB values 350 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Add G Property Creates an S data property for holding a text string Add D List Creates a list of custom properties containing a single D data property and adds the list into the objects list of custom properties This is different from simply adding a custom property ofa D type selecting Add D List creates a list of lists The new list entry appears as an Unnamed gt gt in the list of object s custom properties The gt gt symbols indicate that the list can be opened for editing by double clicking on it with the left mouse button When the list is opened it can be given a name and its content can be edited as well To add more D properties to the list press the Add button at the bottom of the list dialog To edit lists elements select an element and edit it using the displayed Attribute dialog To get back to the object s custom properties list double click on the entry Add S List Same ad Add D List but adds a list of S properties Add G List Same ad Add D List but adds a list of G properties Add Predefined Set Adds the selected predefined custom property set from a list of available custom data sets Refer to the Custom Data Sets and Custom Commands section on page 287 for informati
155. AmbientCoef attributes and its FillColor attribute FLAT GLG_FLAT LIGHT The actual color used to fill a polygon also depends on its position relative to the light vector directed from LightPoint to LightDirection The light is infinitely distant and the light rays are parallel to one another POINT GLG_POINT LIGHT The actual color used to fill a polygon also depends on its position relative to the light vector The position of the light source is defined by the LightPoint attribute Note The POINT light setting is enabled only when the OpenGL driver is used If the GDI driver is used it behaves as the FLAT light option LightPoint and LightDirection Define start and end points of the light vector Light is directed from the LightPoint point to the LightDirection point Note that these two points define the direction of the light source The light itself appears to be infinitely distant LightCoefficient Controls the proportion of a viewport s light cast by the light source at LightPoint This is a scalar value ranging from 0 to 1 The sum of the light coefficient and the ambient coefficient should be between 0 and 1 otherwise color distortion may occur Of course setting the sum greater than may be used to produce special effects AmbientCoefficient Defines the proportion of a viewport s light cast by ambience In a sense this controls how bright the completely shaded places are The coefficient is a scalar value which can
156. D LEFT Anchor Defines vertical and horizontal text alignments relative to the text s control point for the FIXED text or within the text bounding box for other text types The choices are CENTER LEFT or RIGHT for horizontal alignment and CENTER TOP or BOTTOM for the vertical The corresponding defined constants are GLG_HCENTER GLG_HLEFT GLG_HRIGHT and GLG_VCENTER GLG_VTOP GLG_VBOTTOM The two choices are combined logical OR to define the resource value FontType Specifies the type of the font used to draw the text FontType is a font family index in the viewport s font table Refer to the Editing a Font Table section on page 147 for information on adding font types to the viewport s font table FontSize Defines the font size of the FIXED text or the maximum font size to use for fitting other text types FontSize is a font size index to the viewport s font table Refer to the Editing a Font Table section on page 147 for information on adding font sizes to the viewport s font table GLG Objects 77 MinFontSize Specifies the minimum font size to use when fitting the text The MinFontSize is a column index to the viewport s font table Setting MinFontSize to 1 activates automatic decluttering feature for SCALED and SPACED text types In the case the text will not be drawn if there is not enough space to fit the smallest font 0 into the text area SizeConstraint This attribute is used to synchronize the fitting of SCALED an
157. FILL 72 LINEAR gradient 140 linear transformation 161 LineType 71 moving ants animation 71 Line Width 71 linking transformations 156 List of Strings 167 List of Values 166 167 list transformation 166 LISTBOX MS Windows control 215 Loading a palette 303 local 70 Local attribute see Global attribute locales 55 Localization 55 logarithmic series 100 Logical Names 274 LogType 100 Low 126 160 175 Low Low 176 LowOffset 129 M main view 41 major ticks disabling 128 MajorInterval 128 MajorOffset 130 MajorTickSize 130 Map Server 80 maps zooming and panning 45 marker object 78 329 330 MarkerSize 78 MarkerTemplate 110 111 MarkerType 78 marking attribute value 259 transformation 261 matrix transformation 38 matrix transformation see static transformation MaxLength 204 MaxRowSize 133 MaxValue 161 204 205 message types Activate 203 AddItem 207 209 Decrease 198 199 201 206 Deleteltem 207 209 Down 198 DownLeft 198 DownRight 198 GetltemCount 208 209 211 GetltemList 207 209 GetltemsState 208 GetltemStateList 208 GetSelectedItemList 208 Increase 197 199 201 206 Left 198 PageDecrease 198 199 201 206 Pagelncrease 198 199 201 206 Reset 203 213 ResetAllltemsState 208 Right 198 Set 203 SetInitItemList 207 209 SetltemList 207 209 SetItemState 208 SetltemStateList 208 Start 213 Stop 213 Up 198 UpdateltemList 208 209 U
158. G User Control and GLG Library for C NET This is a native GLG C Class Library for developing GLG applications using C and NET GLG ActiveX Control for C C and C NET on Windows This is an alternative option for developing GLG applications in C C and C NET on Windows It may be used to provide an OpenGL renderer option for C NET applications Introduction to GLG 23 Animating a Drawing Once a drawing is displayed it may be animated by setting parameters of the drawing using either resources or tags e GLG Standard API includes methods to set or query resources and tags defined in the draw ing These functions along with a small assortment of convenience functions are platform independent and can be used in both the Microsoft Windows and X Windows environments C C C NET and Java Manipulating Objects in the Drawing at Run Time The following GLG APIs extend the Standard API with additional functionality e Intermediate API extends the Standard API with methods for drawing introspection such as traversing objects in the drawing accessing objects internals and custom properties querying a list of resources defined in the drawing or in an individual object It also includes methods for handling mouse interaction object layout and advanced geometry manipulation coordi nate conversion editing dynamics and constraints and other methods that provide complete control over the objects in a GLG drawing Extended API
159. G gNOption interaction handler supports the following messages that can be sent using the GlgSendMessage method SetInitItemList Updates the option menu widget with the new option items from the viewport s InitltemList after changing items of the nitltemList resource The message has no parameters SetItemList Updates the option menu widget with the option items from the item list passed as the first parameter of the message The passed item list must be a group object containing item strings The message does not alter InitltemList GetItemList Returns a current list of option menu items This message has no parameters and returns a group object containing a list of strings AddItem Adds a new option menu item to the widget The new item is passed as the first message parameter The second parameter may contain GLG_TOP or GLG_BOTTOM to specify the place in the list of options where the new item will be added If the second parameter is NULL the default GLG_BOTTOM value is used The UpdateltemList message must be used to display the new option items when finished The Set temList message provides a way to replace the whole option list Deleteltem Deletes an option item The first message parameter may contain GLG_TOP or GLG_BOTTOM to specify the option item to be deleted If the parameter is NULL the default GLG_BOTTOM value is used The UpdateltemList message must be used to update display when finished The Set temList message provides
160. GLG User s Guide and Builder Reference Manual GLG Toolkit Version 3 5 Generic Logic Inc Generic Logic Inc 6 University Drive 206 125 Amherst MA 01002 USA Telephone 413 253 7491 FAX 413 241 6107 email support genlogic com web www genlogic com Copyrights and Trademarks Copyright 1994 2015 by Generic Logic Inc All Rights Reserved This manual is subject to copyright protection GLG Toolkit GLG Widgets and GLG Graphics Builder are trademarks of Generic Logic Inc All other trademarks are acknowledged as the property of their respective owners June 21 2015 Software Release Version 3 5 Preface GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference This book provides information about creating and animating GLG drawings using the GLG Graphics Builder and editing GLG objects It contains the following chapters Table of Contents Introduction to GLG An overview of the GLG Toolkit and its components Structure of a GLG Drawing A description of the internal structure ofa GLG drawing The material in this and the next chapter are important for anybody who wants to edit or create a GLG drawing GLG Objects A description of each of the objects that make up a GLG drawing Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing A description of the integrated features of the GLG drawing such as zooming and panning object tooltips custom selection events and commands as well as other integrated features Input Objects A descript
161. Group creates a group object which is a container for objects A group is an object that organizes the objects it contains letting you apply actions to all the objects at once A group can contain any object including other groups When you use this option the Builder prompts you to click and drag the mouse in the drawing to define a rectangle that touches or encloses all the objects to be included in the group A group object does not appear as a visible shape but the control points of objects in a group appear as hollow squares Clicking on any member of a group selects the group This option is equivalent to the Group icon on the Object Palette To remove an object from a group use the options on the Arrange Explode submenu To edit a single object in a group use the options on the Traverse menu Edit Next Edit Bottom and Edit All see page 315 Alternatively use Traverse Hierarchy Down to edit the members of the group see page 314 The Ctrl Shift Click on an object in a group may be used as a shortcut for getting access to objects inside the group Create Temporary Group Create Temporary Group is equivalent to Select Rectangular Area described on page 306 Select Multiple Objects Select Multiple Objects is equivalent to Select Multiple Objects described on page 306 318 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Add Object to Group Add Object to Group adds an object to the selected group object It may be used with both temp
162. II character set ISO 8859 1 The MultiByteFlag attribute of all fonts in the default font table will be automatically set to UTF8 when the UTF8 based system locale is detected A custom font table can be specified to render different character sets in the GLG drawing The font table is defined as an attribute of the drawing s viewport The fonts in the font table must use ISO 8859 or some other encoding supported by the UTF8 font sets The XFontName attribute of each font may list several comma separated font names that will be handled as a font set for rendering UTF 8 characters The font s MultiByteFlag must be set to UTF 8 In order to use different character sets in the GLG Editor s text fields buttons and toggles as well as in the native controls in the drawing an appropriate font with the ISO10646 encoding have to be specified via the Motif s renderTable resource Here is an simple example of X defaults for Motif fonts renderTable rtl rt1 fontType FONT_IS FONTSET rt1 fontName 13 isol10646 1 Text renderTable rtl TextField renderTable rtl PushButton renderTable rtl ToggleButton renderTable rtl OptionMenu renderTable rtl Due to the Motif s use of the UTF 16 version of UNICODE for the internal representation of strings it needs fonts with 18010646 encoding to support the UTF8 based locale 58 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Cross Platform Use Note Windows has the UTF 8
163. MProperty The sample code also checks and sets the object s HasResources flag if necessary The code demonstrates how to implement both modal and non modal custom dialogs The OEM menu contains options for both the Edit and Run modes Starting the Run mode disables edit options and enables runtime options of the OEM menu The custom editor options DLL may also implement the functionality of the custom run mode DLL described in the previous section making it possible to provide a single DLL that handles both the OEM editor options and the OEM runtime mode A custom options DLL can be deployed via the option lib command line option as shown in the README file via the CustomOptionLib variable of the glg config and glg hmi_config configuration files or by placing a DLL with a default name in the directory of the GLG Editor executable Refer to the ADDING CUSTOM ICONS section of the README file for information on the process of defining custom icons used by the module In addition to the cross platform GLG based dialogs the module may also use native dialogs based on Windows Win32 API or Xt Motif on Linux Unix Editor Extension API Files All extension DLL examples project files and makefiles on Linux Unix for building the extension DLL The following files are provided in the example directories sample c Example s source code glg custom _dll o Provides GLG API for the custom DLL Don t delete this file when cleaning the project d
164. Many of these methods are portable across window environments allowing applications to be easily ported from X Windows to Microsoft Windows and back again Displaying a Drawing The first step in using a GLG drawing from your application is to display the drawing on the screen Again depending on the application and graphical environment in which it will operate you can choose one of several different display facilities GLG Wrapper Widget for C C and X Motif You use the wrapper widget for applications that will operate in the X Windows environment The GLG Toolkit supplies a version of this widget that uses Motif and another that uses the Xt interface directly You can use Motif if you want access to the Motif widgets or if it s important for your application to use that graphical standard The Xt version of the wrapper widget can also display and animate GLG drawings GLG Custom Control and GLG MFC Class for C C on Windows This interface allows you to display and animate a GLG drawing in the Microsoft Windows environment Cross Platform Generic API for C C The functions of the GLG Generic API can be used to display and animate a GLG drawing in an entirely platform independent way A program using only functions from this API can work equally well in the Microsoft Windows and X Windows environments GLG Bean and GLG Class Library for Java This 100 pure Java Class Library allows you to develop GLG applications using Java GL
165. Object Create SubDrawing SubDrawing From Object menu option then click in the drawing to select the subdrawing s anchor point If the template contains several named objects used as icons for object dynamics enter two colon separated resource paths to one of the objects ObjectPath and its anchor point OriginPath and press OK To display the whole template press OK without entering ObjectPath To create a file subdrawing 1 Click on the a button or select Object Create SubDrawing SubDrawing From File menu option then click in the drawing to define the subdrawing s position Select the drawing file to use This drawing may contain Widget or Drawing resource to specify the object in the drawing to be used as a template If the drawing contains several named objects used as icons for object dynamics enter two colon separated resource paths to one of the objects ObjectPath and its anchor point OriginPath and press OK To display the whole template drawing press OK without entering ObjectPath To create a palette subdrawing 1 Select Object Create SubDrawing SubDrawing From Palette and click in the drawing to define the subdrawing s position If the palette contains several named objects used as icons for object dynamics enter two colon separated resource paths to one of the objects ObjectPath and its anchor point OriginPath and press OK To display the whole palette press OK without entering Ob
166. OpenGL renderer is used the maximum line width is limited by the graphics card s hardware and is 10 for most of the modern graphics cards LineType The line pattern solid dashed etc for rendering the edge of the polygon GLG provides 32 predefined lines types shown in the Builder s Line Type palette OpenGL Note The line type rendering is consistent between the GDI version of Builder C C library ActiveX Control Java and C NET However rendering of some line types in viewports with OpenGL enabled in the OpenGL version of the Builder C C library and ActiveX control may differ due to the differences in the way line types are defined in OpenGL Moving Ants Dynamics Note If LineType is greater than 32 the reminder of division of LineType by 32 is used as a line type and the result of the division is used as a line type pattern offset in pixels The length of the pattern is 32 for the GDI renderer Java and C NET and 16 for the OpenGL renderer The line type pattern offset may be used for a moving ants animation of the line type pattern as seen in the GLG Process Control Demo The effect is achieved by repeatedly increasing the LineType value by 32 which causes the line type pattern to shift by one pixel To avoid overflow the LineType has to be periodically reset back to the initial line type value Since the length of the pattern is 24 for the GDI renderer and 32 for OpenGL resetting it after every 16 24 384 i
167. PY and the second PY2 Attach a transfer transformation to the LineWidth attribute of PY7 Constrain the Source attribute of the transformation to the Line Width attribute of PY2 Now attach the Divide transformation to the Buffer attribute of the Transfer transformation and set its D attribute to 2 The LineWidth of PY1 is now constrained to be one half of the value of the PY2 LineWidth attribute An Identity transformation ignores the attribute s Value and sets the attribute s output value to the value of the transformation s Source attribute which is its only attribute The type of the Source attribute matches the type of the attribute the transformation is attached too This transformation is used for the internal design of the GLG Control Widgets Predefined Dynamics Color List In addition to the stock transformation types listed above predefined dynamics options are provided in the Builder for convenience Predefined dynamics provide easy to use options for implementing the most common dynamic actions for example Blinking Alert The parameters of predefined dynamics are presented to the user as a simple list of public properties that define the its dynamic behavior Predefined dynamics is implemented using custom transformations which represent a collection of several transformations wired together to implement a specific dynamic behavior and present it to a user as a simple list of public properties that define its parameters C
168. Polygon A template polygon object The lines connecting polyline points inherit their graphical properties from this template Therefore you can modify the attributes of this polygon to change the line color and width If Segments is set to YES the polygon is used as a template for creating the segments If Segments is set to NO the polygon itself is used to render the polyline GLG Objects 111 CloneType The clone type used to create an instance of the polygon and marker templates It may be Full Weak Strong or Constrained Refer to the Cloning an Object section of the Using the GLG Graphics Builder for details on using the clone type In a manner similar to the series object instances of markers and polyline segments are differentiated by the zero based index added to the name of the corresponding template object For example for a three point polyline the resource hierarchy might include the template objects Mark and Poly and the series instances Mark0 Mark1 and Mark2 and Poly0 and Polyl If markers are named the polyline contains a group named Markers which in turn contains the instances of the marker template If the template marker s conrol points are named the polyline also contains a group called Points containing the instances of the control points If the template polygon is named there is a group called Polygons containing those instances too The Global flag of a marker template s attributes may be used to constrai
169. PushIn attributes as described below The SpanX and SpanY attributes of the screen object may be used to change the extent of the visible portion of the viewport for advanced use NO SCREEN GLG_SCREEN_cooRD_sysTEM API constant The screen coordinate system is used to define objects In this coordinate system coordinates are defined in screen pixels and objects dimensions are not changed when the viewport is resized The origin of the screen coordinate system is located at the top left corner of the viewport with the X axis pointing right the Y axis pointing down and the Z axis pointing away from the viewer to form a right hand coordinate system for 3D rendering 94 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference NO GLG SCREEN GLG_FLIPPED SCREEN COORD sysTEM API constant Same as the NO SCREEN but with the Y axis pointing up to preserve the X Y and Z axis direction matching the default WORLD coordinate system NO SCREEN CENTER GLG_SCREEN_CENTER_COORD_SyYSTEM API constant Same as NO GLG SCREEN but with the origin located in the center of the viewport When a new widget is created the Resizable attribute of the widget s viewport is set automatically depending on the selected Stretch Resize option used to create a new widget For example the GLG SCREEN setting is used for a widget created using the File New Widget Fixed Scale menu option Stretch Controls mapping from view coordinates to window coordinates
170. RepeatInterval and RepeatTimeout with the same meaning as for the G gButton handler Note that whereas the GLG button widget s label is supplied by a text object the native widget uses a simple string value and draws the label itself The OnState resource is supported not only for the TOGGLE BUTTON but also for other button types If the LabelString resource of a push button has the list transformation attached the OnState resource may be used to control the list transformation to toggle the button s label on a mouse click Such button will behave as a toggle button but without rendering the toggle button s state indicator The button will still generate the push button s Activate action The G gNButton interaction handler supports the same messages as the GleButton handler listed above 204 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference GlgNText This is a native text widget handler which may be used with both single and multi line text widgets It may be attached to a viewport object with WidgetType of TEXT and TEXT_EDIT The native text handler encapsulates the native text box widget s interface and allows to handle it in a cross platform way TextString This resource indicates the string attribute of the text object MaxLength This optional resource indicates the maximum length of a text string that user can enter from the keyboard This resource does not affect strings that are entered programmatically by setting the TextStrin
171. SE If set to True enables additional output when troubleshooting OpenGL driver editor setup loadable editor extension DLLs and other editor extensions The verbose command line option may also be used GLG_OPENGL_MODE If set to True enables the OpenGL renderer If set to False a native windowing system renderer will be used The g g enable opengl and glg disable opengl command line options may also be used 280 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference GLG_OPENGL_VERSION Specifies the value of GlgOpenGL Version which requests the specified OpenGL version The shader based Core OpenGL profile is used for OpenGL versions higher than 3 00 and the Compatibility profile is used for older OpenGL versions The Compatibility profile is used by default an OpenGL version needs to be explicitly specified to use the Core profile GLG_OPENGL_HARDWARE_THRESHOLD Specifies the value of GlgOpenGLHardwareThreshold All viewports with a non zero value of the OpenGLHint attribute less than or equal to GleOpenGLHardwareThreshold will be rendered using the hardware OpenGL renderer if available Viewports with the attribute value between GlgOpenGLHardwareThreshold and GlgOpenGLThreshold will be rendered using the software OpenGL renderer if available GLG_OPENGL_THRESHOLD Specifies the value of GlgOpenGLThreshold All viewports with a value of the OpenGLHint attribute greater than GlgOpenGLThreshold will be rendered using the GDI renderer
172. Stops the stopwatch The message has no parameters Reset Resets the stopwatch The message has no parameters 214 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Native Widgets In addition to making drawings using GLG widgets you can use the GLG Toolkit to create an arrangement of widgets native to the windowing environment The type of native widget used to render a viewport is defined by the WidgetType viewport attribute This attribute is inherited from the screen object associated with each viewport and available for editing in the Builder by clicking on the More button in the list of viewport properties The default DRAWING_AREA widget type is used to render viewports that are used as drawing surfaces for displaying graphical objects By placing viewport objects with widget type different from the default into the GLG drawing you can embed native widgets into the drawing The look and feel of the native widgets will change to match the environment in which the drawing is displayed For example a native button will be displayed as a Windows Motif or Swing button when it is displayed in the respective environments Native widgets come with some limitations For example you cannot use the drawing resources to control the behavior of these widgets although you can control graphical features such as color layout and via input handler s resources labels The input handlers are provided only for some of the native widgets buttons toggle
173. T actions are displayed for editing as a Public Properties dialog or a Custom Properties dialog that allows individual properties to be added or removed A button in the upper right corner of the Action Properties dialog provides a convenient shortcut Enable ConstrainOne Enable ConstrainOne enables or disables the Constrain One button in the Attribute Dialog The Constrain One button is disabled by default and may be enabled for advanced use The EnableConstrainOne option in the glg config file may be used to define the default setting for the Graphics Builder Trace Attribute Constraints for Mark0 Trace Attribute Constraints for Mark0 enables or disables constraints tracing for the attribute marked as Mark0 using the Mark Mark0 buttons in the Attribute or Resource dialogs Refer to the Constraints Tracing section on page 238 for mode information Color Options Swap Color Palettes Swap Color Palettes toggles the displayed color palette between the default color palette and custom color palette The color palette may also be swapped by Ctrl clicking on the color palette Refer to the Custom Color Palette section on page 282 for information on defining a custom color palette Pastel Colors Pastel Colors toggles the displayed color palette between the standard and pastel colors Pastel colors may also be activated and deactivated by Shift clicking on the color palette 255 Color Display 255 Color Display toggles the range of the
174. TIN FORM and DIALOG AREA widget types are used the 3D bevels are drawn if the value of the ShadowWidth parameter is not equal 0 Input Objects Design and the ValueParam resource Starting with the release 3 4 the output resources of input handlers such as Value ValueX ValueY OnState and others have a corresponding resource whose name is formed by adding the Param suffix ValueParam ValueXParam OnStateParam and so on These resources are used only in the internal design of the input widgets and can be ignored in the application code The following section provides detailed information on the internal design of input widgets it is intended for system integrators who want to create custom input widgets from scratch This information is not required for using the Control Widgets provided with the Toolkit and can be safely skipped Advanced Internals of the Input Objects Widgets that use GlgSlider and GlgKnob input handlers use Move and Rotate transformations to move the widgets active elements A Range Conversion transformation is attached to the Factor attribute of the Move and Rotates transformations the Input Value parameter of the range conversion transformation controls the slider s or knob s active element and is named Value ValueX or ValueY depending on the widget type The Range Conversion transformation converts a user defined range of the slider or knob to the 0 1 range of the Factor attribute that drives the wi
175. TION LAYER environment 88 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference variable is set to a valid elevation layer name the point s elevation is also displayed In the Chart Zoom Mode displays the X Time value corresponding to the current cursor position and the Y value in the range of the first Y axis q avallable only in the Graphics Builder in the GIS or Chart Zoom Mode In the GIS Zoom Mode displays information about the GIS selection If GISVerbosity is set to 2000 or 2001 extended information is also written into the GLG error log file and printed to the terminal on Linux Unix In the Chart Zoom Mode it displays information about a data sample pointed by the cursor The data sample is selected using the X mode of the chart s TooltipMode attribute O available only in the Graphics Builder in the Chart Zoom Mode It is the same as the q accelerator but uses the XY selection mode Setting ZoomEnabled to YES enables accelerators in the Run mode of the Builder and at run time If ZoomEnabled is set to NO the accelerators are disabled but the integrated zooming and panning may still be used at run time programmatically by invoking the GlgSetZoom method The G gSetZoom method takes accelerator keys listed above as its zoom type parameter There are several accelerators for the ZoomTo operation allowing to activate zooming in only X Y or in both X and Y directions To perform the ZoomTo operation press one of the zoom accel
176. The Builder can save files in three different formats e Binary which loads quickly but is not portable across platforms that use different binary data representations e ASCH which is completely portable across platforms but loads slightly slower than binary e Extended which is portable across platforms and across versions of the Builder but loads most slowly This format is used only to import drawings to the older versions of the Toolkit and is available only in the Enterprise Edition of the Graphics Builder The default format for the saved drawing is ASCII This is the recommended format that works not only across all hardware platforms but also binary C C ActiveX Java and C NET applications Save Compressed Save Compressed enables or disables saved drawing compression When the drawing compression is enabled drawings are saved using gzip compression The saved file extension is not changed when the drawing is saved compressed This option controls only saving operations on loading the drawing format is recognized and handled automatically The editor can also load drawings compressed outside of the editor using gzip utility The default is Save Compressed Disable the drawing compression if the drawing will be used for code generation Selection Options Disable Dynamics For Editing Disable Dynamics For Editing disables geometrical dynamics such as move scale or rotate when the object is selected When the opt
177. The color to use when the value goes outside of the Low High range ColorAlarm The color to use when the value goes outside of the LowLow HighHigh range InputValue The monitored value Interval The blinking interval in seconds RangeHigh The High range RangeHighHigh The HighHigh range RangeLow The Low range RangeLowLow The LowLow range The List dynamics use an integer index to select an attribute value from a list It works the same way as the List transformation and differs only in the way it lists its properties It may be applied to attributes of either D double or S string type and has the following properties ListIndex The zero based index controlling which attribute value to use ValueN or TextStringN Attribute values or text strings to be used where N is a zero based value or string index The Threshold dynamics compare an input scalar value with the list of thresholds and selects a corresponding attribute value from a list of values It works the same way as the Threshold transformation and differs only in the way it lists its properties It may be applied to attributes of either D double or S string type and has the following properties InputValue This value is compared with the thresholds and controls which attribute value to use The value corresponding to the first threshold smaller than the input value is used ThresholdN Thresholds to be used where N is a zero based threshold index The thresholds must be
178. The contents of the dialog depend on the type of the object e g polygon group polyline Here are some of the object specific features of the Selected Object Properties dialogs e For all graphical primitives such as polygon or text objects and the viewport object the Add Edit Rendering button can be used to add and edit rendering attributes of an object such as gradient or shadows e For text objects the Add Edit Text Box can be used to add a box around the text and edit its attributes e For a group object the dialog includes a set of buttons that give you access to the members of the group without exploding the group These buttons act as equivalents to the Traverse Menu options Select Next Select Bottom and Edit All and the Arrange Menu options Add Object to Group and Remove Object from Group 340 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference e For a viewport object the More button provides an access to the attributes of the screen object which can be thought of as a second set of attributes for the viewport object Click on the Back button to return to the viewport properties See page 331 for information on font handling for a viewport The Add Edit Light button adds a light object and lists its attributes For a screen object the Add Edit Fonttable button allows to define a custom font table and edit its list of fonts The Add Edit Colortable button allows to add and edit attributes of a custom colortable For the font t
179. To prototype the object s run time behavior you can animate it with simulated or random data see page 256 Using the GLG Graphics Builder 229 Editing Attributes The attributes of an object are the characteristics that control its appearance Each object type has its own set of attributes that are used to draw the object Because the GLG objects are arranged in a hierarchy an attribute is usually an object with its own attributes constraints and transformations In the Builder you can edit not only the attributes of a graphical object but also the attributes of its attributes For a complete discussion of the attributes ofthe GLG objects see the Structure ofa GLG Drawing chapter Edit Toolbox The Edit Toolbox provides a fast access to editing attributes of an object or a group of objects and may be activated with either the Object Edit Toolbox or the Edit Toolbox E toolbar button The toolbox also provides a direct single click access to common rendering and text box attributes 1 e gradient and shadow colors text box color and line attributes which otherwise require several mouse clicks to be accessed When activated it displays the most common graphical attributes of the selected object or group of selected objects and provides menus and palettes for point and click attribute editing It also displays the name of the selected attribute and provides a text entry box for entering its value directly in addition to the pale
180. Transformation the Builder prompts you to enter a file name using the standard file selection dialog To apply a saved view projection use View Load View Transformation Coordinate System View Drawing Parent Object Zooming The Coordinate System submenu provides options to let you view the drawing using different coordinate systems The effect of these options depends on the relationships among the objects in the drawing If the objects share the same coordinate system the options have no effect on the appearance of the drawing Changing the viewing coordinate system does not affect the objects or their relationships to one another It affects only the Rotation and Scaling axes and the way the Builder interprets numerical values of coordinates For information about the various coordinate systems relevant to a GLG drawing please see the Structure of a GLG Drawing chapter View lets you edit the drawing using the coordinate system of the viewport before view transformations are applied Drawing lets you edit the drawing using the coordinate system for the drawing after view transformations are applied Parent lets you edit the drawing using the coordinate system of the selected object s parent Object lets you edit the drawing using the selected object s coordinate system The Zooming submenu provides options to let you change the scale of the view The changes in scale affect your view of the drawing not the draw
181. VENTS Disables processing mouse events for the viewport May be used to reduce CPU consumption for viewports that do not need to process any events GLG Objects 89 Tooltip GLG_MOUSE OVER TOOLTIP Enables object tooltips Use Object Add Tooltip menu option to add a tooltip to an object Custom tooltip formatters can be supplied via the GlgSetTooltipFormatter method to generate dynamic context based tooltip strings on the fly Button tooltips are always active regardless of the setting of the ProcessMouse attribute Tooltip Named Objs GLG_MOUSE_OVER TOOLTIP GLG NAMED TOOLTIP Enables tooltips for all named objects The object s name will be used as a tooltip string Click GLG_MOUSE_ CLICK Enables processing of the mouse click events in the viewport It activates processing of actions with Trigger MOUSE_CLICK as well as object selection messages on the mouse click which are passed to the Input callback at run time It also activates the old style prior to v 3 5 custom object selection events and mouse click feedback controlled by the MouseClickEvent MouseClickState and MouseClickToggle properties of an object Move GLG MOUSE OVER SELECTION Enables processing of the mouse over events in the viewport It activates processing of actions with Trigger MOUSE_OVER as well as object selection messages on the mouse over which are passed to the Input callback at run time It also activates the old style prior to v 3 5 custom mous
182. When the drawing is saved the Builder will bring the editing focus back to the top level of the hierarchy showing the Widget viewport it created for the new widget Widget Fixed Scale Same as New Widget Resizable but creates a fixed scale widget When the widget is resized its drawing area shows more or less without changing the size of the objects drawn in it Since the drawing is not stretched the objects in the drawing always keep their X Y ratio SubDrawing Resizable New SubDrawing Resizable is used to create a resizable drawing which is later used as a template of a resizable subdrawing object SubDrawing Fixed Scale New SubDrawing Fixed Scale is used to create a non resizable drawing to be used as a template of a fixed size subdrawing object Empty Drawing Resizable New Empty Drawing Resizable creates a new resizable drawing without creating a widget When the drawing is resized all objects in the drawing are resized as well Before drawing objects we recommend that you create a viewport using Object Create Viewport open it using Traverse Hierarchy Down or use the New Widget option to create a new viewport automatically GLG Graphics Builder Menus 297 To create objects use the buttons in the object palette or the choices in the Object Create submenu To use pre built objects use the Palettes menu to load the palettes Ctr clicking on the palette s icons loads the corresponding widget as
183. a constant center position when the object s shape changes If the value of the gradient type is NONE the gradient is disabled GradientColor The second color for the gradient fill For polygons and polygon subclasses the gradient fill renders the object with a color smoothly changing from the object s FillColor to the gradient color according to the gradient type For text objects the color changes from the text s TextColor to GradientGolor For polygons with no LINE FILL and the LINE WIDTH gradient the color changes from EdgeColor to GradientColor GradientAngle The gradient angle for linear gradient the start angle for conical gradient The angle is measured counter clock wise relative to the X axis For example an angle of 0 with the linear gradient type results in a horizontal left to right gradient fill GradientLength The relative length of the gradient in the range of 0 to 1 controlling the percentage of the object to be rendered with a gradient fill the rest of the object will be rendered with a solid color For example a value of results in the whole object being rendered with a gradient fill with the gradient starting on one side of the object and ending on the other If the value is equal to 0 5 half of the object will be rendered with a gradient fill and the other half will be filled with a solid color If the Gradient Length is larger than 1 the gradient fill will extend beyond the boundaries of the object and will be
184. a history is attached to a series object the resource name mask need not contain the name of the series itself This attribute is not an object but a string char If there is no percent symbol in the VarName string it is added to the end EntryPoint This is the entry point for the object Each time this attribute is changed its changes are propagated to the list of resources that match the VarName attribute Inversed Determines whether the history object works in the order defined by the resource names DIRECT or in reverse order INVERSED RollBack Defines the number of iterations to roll back when the history gets completely filled with data This attribute is used in conjunction with the WRAPPED scrolling type for implementing scrolling behavior which scrolls the graph only once every n iterations as defined by the value of the attribute 140 Alias GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference When the Rol Back attribute is used in a graph the RollBack attributes of the DataGroup object and the XLabelGroup object must be set to proper values to ensure their synchronous scrolling For example consider a graph with the WRAPPED scroll type 200 data samples 10 X axis major ticks with labels and 20 minor ticks per one major tick interval Setting DataGroup Rollback 40 and XLabelGroup RollBack 2 will roll the graph back by 2 major tick and label intervals which corresponds to 40 data samples when the graph gets completely f
185. a new drawing Empty Drawing Fixed Scale New Empty Drawing Fixed Scale is the same as New Empty Drawing Resizable but creates a non resizable drawing where objects do not change their size when the drawing is resized Instead more or less of the drawing area is shown in the window Since the drawing is not stretched the objects in the drawing always keep their X Y ratio Reset Drawing Reset Drawing initializes the current drawing The Builder rebuilds each object in the drawing updating the Builder s representation to match the current information in the object hierarchy For composite objects such as series references polylines and polysurfaces Reset Drawing ensures that the instance objects reflect any changes to the template This means that any changes made to series instances are lost when the drawing is reset All attribute values of instances are also lost when the drawing is reset The old instances are destroyed and a new set is replicated with values from the template Open Open loads a drawing from a file When you select Open the Builder prompts you to select a file name using the standard file selection dialog The Builder can open a drawing saved in any of its own formats see page 357 Ifa drawing is already open Open discards the current drawing The Builder asks if you want to discard the current drawing but it does not prompt you to save the changes To load more than one drawing into the drawing a
186. a objects several RANGE alarm types are available to detect when the value goes out of an application defined range Both the High Low and HighHigh LowLow ranges are supported For all data types a CHANGE alarm may be used to detect a value change When alarm is activated an alarm message is generated The message contains a user defined alarm label as well as other related information that may be used by an application to process the alarm For the range alarms a message is generated when a value is going out of range as well as when it falls back into the range making it possible for the application to set and reset an alarm display An application can install an alarm handler to process alarms The alarm handler is global and processes all alarms for the entire application The handler can display alarms in a scrolling alarm list or perform any other application specific alarm handling GLG alarms are graphical alarms intended to be used with the graphical displays to visualize current alarm conditions in a drawing The alarms are associated with drawings and are active only for the drawings that are loaded and displayed To monitor all alarms in the process database regardless of the drawing being displayed a different alarm service has to be used that monitors the data regardless of the graphics Public Properties for Creating OEM Components The Enterprise Edition of the Graphics Builder provides a feature that allows to designate
187. a subdrawing may be used as a node that provides a single control point for positioning or attaching connectors to it By using subdrawings you can make a drawing file smaller than it might be otherwise since only one copy of the template is saved The drawback of using subdrawings is that the initial resource settings for instances of the template can not be saved in the drawing and must be done programmatically at run time This limitation can be avoided by using attribute binding described later in this section on page 108 Sub Window is a special type of a subdrawing used to switch drawings displayed in the SubWindow object The SubWindow has two control points that define an area in which the template drawing is displayed and its template must be a viewport object The SubWindow may be used as a subdrawing with two control points which is useful for interface objects such as buttons icons and menus if a button template changes instances of the button in all drawings will change as well Bindings may be used to specify unique attribute values for each instance of the subwindow such as a button label or a custom action ID Refer to the Bindings section on page 108 for more information A Reference object has the following attributes Template The original template object shared by all copies For file and palette references this resource is NULL until the drawing hierarchy is set up After the setup the template contains the templa
188. a time stamp is optional If a time stamp is not supplied the chart automatically generates a time stamp using the current time A time stamp is supplied in the format of POSIX time a number of seconds since midnight 120 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference January 1 1970 Fractional values may be used to supply exact high precision time stamps In charts with the RELATIVE TIME SCROLL horizontal axis the entry point is used the same way but the axis labels display the time elapsed since the moment defined by the TimeOrigin attribute of the axis In charts with the VALUE SCROLL horizontal axis values pushed into the entry point are used to position data samples based on an arbitrary numerical value other than time In charts with the INDEX SCROLL horizontal axis an application should not push values into the entry point since it is automatically filled with an incrementing sample index 0 1 2 and so on In XY Scatter charts with the RANGE horizontal axis the entry point is used to push X values of XY plots Valid Entry Point An entry point for supplying a sample s VALID attribute 0 or 1 If it is not supplied the value of is used making the sample valid by default AutoScale Delta Enables auto scaling of the plot if set to a non zero value If auto scale is enabled the plot s range is automatically extended by an integer number of the AutoScale Delta intervals to accommodate out of range data If the attri
189. able the Save Font Table and Load Font Table buttons save or load the fonttable object from a file The Mark Font Table button marks the font table for reuse while the Use Marked Table button replaces the fonttable with the marked fonttable The Options Attribute Clone Type menu controls constraining of the marked fonttable attributes e For rendering and box attributes as well as fonttable colortable and light objects the Delete button at the bottom of the attribute list deletes the object The Mark button at the top of the Properties dialog stores the object for reuse with the Edit Add or Use Marked Object menu option e If the object has public properties defined a button in the upper right corner of the dialog will switch the displayed properties between object properties and public properties The Attribute Dialog Some objects are both attributes and objects For these objects the Selected Object Properties dialog for the object includes ellipsis buttons that let you edit the attribute objects Clicking on the button displays the Attribute dialog The Attribute dialog displays the following attributes The HasResources attribute which control the position of the attribute s attributes in the resource hierarchy e The Global attribute which controls the behavior of the attribute during cloning This attribute changes its label depending on its current setting the default label is Local e A list of values or a palette
190. acter has the same fixed length of more than one byte Instead it means the use of variable width characters where each character may consist of one or more bytes XFontName Holds the name of the font to use when the drawing is displayed in the X Windows environment If wild card characters are used the first matching name is used If MultiByteFlag is set to UTF8 the font with the UTF 8 encoding must be used If the font name starts with the character the rest of the string after the character defines the name of the environment variable that specifies the font name to use This could be used as an escape mechanism for defining a special font at run time WinFontName Holds the name of the font to use when the drawing is displayed in the Microsoft Windows environment If MultiByteFlag is set to UTF8 the font with the Windows UNICODE encoding must be used The environment variable escape mechanism described for XFontName is supported for WinFontName as well WinCharset Specifies the font s charset If the value of the attribute is set to DEFAULT_CHARSET the font with the charset of the current system locale will be used otherwise the font with the specified charset will be chosen For fonts whose charset attribute is set to DEFAULT_CHARSET including the fonts of the default font table the attribute may be set globally by setting the GlgFontCharset global configuration variable The attribute value is ignored in X Window
191. actor may be changed by attaching a range transformation to the factor attribute object itself If an application wants to control the rotation by supplying the rotation angle instead of a normalized value in some range the factor of the rotate transformation may be set to 1 then the angle value will control the rotation directly A common mistake is setting the factor to 0 in which case changing the angle value will not do anything since the product of the two numbers will still be equal to 0 For a complete list ofthe available dynamic transformations see the Transformation Object section of the GLG Objects chapter Alarms An alarm object can be attached to any data or attribute object to monitor its value Internally alarms are implemented as a special type of a transformation object whose only action is to produce an alarm message when the alarm conditions are met Refer to the Alarm Object section of the GLG Objects chapter for a list of available alarm objects The View A GLG graphical object exists in its own three dimensional coordinate space In order to draw a picture of that object on your two dimensional screen a mapping must be established between the object and the screen Because an object can consist of several other objects each with its own coordinate system the mapping entails several steps The steps involved in the mapping are also referred to as modeling transformations 40 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference
192. aeceaaecseeenaeeeeaaeseaeseeecneneenses 317 Select Multiple Objects tait decor beets 317 Add Object to Groups cis ina 318 Delete Object from Grope mii paap a aa e e a a enat ES A 318 Add or Delete Object from Group ccceccecceessecssessecetecesceeneeesecssecsaeseeceseeeseecseceseeeeseseseaeeaaees 319 lei dd tl io 319 Select Boldt AAA RAR 319 EA A a o ns a e do ie 319 Edit All Select adas 319 PMA EU OS 319 ExplodS noia etc 320 REM A AA A 321 Replace Viewport with SubWindow cccccccecssessecsteceeceeeeeseecseeeseceseceseceseeesecaeceaeeeeeeaeeeaaees 321 Polygon Pot iii A ua te ADA 321 A O neve E A ee DGS 322 TOOT it AA A A a a 323 CIS ZOOM Mode talar A AI ii tech e 323 Chart Zoom Mode circadiano oleo NEAR aint 323 Dd o aid changes ASERS 324 Layout ToolbOX o cicsccccdersssadeneccedchoncedeassendesdecndvethendechaceaeosnedscesangeeanendcendeoccesasensdassnaederendetanens 324 AMI AAA A AAA cadets Sade eds AAA A death A 324 14 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference DiS tA DW sseccc castes vache shes ce take ean E teas DAD ESSA tra 325 Spacer td 325 Distribute Even sell 325 A O TE 326 A O POS EE TE dal dorado baii ici 326 MIE A A A A ade sh aeee eee eats 326 OD A A EAE 326 A RN 326 Edit LODO sd oda sia 338 A E hime Neae reece cas Gata site cuate vacua bete ce nada lake debe debe Ce eele care 339 Public Properties ti A A A AA 341 Resources isaac ie italia O AERE n geen ido 341 MD A a iieiais 342 ANET A E E 343 Obje
193. aeenseseneeesees 49 MouseOver Highlight ccc ccccccscesscesseeseeeseeseceeeceseecseecseceseceeeeesecsaecaseneeseeeeseecseecaeenseeseesenees 49 MouseClick Feedback and Toggle cccccesssssesssesseessecseceeeseeeesecaeceseeeeeeeeeesaecaeceeeseeeseneeaaes 50 Integrated EV A ios 51 Object Selection EV iii ds ETEO ERTEN AR Ai is 51 Input Object EVE iia E id ita E ica Rada 53 Custom Fonts and Font Tables indir 54 Internationalization and Localization Support cccceccccssecseceseceseeesecseeceeeeeeseeceseeeseecaeeneeeeeeesees 55 Cross Platform 118N Support ccccccscccsessseeceeeeesseceseceecseeeeseecseecsseeecseeceseecseecseseaeeneeeeeeeesees 55 Multi Byte Character Set Support c ccceccccsccescceseesseeeeessecesecesceeeeeeeecsaecsseseeeseeeeseecsaesseeeneeeaes 56 UNICODE and UTF 8 Support ccccccecccccscessecsseseeceeeceseenseceseceeeeeaeeesecsaeceseseeeseneeseecsaeneeeeaes 56 Localization SUPPO E E erano a a aL E E PEE ETEA D EE EE Er A aa AiE e 58 Data Connectivity Features Nai a a a a A A 60 Resource Based Data ACCESS tii ae ana Enoe e aeoe eis eh eats wal ees aad asas 60 Tag Based Data Access and Database Connectivity ooooonoconocnnononocanonconcconncnnncnononnnooncconnc nana 60 Tag Export and Import Features for Run Time Tag MappiOB cocconnoccnoncnoncnnnnnoncnnncnncconnconocnnos 61 Custom Properties for Storing Application Specific Data ooconcninoninnnnonononconncnn nono nonncconoconanannnnnnos 63 Table
194. ained to the first point of the series path There is another control point which is only visible while looking at the series template This point controls the mapping of the template object onto the series constraint path By default this point is at the origin of the template object s coordinate system so that the origin is mapped onto the path It can be moved to another location to change mapping The series object has the following attributes Template The object used as a template replicated in the series It can be accessed for editing by traversing the hierarchy of the series object Traverse Down or the Hierarchy Down button H When finished use Hierarchy Up to return back to the top level The Template resource is not visible in the Resource Browser by default but will appear in the Resource Browser if it is named DepthSort Controls hidden surface removal This is the same as the DepthSort attribute for a group page 98 except that the SPECIAL value uses a fast depth sorting algorithm optimized for Series objects when the GDI driver is used Factor Defines a number of template copies to be created Note that strictly speaking the Factor attribute of a series object defines not the number of copies produced but the number of series object intervals The actual number of copies may differ by one from the value of the Factor attribute For example for a vertical axis of a graph the number of major ticks is greater than the
195. ainer s elements A user can also make control points into named resources by granting them names in the Builder GLG Objects 71 The lists in the following sections include only attributes with default names other then control points Simple Graphical Objects Polygon Simple GLG graphical objects can be directly viewed in a drawing These are the simplest building blocks of a picture and most of them will seem familiar to you The following sections introduce the GLG objects in greater depth and provide lists ofthe most commonly accessed object attributes The polygon is a basic graphical object and is used to represent both lines and polygons A line in a GLG drawing is simply an open polygon while most shapes are represented by closed polygons of one sort or another A straight line is a two point polygon The polygon is basic to the structure of a GLG drawing in other ways Arcs rectangles parallelograms splines and connectors inherit their attributes from a polygon A simple polygon has a control point at each vertex It also has the following attributes FillColor The color of the polygon s interior if it is filled EdgeColor The color of the polygon s defining line or edge LineWidth The thickness of a polygon s edge Lines with odd line width use round line ends Lines with an even line width use square ends The intermediate connections of a multi line polygon always use rounded connections If the
196. ak clone Using the GLG Graphics Builder 259 e SemiG b constrains the clones to the original in a strong clone but not in a weak clone e Local does not constrain the clones to the original for either a strong or weak clone This is the default To control the position where the clone appears use Edit Clone Offset To define a static transformation to apply to the clone as it is created using Edit Clone Transformation The clone transformation may use rotational or other offsets Adding an Object to the Custom Object palette To add an object to the Custom Object palette simply save it in the widgets custom_objects directory The object will automatically be added to the Custom Objects palette when the builder is restarted or the palette is re opened It s also possible to add your own palettes of objects to the Builder Refer to the Palettes section of the GLG Graphics Builder Menus chapter for more details and options Marking Transformations Rendering Attributes and Other Objects The Builder includes a marking mechanism for marking attributes and resources as well as transformation aliases custom properties rendering and text box attributes color and font tables and other objects Marking attributes is used for constraining to a marked attribute as well as for reusing its value Marking transformations aliases custom properties rendering attributes and other objects is used for replicating these objects as well as for at
197. alize the application at run time The run time localization is performed by loading an appropriate translation file depending on the system s locale into the drawing using the G g mportStrings method Using String Import Feature And Unicode With the Java Version of the Toolkit The Java version of GLG API supports Unicode and uses InputStreamReader to read native characters from the strings translation file decoding the characters using character set defined by the current locale The ImportStrings method of the GLG Java API has an encode parameter allowing an application to load string translation files with encoding different from the current locale setting It is common in Java environment to use ASCII encoding with lu Unicode escape character for representing non ASCII characters Such encoding however does not correspond to any system locale is not supported by InputStreamReader and must be converted to some supported encoding before processing For example in Java source code and resource bundles such conversion is done at the compilation time by the Java compiler which converts the lu encoded ASCII to UTF 16 characters in the generated Java byte code For string translation files an equivalent conversion has to be performed Java provides a native2ascii utility that can be used to convert from Unicode to ASCII encoding with u Unicode escape or vise versa The following command line shows how to run the utility to convert the ASCII
198. alue of the DrawTicks resource If Granularity is defined its value is used as the number of ticks The G gNSlider interaction handler supports the following messages that can be sent using the GlgSendMessage method Increase Increases the slider s value by its Jncrement The message has no parameters Decrease Decreases the slider s value by its Increment The message has no parameters Pagelncrease Increases the slider s value by its PageIncrement The message has no parameters PageDecrease Decreases the slider s value by its Pagelncrement The message has no parameters A knob input widget is used to translate the angular position of the mouse into a value between 0 and 1 Adjusting the granularity can turn a knob into a multi position switch All knob angles like all angles in a GLG drawing are measured in degrees from the X axis the 3 o clock position All the knob resources are optional except for Value Value The knob s value This is a number between 0 and 1 The knob is at 0 when the cursor is at the StartAngle position relative to the Center and 1 when the cursor is at the EndAngle position None of these resources need be present in which case the start angle is 0 the end angle is 360 and the center is the origin of the viewport Center The angular position of the cursor is measured relative to this point This resource is actually a marker object which may or may not be visible but in either cas
199. ame Size Make Same Size submenu provides options for setting size of selected objects to be the same Width Sets the width of each selected object to be the same as the width of the anchor object If no anchor object is selected the left most selected object is used as an anchor Height Sets the height of each selected object to be the same as the height of the anchor object If no anchor object is selected the left most selected object is used as an anchor Both Sets both the width and height of each selected object to be the same as the width and height of the anchor object If no anchor object is selected the left most selected object is used as an anchor Distribute Distribute submenu provides options for distributing objects in the selected group leaving no spaces between the objects Across Distributes objects horizontally leaving no extra spaces between the object s extents Down Distributes objects vertically leaving no extra spaces between the object s extents Space Evenly Space Evenly submenu provides options for evenly distributing spaces between objects in the selected group Across Distributes objects horizontally with equal spaces between the object s extents Down Distributes objects vertically with equal spaces between the object s extents Distribute Evenly Distribute Evenly submenu provides options for evenly distributing objects in the selected group using objects centers 326 Across Down GLG User
200. an application uses several popup dialogs such as drill down dialog alarm dialog set value dialog etc DialogResource S The name or the resource path of the dialog object to be shown DrawingFile S The filename of a drawing to load into the dialog in case the dialog contains a subwindow that displays different dialog drawings depending on the context May be left empty if a viewport with a fixed drawing is used as a dialog object Destination S The name or the resource path of the subwindow object to load the dialog drawing into It may be different from DialogResource in cases when a viewport DialogResource is used as a dialog object and a subwindow Destination inside the viewport is used to load different context dependent dialog drawings Title S Specifies an optional title string to be used by an application as needed ParamS S An optional string parameter 186 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference ParamD D An optional numerical parameter PopupMenu CommandType S Command type is set to PopupMenu The command displays a popup menu MenuType S Specifies a popup menu type in case an application uses several popup menus MenuResource S The name or the resource path of the popup menu object to make visible DrawingFile S The filename of a drawing to load into the popup menu in case the popup menu contains a subwindow that displays different menu drawings depending on the context May be left empty
201. an be drawn and positioned on the map with the mouse in the lat lon coordinates The Builder automatically converts the mouse position to lat lon coordinates which are stored in the object s control points The Builder transparently handles GIS projections which allows the user to draw polylines on top of the globe displayed in the ORTHOGRAPHIC projection To start the GIS Editing Mode select the GIS Object then press the Hierarchy Down button to go down into it In the GIS Editing Mode you can draw and position objects on top of the map with the mouse as well edit attributes of the previously created objects All objects added to the GIS Object for the GIS rendering will be contained in its G SArray and will be saved with the GIS Object Dynamic icons and other graphical objects may also be added to the GIS Object programmatically at run time using the G g4ddObject methods The GLG GIS Demo and GLG AirTraffic Control Demo may be used as source code examples of adding dynamic icons at run time The map displayed in the GIS Object may be zoomed and panned using the integrated zooming and panning features including integrated scrollbars The map may also be dragged with the mouse as described in the Integrated Zooming and Panning chapter above The GIS Object supports GIS queries which can be used to obtain information about the GIS feature under the current cursor position The GIS query returns a complete list of attributes of the GIS feature
202. an infinite coordinate system the drawing is not limited to any page size and the scrollbars use the extent of all objects in the drawing as the drawing size If some objects in the drawing are partially or completely clipped out by the viewport window the thumbs will reflect the portion of the drawing visible in the window and will allow the user to scroll the drawing If all objects in the drawing are completely visible in the window the thumbs will indicate that there is no need to scroll If it is desired to define a fixed drawing size or a maximum scrolling extent that is bigger than the extent of objects in the drawing it may be easily accomplished by adding a rectangle to the drawing to serve as a drawing boundary The rectangle will provide a visual indication of the drawing extent or can be made invisible if required The scrollbars will use the extent of the rectangle as the drawing size allowing the user to scroll up to its extent Using Custom Scrollbars By default the integrated scrollbars use native scrollbars that differ in appearance on different platforms GLG scrollbars may be used to provide the same look and fill regardless of the platform by setting the G gNativeScrollbars global configuration resource to 0 The GlgNativeScrollbars global configuration resource is automatically set to 0 for Qt and GTK integrations When GlgNativeScrollbars is set to 0 the application may also provide its own custom scrollbars to use as the
203. and transformed to produce the clone By default the Builder applies the default linear clone offset The Define Clone Transformation option may be used to define any transformation to offset the copies for example rotate or scale To create the clones use the clone options on the Edit menu Full Clone Strong Clone Weak Clone and Constrained Clone 308 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference To disable the clone transformation select any object and use Define Clone Transformation setting the parameters of the transformation so that they have a neutral effect For example for a move transformation you would set the move distance parameters to zero The clone transformation is applied to copies using Transform Points changing the coordinates of their control points irrevocably without attaching a transformation object to the clone However some objects such as circles arcs and reference objects are treated differently for Scale and Rotate transformations Cloning a circle using a rotate transformation attaches a static matrix transformation to the cloned object to position it When Constrained Clone is used the control points of the clone are constrained to the points of the original object and Transform Points would transform both the clone and the original To avoid that Constrained Clone attaches a static matrix transformation to the cloned object to position it and sets the clone s MoveMode to MoveByXform Full Clone F
204. are ignored allowing for comments and blank lines to annotate the string file A string may extend to several lines as shown in the last conversion file entry Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing 59 If some strings should be not translated their entries may be left unchanged or even better removed from the file Only the strings defined in the translation file will be replaced Builder Features The File menu of the Graphics Builder contains Export Strings and Import Strings options to export or import strings of the drawing loaded in the Builder When editing focus is in a viewport only that viewport s strings are exported or imported providing a way to export or import strings for only a part of the loaded drawing After the exported string file has been translated it can be imported back and the new localized drawing may be saved This allows the translator to edit the strings in a text file instead of finding all text strings in the drawing Drawing Conversion Utility Options The drawing conversion utility supports export_strings lt filename gt and import_strings lt filename gt options for exporting and importing the strings in a batch mode GLG API Methods for Run Time Localization The GlgExportStrings and GlgImportStrings methods are provided in both C C ActiveX Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit s API The application may utilize a single drawing and provide translation files for multiple locales to loc
205. are ignored for the viewport The rendering object is accessible by using the 92 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Add Edit Rendering buttons in the Object Properties dialog To delete the rendering object use the Delete Rendering button in the Rendering Object Properties The attribute assumes the value of NULL if no rendering object is attached See the Rendering section on page 140 for details When a rendering object is added to all objects in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added rendering objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used Zooming and Viewing Transformations Each viewport automatically creates a Matrix transformation which is used for zooming when the viewport is edited in the Builder as well as for integrated zooming and panning at run time User defined viewing transformations e g Scale Move Rotate Shear may also be added directly to the viewport to implement user controlled zooming panning or 3D rotating functionalities which otherwise would require creating a group to contain all objects in the viewport and attaching the transformations to the group Attaching the viewing transformations directly to the viewport makes it more convenient by eliminating an extra group To add a viewing transformation move the focus inside the viewport make sure
206. atagen a test program that is part of the GLG Toolkit see the GLG Programming Tools and Utilities chapter To animate a drawing use Run Start specifying a named resource as part of the command For example to animate an object named valvel with a dynamic transformation that has a named factor variable name of rotate use this command line datagen sin d 0 1 valvel rotate The datagen is a GLG shortcut that prevents the initiation of another process and uses an internal data generator See the The Data Generation Utility section of the GLG Programming Tools and Utilities chapter for more information on data generation options Stop GLG Graphics Builder Menus 355 If no command is given the run process or if an error is encountered when trying to execute the command the Builder searches the drawing for a string resource called DatagenString and uses it as a run command When a new drawing containing DatagenString resource is loaded the resource value is used to initialize the animation command The Store Run Command option may be used to store the current animation command in the existing DatagenString resource of the drawing In the Run mode the Builder activates the Run Toolbar that contains the following controls e Updates displays the number of updates performed from the start of the Run mode Seconds shows the number of seconds the Run mode was active this does not include the time w
207. ate a rotation matrix which is then applied to the parent If the center or angle parameters are changed the rotation matrix will be recalculated changing the position of the object the transformation is attached to If the angle Structure of a GLG Drawing 39 parameter is named an application program can change its value at run time by accessing the angle parameter as a named resource This will result in animating the object the rotate transformation is attached to It will rotate according to the changing angle value Since this style of transformation uses certain parameters to generate the transformation matrix it is sometimes called a parametric transformation Geometrical dynamic transformations typically use two numbers multiplied together to specify the effective value to use for its main parameter For example a rotation transformation uses an angle and a factor to define the rotation angle the effective angle value used for rendering will be the product of these two parameters This lets you control the input range of the controlling parameter For example you could set up a rectangle that rotates through 90 degrees by setting the angle to 90 and letting the factor range from zero to one to accommodate an application which defines the maximum rotation angle of 90 degrees and then supplies a normalized value in the range of 0 to 1 to control the rectangle s rotation within this 90 degree span The 0 1 range of the f
208. ated in the Builder as a rectangle defined by two points Like the parallelogram the rounded object is simply a sub class of the polygon so it has the usual polygon attributes like LineType and FillColor It also has the following attributes that control the object s rounded corners Radius1 Controls an extent of rounded corners along the side of the rounded rectangle defined by the first and second control point Y dimension when originally created in the Builder Radius2 Controls an extent of rounded corners along the side of the rounded rectangle defined by the second and third control point X dimension when originally created in the Builder If set to 1 the value of Radius is used and the size of rounded corners may be controlled with a single parameter Radius 1 UnitType Specifies units used for Radius and Radius2 attributes The following options are available GLG_SCREEN_UNITS corner radiuses are defined in screen coordinates the size of the rounded corners stays constant GLG_ WORLD UNITS corner radiuses are defined in world coordinates the size of the rounded corners changes proportionally when the drawing is resized but stays constant when the object is resized with the mouse GLG_RELATIVE_UNITS corner radiuses are defined as coefficients in the 0 1 range relative to the extent of the rectangle s corresponding side The size of the rounded corners changes proportionally when the drawing or the object is resize
209. ation cccceceeseesseseceeceececeeseeseeeeceaceaecaeeeeeeeeesecaecnaeeneeeees 276 Creating Copies and Animating Them ccccceccecscesceessesseceseceeeeeseeeseesecesecneeeeeeeeseeseeaenes 277 Constrain Attributes ec deciecsisecsonivndsstjanccusdenevat cadavers ae dd cara id chutes chases 278 Builder Setup and Customization ccccccccccesscesseeseeesseeseceseeeneeseecsaececeeeseeeeaeeeseceseceeeeeseeeseeaeens 279 Table of Contents 11 Environment Variables econ ri td adds 279 Builder Configuration Fleur caceria 280 Custom Widget Paleta alabada whet byes 281 OFM CUSO T O a a coneadlascaeseadcnsseedsadsad a ses 281 Custom Color BE ICEA EKE EA E A E E E AE TEA 282 OEM Version of the Graphics Builder oooocioninnninnononoconcnonononcnnnconoconocnn nono nonnn co nonananannon nos 282 Custom Components with User Defined Properties ooooooonnncnnnnnoonconnconnonnnonnonnonanonanorn conocio 284 Custom Predefined Dynamics ccccccccessessscesseesseeeceeceeeeeseecacensecesecnseeeaeeeaecaeeeseeeeeeeseeaaees 284 Custom Data Sets and Custom Commands cecceeccesceseseseseeereeseeseceecaeeeceeseeaecaaeaeeaeeneeeees 287 OEM Editor EXT id ad cea dina 289 Chapter7 GLG Graphics Builder Menus oooooononcnnncccnnnnnnnnaaannnnnnonnnos 295 NN 295 NA ON 295 Reset E 297 O RN 297 Oper Ribose a e O O N 297 Recent DIME ad 297 AVE A A AAA A AA A di 298 O 4 forests E E E a vated tae O E E E A 298 LAO a ea 298 Rece
210. ation public properties of the second level transformation are not listed as the properties of the parent transformation due to the setting of an internal flag To unset the flag and make public properties of the second level transformation listed as properties of its parent uncheck the Options OEM Options Toggle Custom Xform Flag option for the second level transformation object The LineTypeXform group defines additional transformation for the LineType attribute in addition to the transformations from the DXform group that will be automatically appended to the list Using the GLG Graphics Builder 287 Adding Predefined Dynamics To add or delete predefined dynamic options add or delete objects from the corresponding groups in the template drawing and edit the XformObject transformations attached to the objects attributes To define new predefined dynamics 1 Start the OEM version of the Graphics Builder by using the oem command line option of the Enterprise Edition of the Graphics Builder and load the predefined dynamics template drawing from the lt glg dir gt editor_extensions drawings custom_xform_templates g file 2 Add a new object to a corresponding group and define its name and XformLabel property as listed above 3 Make sure that the Options Dynamics Options Full Display of Predefined Dynamics option is checked to display the transformation s attributes instead of public properties 4 Adda stock transformation to th
211. attached to the object The Delete button of the Edit Aliases dialog may be used to delete individual alias objects from a list Mark Aliases Marks all aliases attached to the selected object GLG Graphics Builder Menus 353 Add Marked Aliases History Adds aliases marked with Mark Aliases to the alias list of the selected object This button pops up the History sub menu with the options listed below Add History Add History attaches a history object to the selected object A history object provides scrolling functionality such as scrolling behavior of GLG graphs History provides a mechanism to animate resources that use sequential numbers in their resource names It provides an access to these resources via a single entry point and scrolls resource values according to the specified scrolling type For example a history object may be attached to a group that contains a set of rectangles named Rectangle0 Rectanglel Rectangle2 and Rectangle3 It can also be used with series objects since series name their instances by adding a sequential number at the end of each instance s name For example if a template of a series object is named DataSample the series instances will be named DataSample0 DataSamplel DataSample2 and so on A history object is not visible 1t does not appear in the drawing and only appears in the resource hierarchy if you explicitly name it Its presence is generally indicated by a resource named EntryP
212. attribute is used at run time for accessing the value of the resource object the tag is attached to Applications that receive data from a database usually use TagSource to define the database field to be used as a datasource A tag also has a TagComment attribute that may store any auxiliary information related to the tag When a tag is added its Tag Name and TagSource are initially set to the string undefined and may be edited in the Data Tag dialog The values of the tag s TagName and TagSource attributes are displayed in the Tag field of the Attribute dialog as two fields separated by the character To edit the tag click on the Edit Tag button of the Attribute dialog All added tags are shown in a list of tags in the tag browser The Tag Browser dialog shows the list of tags Each tag s entry shows its TagName and TagSource attributes separated by the 7 character Clicking on tag entries selects them showing the Data Tag dialog for editing the tag s attributes and the Attribute dialog for editing the attribute object the tag is attached to Selected I Tag Nane Filter ly Nanes Sort by Tag Nanes _ Unique Tag Nanes Display TagNane Tag Source Display Both TankLevel Var61 WaterTemperature Yarz Select Clear Close The tags displayed in the tag browser may be sorted by either their tag names or tag sources by using the tag browser s Sort by button The Filter filed may be used to disp
213. attributes with a copy of the marked attributes Axis Label Attributes Replaces axis label attributes with a copy of the marked attributes View The View Menu provides options to let you change the appearance of the drawing These options have no effect on the underlying drawing but just alter its appearance within the drawing area Set View The Set View submenu provides options to let you change the projection used to display the drawing Main y In this view the X axis points to the right the Y axis points up and the Z axis points 2 I toward the viewer x Back y Inthis view the X axis points to the left the Y axis points up and the Z axis points away ll from the viewer GLG Graphics Builder Menus 311 Left y In this view the X axis points away from the viewer the Y axis points up and the Z axis Je points to the right Right In this view the X axis points toward the viewer the Y axis points up and the Z axis points y p p p p A x to the left Top y In this view the X axis points to the right the Y axis points toward the viewer and the Z x axis points down Zz Bottom Z In this view the X axis points to the right the Y axis points away from the viewer and the e Z axis points up Adjust View Adjust View defines and applies a transformation to the view of the drawing letting you transform the view incrementally The view transformations are defined and applied in the same way as object and clone transfor
214. ave the same font type and the sizes range from the smallest for the first font to the largest for the last font If the order is incorrect text fitting for a SCALED text object may fail or yield odd results The font table s Properties dialog also contains buttons for reusing a font table A font table may be reused by marking it with the Mark button at the top of the Properties dialog Use the Edit Add or Use Marked Object Font Table menu option to add the marked font table to another viewport The font table can also be reused by using the Mark Font Table and Use Marked Font Table buttons or by saving it into a file and loading into another viewport by using the Save Font Table and Load Font Table buttons in the Properties dialog When a font table is added to all viewports in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added font tables attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used When a marked font table is reused constraining of corresponding attributes of the new copy and the original font table is also controlled by the Builder s Attribute Clone Type option The font object is used to keep information about one font It is created automatically every time a font table object is created and has the following attributes MultiByteFlag Specifies whether the font handles the characters as single byte
215. awing To define new commands or custom data sets 1 Start the OEM version of the Graphics Builder by using the oem command line option of the Enterprise Edition of the Graphics Builder and load the command template drawing from the lt glg dir gt editor_extensions drawings custom_command templates g file Using the GLG Graphics Builder 289 2 Add a new object to a corresponding group define its name and add custom data with data elements as described above 3 Use the modified drawing with the command templates command line option to test the new commands and custom data sets 4 Uncheck the Options Selection Options Edit Action Data as List menu option add new command or custom event data set and verify the list of its properties OEM Editor Extensions GLG editors support OEM editor extensions in the form of loadable DLLs or shared libraries on Linux Unix platform The same DLL may be used for all editions of the GLG Graphics Builder as well as the GLG HMI Configurator The following extensions are available and described in the next sections Custom Data Browser Extension Custom Run Module Extension e Custom Editor Options and Dialogs Extension The GLG installation includes examples of all available extensions in the editor_extensions directory All examples contain a run script for starting a GLG editor with the extension DLL They also contain self documented source code a makefile and or project file for buildin
216. ay be used in the GLG HMI Configurator as a custom component The HMI Configurator has several options defined in the glg_hmi_config configuration file for editing custom components with user defined public properties The HMI Configurator s Property button may be configured to display public properties for custom components and attributes for objects that do not have public properties The HMI Configurator may also be configured to provide two Property buttons one for displaying object s public properties and another for displaying its attributes Public properties provide a mechanism for supplying custom components with user defined properties for editing in the HMI Configurator The HMI Configurator s configuration file has a number of options to restrict editing of custom components to editing just their exported public properties The OEM version of the Graphics Builder provides two menu choices and two toolbar buttons for displaying object properties one displays the object s attributes and another displays its public properties The non OEM version of the Builder provides both Properties and Public Properties menu options but only one Property toolbar button 284 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Palettes HMI Editor Widget Samples menu displays a palette with samples of HMI components that have public properties The Builder s Object Public Properties menu option may be used to browse custom properties of a se
217. bal flag and the flag and Attributes GLG uses the terms attribute and resource to refer to the same object There is however a distinction between the two that involves the method of access An object such as a polygon has several attributes and these are accessible by their default names You can think of these as places within its data structure for data to modify an aspect of the polygon For example a blue polygon has a FillColor attribute that specifies its color is blue This object consists of a data type G and a data value 0 0 1 and some housekeeping data The FillColor default attribute name is not an independent name This name is not part of the attribute object s data It only means something relative to the polygon to which it refers For example if a second polygon has its edge color attribute constrained to the fill color of the first polygon the data object may be accessed either as FillColor of the first polygon or as EdgeColor of the second polygon However the attribute object can have its own name If you name that object it becomes a resource and is accessible by its own name rather than only by its connection to the parent polygon Consider the diagram below A polygon s data is depicted with three attributes the FillColor LineWidth and LineType Of course a polygon has more attributes than this but we have omitted most of them for clarity The LineWidth and LineType attributes are represented by identi
218. be resource transparent and all its resources will leak through and will be visible at the level of its parent instead of the viewport s level When an input handler processes input events and changes the values of resources it controls it also generates messages which are sent to the application program via the Input callback This lets the program react to the user input depending on the message s Action type Refer to the Callback Events chapter of the GLG Programming Reference for details For input objects that have corresponding native widgets available buttons toggles sliders and text inputs GLG provides two types of handlers one for the graphical version of the widget using GLG graphical objects to implement the widget s graphics and another for use with the native widget to implement the input object For example GlgButton may be used with custom graphical buttons and toggles and GlgNButton may be used with native Motif Windows or Java buttons and toggles 44 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing The GLG drawing provides integrated support for zoom and pan object tooltips mouse over highlight integrated input selection and custom selection events These integrated features greatly simplify application development Refer to the Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing chapter on page 45 for details 45 Chapter 3 3 Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing Integrated
219. be used at run time to zoom and pan the map Refer to the Viewport section of the GLG Objects chapter on page 84 for details A group is a container for other objects It lets you manipulate all members of the group as if they were a single object fx 332 Container GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference To define a group select Object Create Group and drag a rectangle through the objects you want to include in the group Any object touched by the defining rectangle is included in the group The groups created using this method are permanent Refer to the Multiple Selection chapter on page 227 for information about temporary groups The Arrange and Traverse menus provide options to let you work with a group object The Arrange Create Permanent Group option is equivalent to the Object Create Group option You can use the Builder to create groups of graphical objects but groups can contain any objects graphical or not The polygon for example contains a group of point coordinates It is not uncommon to see non graphical objects grouped using the GLG API A container object is a wrapper around a group of objects it encapsulates a collection of objects in a single entity and provides a single control point for positioning it in the drawing A container s Template holds the objects drawn in the container If the container is copied the contained template object is copied as well so that each copy of the container has its own indepe
220. bel The final string is formatted with the supplied string format axis_value Replaced with the value corresponding to the cursor position and formatted with the supplied double format For time axes the value represents a number of seconds since the Epoch i e since 1970 01 01 00 00 00 UTC axis_value_string axis_value_text Replaced with a string showing the axis time or the value corresponding to the cursor position for range axes in the format of the axis s major tick labels The final string is then formatted with the supplied string format The axis_value_string also removes any line breaks to form a single line string axis_time time axes only Replaced with a string showing the time corresponding to the cursor position formatted with the supplied time format axis_time_ms time axes only Replaced with the value showing the number of fractional seconds in the time value that corresponds to the cursor position It is formed by formatting the number of milliseconds with the supplied double format For integrated axis objects of a chart the tooltip is activated by the chart s tooltip settings For a stand alone axis an axis s tooltip is activated by adding a tooltip action to the axis object using the Object Add Tooltip menu option setting the action s Tooltip property to Axis Tooltip and setting the ProcessMouse attribute of the axis s parent viewport to include the Tooltip mask The content of the axis s Tool
221. bute Clone Cyperns idad di 360 EA DI O oda Pees 360 Subdrawing Traversal ccccccccccccscessecsecseceseceseeeseeescenseceseceseseeeeesecaaeeeeseeeeseeessenseseaeeeseseneenses 361 APPEAR A A AA AA ds 361 Modal Dialogs aia aiii a aA EEE EO LEARE E iaaa 361 Display OpenGL Id A a A a oas 361 SAVE LAU E A T E A A E 362 Save HMI Lay ot A cee Gaba a a E NNN 362 Held A A CA E AEA 362 Online Referencer mse en bbs tbawhs e r EREE Airan an e ee ee 362 16 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 17 Chapter 1 1 Introduction to GLG The GLG Toolkit is used to create sophisticated real time animated drawings The design of a GLG drawing allows developers to edit drawings simply and quickly without re programming and allows many simple tasks to be controlled within the drawing itself without programming at all For example GLG allows a developer to create a graphical input widget to accept input from a user and to link that input to some drawing feature without programming a single line of code The ease with which you can create new and elaborate drawings and the speed with which you can adapt existing drawings to new uses make GLG ideal for custom data display projects Also the flexible structure of the product makes it adaptable to many different real time display applications This allows the application programmer to concentrate on the data collection and management aspects of such an application instead of the display Overview GLG
222. bute is set to a negative value it defines the adjustment delta as a fraction of the plot range For example for a value of 0 15 15 of the plot range will be used as an adjustment interval The Linked Y Axis attribute of the plot may be used to link the plot with an axis so that the axis range 1s adjusted synchronously with the plot when the plot is auto scaled Linked Y Axis This button is used in the Graphics Builder to associate the plot with a specific Y axis ina chart with multiple Y axes and CommonRange set to NO When the plot range is changed the range of the associated axis will also change to display the same range and vice versa The text box next to the button shows the label string of the associated Y axis The GlgSetLinkedAxis method of the GLG API may be used at run time to associate a plot with an axis programmatically FilterType Specifies the type of a filter to be used for plots with large number of data points For example when a plot shows 50000 data samples on a display that has only 1000 pixels in width the plot will render 50 points per each pixel in the horizontal direction In this case a filter may be used to combine the values of the data samples that fall within the same pixel into a single data sample or two data samples for the MIN_MAX filter Using a filter increases performance and decreases the CPU load by decreasing the number of plot segments and markers that need to be rendered The following filt
223. button at the top of the dialog provides a shortcut for accessing custom properties attached to the object The selection buttons in the top right corner of the dialog may be used to rotate selection in case when several objects are selected by the mouse The Properties Dialogs When you select an object and then use Object Properties the Builder displays a dialog that shows the properties attributes of the object A text box on the right side of the attribute row shows the value of the attribute For attributes that are also objects the Selected Object Properties dialog presents an ellipsis button that lets you edit the attribute value using a palette or a menu Clicking on the ellipsis button displays the Attribute dialog see below For attributes of S String type that contain multi line strings the text box will be read only and the suffix will be shown at the end of the displayed string An ellipsis button can be used to bring the Attribute dialog with a text edit box for editing the multi line string Ifan attribute has dynamics alarms or tags attached the X A and or T buttons will be displayed on the right side of the attribute row to provide a quick access to the corresponding transformation alarm or tag object For attributes that are not objects in themselves the Builder does not present a separate dialog Such attributes include the Name the HasResources flag and the Global attribute
224. by all transformations attached to the object Alternatively the point position can be entered in any of the defined coordinate systems and the point coordinates in the object coordinates system will be automatically calculated and stored in the control point object Structure of a GLG Drawing 41 Ifan object does not have any transformations attached to it the object coordinate system coincides with the parent coordinate system Drawing Coordinates The drawing coordinate system is defined by the particular view you have of a drawing The main view of a drawing is defined to be the one where the Z axis is pointing directly at the viewer the X axis is level and pointing to the right and the Y axis is pointing up The view coordinates are defined by the matrix transformation that rotates zooms and moves this main view into the view of the drawing that is actually seen The drawing coordinate system includes the combined effect of any viewing transformations attached to the viewport the viewport s integrated zooming and panning transformations and the world to screen mapping transformations of the screen object If the viewport does not have any viewing or zooming and panning transformations its drawing coordinate system coincides with the world coordinate system World Coordinates The world coordinate system includes only the effect of the world to screen mapping transformations of the screen object The viewport s world coordinate
225. cal objects they are each given their meaning and their default names by where they are attached to the parent polygon object The important point is that the default attribute names are recorded in the parent polygon not in the attribute object data The FillColor attribute object on the other hand has both a default attribute name given it by its position relative to the parent polygon and its own name fi l_color recorded in its own data This attribute is a named resource accessible independently from the parent polygon POLYGON ie LineWidth MS fill_color no name no name 0 0 1 2 2 A Polygon and its Attributes 28 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Supplying Data for Animation Since everything in a GLG drawing is an object and any attribute of an object can be accessed as a named resource it becomes quite simple to change any aspect of a drawing by modifying its resources For example you can change the color of a polygon rotate a group move a viewport even change the number of data samples in a graph by changing drawing resources This is in fact the mechanism by which GLG drawings are animated A program animates a GLG drawing by changing named resources with data from an external source Hierarchy of Objects The arrangement of GLG objects in a drawing can be visualized as a hierarchy Specialized container objects like groups and viewports are collections of
226. cally when the user interacts with GLG input objects such as buttons toggles sliders or spinners and are not controlled by the settings of the GLG drawing When a low level event is generated the program s Input callback receives a message containing the event type as well as information about the input object that generated the event and uses this information to perform appropriate actions depending on the input object and the event type that generated the message Refer to the Input Objects chapter on page 191 for more information on the GLG input objects Refer to the GLG Programming Reference Manual for details on the usage of the Input callback and input object events Input Command Actions and Custom Events Input actions are activated by specific input object events such as activation of a push button or changing a value of a slider Unlike actions that are activated by MouseOver and MouseClick events and can be added to any object input actions can be added only to input objects viewports with the Input Handler such as buttons toggles or sliders An input command or custom event action can be defined by attaching an input action with ActionType SEND_COMMAND or SEND_EVENT to an input object in the drawing using the Object Actions Add Input Command or Object Actions Add Input Action menu options of the Enterprise Edition of the GLG Builder The HMI Configurator also allows users to add input command actions An action defines
227. ccssccssssssceesceseeescecseceseceseeeaeeeseesaecaaeceeseeesesecsaeeaenneeneeenaes 265 Using Advanced Obj ts wilh eats hs bestad a a tik Giga ae 265 Associating Objects Together ccccccecccsscesseessecseeseceeeceseecseecseceaeceseeeseseseesaeceseseeeeeeeenseeaaees 266 Generating Objects from a Template ccccccecscessecseceseceseeeseeeseesaecseseecseeecseecsaeneeneenseeaaes 267 Creating Animated Lines and Surfaces cccccecsccssessecesscesseeseeeseesecaeceeeeceecseecaeeneeseenaeeaes 270 Attaching Objects to a Frame tirar aabt ad 270 Connecting Objects with a Path cc ccccescesessseeseceseceseeeeeeeseeseecsaecneceseeeseeeseceaeceeseneenseenaes 271 Defining Extended Set of Rendering and Text Box Attributes 200 ecceeeeeseeteceeeneeeeeeees 271 Scrolling Attributes of Objects with Index based Names ccccccccscessesteesteceeceeeeseeeeneeeaaes 272 Rendering GIS Map Data cccccccccecscessecseceseceseeeseeeseescecaecescseeeseeecseecasessecseeeseeeeeeseeneeeeeaes 273 Adding Custom Properties to Objects ccceccecssesseceteseeceeeceseecseececeeeeseeeseesaeceaeceeeeeeeesaeesaees 273 Defining Logical Names using Aliases ccccccsesseesscessceeeceseeeseecsseeseceseseseeeseeesecneneeeenseeags 274 Drawing a Simple Example ccccccsssssscesscesseessesecssscssesenesessecseceaecssesesesenscatecaeseaceeessatessaeeasees 274 Attribute Anatoni raone ta e cas tganevedaas eas R A A a a Sae 275 Geometrical Transformation Anim
228. cecsaececseeeseeecseeceeneeseenseeenes 195 GG ESTA OR A AAA A AA lt EEE ets 195 GleNSlider ii A A A elsa aiii ot 198 Ol MOD A e Pans A dias d 199 GTS Bute n E EEPE EEE EE AEA EE T E E AE 201 OE BUM dead 203 O A A RR NR 204 Eila KES A NOT 205 Table of Contents 9 Gl Eliana At e a AAA A e E Ed 206 GIENODHON ninrin eniron la 208 GIS MON s mra A A cated a a A A 209 GlgBrowser and GIgFontBrowSet cccccccccessecsseeseceeeeeseeesceeseceseceeeeeseessecsaeceaeneeeseeeeaaeeaeeneenes 211 A E NN 212 GleCl krai TE A EE E Rech 213 Native Wide cai a A a e vas Sheases banda a RE ETE S OA TAREE EaR esa H 214 Input Objects Design and the ValueParam resource ooooocccocnoocononcnonoonnconocan nono non nono nonananancon nos 216 Chapter6 Using the GLG Graphics Builder oooooccconnnnnicncnncnnninnnnanononnn ns 219 Creating a Dra WM EA O a a todas 219 Viewing a GEG Drawing oi iii 219 Viewing the Object Hierarchy cccccecccesseesseesseeseceeceeseessecseecssenseceseceseesaeceseceeeseeeessecaenaeees 220 Starting and Stopping the Builder 0 0 cc cccecceesseesecseceeeeeceeeeescecseecseceseeseeeseeeseeeseeeeesseenes 221 GLG Graphics Builder Features cccccecccessesssessecsseceeceeeeeseeescensecsseceseceseeeseceaeceeeneeeaeesaees 223 Stopping the GLG Graphics Builder 00 cccceeccssesesceeseeseecsceeeceseceseeeseeesecaeceseeeeeesaeenseeaeenes 224 CATE 224 Saving a Drawing AN 224 Drawing ah ODO di A A deca ada dada cence faze gs sha Sands At EEEE aa
229. ceseeeseceseceseeeneeenecsaecsecseeeseeessecseenseenaeeegs 247 Adding and Deleting Resources ccccccccsseessceseceseeeseetecseeeeeeeeceseecsaecsecseeeeeeeseecseeneeeaeennes 248 Usmo Tarso taste Saunolas Uagade dbbgaldstaatdesvacddetbaradente laedelabee 250 Data Tari A EE EEA A TE EE EEEE E veces 250 Adding and Deleting Data Tags ccccccecssesssceseceseeesecsseceseeeeeeeeceseecsaecsecsseeseeecaeeeaecnaeeneeeaes 252 LOSNA eT i na T A E ES AEE EEEE A E 253 Adding and Deleting Alarms oooonnnnincononoconnnonononconnconnonnnonnnonnnonno canon er pase Cinan eeni tiano i esih 255 Amimating a AV A A a Ee aa a e a a 256 Reusing Objects Attributes and Transformations ccccccsccsseeseceseceseeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeensenseenes 256 Revising an Object a 5 cehdsesetdiessadbesaualavsaesnessechess aE A E Aa akao oTa TiTe a A 257 Marking Transformations Rendering Attributes and Other Objects ceeeeceseeseereereeeees 259 Controlling the View ccccccssccsscssseessecseceseceeeseeesseesaecsaececseeeeseecsaeaecaeceseseseeesecsaecseseeeeeeeeaeesaes 263 Changing the View Projection ccccesccesscessesseeeseceseceeeeeeeeseessecsaecsecseeseeecseecseeeeeeseenseenses 264 Customizing the View Projection ccccesccesscesseessecseceeceeeeneeesecsaececseeseeecseecssenseeseenseeeaes 264 Viewing Using Different Coordinate Systems cccceccceesceeseesseesceeeceeceseeeseeesecesecneennenses 264 Changing the Viewing Area ccccecc
230. ch is installed by using the GlgSetAlarmHandler API method described on page 78 of the GLG Programming Reference GLG Objects 175 Manual Each message contains Action and SubAction parameters that indicate the condition that generated the message The message also contains AlarmLabel as well as the alarm object and the attribute object whose value change triggered the alarm There are two types of alarm messages messages that indicate the state of readiness of the alarm object and messages that reflect the alarm state of the monitored value The following alarm messages are generated by all alarm objects to reflect readiness of the alarm object e A message with the Arm action is generated when the drawing containing an alarm is drawn setup e A message with the Enabled action is generated every time the alarm is enabled e A message with the Disabled action is generated every time the alarm is disabled e A message with the Disarm action is generated when the drawing containing the alarm is erased reset When an alarm is armed and enabled it generates alarm messages when changes of the monitored attribute value trigger the alarm condition These messages vary depending on the alarm type and are described in the following sections Range Alarm The Range alarm can be attached to an attribute ofa D type double to monitor its value The alarm message is generated when the value goes below or above the specified High Low range Th
231. ch path segment coincide with control points Defining Extended Set of Rendering and Text Box Attributes The Rendering object is used to define optional rendering attributes such as gradient fill cast shadow arrowheads and fill dynamics For the text object the Box Attributes object may also be used to define attributes of the box drawn around the text To add rendering attributes to an object 1 Select the object to which you want to add rendering attributes 2 Click on the Add Rendering button at the end of the objects properties If the Rendering object has been already added the button name will be Edit Rendering in this case click on it to edit rendering attributes 3 Change rendering attributes to define gradient fill cast shadow arrowheads and fill dynamics parameters 4 To delete rendering attributes click on the Delete Rendering button in the Rendering Properties dialog 272 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference To add text box attributes to a text object 1 Select the text object to which you want to add the box to 2 Click on the Add Box Attributes button at the end of the object s properties If the Box Attributes object has been already added the button name will be Edit Box Attributes in this case click on it to edit the box attributes 3 Change the box attributes to define the text box s appearance 4 To delete box attributes click on the Delete Box Attributes button in the Box Attribut
232. changing its CommandType attribute New custom commands with command specific data may be added by customizing the Builder or HMI Configurator Refer to the Custom Data Sets and Custom Commands section on page 287 for more information ParamS S An optional string parameter ParamD D An optional numerical parameter 188 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference CustomExt The CommandExt command type is the same as Command but with the following additional parameters for storing command data ParamS2 S ParamS3 S Optional string parameters ParamD2 D ParamD3 D Optional numerical parameters Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time When a SEND_EVENT or SEND COMMAND action attached to an object is activated it generates a message which is received by an application s input callback as the message parameter The message contains resources that identify the event that triggered the action Custom Event Message This message with Format CustomEvent is generated by the SEND_EVENT actions The Action and SubAction resources of the message contain information about the input event the EventLabel resource contains the EventLabel parameter of the action object and the ActionObject contains the action that generated the message The ActionData resource of the action object contains action data and may be accessed directly from the message object via as ActionObject ActionData Refer to the C
233. characters as well as conversion specifications The conversion specifications contain a source keyword and a conversion format separated by the character and are surrounded with angle brackets For example lt plot_name s gt Depending on the type of the conversion specification source one of the following matching format types can be used double format some variant of the Yf format string format some variant of the s format time format uses the same notation as the TimeFormat attribute described on page 126 The following conversion specifications are supported plot_annotation Replaced with the selected plot s annotation formatted with the supplied string format plot_name Replaced with the selected plot s name formatted with the supplied string format plot_string Replaced with the annotation of the selected plot or with the plot name if the selected plot has no annotation The final string is formatted with the supplied string format input_x Replaced with the value corresponding to the cursor s horizontal position and formatted with the supplied double format For charts with time axes the value represents a number of seconds since the Epoch i e since 1970 01 01 00 00 00 UTC sample_x Replaced with the time stamp or X value of the selected sample formatted with the supplied double format For time stamps the value represents a number of seconds since the Epoch i e since 1970 01 01 00 00
234. charset for decoding drawings loaded into the beans on the per bean basis The GlgDefaultCharset global configuration resource may also be used to set the default GLG charset different from the default system charset for the whole application In C NET the G gControl component provides the GetEncoding and SetEncoding methods for setting default encoding on per control basis If a string in a drawing has the UTF8Encoding flag set to YES the string is automatically decoded from the UTF 8 encoding to the internal UTF 16 representation regardless of the charset_name parameter of the load method String Encoding in the GLG Drawings All strings stored in S data objects such as the TextString attribute of a text object tooltip or custom property of S type may be stored in either the encoding of the system locale or the UTF 8 encoding depending on the setting of their UTF8Encoding flag All other strings that are not objects such as object names tag names or tag sources are stored in the encoding of the current system locale Multi Byte Character Set Support The GLG font objects defined in the viewport s font table support various character sets both single and multi byte Each font has the MultiByteFlag attribute that determines the type of the font SINGLE BYTE MULTI BYTE or UTF8 On Windows each font also has the FontCharset attribute that defines the version of the font to use If it is set to DEFAULT_CHARSET the version of the f
235. chy path as it is the case with resources Both tags and resources have their own advantages for different types of applications Resources are great for handling applications with a large number of instances of similar objects where it is convenient to show just the names of instances on the top level and display more details when a particular instance is selected Tags are ideal for process control applications were the tag s TagSource attribute provide mapping between resources of the drawing and fields of a process database TagSource defines the name of a database field which serves as a datasource for the tagged attribute When a database field changes an application can update a corresponding tag in the drawing by passing the tag source and new tag value to one of the SetTag functions If multiple attributes share the same tag source updating the tag will update all such attributes The Builder includes a Tag Browser which shows all tags of the selected object or the tags of the whole drawing if no object is selected If no object is selected and the editing focus is in a child viewport the tags of that viewport will be shown in the Tag Browser Using the GLG Graphics Builder 251 A data tag may be added to any attribute or resource object by clicking on the 4dd Tag button in the Attribute dialog The tag s TagName attribute may be given any local name that will help the user to identify the tag when browsing The value of the TagSource
236. circle turns the polygon green In the future changing the Fil Color of either object will affect both of them You can also constrain any attributes that have the same data type string scalar or geometric for example a label and incoming data the radius of a circle to the number of sides it has or a color and a control point 236 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference In the object hierarchy a constraint is a point where two attributes merge The constraint is not a link between the values for an attribute it actually merges the attribute values When two attributes are constrained one attribute value is replaced Constraining Similar Attributes To create a constraint you select the attribute that is to lose its value and then constrain it to the attribute that replaces it If the attribute is already constrained the existing constraint is replaced by the new one unless you merge the constraints see below To constrain an attribute to the same attribute in another object 1 Select the object that has the attribute you want to constrain 2 Use Object Properties or click on the Properties button to show the Selected Object Properties dialog This dialog shows a list of attributes with a 4 for attributes that can be edited in a dialog 3 Click on the yy to see the Attribute dialog 4 Click on the Constrain One button in the Attribute dialog To keep existing constraints use the Constrain All button instead Const
237. clipped GradientCenter This G type attribute defines the center of the gradient fill in relative coordinates so that the 0 1 range of each of its coordinates corresponds to the object s boundaries in the specified direction with the direction of each coordinate coinciding with the corresponding axis The Z coordinate of the center is ignored For example a value of 0 5 0 5 0 5 centers the gradient inside the object A value of 0 0 0 positions the gradient s center in the lower left corner of the object Values outside of the 0 1 range will position the center of the gradient outside of the object and result in the gradient being partially clipped The attribute is ignored for the LINE WIDTH gradient GradientResolution The number of segments used to render the gradient fill Increasing this number will increase the rendering quality for the price of slower performance For environments with OpenGL support as well as the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit gradient types other than conical are rendered natively and gradient resolution is ignored The attribute is also ignored for the LINE WIDTH gradient 142 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference On systems with a limited number of colors the rendering quality is also limited by the number of colors available in the color table and increasing the gradient resolution above a certain value will not further improve the rendering quality ShadowOffset The cast shadow offse
238. color RGB values between the default 0 1 range and the 0 255 range familiar to the Windows users The color display range changes only the color RGB display in the Builder The run time color RGB values and the values saved in the drawing still use the default 0 1 range Dynamics Options Full Display of Predefined Dynamics Full Display of Predefined Dynamics controls the way predefined dynamics are displayed If the option is not checked default the Edit Dynamics dialog displays public properties of predefined dynamics for convenient editing If the option is checked the dialog displays all attributes of the dynamics for advanced editing 360 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Show Predefined Dynamics First Show Predefined Dynamics First controls the choices of dynamics presented in the attribute dynamics menu If the option is checked default the predefined dynamics options are shown first to provide intuitive attribute dynamics and stock dynamics are shown when the More button is pressed If the option is unchecked the stock dynamics options are shown first Data Browser Options Browse Tag Names Browse Tag Sources Control the usage of the Data Browser If Browse Tag Sources is selected the tag string selected in the Data Browser is assigned to the TagSource attribute of the tag being edited otherwise it is assigned to the tag s TagName attribute Attribute Clone Type Attribute Clone Type defines the clone
239. consists of several separate components e The GLG Graphics Builder used to create and edit GLG drawings e A set of GLG containers GLG Bean GLG Wrapper Widget GLG ActiveX Control etc for embedding GLG drawings into different programming environments e The set of functions also called the Application Program Interface or API used to incorpo rate a GLG drawing into a user s application and update the drawing with real time data The extended set of functions referred to as an Extended API used to create GLG objects programmatically or perform complex manipulations on GLG objects A library of ready to use GLG Widgets including graphs meters dials avionics gauges pro cess control symbols and other widgets that can be used alone or incorporated into other draw ings e Programming tools and utilities including a data generator for prototyping animated draw ings a file format converter and a tool for creating memory images of finished GLG draw ings Central to each of these components is the GLG drawing Broadly speaking the GLG Graphics Builder is for creating and modifying these drawings and the API is for including and controlling the drawings from a user s program There is also an extended API for creating and modifying a drawing from within a program The widget set is a library of GLG drawings and the tools are aids for creating and editing these drawings Rather than relying on the sophistication
240. containing a list of the button labels S data objects to be displayed If no such resource exists the button s name or LabelString resource is used To redraw button labels after changing strings in the list reset the menu TooltipList An optional group object containing a list of the tooltip strings S data objects used to initialize the buttons on hierarchy setup InitStateList An optional group object containing a list of initial state values D data objects used to set the initial state of toggle buttons of a multiple selection menu InitSelectedIndex This optional resource D type provides a zero based index of a toggle button to be selected on the initial appearance of a radio menu Messages Input Objects 211 ScrollObject If the list is too long for the menu window a scroll object may be included This is a vertical slider widget SelectedIndex SelectedString Selected Value These resources may be present in the menu viewport They contain the index label string and token value of the last button pressed They are more often used as resources of the message object returned when a menu button is pressed However the SelectedIndex resource may be used for selecting an item of a radio menu at run time by setting the resource to a zero based button index The G gMenu interaction handler supports the following message that can be sent using the GlgSendMessage method GetItemCount Returns the number of button
241. coordinate GLG Objects 143 defines the width of the arrow s one side in the direction perpendicular to the line The X and Y values of ArrowShape specify width and length of the arrow relative to the line width of the polygon The actual width and length of the arrow increase proportionally when the line width increases Negative values for both X and Y parameters may be used to define the absolute length and width of the arrow so that the arrow s dimensions remain constant when the line width changes If null value is specified 0 0 0 the value of the GlgArrowShape global configuration resource is used see Appendices on page 341 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual Delete Rendering This button is present only in the Builder it deletes the rendering object A rendering object may be reused by marking it with the Mark button at the top of the Properties dialog Use the Edit Add or Use Marked Object Rendering Attributes menu option to add the marked rendering attributes to another object When a rendering object is added to all objects in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added rendering objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used When a marked rendering object is reused constraining of corresponding attributes of the new copy and the original rendering object is also con
242. creen object which is always attached to the viewport and controls its window specific display attributes Use the Screen Attributes button to display screen s properties Screen attributes are inherited by the screen s viewport and may be accessed as resources of the viewport itself in an application GLG Objects 93 Screen The screen object is a mandatory child object of a viewport It is designed to contain window specific attributes of a viewport and is created automatically every time a viewport is created It has the following attributes Double Buffering Controls the usage of the double buffering for a screen This may be set to NO or YES When set to YES screen updates are done incrementally off screen and all changed portions of the entire screen are updated at once This usually creates a smoother illusion of motion than updating objects directly on the screen Double buffering is turned on by default It can be useful to turn it off to see updates as they go in complicated drawings such as a surface graph If you have a lot of viewports double buffering may turn to be an expensive resource as it causes the window manager to allocate memory for the off screen pixmaps Turn it off if you want to decrease the amount of memory consumed Warning Double buffering is known to cause problems when zooming with high zoom factors in a viewport that has other viewports in it Zooming in the parent viewport increases the size of the child
243. ct using 268 reference object 267 268 309 322 Reference Resizing 358 REFERENCE REF 105 ReferenceType 105 Rendering Attributes 271 reuse 143 rendering attributes marking and replicating 259 Rendering object 70 72 77 78 91 140 RenderingColor 146 RepeatInterval 196 200 202 RepeatTimeout 196 200 202 Replace Viewport with SubWindow 321 Reset 213 Reset action 175 Reset message 203 213 ResetAllItemsState message 208 Resizable 93 Resizable attribute 41 resize box 358 Resolution 74 75 resource 245 to 250 adding to hierarchy 248 deleting from hierarchy 250 distinction from attribute 27 hierarchy 220 244 341 to 342 name conflicts 29 373 named attribute 26 named object 26 naming guidelines 247 positioning in hierarchy 249 resource hierarchy 28 32 defining 249 resources user defined 248 resource transparent 29 RGB format 280 Right 197 Right message 198 RIGHT text alignment 76 Role of an attribute 136 RollBack 139 Rotate Flag 154 ROTATE NO ORIGIN path rotate type 155 ROTATE path rotate type 155 rotate transformation 153 RotateAngle 200 Rotation Axis 153 rounded object 73 rounded rectangle 73 RoundedPlacement 129 RowAnchor 133 RowFactor 102 111 Ruler 123 RulerScale 126 RulerStart 126 S saving drawing 298 357 object 257 299 SAWTOOTH timer update type 160 scalar 134 scalar data type 26 scalar formatting transformation 164 scalar transformati
244. ct DyN aMSN AA A a E E A EEE TEE E 343 LLO PAM is 346 Add Static Transformation oconoonncnncnicnnocnoncnncncnnnnnn cnn cnno nono conca nn concen 346 TOO Mi AA 347 ON NN 348 Add Tooltip io AA AAA EA A AR E E 349 Add MouseClick Event Binion 349 Add MouseOver Event 3 durara a 349 Edit Delete Tooltip Or Event G A A N ae 349 Custom Propertie Sun okan ana aae a a a aa a Eaa aha ani aane a raaa Eas 349 Add Custom Property iii a a Aaa ca 349 Edit Custom Properties ennnen akoi anaE E E E T EEAO EEE RE TARE eA 350 Delete All Custom Properties nnna n a a A a a a A 351 Mark Custom Properties cti iii da EE E aE E 351 Add Marked Properties otto Ea ade de ci dada 351 AMAS A daban 351 PUG ATIAS seins o TN 351 EA MAS aida sii 352 Delete All AM e aaa teen 352 Mark Ali AAA A nee e EET E 352 Add Marked AMAS 2 A a da Aid 353 Table of Contents 15 HSM sti A td E A DE Ada VR E 353 Add HIStO ironia abri 353 EAS as 354 Delete All Histotias 354 O SLL Least Le aot heeita ta 8 354 O NN 354 O a RT 355 Restore Values OM MOP A iaa AGA 355 Store RUN Command insti atada 355 OPM a A eae cp A A A ete EE A EE 356 AS A A RN elie eater ee tae 356 o aTe 1 o RO AEE A E E T 356 STOW ARIS A E A i 356 NC KS T ELE EEEE EE E 357 Show Default Span reniei n ei e E e EE EE E E EE E A 357 Save POr E E A E E TT 357 Save Compressed sereine A Ee ET e E E 357 Selection OPS a 357 Color OpttOms ss ui di iii 359 DyN aMIES OPtiOns 34d Ad Ra e SA 359 IN O NN 360 Attri
245. ct and use either Object Tags or the Tags toolbar button to bring the Zag Browser dialog see page 342 To see tags of the whole drawing unselect the object by pressing the Esc key Selecting another object while the Tag Browser is up will show its tags in the Tag Browser Refer to the Tag Based Data Access and Database Connectivity chapter on page 60 for details of different ways of using tags for accessing data Adding and Deleting Data Tags Adding a Tag To add a tag to an object s attribute 1 Select an object 2 Use Object Properties or use the Properties button to see the attributes of the object 3 Select an object s attributes by clicking on the attribute s ellipsis button Lj 4 Click on the Add Tag button 5 Enter values for the tag s attributes in the Data Tag dialog To add a tag to a resource 1 Use Object Resources or click on the Resources button RJ to see the resource hierarchy 2 Locate the attribute resource you want to tag and click on it to select it 3 Click on the Add Tag button 4 Enter values for the tag s attributes in the Data Tag dialog Using the GLG Graphics Builder 253 Editing a Tag To edit a tag attached to an attribute bring the Attribute dialog for the attribute and click on the Edit Tag button to activate the Data Tag dialog Alternatively click on the T button on the right side of the attribute row in the Properties dialog Tag Name TankLevel Data Typ
246. cted nodes the objects single control point may be used to constrain connecting lines that represent edges The polyline object is a special type of series that produces an open polygon with specified number of points or a specified number of line segments It is often used for animated line graphs like the ones in the GLG widget set A polyline has a variable number of control points defining its location It also has the following attributes Factor Defines number of polyline control points to be created DrawMarkers Controls the presence of polyline s markers Markers are created if the attribute is set to YES DrawLines Controls the presence of the lines between a polyline s points These lines are drawn between each marker if the attribute is set to YES Segments Enables the segments mode If the value set to YES separate polygon objects are used to render each segment of a polyline allowing to use different colors and line attributes for each segment In this case the Polygon attribute is used as a template for producing the segment instances If the value is set to NO one polygon is used providing faster and more efficient rendering Marker A template marker object Copies of this marker appear on each control point if the DrawMarkers attribute is turned on To access the marker template traverse the hierarchy of the polyline the Hierarchy Down button H When finished use Traverse Up to return back to the top level
247. ctory where the ibOSMesa library is located If the GLG_DIR environment variable is set the libraries will also be searched in the GLG_DIR ib directory On Windows OpenGL uses Opengl32 dll and Glu32 dll libraries These libraries are always present but they support the hardware accelerated renderer only if drivers for a graphics card with the OpenGL support are installed Otherwise only the software renderer is enabled If hardware acceleration is enabled by the graphics card the OpenGL libraries on Windows support both hardware and software based rendering with no additional libraries required On both Unix Linux and Windows platforms all OpenGL libraries are dynamically loaded at run time if they are available so that the executable may be used even if the libraries are absent 22 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference OpenGL on Linux Laptops with NVidia Optimus Bumblebee On Linux laptops with switchable graphics cards the optirun command is used to run an application on the NVIDIA graphics card The optirun utility preloads l bGL but not ibGLU required by GLG To run the Graphics Builder or a GLG application via optirun libGLU has to be explicitly preloaded using the LD_PRELOAD environment variable For example export LD PRELOAD usr lib libGLU so 1 optirun usr local glg bin GlgBuilder The Application Program Interface Once a drawing is created the GLG Toolkit offers a variety of ways to use that drawing in a program
248. d maintaining a constant ratio between the size of the rounded corners and the length of the object s side in the corresponding direction 74 Arc GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Resolution The number of line segments used to render rounded corners The default value for this is 7 for rounded rectangles 25 for ellipses A larger value may be used for nicer rendering of rectangles with large corner radiuses If Radius and Radius2 are set to 1 in relative units the object will render an ellipse If UnitType is set to relative and Raduis2 is set to 1 the rounded corners will take the whole height of the object and an equal amount of space in the horizontal direction This results in the object being drawn as a rectangle with a round left and right side except when the object is too small in the horizontal direction The Arc object is used to represent both arcs and circles One part of an arc is a section of a circle s perimeter A chord arc simply joins the two ends of the curve with a straight line while a sector arc is shaped like a piece of a pie with two straight lines joined at the center of the circle describing the extent of the third curved side A circle is simply the special case of an arc whose interior angle is 360 An arc has two control points a center and a vector point A vector from the center point to the vector point defines a line perpendicular to the arc plane As you move either of the two ends
249. d In general it simplifies the object s representation by removing one level of the object hierarchy e For a series Explode deletes the series object and replaces it with a group with same name as the exploded series object the group will contain members of the series For a reference Explode deletes the reference object and replaces it with an instance of the template object For file references subdrawings the loaded instance of a drawing is used e For a group Explode deletes the group object The objects that were previously members of the group become independent objects For a connector object Explode replaces the connector with the object used to render connec tor s graphics a polygon for recta linear connectors or an arc for arc connectors e For a circle a parallelogram a rectangle a rounded rectangle or a spline Explode replaces the exploded object with a polygon that has a control point at each vertex For example exploding a circle creates a many sided polygon and exploding a rectangle creates a four sided uncon strained polygon When an object other than a group is exploded any actions and custom properties attached to the object are transferred to the object used as a replacement Object explodes the selected object If the selected object is a group or series this option only affects the top level of the association Use Arrange Explode Sub Objects to explode the sub objects If the selected
250. d The Light object has attributes that allow you to position and aim the light The other form of lighting used in a GLG drawing is ambient light Unlike illumination ambient light is cast evenly on all objects no matter which direction they face A Light object s attributes let you determine the proportion of light cast by illumination and ambience The lighting facility provided with GLG is a limited one it is useful for dynamic visualization of three dimensional objects but is not really appropriate for photo realistic rendering a scene For example a user may position the light but the objects do not cast shadows on other objects Structure of a GLG Drawing 43 A polygon s Shading attribute provides additional control over shading of individual polygons in the viewport Input Handlers GLG provides a variety of input handlers used to build input objects such as buttons toggles sliders knobs etc An input handler is an object that processes input events and converts them into the corresponding resource changes depending on the type of the input handler For example a slider input handler GlgSlider converts the mouse move and mouse click events into value changes of the resource that controls the slider knob s position An input handler is attached to a viewport by entering the handler s name into the viewport s Handler attribute the viewport s DisableInput attribute must be set to NO to enable the handler Each handl
251. d SPACED text objects If more than one text object is used fitting may yield different font sizes due to different area sizes or different string lengths of each text object As a result they will be rendered using different font sizes The actual value of this attribute is irrelevant because it is determined dynamically However if the attribute is constrained all text objects with constrained SizeConstraint attributes will vary together using the same font size regardless of the string length and other conditions The MinFontSize for all constrained text objects has to be set to the same value as well If several text objects have constrained SizeConstraint attributes they all will be displayed using the smallest needed font size in the group To avoid constraint loops the font size will stay small until the drawing is resized even if the original reason for using the small font size has been eliminated Text Box A slot for attaching an optional Box Attributes object to control attributes of an optional box drawn around a text object A filled box may be used to provide a background for drawing a text object The box attributes object is accessible by using the Add Edit Text Box buttons in the Object Properties dialog To delete box attributes use the Delete Text Box button in the Box Attributes properties The attribute assumes the value of NULL ifno box attributes object is attached in which case no box is drawn See the BoxAttribu
252. d a palette into the Builder A palette is defined by a Palette Description File with the pal extension This file provides information about the palette and the objects it contains Refer to the Palette Description File Format section and the Adding Custom Palettes to the Builder section for more information To load a palette select Read Palette then select the palette s pal file using the activated file browser Read Directory The Read Directory option can be used to scan a directory containing GLG drawings and display a palette containing all drawings in the directory To read a directory select Read Directory then select a directory to read with the activated file browser Adding Custom Widgets and Custom Palettes Naming Conventions for Palette Drawings 3Icon Each drawing file defines one palette item A drawing may contain special graphics to be used as a palette icon as well as the graphical object to be used in the Builder The following describes the naming conventions used to annotate the icon and the graphical object to be used By default the complete content of the each drawing is added to the palette which may take a considerable amount of memory and CPU time to load and render To make the process faster each drawing can contain a con resource optimized in size and appearance for being displayed as a small palette item If this resource exists in the drawing it will be displayed as a palette icon The icon w
253. d if the default Constrained Clone 144 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference setting is used When a marked Box Attributes object is reused constraining of corresponding attributes of the new copy and the original object is also controlled by the Builder s Attribute Clone Type option Line Attributes The Line Attributes object is used to keep attributes of lines and polygons used to render internal components of a chart or an axis The Line Attributes object inherits most polygon attributes like EdgeColor LineWidth and LineType It may also contain FillType and FillColor attributes for filled polygons and has the following additional attribute Opacity Opacity in the range from 0 to 1 If set to 0 the line will be completely transparent A Line Attributes object may be reused by marking it with the Mark button at the top of the Properties dialog Use options from the Edit Add or Use Marked Object menu to add the marked line attributes to another object The Edit Add or Use Marked Object menu has several entries depending on the way the marked line attributes are used in the drawing Axis Tick Chart Grid Chart Cross Hair Chart Background and Plot Level Line When a Line Attributes object is added to all objects in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added Line Attributes objects the attributes are constrained if the de
254. d in the drawing and edit their database data sources by changing the tags TagSource attributes The 7agAccess Type and TagEnabled attributes provide additional control over the use of a tag in an application Refer to the Zag section on page 137 for more information The Tag Export and Tag Import features described in the next section may also be used for editing or remapping all tags in the drawing either at design time in the Builder or at run time in an application At run time a process control application may load the drawing query the list of tags defined in the drawing with the GlgCreateTagList method and subscribe for updates for the process database fields defined by the tags TagSource attributes When data changes the application may set the new data values by invoking the G gSetTag method passing the TagSource and the new data value for each tag as shown in the source code of Tags Example which is provided for both C C Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit Tag Export and Import Features for Run Time Tag Mapping All tags defined in the drawing may be exported into an ASCII tag file for editing them via a batch script or a text editor The modified tag file may then be imported back into the drawing importing the modified ZagName and TagSource attributes The tag export and import features provide a way to modify the tags defined in the drawing to map them to the database fields of a specific process database It may b
255. d of geometric transformation is the static transformation This transformation type contains the actual matrix used to transform the parent object and is therefore sometimes called a matrix transformation Before the parent object is rendered its defining points are transformed using this matrix The disadvantage to the simplicity of this transformation object is its lack of flexibility Once you create a static transformation object editing it is cumbersome although it may be easily combined with other static transformations or deleted Ifa static transformation attached to some object defines a move of 50 units in the X direction changing the transformation to move the parent object 75 units involves either combining 1t with a new static move transformation of 25 units or discarding the 50 unit move object and creating an entirely new 75 unit move In the Builder when a static transformation is attached to an object which already has a static transformation both transformations are merged and the object s single static transformation is modified to contain the resulting combined matrix Naturally while useful for creating and editing graphical objects in drawings this sort of transformation is not very useful for animation Transforming Object Points Instead of attaching a transformation to an object as a child the transformation may be used to physically change the coordinates of object s control points In this case no transfor
256. d to draw the objects inside the viewport When the viewport is selected the Add Edit and Delete Dynamics buttons of the Properties dialog modify an outside transformation If the editing focus is inside the viewport with no objects selected the buttons modify the inside transformations which may be used to zoom pan or rotate all objects in a viewport without creating a group to hold them After either the inside or outside transformation is added it may be edited with the Edit Dynamics button When a list of inner transformations of the viewport is displayed it also shows the viewport s zoom transformation This is a matrix transformation which is automatically created and used when changing the view in the Builder It is always at the bottom of the list and cannot be deleted The viewport s screen object also has a special drawing transformation used to adjust the rendering of the viewport when the viewport s size changes Clicking on the More button in the Viewport Properties dialog and then on the Edit Dynamic button in the Screen Properties dialog provides access to the parameters of this transformation The X and Y scaling factors of the transformation may be used to create fixed screen offsets as described in the the Screen section of the Simple Graphical Objects chapter Using Resources A resource is an object or attribute that is accessible by name The Builder includes a browser which shows the structure of the named resources in
257. d to run the GLG Builder with a custom data browser The script can be edited to define the version of the GLG editor to run 292 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The sample source code is self documented and demonstrates how to add a custom OEM menus and toolbar icons to a GLG editor The code provides examples of implementing both push buttons and toggle buttons as well as cascading sub menus It also shows how to change sensitivity of the menu options depending on an object selection and the GLG editor s mode Edit or Run One of the OEM menu options demonstrates how to implement a custom OEM dialog that performs a custom OEM action in the editor s Edit mode The example also includes code samples showing how to customize the GLG editor by removing unwanted icons and menu options To check the proto DLL s functionality run the run_proto_example script to start the Builder and notice the OEM Sample Menu appearing after the Edit menu It will also appears in the popup menu A custom OEM icon a red square with the OEM label will appear near the right side of the editor s toolbar The OEM icon and menu entries become active when an object is selected Create an object select it and try the OEM menu options The Add Edit Custom Value menu option and the OEM toolbar icon activate an OEM dialog that adds an OEM property to the selected object and allows the user to edit its value The property is visible in the Resource Browser as OE
258. dValue Defines the grid spacing in world coordinates A viewport s corners are mapped to 1000 1000 and 1000 1000 in this coordinate system If it is zero the grid is not drawn SpanX SpanY Define the mapping of the world coordinate system to the visible area of the viewport The default value of the SpanX and SpanY attributes is 1000 which causes the corners of the visible area of the viewport to correspond to the coordinates 1000 1000 and 1000 1000 in the absence of zooming and panning and with Stretch set to YES The SpanX and SpanY attributes may used to change the mapping FonttableFile Specifies a GLG drawing file containing a custom font table to use A custom font table file can be shared between different viewports in multiple applications The drawing specified with FonttableFile may contain a font table saved using the Save Fonttable button in the font table object Properties For the convenience of editing in the Builder the drawing may also contain a Widget viewport in which case the viewport s font table will be used Ifa relative filename is used it is interpreted relatively to the load path of the drawing first and then relatively to the current directory For C C and ActiveX deployment options the GLG_PATH is also searched before the current directory 96 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The attribute may be set at run time to customize fonts used in the drawing It needs to be set o
259. datagen command line to animate the fill color of the instances would send data to the EntryPoint object defined at the same level as the Triangle object Widget S EntryPoint To animate the resource provide input data to the EntryPoint resource Each member of the numeric series is updated in turn Using the GLG Graphics Builder 273 To access a list of history objects attached to the selected object use Object Edit History menu option or click on the Hist button in the Status Panel To delete a history object select the parent object and use Object Delete History The Builder deletes the first history object in the list You can also use the Delete button at the bottom of the History List to delete the highlighted history object from any position If you explode a series polyline or polysurface object that has a history object the group that remains after exploding it retains the history object Exploding that group discards the history object Rendering GIS Map Data The GIS Object provides a way to utilize functionality of the GLG Map Server in a GLG drawing embedding GIS map displays into GLG drawings in both the Builder and an application The GIS Object transparently handles all aspects of low level map server interaction to display zoom and pan the map To create a GIS Object select a GIS Object button in the Object Palette then click in the drawing area to define two points that specify the rectangular area to be used for
260. de Group cecccecsccsseesscessceseeeseecseceseceseseeeeeneessenseceseeeseeeseeeseceaeseeseeeeeaeenses 306 Select lidad ie ee 306 CUM A AA Mn A a S 306 COPY A o a e o ol 306 A TN 307 Deli Ri id 307 Define Clone Oti A ates 307 Define Clone Transformation ano eae 307 Pull Clones 2esees ates tia 308 Ma ici pateisi e aa capa e Cao A ae ees 308 STOMP COM eana a a a edbieadede ccdedbagneed ibiabesapenacdgccsadde aa aner aaan aias 308 Constrained Cl n ees ornen ie oen ee E e Geel dan 309 Reset Scaling A O a a i naaier 309 Add or Use Marked Object inris a a a a ea a ia 309 O RIO 310 AN A A A AAN a ai 310 AUS VIC We A A A A A AA AAA E CR ca teak cet ices 311 Load View Transformation AAA A O CRA 311 Save View Tr nsformatio tirando e E EE aa ac ea i ea ETa 312 Coordinate Systems aa ee a aA a a a aiaa raaraa Na 312 ZOOMIN See AAA a A ARA AAA A Ati 312 Table of Contents 13 Scroll DY DTC ii id A AE E EA RRE 313 Traverse A A A TON 313 Hierarchy DW iio iL el aun eet su 314 Transformation DOWN ccecceessssssseceseeseeseeseceeceeceaesaeeseeseceaceaecaesesneeaecaecaceaeeeneeseeaecaeeaeenees 314 cece nee eae See RN 314 Set FOCUS AA a 314 Maim FOCUS da A TTE E iio 315 Select Ned cia 315 Select BOM A AA sa 315 Edit AWCRirS Y eine atada 316 PAA SEE aN a EA RA Sie aS ES ee e Ed 316 RR An O 317 Create Permanent Caro cdi edson cs moda enmaai a OAT Ea 317 Create Temporary Group cccccccceeccceseceeseceeeseceseeceseeceececaeeeeaeeees
261. de button on the left of the panel defines if the layout operation such as Set Width or Set Height will be applied to the group itself or to the objects the group contains The text entry box is provided for entering the required parameter which is initialized to the corresponding parameter of the selected object or the anchor object if it is defined The World and Screen buttons above the text box control whether the value of the layout parameter such as width height or space is interpreted as screen pixels or world coordinates The Increase and Decrease Value buttons with arrows provide a convenient way to increase or decrease a desired parameter in steps and with the provided increment To apply a new parameter value entered in the text edit box press either Enter key or Apply button Some operations from the bottom panel may not be applicable to certain object types For example trying to set width or height of a text object with one control point would generate a corresponding warning message The Layout pull down menu also provides options for accessing align and layout operations via the menu Edit Undo may be used to reverse erroneous layout or alignment actions Creating Constraints A constraint causes one attribute to change along with another attribute You can constrain the same attribute for two different objects For example constraining the FillColor attribute of a yellow polygon to the Fil Color attribute of a green
262. ders can be horizontal or vertical A scroll bar is a form of slider Adjusting the granularity can turn a slider into a multi position switch All the slider resources are optional However at least one of the ValueX or ValueY resources must be present ValueX The slider s X value This is a value between 0 and 1 When the cursor is at the left edge of the viewport ValueX is 0 When it is at the right edge it equals 1 ValueY The slider s Y value This is a value between 0 and 1 When the cursor is at the bottom edge of the viewport ValueY is 0 When it is at the top edge it equals 1 196 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference ActiveArea The screen cursor must be within this polygon for the slider to react to user input Start This resource identifies a marker object that is placed at the lower limit ofthe X and Y values For example in a horizontal slider the start marker is at the left edge of the range while in a two dimensional slider it is placed at the lower left corner XEnd This resource identifies a marker object that is placed at the upper limit of the slider X value YEnd This resource identifies a marker object that is placed at the upper limit of the slider Y value Granularity A control s granularity is the number of possible positions that control can take This resource is an integer indicating that value As an example a granularity of 2 for a vertical slider creates a 2 position linear
263. dge functionality or connecting objects in a diagram There are two types of connectors 336 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference A Recta Linear connector connects objects with linear segments maintaining right angles between adjacent segments There are Horizontal 9 and Vertical o recta linear connec tors e An arc connector connects objects with an arc Va A To create a connector select the connector type then click in the drawing to define its shape For the arc connector select 3 points to define the arc For the recta linear connector select any number of points to define one or more recta linear segments and press the Esc key or the middle mouse button to finish Series A series object is a set of dynamically created copies of a template object Typically you use a series object to create a set of entities with identical or at least very similar characteristics such as the bars in a chart A series object consists of a template a factor indicating the number of copies a path along which to arrange them and a set of generated instances A To create a series 1 Select an object to use as a template 2 Select Object Properties to set the attributes ofthe template object so that its instances will inherit appropriate characteristics Name the object 3 Select Object Create then select Line Series or Path Series to create the instance objects 4 Click on two points to define a line path for a Line Seri
264. dget s active element When a range transformation is attached an interaction handler needs to know the object IDs of both the Factor and Input Value parameters in order to properly animate the widget To accomplish that the Factor attribute is named by adding the Param suffix to the name of the corresponding controlling variable ValueParam ValueXParam or Value YParam To allow the input object s output resources to be constrained to other resources in the drawing without the loss of the input widget functionality the Value ValueY or ValueY resources are defined as aliases using default attribute names relative to the corresponding resource with the Param suffix For example in a horizontal slider the ValueX resource is defined as an alias to Value YParam Xform XformAttr6 which is relative to the Value YParam resource Since the default attribute names are not affected when the Value Y resource is constrained to a resource in the drawing with a different name such constraining operation will not interfere with the functioning of the input handler Previously the resources in the drawing could be constrained to the input objects s output resources but not visa versa Input Objects 217 To avoid resource name conflicts when Value ValueX and Value Y resources are present in the drawing as both named resources and aliases set HasResources of the active element or of the range transformation to make sure these resources are
265. disparate objects while any GLG object can be said to contain its attribute objects Because a GLG object may contain other objects the attributes of those secondary objects may be considered subsidiary attributes of the first object This arrangement defines a drawing s object hierarchy For example consider a group object that contains two polygons GRP A sample drawing of two simple polygons Call the parent object GRP and call the polygons PY and PY2 Each polygon has an attribute called FillColor that indicates the color of the interior of that polygon This is part of the definition of the polygon object You might also think of the GRP group as containing two attributes namely PY and PY2 These objects in turn contain other attributes like Fi Color In this case the default name of the Fil Color attribute of the PY polygon would be PY FillColor From a point outside the GRP group itself the fill color of the PY polygon would be called GRP PY1 FillColor In other words there is a hierarchy of objects in a GLG drawing precisely comparable to the hierarchy of directory and file names used to denote the location of a file on a disk Hierarchy of Resources The object hierarchy is a fixed representation of the parent child relationships between objects in a GLG drawing The Fil Color attribute attached to PY2 is always attached to PY2 In addition to the object hierarchy however a GLG drawing contains a
266. displayed page To use a relative path when processing the command in the input callback the application needs to know the viewport object of the current page If each page has OwnsInputCB flag set to YES the viewport parameter of the input callback will be set to the page s viewport object when the command is triggered This avoids a need to attach an input callback to each page s viewport as demonstrated in SCADA Viewer demo When the value of the OwnsInputCB is set programmatically it follows the rules for attaching the input callback and must be set before hierarchy setup Light A slot for attaching an optional Light object to control the viewport s lighting and 3D shading The Add Edit Light button may be used to add a light object to the viewport or edit its attributes if it already exists To delete the Light object use the Delete Light button in the Light Object properties See the Light Object section on page 149 for details When a Light object is added to all viewports in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added Light objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used Rendering A slot for attaching an optional Rendering object to control an expanded set of rendering attributes for the gradient fill Other rendering attributes such as cast shadows fill level and arrow heads
267. drag the mouse to finish It is especially useful in the Chart Zoom Mode start ZoomToXY mode left click and drag the mouse to finish T start custom ZoomTo mode A custom zoom mode lets the user define the ZoomTo area without performing the zoom operation An application can use the selected ZoomTo rectangle as the input to implement custom zooming or object selection logic e abort ZoomTo mode Control click drag Drag the drawing or map with the mouse same as s see details below s start generic dragging mode left click and drag the drawing with the mouse to finish In the Chart Zoom Mode if the user clicks and drags the mouse within the X or Y axis area scrolling will be performed in the direction matching the direction of the selected axis start vertical dragging mode left click and drag the drawing with the mouse to finish It is especially useful in the Chart Zoom Mode gt start horizontal dragging mode left click and drag the drawing with the mouse to finish It is especially useful in the Chart Zoom Mode amp start XY dragging mode left click and drag the drawing with the mouse to finish J fit the drawing to the visible area of the viewport Drawing Zoom Mode only F fit the area of the drawing defined by an object named G gFitArea to the visible area of the viewport Drawing Zoom Mode only U anchor on the upper edge of the drawing Drawing Zoom Mode only D anchor on the lower ed
268. drawing into a file by taking an OpenGL snapshot of an image displayed in a viewport This technique improves the rendering quality of the generated image by getting around the Windows OpenGL driver which uses a software renderer with poor anti aliasing for off screen rendering This option may be used only for viewports with the OpenGL rendering and it does not work with children viewports Export Strings Export Strings exports all strings defined in the drawing into a file Refer to the Localization Support chapter on page 58 for information about the string translation file format Import Strings Import Strings imports strings from a strings file replacing matching strings in the drawing Refer to the Localization Support chapter on page 58 for information about the string translation file format Export Tags Export Tags exports all tag names defined in the drawing into a file Refer to the Tag Export and Import Features for Run Time Tag Mapping chapter on page 61 for information about the tag file format Import Tags Import Tags imports tag names from a tag translation file replacing matching tag names in the drawing Refer to the Zag Export and Import Features for Run Time Tag Mapping chapter on page 61 for information about the tag file format Exit Exit closes the GLG Graphics Builder Ifa drawing is already open the Builder asks if you want to discard the current drawing but it does not prompt you to save the chan
269. e disarmed if the Control key is not pressed The attribute may have one the following values NONE An action may be activated regardless of the state of the Control key ARMED An action may be activated only if the Control key is held down ARMED amp UNARMED Modifies the behavior of the TRACE STATE action to set its State attribute to different values depending on the state of the Control key For other action types this setting is the same as NONE MouseButton mouse click actions only Specifies the index of the mouse button 0 1 or 2 that will trigger the action for actions with the MOUSE CLICK trigger Enabled Enables or disables the action when is set to 1 or 0 EventLabel SEND EVENT and SEND COMMAND actions only Defines an event label string that will be available in the input callback as the EventLabel resource of the message object The event label may be used to differentiate between different custom events or action commands in the input callback State SET STATE RESET STATE and TOGGLE STATE actions only The output parameter whose value will be set to reflect the mouse events based on the action type Refer to the description of the ActionType attribute on page 179 for information on possible values of the State attribute for different action types The State is an attribute of D double type and may be constrained to some D attribute of another object in the drawing to provide a visual feedback For exampl
270. e Try it again with Sdatagen sin d 0 90 Widget valvel handle rotate angle sin d 0 90 Widget valve2 handle rotate angle Create an ordinary text file called valve containing sin d 0 90 Widget valvel handle rotate angle sin d 0 90 Widget valve2 handle rotate angle Now animate the valve with the command Sdatagen argf valve To use this drawing in a program you would use valvel handle rotate_angle and valve2 handle rotate_angle as input resource names for GlgSetDResource or GlgGetDResource Constraining Attributes Here we will add a constraint to the rotation of the two valves so they will always rotate together Constraints like these are the heart of the GLG drawing architecture 1 Select the viewport Traverse Hierarchy Down select the valve2 group Traverse Hierarchy Down select the handle polygon display the Selected Object Properties dialog and press the Edit Dynamics button Press the button next to the Angle attribute and press the Constrain button on the left side of the Attribute dialog Press the Use Resource button in the Attribute dialog then use the resource browser to select the resource Widget valvel handle rotate_angle Animate the valve with the command Sdatagen sin d 0 90 Widget valvel handle rotate angle Notice that both valves move together Using the GLG Graphics Builder 279 This example is only meant to illustrate some of the basic procedures involved in u
271. e D Tag Type DATA INPUT ENABLED Comment i InLow InHigh Apply DK Delete The Data Tag dialog has entries for editing the TagName TagSource and TagComment attributes of the tag object The Type field displays the type of the attribute D S or G the tag is attached to The nLow and InHigh entries become active if the attribute the tag is attached to has a range transformation In this case the JnLow and InHigh entries of the Data Tag dialog provide direct access to editing the InLow and InHigh parameters of the range transformation This is convenient when editing tags via the Tag Browser since the user can assign a datasource and define its value range in one dialog Deleting a Tag To delete a tag attached to an attribute object follow the following steps 1 Use Object Tags or click on the Tags button 7 to see a list of tags 2 Locate the tag you want to delete and click on it to select it 3 Click on the Delete Tag button in the Data Tag dialog Alternatively display the Attribute dialog for the attribute or resource the tag is attached to click on the Edit Tag button to display the Data Tag dialog and click on the Delete button The T button on the right side of the attribute row in the Properties dialog may also be used to access the attribute s Data Tag dialog Using Alarms Alarms may be used to monitor an object s attribute value A change alarm generates an alarm message
272. e SubDrawing SubDrawing From Palette and click in the drawing to define the subdrawing s position If the palette contains several named objects used as icons for object dynamics enter two colon separated resource paths to one of the objects ObjectPath and its anchor point OriginPath and press OK To display the whole palette press OK without entering ObjectPath Edit the subdrawing s properties and enter palette object s resource path in the SourcePath attribute To edit the template of a container or subdrawing object select it and use Traverse Hierarchy Down For File SubDrawings traversing down loads the referenced drawing and traversing back up saves it For Palette SubDrawings traversing down performs Hierarchy Down into the palette object To delete the subdrawing s wrapper and replace it with the template use Arrange Explode Object see page 320 To adjust the position of the subdrawing s or container s graphics relative to its control point you can move their template to change its position relative to the center of the drawing or the Origin point a round marker You can also adjust the anchoring by pressing Shift Control and moving the subdrawing s control point relative to its graphics without traversing down to edit the template Containers and subdrawings may either be scalable or have fixed size as controlled by their FixedSize attribute Containers and subdrawings may be used as nodes connected wit
273. e either the Control key or the mouse button is released If ProcessArmed ARMED and UNARMED the State changes to 1 on the mouse click without the Control key or to 2 if the Control key was held down The State returns back to 1 when the Control key is released and to 0 when the mouse but ton is released Trigger MOUSE_OVER If ProcessArmed NONE sets State to 1 when the mouse moves over the object and resets State back to 0 when the mouse moves away from the object If ProcessArmed ARMED the value of State is changed to 1 only if the Control key is pressed down and the mouse is positioned on top of the object If ProcessArmed ARMED and UNARMED the State changes to 1 when the mouse moves over the object without the Control key or to 2 if the Control key is held down while the mouse is positioned on top of the object The State returns back to 1 when the Control key is released and to 0 when the mouse moves away from the object SET STATE Sets the action s State attribute to 1 when the action is triggered If ProcessArmed ARMED the action is activated only if the Control key is held down RESET STATE Resets the action s State attribute to Owhen the action is triggered If ProcessArmed ARMED the action is activated only if the Control key is held down TOGGLE STATE Toggles the action s State attribute between 0 and 1 every time the action is triggered If ProcessArmed ARMED the action is activated only if the Control key
274. e to provide a MouseOver feedback via changing the object s color State can be constrained to the index of a color list transformation attached to the object s FillColor attribute The State attribute can also be constrained to an attribute of a different object to change that object s appearance when the object the action is attached to is selected with the mouse InputAction input actions only Specifies when the Input Action attached to the input object is triggered For example InputAction ValueChanged may be used to activate the action attached to a slider every time the slider value is changed and InputAction Activate may be used to trigger an action attached to a push button When an input object receives user input a default message containing the Action and SubAction resources describing the type of the input activity is generated At run time the default message can be processed by the application code in the input callback to perform various operations depending on the name of the input object as well as the Action and SubAction resources supplied by the message This technique of handling user input in the application code does not require any GLG Objects 183 input actions to be added to input objects at design time However it makes the application code dependent on the names assigned to input objects in the drawing To make the code more generic and independent of object names Input Actions may be attached to input ob
275. e Builder with a resource or tag in the drawing When you change the value of an object s attribute it alters the object s appearance Animating an object supplies a continually changing series of values to a particular attribute of the object so the object s appearance is continuously altered The attribute is addressed via the resource hierarchy the attribute to animate must appear in the resource hierarchy The attribute may also be addressed via its tag name For example to animate the radius of a circle named Circle you would use an external data source to provide a series of values to the Widget Circle Radius resource object Executing the animation results in a circle that changes its size If the radius attribute has been assigned a radius tag name the same animation may be performed by providing values to the radius tag You may also use a dynamic transformation to animate an object The simplest way to animate a transformation is by naming its controlling Factor by specifying a Variable Name in the Add Dynamics dialog the name gets assigned to the Factor parameter of the transformation in the Edit Object Dynamics dialog At runtime you can animate the Factor parameter usually in the range of 0 to 1 to dynamically transform the object At run time the animation is performed by updating resources of the drawing with new values using the GLG Standard API The C C Java C NET or ActiveX version of the API is used depending o
276. e Drawing at Run Time 0 ec ceceeeceesceseesecceeeeeceeeeceeceaeeaeeaeeenens 23 GEG Widgets ierni Yea oz lek ees seed eek De eee reid bated bole Ps tc weve dda etedes e e e edtl eteltehateh 23 Programming LOOMS teera roinne errre n an E E a E AE Eare a Ea E E A Ea iA 23 Chapter 2 Structure of a GLG Drawing ccccccccoconncnnnnnoncnnnnanananannnnnnnnnnanos 25 NR NANO 25 Resources and Objects iiinis inet eua ia iae aa a EEs RAET e R E AT 26 ADEPAN Ango AO ole e EA E E A E E A E 26 Resources and Attributes s seseneseesesesseseeessesestsseeseseesesssseseeseseressesesenssesessestsssseseeseseesesese 27 Supplying Data for Animation ccccccccceeesceescesceesceeseceseceseeeseesscessecaeceeeseseeesecsaeceaeceeeeeneeaes 28 Hierarch y of OB SCts it E E is 28 Hierarchy Of LOLI KE EEE E EST 28 Tags for Database Connectivity reiont a a nono non aa reee i aua Vian 31 COSAS a A e o 32 Graphical ODE arniii a e E A E EE E e EE TOE st Peg wing eee Reba 33 AM aca dales arboladas de 34 Control points A o lit 34 A E E 35 Transformations as OD iii ai a ti dad it ec 36 Static Transformations cccsccesesseeseeseseecesecsecseeeeecceeceaecaneseeeceeseeeeceaesaesseeeeceeceaeeaecaeeeeseneeaes 38 Transforming Object Points 20 0 0 ceececcesscesseesseesseeecseeeeseecseceaecseeeeeeeseesaecaaeceeseeesesecseeeeesaeenes 38 Dynamic Transformations sssrinin ai e a Sa E E E aa a aS E aasa 38 6 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference A
277. e Format and Save Compressed see page 357 Save As saves the current drawing to a different file When you select Save As the Builder prompts you to enter a file name using the standard file selection dialog The usual file name extension for a GLG drawing is g though it is not required The default format for saving drawings is compressed ASCII To change the format use Options Save Format and Save Compressed see page 357 Load Object Load Object loads an object from a file into an existing drawing The object is loaded into the current place in the object hierarchy If the editing focus is inside a viewport or a group the loaded object will be added to that viewport or group When you select Load Object the Builder prompts you to select a file name using the standard file selection dialog The Builder can open any drawing saved in any GLG format If the input drawing contains more than one object they appear together in a newly created group in the existing drawing To clear the drawing area before loading a drawing use File Open see page 297 To save a drawing to a file use either File Save or File Save Object see page 298 GLG Graphics Builder Menus 299 Recent Objects Recent Objects displays a list of the recently edited objects Select one of the recently accessed objects from the list to load it into an existing drawing Similar to Load Object the object is loaded into the current place in the object hierarchy
278. e GLG Graphics Builder 223 GLG Graphics Builder Features When the Builder starts you see the main window a Toolbar Fle Palettes Edit View Traverse Arrange Layout Object Run Options PUN ERNEST E ROUCO HME Object al Drawing Palette Area Y JE Point Controls a Fons Fli d Transf ip and Transform Hierarchy p Zoom d i Status Panel f i Cursor Rotate tone No name Tue No object Coordinates Prompt Area The most important areas of the GLG Graphics Builder window are The Toolbar contains icon buttons for fast access The Drawing Area contains the graphical objects of the drawing By default the drawing area contains an axis marker that shows the projection of the current view and grid lines The drawing area also contains round red markers that annotate the extent of the default span The markers are usually displayed in the corners of the viewport with the current editing focus unless the viewport is zoomed in or out The markers may be outside of the visible area if the viewport is zoomed in of if Stretch NO and PushIn NO The Object Palette contains buttons for creating graphical objects The Control Panel contains the following controls The Point Controls let you select a method for specifying the location of points as you draw an object It contains the following buttons for selecting the mode for defining points P Position define the point positi
279. e SubDrawing and Sub Window objects contains a local copy of the template used for rendering If the ObjectPath attribute is not NULL the Instance contains not the whole template but its subobject used for rendering as defined by the ObjectPath The Instance is created dynamically after the drawing hierarchy is set up A user may edit its resources but the changes are volatile when the drawing is reloaded or reset the attributes of the instance are recreated from the Template again erasing any modifications a user might have made except for Global attributes that are shared between all instances and rebound attributes described in the Bindings section on page 108 The Instance object is visible in the Resource Browser as a resource For example if the template object is named MyTemplate both Instance and MyTemplate resources will be visible and refer to the same local copy while the Template resource points to the original template shared by all copies For the Container object the template is displayed directly without creating a local copy and both Instance and Template resources refer to the same object ReferenceType The subtype of a reference object GLG_ CONTAINER REF GLG SUBWINDOW_REF or GLG_ SUBDRAWING REF This is a read only attribute that is set at the creation time and defines the reference as either a Container SubWindow or SubDrawing Source The source of the template object for the SubDrawing and SubWi
280. e anchor point This attribute can be constrained to another point to use that point as an anchor X Offset Offset along the X axis Y Offset Offset along the Y axis Z Offset Offset along the Z axis X Offset Type Units of the X Offset world coordinates WORLD or pixels SCREEN Y Offset Type Units of the Y Offset world coordinates WORLD or pixels SCREEN Z Offset Type Units of the Z Offset world coordinates WORLD or pixels SCREEN The Screen Offset transformation allows the user to mix a world offset in one direction and pixel offset in another by using different offset types for different axes To add the screen offset transformation use Pixel X the Pixel Y or the Pixel XY offset type options in the Add Dynamics dialog All of them add the same type of the screen offset transformation initializing unused offsets to 0 for convenience Moving a point with the screen offset transformation modifies X Y and Z Offset parameters of the transformation instead of changing the point s coordinates The screen offset transformation is not allowed inside the GIS object except when it is used inside icons implemented as reference objects of a fixed size 158 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Screen Scale ADVANCED The Screen Scale transformation is similar to the Scale transformation but it automatically adjusts its scale factor to maintain an object s dimensions constant in the selected direction when the drawing i
281. e any control points since its geometry is completely defined by its parent chart A plot object has the following attributes Plot Type Defines the type of the graphics used to visualize the plot s data can have the following values GLG_LINE PLOT GLG_STEP PLOT GLG MARKERS PLOT GLG_LINE AND MARKERS PLOT GLG STEP AND MARKERS PLOT Annotation Specifies a label used to annotate the plot in a chart s legend Enabled Enables or disables the plot Disabled plots are not shown in a chart but still keep data in their history buffers and accept new data samples to be shown when the plot is enabled again Y Low The low range of the plot If the chart s CommonRange is set to YES the range is shared by all plots in the chart Y High The high range of the plot If the chart s CommonRange is set to YES the range is shared by all plots in the chart Value Entry Point An entry point for supplying Y values for the plot s samples The value must be supplied for each data sample pushed into the plot Time Entry Point An entry point for supplying Time or X values for the plot s samples These values define samples placement in the horizontal direction In scrolling charts with AutoScroll YES pushing a value into the time entry point also scrolls the chart horizontally to display the new data sample In charts with the ABSOLUTE TIME SCROLL horizontal axis the entry point is used to push time stamps for the chart s samples Supplying
282. e combined data sample s the data sample with a marker is drawn and then the next filter interval is started If FilterMarkers Y ES the combined data sample s representing the output of the filter for this filter interval will show a marker if any data samples in the interval had a marker Include Zero If set to YES the plot s range queries always include 0 in the plot s range For example if a plot contains data samples in the range 20 100 the range will be reported as 0 100 If the Y scrollbar is activated it will scroll the plot from 0 to 100 instead of the 20 100 range Resetting the chart s Y range via integrated zooming will reset the range to 0 100 as well Range Lock If set to YES prevents the plot s range from being changed when the chart is zoomed or scrolled in the vertical direction It may be used for locking plots that display boolean ON OFF data so that other plots in a chart can be zoomed and scrolled in Y direction while the locked plot does not change its vertical scale and location This makes it possible to zoom and scroll other plots vertically and view them in the context of the boolean ON OFF data as shown in the GLG Real Time Strip Chart demo Number of Samples A read only attribute containing the number of samples accumulated in the plot When the chart is reset the samples are discarded and the number of samples is reset to 0 Edit Line A button in the Properties dialog to access a Line Attrib
283. e different from the value of the G SExtent attribute The actual used extent may be queried at run time using the G SUsedExtent resource G If a GIS object with a map in the ORTHOGRAPHIC projection is clipped by the viewport s visible area its actual GISExtent is not adjusted to include only the visible area of the map Instead the original GISExtent defined in the GIS object is used to define the projection parameters without any adjustments while the map image is generated only for the visible part of the map for efficiency This makes it possible to generate zoomed images of the globe with a visible horizon line as shown in the Trajectory demo The demo uses a GIS object bigger than the viewport visible area to achieve the desired visual appearance of the map GISAngle Defines the map rotation angle in degrees For example an application can set the rotation angle to display a map from the point of view of an airplane pilot The map rotation feature is supported only in the rectangular projection the attribute s value is ignored in the orthographic projection The attribute is automatically adjusted when integrated GIS rotation is performed GISStretch Defines the stretch mode If the attribute is set to YES the map is stretched otherwise the aspect ratio of the map is preserved and the map image may include an area which is slightly bigger than the area defined by the G SExtent attribute GLG Objects 83 GISDataFile Specifie
284. e done either at design time using the Builder or at run time using the GLG API functions to import the tag file The tag export feature exports all tags defined in the drawing into a tag file Each tag entry contains two copies of the tag s TagName and TagSource attributes separated by two separator characters The first copy of the TagName and TagSource attributes is used to identify the tag and should not be changed The second copy of the attributes may be changed to modify the tag The new value of the TagSource attribute supplies the database field associated with the tag The TagName attribute may be changed to modify the tag name in the drawing 62 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The import feature is then used to load the translated file and replace tags in the drawing with the new tags from the tag import file The strings in the exported tag file are separated with a two character separator Two double quotation characters are used as the default separators but that can be changed by defining the GLG_STRING_SEPARATOR environment variable to supply a two character string to be used as a separator In the GLG API separator characters are supplied as function parameters 6666 The following is an example of the tag conversion file using the default separator characters HEADER GlgTagConverter 2 Comment Converted Tags AlarmState undefined AlarmState Plant3 Tank2 Alarm Pressure undefined Pre
285. e drawing to the resources of the input widget For example the Visibility attribute of an object in the drawing may be constrained to the OnState resource of the toggle button The toggle s handler will change the value of the toggle s OnState resource each time it is clicked on with the mouse changing the visibility of the constrained object in the drawing without a need to write any supporting code Each time the toggle changes its state the toggle widget s handler also generates a ValueChanged message At run time the application s input callback is invoked to receive the message and provide additional application specific handling of the event Other input widgets such as a push button don t keep any state information or resources that may be used to control other objects in the drawing These widgets rely on the input callback to handle user interaction with the widget 192 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Input Handlers A variety of input handlers are available The handlers are attached to a viewport where they look for a specific set of resources to control For example the G gKnob handler used by the dial widgets controls a resource called Value among others When the handler is attached the handler looks for a resource with that name When the drawing is run mouse movements in the viewport will be interpreted by the knob handler and translated into values of the Value resource The behavior of an input hand
286. e for SubDrawing and Container objects The Origin attribute is not shown in the object s Properties dialog but is visible as a resource in the Resource Browser For containers and subdrawings with an included template its position is also displayed as a round marker when the object s template is edited using the Hierarchy Down button the marker may be hidden behind the template s objects For Containers and SubDrawings with no anchoring defined in the ObjectPath the template will be anchored at a position defined by the Origin the control point of the subdrawing will be at the same location as indicated by the Origin marker in the Template For example if Origin is set to 100 0 0 the subdrawing s single control point will coincide with the 100 0 0 position in the template When a Container or a SubDrawing is created the value of the attribute is set based on the user input The value may be changed or reset to 0 0 0 by setting the Origin resource moving the Origin marker in the template or by dragging the subdrawing s anchor point using Ctrl Shift Left Mouse Move If an additional anchor path is specified in the ObjectPath attribute the template is further offset by the distance from the center of the template s coordinate system to the anchor object defined in the anchor path of the ObjectPath attribute Another way of looking at it is that the origin s anchoring offset is applied to all objects in the template on top of the
287. e information 24 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 25 Chapter 2 2 Structure of a GLG Drawing When you look at a GLG drawing you see a collection of colored shapes that may be moving and changing according to a set of predefined instructions This picture however is only the surface representation of the internal structure of a drawing Internally a GLG drawing actually consists of an arrangement of abstract data objects and the links between them When you edit a drawing with the GLG Graphics Builder or animate it with a program you are accessing and modifying data within this data structure The rendering of this elaborate internal structure into a simple two dimensional image is the last and most superficial of the many steps that go into animating a drawing Of course the two dimensional image is not only what you see when the drawing is displayed but also what you see when you create and edit a drawing To understand what is really going on when you edit or operate a GLG drawing however you must understand the underlying structure of that drawing This chapter introduces the basic elements of that structure Objects The concept of the object is fundamental to GLG Every component of a GLG drawing may be considered an object and a drawing is nothing more than an arrangement of these objects and the links between them The definition of a GLG object is similar to that of an object in C or some other object oriented pro
288. e is Color Factors for Rainbow Color Table ColorFactor Number of Colors I 19 default 1 7 3 19 4 37 2 61 91 7 127 8 169 146 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Color Factors for Rainbow Color Table ColorFactor Number of Colors d 217 NumColors A read only attribute that contains the actual number of colors used GradeHint Defines a number of color intensities for every color hue for the RAINBOW colortable If set to 0 or 1 the default value of six is used A value of two indicates that each color shall have two grades black and full strength NumGrades A read only attribute that contains the actual number of grades used PatternFactor Defines a number of dithering patterns used to render color intensities Using dithering increases the number of possible color intensities without increasing the number of allocated colors A value equal to 0 causes only one pattern to be used disabling dithering Like the ColorFactor this attribute is an index into a table of predefined values Dithering Patterns PatternFactor di nas 0 1 1 4 2 16 default 3 64 4 256 maximum NumPatterns A read only attribute containing the actual number of patterns used RenderingColor Defines a color used for simulating a monochrome or a greyscale display Everything is rendered in different intensities of this color This attribute has
289. e is used to define a position in the viewport space If the resource is not present the viewport s origin is used as the center 200 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference StartAngle This is the angle measured counter clock wise in degrees from the 3 o clock position at which the knob value is 0 If absent the default value of 0 is used EndAngle This is the angle measured counter clock wise in degrees from the 3 o clock position at which the knob value is 1 If absent the RotateAngle value is used The default value of 360 is used if the RotateAngle is absent RotateAngle An alternative rotation angle measured counter clock wise in degrees from the 3 o clock position and relative to the StartAngle If the EndAngle is absent and the RotateAngle is defined its value is used to define the end angle of rotation as StartAngle RotateAngle Granularity A control s granularity is the number of possible positions that control can take This resource is an integer indicating that value As an example a granularity of 3 for a knob creates a 3 position rotary switch If the resource is absent the knob may take any value between the lower and upper limits DisableMotion If this resource is present and non zero the control is disabled IncrementOnClick If this resource is not present or is set to zero the knob moves to the location of the mouse click If the resource is present and non zero the alternate behavio
290. e knob s value by its Pagelncrement The message has no parameters A button widget reacts to left mouse button clicks while the mouse cursor is within the widget viewport There are two kinds of buttons toggle buttons and push buttons A toggle button has an internal state that changes with each press of the button while a push button has no internal state 202 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference and only reacts to the external event the mouse click A toggle button s state may or may not be displayed G gButton supports only binary toggle buttons A slider or knob with a non zero Granularity resource can be used to create multi position switches PressedState This resource is usually 0 but when the mouse button is pressed the resource momentarily changes to 1 When the button is released the resource goes back to 0 OnState If this resource is present the button is a toggle button and successive clicks on the button change this resource value from 0 to 1 and back again The value is set to 0 at startup and after a drawing reset InState This resource is usually 0 but when the mouse cursor enters the button widget viewport it changes to 1 When the cursor exits the viewport the value goes back to 0 Label This resource indicates a text object displaying a label for the button LabelString This resource generally indicates the string displayed by the Label resource text object It is used when the button is dis
291. e mouse Selecting Reset Scaling Xform restores the original unstretched appearance of the instance Add or Use Marked Object Provides options for reusing rendering and text Box attributes chart label and plot line attributes as well as viewport s font tables and other objects The menu becomes active when the objects to be reused are marked by selecting the Mark button in the Object Properties dialog The Attribute Clone Type option of the Options menu controls the constrain type of the added copies When a group is selected adding a marked object adds copies of it to all objects in the group Rendering Attributes Adds a copy of a marked rendering attributes object Box Attributes Adds a copy of a marked text box attributes object Font Table Adds a copy of a marked font table Light Attributes Adds a copy of a light attributes object 310 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Background Attributes Replaces chart background attributes with a copy of the marked attributes Grid Attributes Replaces chart grid attributes with a copy of the marked attributes Cross Hair Attributes Replaces chart cross hair cursor attributes with a copy of the marked attributes Tick Attributes Replaces axis tick attributes with a copy of the marked attributes Line Attributes Replaces attributes of a chart s plot or level line with a copy of the marked attributes Tick Legend Label Attributes Replaces axis or legend tick
292. e number of font sizes in the font table Fonts A container object containing a list of font families Each font family contains a list of fonts of different sizes Each font is stored in a font object described below If a custom font table is not provided GLG drawings use a default font table A custom font table can be specified in one of the following ways e To assign a custom font table and store it in the drawing click on More in the viewport s Properties dialog then click on the 4dd Font Table button See the Editing a Font Table sec tion below for details e To specify a font table stored in an external file that can be shared between multiple draw ings use the FontTableFile attribute in a viewport s Properties dialog See page 95 for more details e To set a custom font table as a global default use the G gDefaultFontTableFile global config uration resource described on page 345 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual This custom font table will be inherited by all viewports that use a default font table The GlgDefaultFontFile GlgDefaultNumFontTypes and GlgDefaultNumFontSizes global configuration resources described on page 345 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual may be used to define a list of fonts for the default font table using a plain text file In the X Windows environment each entry of the file may contain either a font name or a comma separated list of font names comprising a font set for font sets the Mul
293. e object 5 Add transformations to any of its attributes as required to implement custom dynamic behavior Use stock transformations to simplify the process of defining public properties 6 Add export tags to the attributes of a transformation that need to be shown as transformation s properties To add an export tag to a transformation s attribute click on the ellipses button next to the attribute in the Edit Dynamics dialog then press the ET Export Tag button the Attribute dialog 7 Uncheck the Options Dynamics Options Full Display of Predefined Dynamics option and verify the list of the transformations public properties 8 Use the modified drawing with the xform templates command line option to test the new predefined dynamics Custom Data Sets and Custom Commands Custom data sets may be used to define predefined sets of data to be added to objects as custom data action data or action commands Custom data sets are contained in a group object that holds individual data elements Data elements of action and command data have EXPORT DYN export tags attached to export them as public properties visible in the Public Properties dialog for editing action or command data Predefined Custom Command Template The editor_extensions drawings custom_command_templates g file of the GLG installation provides a template that contains predefined commands and data sets To add custom data sets and or custom commands this drawing may be
294. e over events and mouse over feedback controlled by the MouseOverEvent and MouseOverState properties of an object Masks of a viewport s ProcessMouse attribute are inherited by its children viewports For example setting ProcessMouse to Click will enable mouse click processing for the viewport as well as for all of its children viewports If a viewport s ProcessMouse Click and the ProcessMouse of its child viewport is set to Move the child viewport will process both the mouse click and mouse over events Refer to the Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing chapter on page 45 for details on custom events mouse feedback and object tooltips Refer to the description of the GlgDisablePre350bjectEvents global configuration variable on page 179 for information on disabling the old style custom events and tooltips prior to v 3 5 which may decrease CPU load when moving the mouse over a large drawings Handler A viewport may become an input widget or control by naming an input handler with this attribute The Handler attribute identifies the style of control that is adopted such as slider knob switch and so on The use of input handlers is described in Input Objects DisableInput Controls whether or not a viewport and its input handler react to input events Setting the attribute to YES disables all input events in the viewport if the viewport has an input handler attached it also disables the handler The YES setting also disables all c
295. e range alarm has the following attributes Use Value If set to Value default the value of the attribute before applying any attribute transformations is used If set to XfValue the transformed value of the attribute is used The transformed value includes an effect of all transformations if any attached to the attribute High Defines the high range of the value The alarm message with the High subaction is generated when the value reaches or exceeds the High range Low Defines the low range of the value The alarm message with the Low subaction is generated when the value drops below or equal to the Low range The Range alarm generates the following alarm messages e A message with the Set action is generated when the monitored value changes from being within the alarm s range to being out of range The SubAction parameter of the message indi cates the alarm condition High or Low e A message with the On action is generated when the monitored value outside of the range changes to a value which is still outside the range with the same alarm state High or Low as before the change The SubAction parameter of the message indicates the alarm state High or Low e A message with the Reset action is generated when the monitored value changes from being outside of the range to within the range The SubAction parameter of the message indicates the alarm state being reset High or Low 176 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference If t
296. e rectangle 76 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference SPACED Text has three control points The letters of the text are evenly distributed along the line connecting the first two points For multi line text the third point controls the position of the text s lines Similar to the SCALED text the SPACED text is fit to the parallelogram defined by it s three control points with the FontSize and MinFontSize defining the maximum and minimum font sizes for scaling All text objects have the following attributes in addition to control points TextColor Defines the color of the text Compatibility Note The name of this attribute changed in the release 2 9 Previously the default attribute name for this attribute was EdgeColor The GlgCompatibilityMode global configuration resource may be set to obtain behavior compatible with the earlier versions TextString This is the text string displayed by the text object If the text string contains the n ASCII NL and r ASCII CR characters they will be used as line separators and the text will be displayed in multiple lines The ZextString of a multi line text can be edited only by using the text edit field of the Attribute dialog ellipsis button TextType Can have the following values FIXED GLG_FIXED_TEXT SCALED GLG_AUTOSCALED_TEXT SPACED GLG_SPACED_ TEXT Direction Defines whether text is GLG_HORIZONTAL GLG_VERTICAL GLG_ VERTICAL ROTATED RIGHT or GLG_VERTICAL ROTATE
297. e the resource mechanism is very flexible and powerful the application has to know the exact path of all resources it needs to access Tags described in the next chapter provides an alternative data access mechanism with a flat hierarchy Tags for Database Connectivity A data tag may be attached to any attribute or resource object for an alternative tag based access to the resource value In addition to accessing an attribute object by a hierarchical resource name it may be accessed by global tags which is convenient for applications that obtain the data from a database Tags are similar to resources and same as resources are used to update attributes with new data at run time There is one important difference though while resources are hierarchical the tags are global and their hierarchy is flat All tags defined in the drawing are visible at the top level which is very convenient for data connectivity with process databases Tags provide a way to associate a name of the database field the data source with the attribute that needs to be updated with this data In the Builder the Tag Browser may be used to view tags of individual objects as well as all tags defined in the drawing A tag object has TagName and TagSource attributes which facilitate database connectivity The TagSource attribute contains the name of the database field that will supply dynamic data for updating the attribute The ZagName attribute defines a tag name which
298. e to retrieve the object When you copy and then paste an object the object is placed directly over the selected object at the current level of the hierarchy You can then drag it into position The Paste Clone Type option of the Options menu controls a constrain type of the copy s attributes The Cut Copy and Paste toolbar icons may be used for fast access Cloning an Object You can clone an object which adds another copy of the object to the drawing Cloning gives you more control over the nature of the copy you can constrain the clone place it using a specified offset from the original or transform it as it is created The Builder provides several varieties of cloning e A full clone is just a copy of the object with no constraints This is the default for copy and paste operations e A constrained clone is a copy of the object with all attributes and control points of the copy constrained to the corresponding attributes or control points of the original object A strong or weak clone is a constrained copy of the object The Global attribute determines what attributes of the clone are constrained Each attribute or control point has a Global attribute which appears in the Attribute dialog This attribute has three possible values that interact with the strong and weak clone types to provide a range of possibilities for constraining while cloning e Global constrains the clones to the original for both a strong and a we
299. e used for setting its position using different coordinate systems You can reposition the point by typing in the Value or Position text entry box or clicking on the arrow buttons Public Properties Public Properties display user defined public properties of an object Public properties are used to create components that may be easily edited in the GLG HMI Configurator The OEM version of the GLG Graphics Builder is used to define an object s public properties In the non OEM Builder the Public Properties menu option can be used to browse public properties of an object The Public Properties dialog displays public properties in a way similar to the way attributes are displayed in the Properties dialog The only difference is the absence of the X button for the public properties that have dynamics attached Instead the x character is displayed in the property s ellipsis button to indicate the presence of a transformation attached to the object A scrollbar to scroll the list of properties is automatically activated if required Each property has an ellipsis button that brings the Property Object dialog for editing the property value using an appropriate palette or a menu The Property Object dialog is the same as the Attribute dialog described in the previous section A button in the upper right corner of the dialog may be used to switch display between public properties and object properties Resources Resources display
300. e values by typing values or by clicking with the mouse Clicking on a button and then in the drawing area records the mouse position in the corresponding text entry box For example clicking on the Distance X In Drawing button and clicking on two points in the drawing calculates and records the distance between the points in the X direction When using buttons for defining transformation s geometry in the drawing notice the prompt at the bottom of the drawing area that provides information on the number of points to select with the mouse For most transformations a Reverse button provides a way to reverse a transformation by inverting its parameters Use the Variable Name text entry box to name the controlling parameter of the dynamic transformation The range parameters may be used to map the range of the input data to the range of the required change of the transformation s factor If the default range parameters are modified a Range Conversion transformation will be attached to the dynamics Factor and the name entered in Variable Name will be assigned to the Input Value of the Range Conversion transformation For the Path transformation the dialog provides several ways of defining the path points The Points In Drawing button can be used to define the path points with the mouse Use Object uses points of an object such as polygon arc or spline selected with the mouse Constrain To Polygon constrains points of the path to the points o
301. e variety of visible features of the objects that do appear These objects are for advanced usage and may be safely ignored until they are really needed The data object is used to specify a data value Most attributes of GLG objects use data objects to keep an attribute s value The data objects are also used to attach Custom Data Properties to other objects The data object has the following attributes the data type the value the transformed value and an optional tag Of course it also has a name the Global and HasResources flags and may have transformations attached to it A tag may be attached to the data object to mark it as a global resource to define database connectivity for the data value Refer to the Tag Based Data Access and Database Connectivity chapter on page 60 for details of using tag objects for data access If a transformation is attached to a data object it will transform it causing the transformed value to differ from the original data value Data objects are not affected by drawing and other transformations attached to their parents The attributes of the data object are as follows Type Specifies the type of data stored Possible data types are G D or S for geometrical double precision and string respectively A G value contains three double precision values It usually represents a point in a Euclidean space but it can be used for any data stored in triples RGB color values for example
302. ease Increases the slider s value by its PageIncrement The message has no parameters PageDecrease Decreases the slider s value by its Pagelncrement The message has no parameters Up Increases the slider s Y value by its Increment The message has no parameters Down Decreases the slider s Y value by its Increment The message has no parameters Right Increases the slider s X value by its Increment The message has no parameters Left Decreases the slider s X value by its Increment The message has no parameters UpLeft UpRight DownLeft DownRight Composite messages that perform the actions of the two messages indicated by their names The messages have no parameters GlgN Slider The GLG Toolkit includes a native slider input handler that uses features of the native windowing environment and may be attached to a viewport object with WidgetType of VERTICAL SCROLLBAR HORIZONTAL SCROLLBAR VERTICAL SCALE and HORIZONTAL SCALE The native slider handler encapsulates the native slider and scrollbar widget s interfaces and allows to handle them in a cross platform way The native slider is more limited than the GLG version and only handles one dimensional input Its Value and Stateless resources are described in the GlgSlider section but it also has the following resources Increment Specifies the amount the value changes when the users moves the slider by one increment The increment is expressed as a fraction of the total range
303. ecify the resolution of the alignment grid in the GLG world coordinates If you specify Snap to Grid the Builder snaps to the grid and also to the midpoints of the grid The 0 No snapping option is used to disable snapping and Round to integer option is used to get rid of the fractional coordinate values which is almost the same as no snapping but with integer coordinates The Custom option allows the user to specify a custom rounding value The Snap To submenu only affects the placement of points and objects with the mouse Other means of specifying points such as entering coordinate values or using existing values are not affected by the Snap To option Show Axis shows or hides the axis icon The axis icon indicates the center and orientation of the current view and coordinate system To change the view projection and the coordinate system used to view the drawing use the options on the View menu GLG Graphics Builder Menus 357 Show Coordinates Show Coordinates shows or hides the mouse coordinate display window in the lower right corner of the Builder Both the screen S and world W coordinates in the selected coordinate system are displayed To change coordinate system use View Coordinate System Show Default Span Show Default Span shows or hides red markers that display the extent of the drawing area in the unzoomed state Save Format Save Format determines the format the Builder uses to save a drawing to a file
304. ect section on page 184 By default the action s command data are displayed for editing as properties in the Action Properties dialog The Options Selection Options Edit Action Data as List menu option may be used to edit the properties as a list which allows deleting or adding new data to the command The list editing interface is the same as the interface for editing custom properties see the Edit Custom Properties section on page 350 A button in the upper right corner of the dialog provides a convenient shortcut for switching command data display To delete a command delete the action containing the command To delete a command without deleting the action object edit the command data as a list and delete all command properties A new command can then be added via the Add Command button in the Action Properties dialog Refer to the Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time section below for information on accessing command data in the application code at run time GLG API note a command is a group object that contains public properties that define command data A command object is a group that contains all command data A default set of predefined commands is provided new custom command types can be added by customizing the Builder as described in the Custom Data Sets and Custom Commands section on page 287 GLG Objects 185 All commands contain a mandatory CommandType resource which is a str
305. ect will be displayed on top of the map using the GIS Rendering Mode providing a convenient way to position dynamic objects on the map using lat lon coordinates Screen Coordinates Lighting The screen coordinate system uses the screen coordinates of the native windowing system Its origin is always located in the upper left corner of the viewport The final mapping transformation takes the drawing from an internal representation of three dimensional space into a two dimensional one The origin of this coordinate system is defined to be the upper left corner of the window and the horizontal and vertical extent of the visible part of the viewport s window are equal to the window s width and height respectively In order to see an object in three dimensional space there must be a source of light to illuminate it The GLG system provides two different sources of lighting illumination and ambience Illumination is the simplest form of lighting to understand because it is the most obvious analogy to what we observe in the real world Mlumination is the light cast by a point light source in a certain direction For example a light source on the right side of some object leaves the left side of that object in shadow Each viewport in a GLG drawing can have a light source to shine in it The viewport uses a Light object to store all lighting attributes This allows for space for viewports that do not use lighting and 3D shading to be conserve
306. ects Use Arrange Group to create a group The Builder prompts you to draw a rectangle that touches or encloses all the objects to be included in the group A group object does not appear as a visible graphical object but the control points of objects in a group appear as hollow squares Clicking on any member of a group selects the group To release one object from a group use the options on the Arrange Explode submenu To release all the objects from a group and delete the group object select it and use Arrange Explode Object Editing Group Members Although the members of a group are associated they can still be edited individually You can move the control points of a group member by dragging or editing them For more intensive editing use the options on the Traverse and Arrange Menus to get access to an individual object e Open the group using Traverse Hierarchy Down By navigating to the appropriate level of the hierarchy you can edit the individual members of the group Use Traverse Up when you have finished e Release or add members to the group using Arrange Remove Object from Group and Arrange Add Object to Group see page 318 e Destroy the group and replace it with its members by using the Arrange Explode submenu see page 320 e Edit attributes that are common to the group members using Traverse Edit All or the button on the group s Properties dialog The changes you make are applied to every member of the
307. ed in which case they are annotated with X A or T buttons on the right side of the Properties dialog These buttons may also be used as shortcuts for accessing the dynamics alarms or tags attached to an object s attributes If an attribute has a transformation attached that overrides the value of the attribute the value of the attribute in the Properties dialog will be read only Attribute Dialog The content of the attribute dialogs differ according to the attribute and its data type string scalar or geometric However all the dialogs include Text boxes for entering attribute name and value e Text fields showing an attribute s data type D S or G and transformed value XfValue e A way to change the attribute value via a palette a menu with list of possible values or a spinner e Toggles for setting the attribute s HasResources and Global attributes A button for adding or editing a tag and a text field showing tag information e Buttons for reusing attributes of other objects in the drawing A button for marking the attribute for reuse see page 259 e Buttons for constraining the attribute see page 236 e Buttons for adding editing or deleting transformations for the attribute see page 241 e A button for adding or editing an alarm to monitor the attribute s value The following picture shows an Attribute dialog for a color attribute tne i Tag Add Tag Type G J HasResource
308. edefined dynamics are displayed in the Builder s dialogs Predefined Dynamics Template Drawing The editor _extensions drawings custom_xform_templates g file of the GLG installation provides a template that contains the default predefined dynamics To add custom predefined dynamics this drawing may be edited using the OEM version of the Enterprise Edition of the Builder use the oem command line option to start the Builder in the OEM mode When finished copy the drawing to the main directory of the GLG installation The xform templates command line option may also be used to supply the drawing containing a custom predefined dynamics template for the Builder or HMI configurator xform templates lt glg dir gt editor_extensions drawings custom_xform_templates g The drawing containing a custom predefined dynamics template can also be specified in the GLG configuration file using the CustomXformTemplates variable or by setting the GLG CUSTOM XFORM_ TEMPLATES environment variable The predefined dynamics template drawing contains the XformTemplates viewport which contains several groups of objects one for each transformation subtype DXform group defines transformations for generic D attributes e SXform group defines transformations for generic S attributes e GXform group defines transformations for generic G attributes e ColorXform group defines transformations for color attributes e LineTypeXform group defines additional trans
309. ee sets of basic transformations one set for each basic data type string scalar and geometric See the GLG Objects chapter for descriptions of the different transformation objects In the Builder there are three different ways to apply a geometrical transformation to an object Transform Points makes an immediate and permanent change to the definition of the object by changing coordinate values of its points without creating a transformation object A static or matrix transformation is attached to the object to change its appearance without changing coordinates of the object s control points A static transformation doesn t change the object definition instead it projects the object so that it appears in a different place or in a different shape When several static transformations are applied they are merged into one static transformation with combined parameters The transformation parameters cannot be edited A dynamic or parametric transformation has parameters that can be edited or animated at runtime by providing input data to the transformation see page 256 Since dynamic transfor mations are intended primarily for runtime animation their parameters are set to initial values that do not change the object s initial position When several dynamic transformations are attached to an object each transformation can be animated independently of the others A transformation can be attached to an entire object to an at
310. elative time stamps as time intervals expired since the start of the experiment Alternatively it may set TimeOrigin to the time of the experiment s start and supply absolute time stamps in this case the axis will subtract the start time from the time stamps before displaying them in the major tick labels If the X axis of a chart is a relative time axis the chart will also subtract the start time from the time stamps when plotting the data points while keeping the original absolute time stamps in the data buffer GLG Objects 131 Tooltip Format Specifies a custom format for an axis tooltip The tooltip format can contain ordinary characters as well as conversion specifications The conversion specifications contain a source keyword and a conversion format separated by the character and are surrounded with angle brackets Depending on the type of the conversion specification source one of the following matching format types can be used double format some variant of the Yf format string format some variant of the s format time format uses the same notation as the TimeFormat attribute described on page 126 The following conversion specifications are supported axis_label Replaced with the axis label formatted with the supplied string format axis_name Replaced with the axis name formatted with the supplied string format axis_string Replaced with the axis label or with the axis name if the axis has no la
311. elect to insert selected tag into the TagSource field The example source code is self documented and provides an example of browsing a hierarchical process database with several levels of hierarchy controller tag group and tag The syntax used to separate the controller tag group and tag entries in the selected TagSource 1s just an example and may be changed to fulfill custom application requirements A custom data browser DLL can be deployed via the data lib command line option as shown in the README file via the CustomDataLib variable of the glg config and glg hmi_config configuration files or by placing a DLL with a default name in the directory of the GLG Editor or application program executable Custom Run Module DLL A custom proto DLL may be provided for animating the drawing with real data in the Run mode of the GLG editor as well as handling user interaction object selection and custom runtime dialogs with an application specific runtime logic The module has access to a complete GLG API both the Standard and Extended making it possible to implement a complete application integrated with a GLG editor The application will function in the editor s Run mode while the Edit mode may be used for editing the application s drawing Using the GLG Graphics Builder 291 For even further customization the run command line option or the StartRun configuration file variable can be used to start the GLG editor in the Run mode The run w
312. enation of the substrings provided as transformation parameters The string concatenation transformation may be used to create a text object that displays a label value and units each controlled by a separate parameter A Format D transformation may be attached to one of the substring parameters of the transformation to display a numerical value as a string The transformation has the A B C D and E parameters that specify strings to be concatenated Common Attribute Transformations List SList Common attribute transformations can be attached to an attribute of any type D S or G These transformations ignore the attribute s Value and assign the transformation s output to the attribute s transformed value XfValue The available types of the common attribute transformations are listed below The List transformation uses an integer index to select an attribute value from a list For example a list of colors may be attached to the Fill Color attribute of an object and the list s Index used to control what color is displayed the index of 0 will display the first color the index of 1 the second color and so on The list transformation may be attached to attributes of any type D S or G For example you can attach a list of strings to be displayed in a text object via the text s String attribute or attach a table of line widths for the polygon s Line Width attribute The attributes for this transformation are as follows
313. ence between static and dynamic and a description of the possible transformations see the Transformation Object chapter on page 151 You can animate a drawing by attaching a dynamic transformation to a named object and naming the factor for the transformation Entering a name in the Variable Name field in the Add Dynamics dialog assigns 1t to the Factor attribute in the Edit Dynamics dialog When you use Run Start to execute the animation specify the named factor in the command line see page 354 To add dynamics to object attributes such as visibility or color dynamics use the Add Dynamics button of the Attribute dialog Refer to the Adding Attribute Dynamics chapter on page 241 for details The Add Dynamics Dialog The 4dd Dynamics dialog lets you define a parametric dynamic transformation to attach to the selected object 344 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference To specify the transformation use the Transformation Type option which lists the geometrical transformations See the GLG Objects chapter for specifications of these transformations When you select a transformation the content of the dialog changes providing appropriate text entry boxes and buttons for defining the transformation To switch from defining a dynamic transformation to transforming points or defining a static transformation use the Action option Some of the text entry boxes are paired with buttons for these values you can specify thes
314. eneric platform independent format that will be used for the remaining platforms For example the following format uses different native format specifications for C Java and C C ActiveX environments lt c gt 0 N2 lt c gt lt java gt 2 lt java gt 2f In Java the native format is passed as a format parameter to the format method of a Formatter object In C it is passed as a format parameter to the String Format method for double integer and string formats and as a format parameter to the ZoString method of a DateTime object for time and data formats Data The scalar data value to write into the text string Format Type The type of the format to use DOUBLE or INTEGER If an integer format is used the data value is first cast to an integer type with no rounding performed Time Format The time formatting transformation formats the supplied time value with the requested time format Time Format A character string specifying a desired time format X x by default Refer to the description of the axis object s Time Format attribute on page 126 for information on the supported time formats Escape sequences may be used to define native platform specific formats for Windows and Unix platforms as well as Java and C NET environment as described in the the Scalar Formatting Format D section above MilliSec Format Specifies a double precision C style format for an optional display of fractional seconds at the end of
315. epeat the above steps to add more aliases When finished use the Resource Browser to check the aliases The Alias button of the Status Panel may be used to access a list of aliases defined for the selected object The Mark Object and Mark List buttons in the Alias List dialog may be used to mark the currently selected alias object or the whole alias list for reuse To add marked aliases to a different object select the object and use Object Aliases Add Marked Aliases from the main menu Drawing a Simple Example The following example shows how to draw and animate a couple of valves It incorporates several of the most typical tasks encountered in building and animating a GLG drawing Where the instructions below use the choices available from the Builder menus you can also use toolbar and object palette buttons Using the GLG Graphics Builder 275 Attribute Animation The first task is to create a drawing for the valve handle and to animate some of its simple attributes 1 Create a viewport and name it Widget Use Object Create Viewport to create the viewport or click on the Viewport button in the object palette and use the mouse to specify the viewport s corner points Use Object Properties or click on the Properties button on the toolbar to show the Selected Object Properties dialog You can use this dialog to specify the viewport s name Select the viewport with the mouse if you have just specified its name it
316. epresentation of the object hierarchy several partial views are available The dialogs for editing a graphical object s attributes and transformations provide access to an object s attributes as well as the attributes of the transformations attached to the object see page 229 For a drawing with named objects the Builder lets you browse a hierarchy of resources very similar in appearance to a file and directory structure see page 245 e For a transformed object the Builder lets you view the original untransformed object The drawing area shows a single level of the hierarchy of graphical objects and you use Traverse Transformation Down and Traverse Up to move between the levels see page 239 e For a composite object such as a group or viewport the Builder provides access to its subob jects use Traverse Hierarchy Down and Traverse Up to move between the levels see page 265 Using the GLG Graphics Builder 221 Starting and Stopping the Builder The bin subdirectory of the GLG installation contains executables of one or more GLG editors lt glg gt bin GlgBuilder GlgHMIEditor Ifa GLG Editor is started from a command line it starts in the OpenGL mode and uses the OpenGL driver if it is available The bin directory also contains links shortcuts on Windows for starting a GLG Editor in non OpenGL GDI mode GlgBuilder_no_opengl GlgHMIEditor_no_opengl For the Enterprise Edition of the Graphics Builder the b
317. equently add them to other objects in the drawing To select individual actions instead of the list of all actions attached to the object use the Mark Object button in the action s properties dialog Add Marked Actions Add Marked Actions adds a copy of the previously marked actions to the selected object Add Tooltip 3 4 Add MouseClick Event 3 4 Add MouseOver Event 3 4 Edit Delete Tooltip Or Event 3 4 Options for adding or editing the old style prior to v 3 5 tooltips and custom events These options are disabled by default but may be enabled by setting the value of the DisablePre3 5Menus property to 0 in the glg config file Custom Properties This button brings the Custom Properties sub menu with the options listed below Add Custom Property Add Custom Property attaches a custom property to an object Custom properties are saved with the drawing and may be used to associate application specific data with objects Custom properties other then data may be attached to objects programmatically using the Extended API The presence of custom properties is indicated by the Data indicator in the Status Panel when an object with custom properties is selected To edit custom properties select the object to which the custom properties are attached and use Object Edit Properties or click on the Data indicator in the Status Panel Alternatively display the object s Properties dialog and click on the Custom Props button
318. er 205 GlgText 205 installing 193 specifying 89 input handlers 43 Input Object Events 53 Input Value 159 160 input widgets 191 InputFormat 204 InputInvalid 204 Instance 105 instance names square series 102 InState 202 Integrated Events 51 integrated scrollbars 46 integrated tooltips 47 integrated zooming and panning 45 Internationalization 55 Interval 161 INVERSED 139 Inversed 125 139 ItemList 207 208 ItemStateList 207 J JavaFontName 149 JPEG image 79 K KeepEditRatio 91 102 108 L Label 202 Label XOffset 133 LabelExtentAbsolute 130 LabelExtentRelative 130 LabelFormat 128 LabelMaxHeight 134 LabelMaxWidth 134 LabelString 202 language locales 55 layout operations 234 layout toolbox 234 LayoutType 132 Left 197 370 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Left message 198 LEFT text alignment 76 Legend 132 legend 323 enabling or disabling background and outline 133 legend object 132 Level 122 Level Line 122 level line visibility 114 Level Line object 122 Light Object reuse 150 Light object 91 light object 149 light source 150 LightCoefficient 150 LightDirection 150 lighting 42 defining 150 source 150 special effects 150 LightPoint 150 LightType 150 lightweight button 50 line 71 Line Attributes 144 reuse 144 Line Attributes object 144 line graph 110 Line Length 133 Line Type Dynamics 71 LINE WIDTH gradient 141 LINE_
319. er element appears to slide on the plane defined by this polygon The points of the polygon must be co planar When you click on the slider widget the cursor position is projected onto this plane The resulting coordinates are used to set the slider position Messages Input Objects 197 Increment Increment for changing the knob s value by using the directional buttons listed below The increment is expressed as a fraction of the total range of the slider ranging from 0 to 1 If this resource is missing the default increment is two hundredth of the slider range Pagelncrement Page increment for changing the knob s value by using the page directional buttons listed below The increment is expressed as a fraction of the total range of the slider ranging from 0 to 1 If this resource is missing the default increment is one tenth of the slider range Left Right Up Down If buttons with these names are embedded into a two dimensional slider each press of a button moves the slider in the direction indicated by the button s name and by the amount specified by the slider s Increment Increase Decrease If buttons with these names are embedded into a one dimensional slider each press of a button moves the slider in the direction indicated by the button s name and by the amount specified by the slider s Increment IncreaseKeys DecreaseKeys These S resources define a list of characters that will be used as keyboard acce
320. er type implements predefined logic associated with a particular input object For example the G gButton handler implements the input logic of the push button and toggle widget Each handler searches for some predefined set of resources to control in the viewport they are attached to For example the G gKnob handler searches for the resource named Value and then changes its value to rotate the knob when it is moved with the mouse The knob widget is designed in such a way that the Value resource controls the angle of the knob s rotation and changing this resource from 0 to 1 moves the knob from the start angle to the end angle The handler always changes the resources it controls in the range of 0 to 1 A range transformation may be used to convert the default range of 0 to 1 to a different range The behavior of an input handler may be modified by defining certain resource names it recognizes For example the G gButton handler searches for the resource named OnState If this resource is found the handler implements a toggle Otherwise a push button is implemented An input handler searches for resources at the top level of the viewport hierarchy so any controlling resources must be visible at the viewport s top level Alias objects may be used to make resources defined inside the hierarchy be visible at the top level It is also important to set the HasResources flag for the viewport when adding a handler to it Without it the viewport will
321. er types are supported NONE Disables data filtering to draw all data samples MIN_MAX Combines multiple data samples into two data samples that hold the minimum and maximum values of the combined samples GLG Objects 121 AVERAGE Combines multiple data samples into a single data sample by averaging the values of the combined samples DISCARD Plots the first encountered data sample discarding any other samples that fall onto the same pixel in the horizontal direction CUSTOM Allows the use of custom filters A custom chart filter can be added to a plot via the GlgSetChartFilter GLG API method Examples of the custom filter code for various programming environments are provided in the src subdirectory of the GLG installation The examples demonstrate the implementation of the above filter types and may be modified to fine tune filter behavior to suit the application requirements FilterPrecision Specifies the horizontal interval in pixels for combining multiple data samples The default is 2 pixels which will cause all data samples in each 2 pixel interval to be combined in one or two data samples depending on the filter type FilterMarkers If set to NO disables filtering for data samples with markers It may be used to let data samples with markers through for plots which use markers to annotate special events Ifa data sample with a marker is encountered the data samples for the currently accumulated filter interval are flushed to draw th
322. er widget that may be used in a sliding spinner Done An optional Done button for generating Activate message The GlgSpinner interaction handler supports the following messages that can be sent using the GlgSendMessage method Increase Increases the spinner s value by its Increment The message has no parameters Decrease Decreases the spinner s value by its Increment The message has no parameters Pagelncrease Increases the spinner s value by its Page ncrement The message has no parameters PageDecrease Decreases the spinner s value by its PageIncrement The message has no parameters The native list handler encapsulates the behavior ofa native list widget allowing to use it in a cross platform way It may be attached to a viewport object with the WidgetType of LIST MULT_LIST and EXT_LIST and handles both the single and multiple selection depending on the native list type In the single selection mode the list s selection may be changed by setting the value of the SelectedIndex resource In the multiple selection mode the GlgSendMessage method may be used to change list s selection as well as to add delete or query list entries Messages Input Objects 207 InitItemList This resource is a list of strings to be displayed in the list widget on initial appearance It may be edited in the Graphics Builder ItemList A group object created by the list handler which contains the current list of strings displayed in
323. erarchy must be unique to avoid resource name conflicts If two or more resources on the same hierarchy level have the same name the first found resource object will be returned when the resource is accessed Resources on different hierarchy levels may have the same names For example if both PY 1 and PY2 polygons have HasResources YES each of the polygons may have its own fill_ color resource accessible as PY fill_color for the first polygon and PY2 fill_color for the second one Using such identical resource hierarchies is a powerful technique for drawings with a large number of similar objects 30 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The following diagram represents the hierarchy of objects in the drawing on page 28 If each object has resources the HasResources flag is set to YES and all objects are named then the resource hierarchy is identical to this object hierarchy Again note that to avoid confusion about default attribute names which always appear at the object level regardless of the HasResources flag we have renamed the attributes shown in the diagram GRP PY1 PY2 line_type Other Attributes fill_color Other Attributes fill_color An Object Hierarchy The following diagram shows the case where polygon PY2 is resource transparent Here all the resources of the transparent polygon appear to be resources of the parent GRP Other
324. erators t _ etc then left click and drag the mouse to define the area to zoom to The user can also zoom to an area by holding the Shift key and then using the left mouse button to click and drag the mouse to define a zooming rectangle Zooming in only X or Y direction is especially useful for real time charts allowing to zoom only along the time axis or the Y axis The are also accelerators for panning and scrolling the drawing by dragging it with the mouse Several accelerators are provided for panning and scrolling in only X Y or in both X and Y directions In the GIS Zoom Mode the map is scrolled by dragging it with the mouse and in the Chart Zoom Mode the chart is scrolled To start press one of the panning accelerators s gt etc then left click and drag the mouse to scroll the content of the drawing The user can also use the Control click drag sequence Panning accelerators are primarily used for starting the dragging operation via the programming API at run time Performing zoom and pan actions on a viewport generates Zoom and Pan messages Refer to the Appendix B Message Object Resources section ofthe GLG Programming Reference Manual for details ProcessMouse Controls the viewport s processing of the mouse events The value of the attribute is formed by ORing binary masks to enable individual types of mouse events Possible values may contain a combination of the following None GLG NO MOUSE E
325. eries and click on two points to specify two vectors from the first point they control the arrangement of the series instances 5 When prompted enter the number of rows then the number of columns These values specify the number of instances to create To edit the template object use Traverse Hierarchy Down When you finish editing use Traverse Up to see the instance objects The Reference Object Containers and SubDrawings A reference is essentially a series with a single element Like the series it uses a template object but only one instance the Reference object is created A reference is most useful when there is a need to replicate an object throughout a drawing or multiple drawings It may also be used to implement subdrawing or object dynamics changing the displayed object based on some condition There are several types of reference objects Container A Container object is used to encapsulate a set of objects protect them from accidental editing and provide a control point which may be used to move or constrain objects When a container is copied its template object is copied as well To create a container select an object to use as a template click on the Container icon in the Object Palette and click in the drawing to position the container Using the GLG Graphics Builder 269 Included SubDrawing An Included SubDrawing is used to replicate instances of a template in a drawing Copying or cloning the subdrawin
326. es Property dialog Scrolling Attributes of Objects with Index based Names The history object provides a way to animate resources that use numeric values in their names When such a resource is animated the history object provides access to each value in turn The most obvious application for the history object is for series objects polylines and polysurfaces since these objects append a numerical index to names of its template s instances The history object can also address named resources in a group if they use the same type of naming convention and the group object s HasResources flag is turned on To create a history object 1 Select the object to which you want to add a history object 2 Select Object Add History The Builder prompts you for the resource name 3 Enter the resource name replacing the numeric part with a percent sign If the resource is not a direct child of the object you selected specify a relative path to the resource 4 The Builder adds a resource named EntryPoint to the resource hierarchy The History object is not represented visually its existence is indicated by EntryPoint For example consider a series named S with its HasResources flag set to YES and with a template named Triangle Its instances are named Triangle0 Trianglel Triangle2 and Triangle3 To animate the fill color of the instances you add a history object to S and specify Triangle FillColor as the resource name The
327. es on which to arrange the series instances For a Path Series define a transformation to be used for replicating instances 5 Enter a factor to specify the number of instances to create When you create a series object the Builder names the instances using the template object name and an index for example a template named Rect with a factor of 3 creates three instances named Rect0 Rectl and Rect2 To edit the template object use Traverse Hierarchy Down When you finish editing use Traverse Up to see the instance objects Square Series A square series is a special type of series object which presents the instances of its template in rows and columns The number of rows and columns in the square series determines the number of instances in the series A square series object consists of a template and a set of generated i AA instances AA Polyline GLG Graphics Builder Menus 337 To create a square series 1 Select an object to use as a template 2 Select Object Properties to set the attributes of the template object so that its instances will inherit appropriate characteristics Name the object 3 Select Object Create Square Series to create the instance objects 4 Click on the center point for the square series and click on two points to define two vectors from the first point they specify the arrangement of the series instances 5 When prompted enter the number of rows then the number of columns These
328. es and buttons for defining the transformation which are the same as in the 4dd Dynamics dialog described on page 343 To switch from defining a static transformation to transforming points or defining a dynamic transformation use the Action option For most of the transformations a Reverse button provides a way to undo a transformation It inverts the parameters of the last transformation you applied which has the effect of negating the effect of the previously applied static transformation when the inverted transformation is applied The Variable Name InLow InHigh OutLow and OutHigh options are not available these options apply only to dynamic transformations Use the Apply button when you have finished specifying the transformation Tooltip The Tooltip submenu provides options for adding and editing object tooltips Add Tooltip Add Tooltip attaches a tooltip action to the selected object and opens the action s Properties dialog for entering the tooltip string as a value of the action s Tooltip attribute To activate tooltip processing the ProcessMouse attribute of the viewport containing the object or a parent viewport has to include the Tooltip mask The Run mode of the Builder may be used to test the tooltips Edit Tooltip Edit Tooltip opens the Properties dialog for editing the Tooltip action attached to the selected object Use the Object Custom Properties Edit Custom Properties menu option to edit old style
329. es to the application code The OpenGL renderer is supported in a cross platform way on both Unix Linux and Windows environments When the Toolkit is installed on Windows two groups of icon shortcuts are provided for starting the demos and the Builder one for the OpenGL rendering mode and another for the GDI mode For Unix Linux installations symbolic links are provided for starting the demos and the Builder in either OpenGL or GDI rendering mode Java and NET Note Java and NET use their own renderers that support anti aliasing transparency alpha blending and color gradients The only feature of the OpenGL renderer not available in the Java and C NET GLG applications is the hardware accelerated hidden surface removal For C NET applications on Windows that need this feature the GLG ActiveX Control provides an alternative to the GLG C class library that supports OpenGL Enabling OpenGL renderer The OpenGL renderer is enabled on per viewport basis by setting viewport s OpenGLHint flag to ON The flag may be set to several ON values with different rendering priorities described in the following section At run time the OpenGL renderer may be enabled or disabled by using the g g enable openg or gle disable opengl command line options Refer to the Command line Options section on page 221 for more information The OpenGL renderer may also be enabled or disabled globally by setting the GLG_OPENGL_MODE environment variable to True o
330. ese names are also used in the GLG Graphics Builder Stock Transformations vs Predefined Dynamics There are two sets of dynamics options for object attributes the stock transformations and predefined dynamics The stock transformations are basic transformation types used as building blocks to implement dynamic behavior Predefined dynamics are pre created combinations of stock transformations that provide easy to use options for the most common dynamic actions in the GLG editors Predefined dynamics may also be used by system integrators to extend GLG editors with elaborate application specific dynamics Predefined dynamics represent a collection of several stock transformations wired together to implement a specific dynamic behavior Most of the parameters of the transformations used to implement the predefined dynamics are hidden from the user and only the essential parameters marked as public are presented to the user as a simple list of public properties The Options Dynamics Options menu of the Graphics Builder contains options that control how the predefined dynamics are displayed in the Builder s dialogs The following chapters list the available types of the stock transformations first and list the predefined dynamics choices at the end Geometrical Transformations The geometrical transformations are those that can be applied to a point in three dimensional space or a data point of type G Because graphical objects are described b
331. esired time format X by default Refer to the description of the axis object s Time Format attribute on page 126 for information on the supported time formats TimeLabel A label appended to the displayed time string UTCFlag If set to 1 the UTC time will be displayed Otherwise a local time will be shown UpdateInterval Update interval in seconds 1 by default Date Display The Date Display dynamics may be attached to the TextString attribute of text objects to display the current date It has the following properties Enabled Enables or disables time updates In the Builder use the Run mode to see updates of the time display DateFormat A character string specifying a desired date format x by default Refer to the description of the axis object s Time Format attribute on page 126 for information on the supported time formats 174 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference DateLabel A label appended to the displayed time string UpdateInterval Update interval in seconds 1 by default Flow The Flow dynamics may be attached to the LineType attribute of lines and polygons to visualize flow of gases and liquids through pipes The dynamics shifts a line type pattern along the length of the line to animate the flow It has the following properties DisabledLineType The line type used to visualize the pipe when the flow is disabled The default value is 0 solid line EnabledLineType The line type pattern
332. esources Attaching tags to important resources of the drawing allows the user to easily browse them in the Builder By assigning meaningful names to the TagSource attributes the application can access the resources by their associated TagSource as shown in the following example Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing 61 GlgSetDTag drawing PressureMeterValue 25 GlgSetDTag drawing PressureAlarmState 0 Here the tags are used in virtually the same way as resources with the TagSource being handled as a global resource name Unlike resources TagSources do not have to be unique If several tags in the drawing have the same TagSource invoking GleSetTag with this TagSource will set values of all the tags This may be interpreted as a programmatic way of handling constrained values without actually constraining objects in the drawing The application may also easily query all tags defined in the drawing using the GlgCreateTagList method Using Tags for Database Connectivity Tags may also be used in a more sophisticated way to store database connectivity information in the drawing by attaching a tag to each resource in the drawing that needs to be updated from a database The tag s TagName attribute is set to a logical name that helps to identify the tag while browsing and the ZagSource is set to the name of the database field that will provide the data for the resource the tag is attached to A user can browse all tags define
333. et to GLOBAL in the template changing this attribute will change all instances If the flag is set to LOCAL the attribute of each instance may be set independently enabling independent dynamics The constraining behavior of the series is also controlled by its CloneType attribute When the series object is used in GLG widgets it may scale instances of the template For example if you increase the number of bars in a GLG bar graph widget the bars become narrower so they will fit on the X axis Series with this feature cannot be created in the GLG Graphics Builder you can still use the square series which scale their instances to obtain a similar effect However you can use the Builder to edit graphs that use it For a series with this feature enabled a rectangle defined by points with coordinates 1000 1000 and 1000 1000 in the template object coordinate system is mapped to the size of one bar slot Square Series The square series object is a special case of a series object used to position copies of a template object on a two dimensional grid Like a parallelogram the square series object has three control points that define a corner and two sides These three points define a parallelogram The first defined point is the center Rows of the square series are parallel to the line through the center and the second defined point and columns are parallel to the line through the center and the third defined point Created copies are
334. eter to define its entries entries Specifies the drawing files to display in the palette The entries parameter should be the last in the file and should contain nothing on the right side of the sign The drawing files are listed one per line on the lines following the entries key word Each drawing file defines one palette item and may contain the Icon Drawing or Widget resources as described in the Read Directory section to specify the icon to display and the object to insert in the drawing when the palette icon is selected File names may include directory path relative to the location of the palette description file The palette file may also contain comments lines starting with the character GLG Graphics Builder Menus 305 Adding Custom Palettes to the Builder Edit Undo The Builder uses the palettes pls file located in GLG s widgets directory to detect installed palettes during start up This file contains a list of palettes to be added to the Builder s Palettes Menu To add a new custom palette to the Builder create its palette description file and add it to the palettes pls file After restarting the Builder the new palette will show up in the Builder s palette list Each line of the palettes pls file contains the file name of a palette description file including a path name relative to the location of palettes pls The file may also contain separator lines lines that have just the symbol
335. ew plots are added they are assigned default names formed by appending the plot s index at the end of the Plot string i e Plot 0 Plot 1 and so on When plots are reordered default names change to reflect the new order a persistent custom name can be assigned to each plot Number of Y Axes Specifies a number of Y axes in the chart The chart automatically adds or deletes Y axes when the value of the attribute is changed When new Y axes are added they are assigned default names formed by appending the axis s index at the end of the YAxis string i e YAxis 0 YAxis 1 and so on When axes are reordered default names change to reflect the new order a persistent custom name can be assigned to each Y axis Number of Levels Specifies a number of level lines in the chart A level line object annotates a chart threshold by drawing a horizontal line at a specified height The chart automatically adds or deletes level lines when the value of the attribute is changed When new level lines are added they are assigned default names formed by appending the level index at the end of the Leve string i e Level 0 Level 1 and so on When level lines are reordered default names change to reflect the new order a persistent custom name can be assigned to each level line 114 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Common Range Controls whether or not the chart ranges are shared across
336. ewport HasResources flag to YES and the active element s HasResources flag to NO Alternatively an alias object named ValueX may be added to the viewport to specify the full path to the ValueX resource Edit the move distance and the initial position of the active element to make sure that the values of Factor in the range from 0 to 1 correspond to the active element moving from the left side of the viewport to the right Set the viewport Handler attribute to GlgSlider Make sure that the DisableInput attribute is set to NO When you run this drawing the G gSlider handler will read input from the cursor position when you click in the viewport and use that position to set the value of the viewport s ValueX resource Of course the ValueX resource need not control the position of an object A move transformation attached to the active element is what we expect to see but the resource could be attached to anything For example you could rotate a joystick in three dimensions based on the linear position of the mouse Input Objects 195 To make the slider granular create a scalar data resource named Granularity at the top level of the slider viewport s resource hierarchy The value of the object indicates the number of positions the slider may take In the Enterprise Edition of the Builder you can use the Object Custom Properties Add Custom Property menu to add a D property named Granularity to the slider s view
337. ext field in the Properties dialog shows the attribute s Value and allows in place editing Other scalar transformations ignore the value of the attribute and use one or more transformation parameters as input values For example the Range Conversion transformation ignores the value of the attribute uses its Input Value parameter as an input and sets the transformed value of the attribute to the resulting output In the Graphics Builder if an attribute that has a transformation that ignores the attribute s value the Value field in the Attribute dialog will be disabled the Property dialog will display the attribute s transformed value XfValue which also will be disabled for editing Any changes of the attribute should be done by changing the input value of the attached transformation Scalar transformations cannot be concatenated so you can t attach more than one scalar transformation to an attribute However you can chain transformations by attaching other scalar transformations to the parameters of a scalar transformation Refer to the Common Attribute Transformations section on page 166 for additional transformations that can be attached to scalar attributes GLG Objects 159 Range Conversion The Range Conversion transformation maps a range of input data values into a different range of output values For example if the transformation is set up to map the input values 12 through 20 to the values 0 to 1 an input value of
338. extends the Intermediate API with methods for programmatic object creation at run time It is used to create or copy objects on the fly when the number of objects varies and is determined dynamically at run time Other examples include dynamically configurable applications that create drawings based on a configuration file or custom editor applications that need to create objects with the mouse GLG Widgets The Toolkit provides a variety of prebuilt widgets such as dials meters buttons and toggles charts avionics process control and many other widgets Each widget is a GLG drawing that can be loaded and customized in the GLG Builder Custom widgets can be created by either modifying an existing widget or created from scratch using the Enterprise Edition of the Builder In the Builder widgets are available for drag and drop via the widget palettes Custom palettes can also be integrated into the GLG Builder and HMI Editor Programming Tools The GLG Toolkit includes several programming tools useful to application programmers These include a test data generator a file format converter and a code generator for including a GLG drawing directly within an application s code The GLG Graphics Builder and file converter may also be used as scripting tools for editing drawings using a script in batch mode or to create new drawings using a script Refer to the the GLG Programming Tools and Utilities chapter ofthe GLG Programming Manual for mor
339. f preserving all constraints Any consequent paste operations place a full copy of the object removing any constraints The pasted object is added at the position of the current editing focus For example if an editing focus is inside of a viewport the new object appears inside the viewport If it s inside a group the new object becomes a member of the group Delete removes the selected object from the drawing The deleted object is irrevocably discarded it is not placed on the clipboard To remove an object from the drawing and place it on the clipboard use Edit Cut This allows you to move an object from one part of the drawing to another Define Clone Offset Define Clone Offset determines a linear offset used for the placement of a clone with respect to the original object When you select Define Clone Offset the Builder prompts you to click on two points that define the clone path The clone path specifies the distance and direction from the origin of the original object to the origin of the clone using the object s coordinate system The Builder uses a default offset of 50 units to the Southeast for all objects unless you redefine the offset To clone an object use the clone options on the Edit menu Full Clone Strong Clone Weak Clone and Constrained Clone Define Clone Transformation Define Clone Transformation specifies a transformation to be used for positioning a cloned object The original object is copied
340. f the group are sorted by a parent object with the DepthSort attribute set to a value different from NO If there are two groups with the DepthSort attribute set to PARTS and the DepthSort of the parent object containing these groups is set to YES or SPECIAL the elements of these groups may be intermixed when drawn based on their position in 3D space Ifa group s DepthSort is set to PARTS the Visibility attribute of the group has no effect on the objects the group contains since it is the group s parent who is drawing them If you need to use the group s Visibility attribute to control the visibility of all objects in the group constrain the Visibility attributes of all objects in the group to the group s Visibility In addition to the DepthSort attribute the group s properties dialog also contains buttons for selecting and editing objects contained in the group as well as adding and deleting objects from the group The EditA button starts editing the attributes of objects in the group by using the first object in the group to select a set of attributes for editing which is a convenient option for fast editing of groups that contain objects of the same type For groups that contain objects of different types the Edit All Select option allows you to select a set of attributes to edit For example if the group contains both the polygon and text objects the Edit All Select option allows you to select the polygon or text attribute
341. f the new object By default you specify geometry by clicking on points inside the drawing area Alternatively you can change the way you specify points by using the Point Controls PC UY Position in the lower left of the window e P stands for Position Click on a spot to specify the position of the new point This method is the default e C stands for Constrain Click on an existing control point to constrain the new point to the existing control point see page 235 e U stands for Use Position Click on an existing control point to use the same coordinate values for the new point The points merely use the same coordinates they are not constrained so moving one point has no effect on the other e V stands for Value The Builder prompts you to specify the position of the new point by typing values in a dialog For most objects you only need to specify a few points The Builder always prompts you for all the information needed to create a particular object the prompt is displayed at the bottom of the drawing area For help in creating a particular shape see the Create chapter on page 326 For example to draw a circle you can click on the 0 button The Builder prompts you to specify the circle s center and another point that defines the radius To align the points of an object use the options on the Options Snap To submenu see page 356 When you select a Snap To value specifying coordinates with the mouse becomes less precise
342. f the result of the comparison is True the output value is set to 1 otherwise the output value is set to 0 The transformation has the following attributes OP The comparison operation may be one of the following A and B Parameters The input parameters to be compared A Boolean transformation ignores the attribute s Value and sets the attribute s transformed value XfValue to the result of the boolean function of three input parameters of the transformation If the result of the boolean function is True the output value is set to 1 otherwise the output value is set to 0 The transformation has the following attributes Function The boolean function may be one of the following A BIC Al B C A B C A BI 1C Al B amp amp C Al B 88 IC Al 1B 88 C A 1B 828 IC A amp amp B amp amp C IA amp amp B 88 C A amp amp IB amp amp C A amp amp B amp amp IC IA amp amp IB amp amp C IA amp amp B 828 1C A amp amp B amp amp 1C IA amp amp IB amp amp 1C Bitmask GLG Objects 163 A amp amp B C A amp amp 1B C A amp amp B C A amp amp B 1C IA A A B and C Parameters The input parameters of the boolean function Boolean Converter Bool var The type of boolean conversion function used to convert double input values to boolean may be one of the following var 0 True if the input value is not zero var gt 0 T
343. f the selected polygon if polygon s points change their position the path changes accordingly However adding or deleting points from the polygon after using the Constrain To Polygon button does not affect the path Finally Select Path can be used to select the path object ID so that adding or deleting points from the object is reflected in the path Select Path can also be used to use objects other than polygons such as arcs connectors or splines For the Use Marked transformation type option the dialog provides the Clone Type option that controls if the parameters of the added transformation copy are constrained to the corresponding parameters of the original transformation Use the Apply button when you have finished specifying the transformation Edit Dynamics Edit Dynamics lets you change the values of a dynamic transformation This option is equivalent to selecting the Edit Dynamics button from the Properties dialog It is grayed when the selected object has no dynamic transformations GLG Graphics Builder Menus 345 The Edit Dynamics Dialog The Edit Dynamics dialog lets you change parameters of dynamic transformations attached to the object change their order and delete selected transformations from any position in the list A list of transformations attached to the object is displayed on the left side of the dialog Selecting a transformation in the list displays its properties For stock transformations the attributes
344. factor by one since an additional tick is placed at the end of the axis Every time the Factor attribute is changed the old instances of the template are destroyed and the new number of instances is created Any resource values set in the old instances are destroyed LogType Defines how the template copies are positioned If this attribute is set to NO the copies are positioned linearly If it is set to YES they are positioned logarithmically The base of the logarithm is equal to the value of the Factor attribute minus one Inversed Controls how the instances are named If the value is DIRECT instance 0 is at the start of the series path If the value is INVERSED instance 0 is at the end CloneType The clone type used to create instances of the template It may be Full Weak Strong or Constrained Refer to the Cloning an Object section of the Using the GLG Graphics Builder for details on using the clone type Persistent Controls persistency of attribute settings for the series instances If set to VOLATILE default only the series template will be saved and the instances will be created from the template on hierarchy setup performed at loading time Any settings of the local attributes of the instances will be lost If the PERSISTENT setting is used the instances will be saved in the drawing preserving current settings when the drawing is loaded If the number of instances is increased by GLG Objects 101 changing the series
345. fault Constrained Clone setting is used When a marked Line Attributes object is reused constraining of corresponding attributes of the new copy and the original object is also controlled by the Builder s Attribute Clone Type option Colortable A colortable object defines a set of colors allocated for a viewport and provides an efficient way to manage colors for non TrueColor visuals On TrueColor systems and in the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit colortables are not used at run time In the Builder colortables are used even on the TrueColor systems to define the number of colors displayed in the Builder s color palette The color of an object in a viewport is defined by its three color coordinates but the color that is actually displayed is the nearest neighbor in the color table to the point defined by those coordinates This can yield surprising results in viewports with restrictive color tables on non TrueColor systems Note that the total number of colors available is the number of colors defined by the ColorFactor attribute times the number of grades specified with GradeHint If the product of the two numbers is greater than the number of colors your screen can display the total number of available colors may be less than the number of colors in the color table For example you are limited to 256 different colors at any one time on an 8 bit color machine and this hardware limitation takes precedence over the software color
346. filled with liquid and the drawing contains several such tanks the initial liquid color for all tanks will be the same when the drawing is loaded Bindings may be used to define a different liquid color for each tank that overrides the color defined in the template Bindings may also be used to constrain a color in the subdrawing to the color of another object in the drawing For example the color of the tank may be constrained to the color of pipes connected to 1t Bindings for an attribute such as the liquid color in the previous example are activated by naming the attribute in the template and setting its Global flag to BOUND If an attribute is BOUND the attribute is stored in the drawing instead of using the attribute from the subdrawing s template When the subdrawing is loaded the attribute from the template is replaced with bound to the attribute stored in the drawing When a subdrawing with named BOUND attributes is placed in a drawing it will have a Bindings array containing local copies of the bound attributes These attributes may be edited to define unique settings for each subdrawing instance Bindings are saved with the subdrawing When a subdrawing is loaded all named bound attributes of its Instance will be rebound i e replaced with the corresponding local copies stored in the Bindings array The local copies of the attributes in the Bindings array may be edited using the Edit GLG Objects 109 Bindings button i
347. formations for LineType attributes These trans formations will be available for LineType attributes in addition to the predefined transforma tion defined in the DXform group e VisibilityXform group defines transformations for object Visibility attributes GeomXform group defines transformations for geometrical transformations of objects and their control points It is used only by the GLG HMI Configurator All groups are optional and some of the groups can be removed if necessary Each object in the group defines a certain type of predefined dynamics and the name of the object in the group defines the label displayed in the predefined dynamics menu The order of predefined dynamics in the menu is defined by the drawing order of the objects in each group not by the visual order of their appearance in the drawing The Arrange Reorder menu options may be used to change the drawing order of the objects in a group Each object in a group has a transformation named XformObject attached to one of the object attributes as indicated by the X button on the right side of an attribute row in the object s Properties dialog For objects in the GeomXform group the transformations are added to the objects 286 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference themselves instead of their attributes The transformation defines custom predefined dynamics and may contain a complex collection of transformations wired together to perform a custom dynamic ac
348. fractional seconds in the time corresponding to the cursor s horizontal position Itis formed by formatting the number of milliseconds with the supplied double format sample_time_ms time charts only Replaced with the value showing the number of fractional seconds in the time stamp of the selected sample It is formed by formatting the number of milliseconds with the supplied double format input_y Replaced with the Y value corresponding to the cursor s vertical position in the Low High range of the selected plot and formatted with the supplied double format sample_y Replaced with the Y value of the selected sample formatted with the supplied double format sample_valid Replaced with the yes or no strings depending on the Valid flag of the selected sample The final string is formatted with the supplied string format A chart s tooltip is activated by adding a tooltip action to the chart object using the Object Add Tooltip menu option setting the action s Tooltip property to ChartTooltip and setting the ProcessMouse attribute of the chart s parent viewport to include the Tooltip mask This is the default for all charts in the Real Time Charts palette The content of the chart s TooltipFormat attribute is then used to format the tooltip If the value of TooltipFormat is not set the following value is used as a default lt axis_string s gt axis value lt axis_value_string s gt 118 GLG User s Manual a
349. from the Object pull down menu To add marked custom properties select another object then choose Custom Properties Add Marked Properties from the same pull down menu The custom property lists can contain lists of lists of custom properties For example an option menu object may have a list of custom properties that contains another list named JnitItemList The InitItemList contains items to be displayed in the option menu To mark this inner list select the option menu object select Custom Properties Edit Custom Properties from the Object pull down menu select nit temList with a single mouse click and press the Mark List button To add the marked list of custom properties as a list to another object select a new object then select Custom Properties Add Custom Properties Add Marked List from the Object pull down menu Controlling the View A GLG drawing is a set of three dimensional objects defined in limitless space However the Builder renders these objects in two dimensions on the screen To present a drawing the Builder applies a set of transformations to the objects in the drawing To get a different view of the drawing you can change some of the parameters for these transformations including the view projection scale coordinate system and center For example the Builder s main view shows the X and Y axes with the Z axis perpendicular to the screen In this projection the control points of objects you create in the main
350. g Specify the values to use in the transformation by typing them in the boxes Alternatively use the buttons on the right to supply the values using the mouse the Builder prompts you for each required value Optional step for dynamic transformations enter a name for the transformation s controlling parameter into the Variable Name field and define the ranges that control mapping of input data to the change of the Factor parameter If the default ranges are modified a Range Conversion transformation will be attached to the Factor parameter and Using the GLG Graphics Builder 241 the name entered in the Variable Name field will be assigned to the Input Value parameter of Range Conversion If the default ranges are not modified the name will be assigned to the Factor attribute of the attached dynamics 5 Click on the Apply button to change the definition of the object by applying the transformation to the object 6 Toundo a static transformation right after you apply it use the Reverse button to specify an inverse transformation and click on Apply again To undo a dynamic transformation delete the attached transformation using Object Delete Dynamics or the Delete Dynamics toolbar icon Defining a static or dynamic transformation adds it to the transformation list so you can access it using Object Edit Dynamics If you want to attach the same transformation definition to other objects you can use the Mark Object or Mark List butto
351. g creates a new instance that uses the same template Editing the template modifies all the instances of the subdrawing in the drawing To create instances of the template first create an included subdrawing select an object to use as a template click on the SubDrawing From Object icon in the Object Palette and click in the drawing to position the subdrawing If the template contains several named objects used as icons for object dynamics enter two colon separated resource paths to one of the objects ObjectPath and its anchor point OriginPath and press OK To display the whole template press OK without entering ObjectPath File SubDrawing A File SubDrawing is used to replicate instances of another drawing used as the subdrawing s template Editing the template drawing changes all instances of it in other drawings To create a file subdrawing click on the SubDrawing From File icon in the Object Palette click in the drawing to position the subdrawing and define the drawing file to be used as the template If the template drawing contains several named objects used as icons for object dynamics enter colon separated resource paths to one of the objects ObjectPath and its anchor point OriginPath and press OK To display the whole template drawing press OK without entering ObjectPath Palette SubDrawing The Palette SubDrawing uses some object in the drawing palette as a template To create a palette subdrawing select Object Creat
352. g dithering patterns except for the image objects Transparency is not supported in the Postscript output MoveMode This attribute specifies how the object s control points are modified when the object is moved with the mouse and may have the following values GLG_MOVE POINTS Moves all controls points of the object but does not move control points of geometrical transformations attached to the object if any For example if the object has a rotate transformation attached the center of rotation will not be moved with the object when the object is repositioned GLG_STICKY_ CENTER MODE Moves all control points of the object as well as the control points of geometrical transformations attached to the object if any This setting may be used when the object has to rotate around its center when the object is moved the center of rotation will moved with the object to preserve its position relatively to the object This is the default for newly created objects GLG_ MOVE BY XFORM Instead of moving the object by changing the spatial coordinates of its control points the object is moved by creating a matrix move transformation and attaching it to the object The transformation moves the object without reassigning coordinates of its control points which is useful if it is needed to preserve the original coordinates of an object s points In addition to moving an object with the mouse the attribute also controls how the object is modified us
353. g priorities from highest 1 to the lowest 3 which control the type of the OpenGL renderer to use hardware or software Viewports with higher priorities use hardware accelerated renderer while viewports with lower priorities may use software renderer The software renderer may be used for icon buttons and other secondary windows with a small number of objects or infrequent updates The use of the software renderer allows an application with a large number of viewports to use nice anti aliased OpenGL rendering for all viewports without exceeding the graphics card s limit on the maximum number of OpenGL windows which varies from card to card The runtime mapping of the OpenGL priorities to the type of the used OpenGL renderer is controlled by either command line options global configuration resources or environment variables Refer to the Hardware and Software Renderers OpenGL Priority section on page 20 for detailed description of the runtime mapping and all mapping options Even if the OpenGLHint is set to ON the OpenGL renderer may be disabled by the g g disable opengl GLG Objects 95 command line option setting the GLG_OPENGL_MODE environment variable to False or setting the GlgOpenGLMode global configuration resource to 0 Refer to the OpenGL or GDI Native Windowing System Renderer section on page 18 for details OpenGL Read only attribute for the programming use that provides the current status of the OpenGL renderer If the O
354. g resource InputFormat This S type resource indicates an optional format and may have the following values string for entering any alpha numerical characters integer for entering integer values double for entering floating point values If the resource is not specified the string default value is assumed MinValue Max Value Specify optional minimum and maximum values of the numerical input EnforceRange For the numerical input this optional resource defines how the values outside of the MinValue MaxValue range are handled If it is defined and set to 0 the input values will not be adjusted and may exceed the range If it is set to 1 or not defined the input values outside of the range will be adjusted to fit inside the range InputInvalid This resource contains the input status for numerical inputs and may be set to the following values when the input is completed input was parsed successfully 1 input parsing error 2 input our of range Value This resource contains the entered value of the numerical input object ValueFormat This resource specifies an optional C style format that controls how the entered value is displayed in the numerical input object Glg Text Input Objects 205 The text widget is used for entering single lines of typed text It also contains a resource that provides initial text to display and another to control the widget s appearance when it receives the
355. g section on page 140 for details When a rendering object is added to all objects in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added rendering objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used GLG Objects 73 Parallelogram Rectangle A parallelogram is a four sided polygon that includes implicit constraints to keep the opposite sides parallel The parallelogram has only three control points and one constrained point The attributes of a parallelogram are the same as the attributes of a polygon except that because a parallelogram is always closed the OpenType attribute is not present When a parallelogram is exploded in the Builder it becomes a regular four sided polygon The constraints that keep its sides parallel are removed and the fourth point becomes a simple control point A rectangle is a special case of the parallelogram object in which each pair of adjacent sides is perpendicular A rectangle has two control points located at the end of the rectangle s diagonal and two constrained point at the end of another diagonal which are managed automatically Rounded Rectangle and Ellipse An object of type ROUNDED is used to render both rectangles with rounded corners and ellipses Same as a parallelogram the rounded object is defined by three control points but it is initially cre
356. g the extension and a README file with more information The Editor Extension API Files section of this chapter describes common files used by all DLL examples All OEM Extension DLLs may use both the GLG Standard and Extended API for implementing the extension Since the DLLs are used with the GLG editor and use its Extended API the extension DLLs themselves are royalty free and do not require any additional GLG libraries The custom extension DLLs may be deployed in the Graphics Builder or HMI Configurator by using the command line options or configuration file variables listed in the corresponding sections below Each DLL may also be deployed by using a default DLL name and placing the DLL into the directory where the editor executable is located On Linux Unix an extension DLL with a default name may also be placed into any location where 1t will be searched for by the dynamic linker such as usr lib or a location specified by a LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable On Windows an extension DLL with a default name may also be placed into any location where it will be searched for by the LoadLibrary function The default name of an extension DLL is formed by a base name and extension The following lists the default base names of the custom extension DLLs Custom Data Browser DLL libglg custom_data Linux Unix glg custom_data Windows 290 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Custom Run Module DLL libgle custom proto Linux Unix
357. ge of the drawing Drawing Zoom Mode only R anchor on the right edge of the drawing Drawing Zoom Mode only L anchor on the lower edge of the drawing Drawing Zoom Mode only A rotate the drawing clockwise around X axis Drawing Zoom Mode only a rotate the drawing counterclockwise around X axis Drawing Zoom Mode only B rotate the drawing clockwise around Y axis Drawing Zoom Mode only b rotate the drawing counterclockwise around Y axis Drawing Zoom Mode only C rotate the drawing clockwise around Z axis Drawing Zoom Mode or GIS Zoom Mode with the rectangular projection only c rotate the drawing counterclockwise around Z axis Drawing Zoom Mode or GIS Zoom Mode with the rectangular projection only g Ifthe mouse is located on top of a GIS Object sets the viewport s GIS Zoom Mode and remembers the selected GIS Object If the mouse is located on top of the chart object sets the viewport s Chart Zoom Mode In the GIS Zoom Mode the map displayed in the GIS Object is zoomed and panned instead of the viewport s drawing and in the Chart Zoom Mode the chart is zoomed and scrolled Zooming panning ZoomTo and reset accelerators are supported in the GIS and Chart Zoom Modes G Resets the GIS or Chart Zoom Mode p available only in the Graphics Builder in the GIS or Chart Zoom Mode In the GIS Zoom Mode it displays the lat lon and X Y coordinates of the point at the current cursor position If the GLG_GIS_ ELEVA
358. ge transparency is supported via the Visibility attribute by setting it to fractional values In the OpenGL Java and C NET environments PNG images with an alpha channel transparency are also supported An image may be of fixed size defined by the size of the image in the original file and have one control point The image object may also be resizable in which case it s size is adjusted to fit the rectangle defined by the image s two control points An image object has the following attributes ImageType Defines the type of the image a fixed size GLG_FIXED_IMAGE with 1 control point or a scalable GLG_SCALED_IMAGE with two control points ImageFile Defines the location of the image file in one of the supported image formats In the Graphics Builder as well as for the C C ActiveX the type of the file is determined by the file s extension gif for a GIF file Jpg for a JPEG file png for a PNG file bmp for a Windows bitmap Windows only Note When an image object is created in the Graphics Builder a file browser is used to select an image file and an absolute path is stored in ImageFile To allow the application to be moved to a different directory or a different environment web or Java without adjusting image paths it is recommended to edit the stored ImageFile path to make it relative to the location of the drawing If the ImageFile attribute defines a relative file name the Toolkit tries to find the file it in
359. ges You must explicitly save the drawing using File Save before exiting the GLG Graphics Builder 302 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Palettes The Palettes Menu provides access to palettes of widgets and other pre built objects By default only the Custom Objects and HMI Editor Widget Samples palettes are installed Other palettes are optional and will be installed only if selected Possible palettes include Real Time Charts 2D Graphs 3D Graphs Controls Avionics Process Control and Special Widgets palettes The Palettes Menu lists all available palettes of pre built objects To display a palette select it from the palettes list To add an object from a palette into the drawing click on its icon in the palette The Builder will insert a copy of the object into the drawing Give the object a name for accessing its resources and adjust its shape using the resize box To load an object or widget from a palette as a new drawing Ctrl click on the widget s icon in the palette The current drawing will be discarded after a prompt and the widget s drawing will be loaded The run command will also be set to match the widget s resources This is a convenient way to create a drawing containing just one widget The widget s viewport is named Widget by default so the drawing may be saved and used with a GLG program The drawing also contains a small icon viewport used by the Builder when the widget is shown in the palette This ico
360. ght or above and to the left Use Ctrl Z to toggle between the three possible values of the offset SubDrawing A subdrawing is used to replicate a template in one drawing or in multiple drawings When the template is changed all subdrawings that use the template will change as well The template may be included in the same drawing or stored in a separate drawing file By using the subdrawing you can make a drawing file smaller than it might be otherwise since only one copy of the template is saved You can also edit a template in one place to change all of its copies in the drawing The subdrawing object can also be used to implement object dynamics changing the object that is displayed There are three types of subdrawing objects that differ in the way they store their template e An included subdrawing SubDrawing From Object menu option stores its template in the subdrawing object of A file subdrawing SubDrawing From File option stores the template in an external drawing file nx e A palette subdrawing SubDrawing From Palette option stores the template in the drawing as a separate palette for convenient editing 334 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference To create an included subdrawing 1 Select an object to use as a template Select Object Properties to set the attributes of the template object so that its instance will inherit the appropriate settings Name the object Click on the 2 button or select
361. ging Starts dragging mode Click and drag the mouse after selecting this option to scroll the drawing with the mouse Scrolling the drawing with the mouse may also be performed by the Ctrl click drag sequence in any empty area of the drawing However if the drawing area is completely occupied by objects this menu option provides an alternative Traverse The Traverse Menu provides options to let you work with the object hierarchy 314 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Hierarchy Down Hierarchy Down shows the members of the object hierarchy below the selected object The effect of this option depends on the selected object e For a container object such as a group or viewport this option shows the elements inside the container object e For a composite object such as a series or object reference this option shows the template for the composite object e For the file reference subdrawing this option loads the referenced file e For polylines and polysurfaces this option shows the template marker object For non composite objects this option is grayed This menu option is equivalent to the Hierarchy Down button at the left side ofthe Builder window To navigate back up through the object hierarchy use Traverse Up Transformation Down For a transformed object Transformation Down shows the original object before its transformation To return to a view of the transformed object use Traverse Up Up Up undoes t
362. glg custom proto Windows Custom Editor Options DLL libgle custom option Linux Unix glg custom_ option Windows The extension uses a platform s standard extension for dynamic libraries d on Windows so on Linux and most Unix platforms s on HPUX For example the default name of the Custom Data Browser DLL is glg custom_data dll on Windows and libglg custom_data so on Linux Custom Data Browser DLL A custom data browser DLL may be provided for connecting to proprietary data sources to browse available tags in a GLG editor to select a tag s data source The Browse button in the Data Tag dialog starts a Data Browser that will use the supplied custom data DLL for selecting a tag source When the tag selection is made the selected tag is inserted into the data tag s TagSource field The DLL is also used by the Data Browser widget available at the application runtime The example is located in the editor_extensions data_browser_example directory and works with both the GLG Graphics Builder and the GLG HMI Configurator The run_data_example script in the example s directory may be used to run the GLG Builder with a custom data browser The script can be edited to define the version of the GLG editor to run To test the data browser run the script to start the Builder add a tag to an object s attribute and click on the Browse button of the Data Tag dialog to start the tag browser Select a controller tag group and tag then press S
363. go back to the top level SubWindow Sub Window is a special type of a subdrawing used to switch drawings displayed in the Sub Window object SubWindow has two control points that define an area in which the template drawing is displayed and its template must be a viewport object To create a subwindow 1 Click on the button or select Object Create SubWindow SubWindow From File menu option then click on two points in the drawing to define the subwindow s position 2 Select the drawing file to use This drawing may contain Widget resource to specify the viewport object in the drawing to be used as a template 3 Ifthe drawing contains several named viewports enter resource paths to one of the viewports and press OK To display the Widget viewport press OK without entering ObjectPath A subwindow may be used as a subdrawing with two control points which is useful for interface objects such as buttons icons and menus if a button template changes instances of the button in all drawings will change as well Bindings may be used to specify unique attribute values for each instance of the subwindow such as a button label or a custom action ID To edit the subwindow s template object use Traverse Hierarchy Down When finished use Traverse Up to go back to the top level Connector This option creates a connector object which may be used to connect other objects in the drawing It is useful when implementing node and e
364. gramming system That is an object is simply a thing that may be represented as a collection of data and the methods used to access that data Some objects have a graphical appearance For example a polygon appears on the screen as a flat shape bounded by a line Within the context of the GLG Toolkit however it is more useful to think of that polygon as a simple collection of points colors and line types the data and interfaces to access these data the methods Since the graphical appearance of the object is completely defined by its data the program can control the way the object is rendered on the screen by changing these data using just a handful of methods common for all GLG objects An object s data are referred to as its attributes Using the same example a polygon s color the width of its border lines and the position of its vertex points are each attributes of the object Most of these attributes are stored as data objects which keep the value name and some other properties of each attribute The notion of an attribute in GLG is recursive as the attribute s value and name are attributes of an attribute object itself Some properties of an object are kept as plain data instead of using data objects For example the name attribute is kept as a character string to avoid infinite recursion of a name object having its own name attribute and so on An object may contain other objects An object that contains other objects is said
365. group see page 316 Enter group editing mode using Traverse Select Next or the button on the group s Properties dialog You can edit the group member you select without having to traverse the hierarchy see page 315 For nested groups move directly to the lowest level of grouping using Traverse Select Bottom or the button on the group s Properties dialog see page 315 Temporary Groups A temporary group may be used for quick editing of several objects A temporary group may be created by dragging a rectangle around objects in the drawing with the mouse all objects that intersect a rectangle will be included into the group Alternatively Ctrl click may be used to add or Using the GLG Graphics Builder 267 delete objects from the selection The Edit and Arrange menus contain additional options for creating temporary groups The Permanent Group toggle in the Arrange menu may be used to change the type of the group from temporary to permanent and vice versa The temporary group is automatically destroyed when it is unselected Generating Objects from a Template To create a set of objects that share characteristics you can generate objects from a template instead of cloning or copying an original With generated objects you can change the whole set just by editing the template and position the set automatically The Series Square Series and Reference objects all consist of a set of instances and a template that controls
366. group object use Traverse Up This option is equivalent to the Select Next button in the Selected Object Properties dialog for a group object Select Next mode is aborted when an object outside of the group is selected Select Bottom When you select a member of a group with a mouse click you select the entire group If you want to edit only one member of the group you can use Select Bottom to select it This option selects members of a group that exist at the lowest visible level of the object hierarchy That is if one of the members of the group is itself a group when you choose Select Bottom and then click on a member of that sub group you select only the object on which you clicked If you want to select the entire sub group instead you can use Select Next to select objects at the next lower level of the 316 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference hierarchy of nested groups When an object inside the group is selected using Select Bottom the boundaries of its parent group are highlighted with a dotted line to provide visual feedback for the traversal of the group hierarchy To change attributes that are common to all the members of a group use Traverse Edit All or the Edit All button on the group s Properties dialog To delete a group object and separate its members for independent editing select the group and use Arrange Explode Object Alternatively you can select the group and use Traverse Hierarchy Down repeated
367. guidelines for including resources e Name the object if you plan to animate it Animation requires access to a named resource e Name the object if it corresponds to a graphical object in the drawing that you want to access programmatically later on This is not required but it lets you use the resource hierarchy to locate any graphical object in the drawing regardless of its visibility or location in the hierar chy e Name the object if you plan to edit its attributes frequently This is not required but it lets you use the resource hierarchy to locate and select the object s attributes e Name control points if selecting them with the mouse would be difficult or if you Il need to access the point programmatically later on This is not required but can simplify editing closely positioned points e It is not usually necessary to name transformations though you should name the attribute of the transformation that you plan to animate e Do not assign the same name to different objects and use care when cloning or copying objects renaming the copies Naming conflicts where more than one object at the same level have the same name can have unpredictable effects These guidelines are not intended to force you into naming more objects than you find useful but they may help you to make better use of the resource hierarchy s ability to structure the drawing and provide access to objects especially as you begin using the Builder
368. h connector objects constrained to their control point 270 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Creating Animated Lines and Surfaces For animated lines and surfaces use the polyline and polysurface objects A polyline is a line or set of line segments with a defined number of points A polysurface is a set of polygons These are special objects used in graphs that may be animated by using a history object to address their points or segments see page 272 The polyline and polysurface objects use two templates The Marker template is used for the control points of the objects The Polygon template controls the line segments of the polyline and the surface polygons of the polysurface Each instance of the object is named using the template object name and an index For example for a two segment polyline there are three marker instances Marker0 Marker1 and Marker2 and two line instances Polygon0 and Polygon The Polyline Object A polyline is a specialized series that consists of a line or set of line segments and points To create a polyline click on two points to specify the beginning and end of the polyline The Builder prompts you for the factor which controls the number of points along the line The number of segments in the polyline is controlled by its Segments attribute To edit the Marker template object use Traverse Hierarchy Down When you finish editing use Traverse Up to see the instance objects To edit the Pol
369. h matching actions and executing these actions If an object has several actions of the same type attached all of them will be processed For other Action Type Trigger combinations that have not yet been handled the search for matching actions continues until it processes all selected objects GLG Objects 179 When processing actions the old style prior to v 3 5 custom events and mouse feedback properties of the drawing are handled the same way as actions the action processing stops when the first property matching the event has been processed For example is an object has the MouseClickEvent property a custom event will be generated and the search for the mouse click event actions will stop The action object provides a more efficient alternative to the old style custom events mouse feedback and tooltip properties such as MouseClickEvent TooltipString etc since it does not involve resource name queries required by these properties If the drawing does not contain the old style properties the GlgDisablePre35ObjectEvents global configuration resource or the GLG_DISABLE_PRE35 OBJECT_EVENTS environment variable may be set to speed up mouse move processing for large drawings Action Object Attributes Most of the action attributes are common across all available action types with the exception of the tooltip action that has only two attributes Tooltip and Enabled The following lists all attributes of an action object ActionType
370. h the attribute value between GlgOpenGL Hardware Threshold and GlgOpenGLThreshold will be rendered using the software OpenGL renderer if available glg opengl threshold lt N gt Specifies the value of GlgOpenGLThreshold All viewports with a value of the OpenGLHint attribute greater than GlgOpenGLThreshold will be rendered using the GDI renderer glg disable hardware opengl Disables hardware OpenGL If the OpenGL driver is enabled only the software based OpenGL renderer will be used glg disable software opengl Disables software OpenGL If the OpenGL driver is enabled only the hardware based OpenGL renderer will be used glg debug opengl Generates extended diagnostic output for the OpenGL driver glg disable timers Disables timer transformations in the drawings for debugging purposes Environment variables may be used instead of the command line options if necessary A verbose mode may be set by setting the GLG_VERBOSE environment variable to True The OpenGL renderer may also be enabled or disabled by setting the GLG_OPENGL_MODE environment variable to True or False or by setting the GlgOpenGLMode global configuration resource in the GLG configuration file to the following values 0 La ve disable the OpenGL renderer enable the OpenGL renderer don t change the default setting Refer to the Builder Setup and Customization chapter on page 279 for a list of all supported environment variables Using th
371. hanging the coordinate system allows the rotation of objects in different coordinate systems Use the options on the View Coordinate System submenu to select a coordinate system The effect of these options depends on the content of the drawing and the object you select For example consider a drawing that contains a group of three polygons such a drawing has separate coordinate systems for each polygon for the group object and for the viewport For this drawing all the View Coordinate System submenu options are applicable However for a drawing containing one polygon only the Object option applies Using the GLG Graphics Builder 265 Changing the Viewing Area To control the scale of the drawing use the options on the View Zooming submenu or the Zoom and ZoomTo buttons in the Control Panel zom DITA 11 1 a To use a different point as the center of the Builder window use the View Pan To option Alternatively you can use scrollbars or Ctrl click in the drawing to drag it with the mouse Using Advanced Objects The Builder includes certain objects that can be used for specialized functions They simplify the construction of complex drawings The functions and the objects that provide them are Function Object type Associate objects together either temporarily Group or permanently Create a set of replicated objects from a Series template spacing them
372. hart to the XY Scatter chart The axis s Visibility attribute can be used to turn the X axis on or off Edit Y Axes A button in the Properties dialog for editing the chart s Y axes It activates the Y Axis List dialog as well as the Properties dialog for the selected Y axis An axis s Visibility attribute can be used to turn individual Y axis on or off The Y Axis List dialog has buttons for adding deleting and reordering axes in the list When axes are reordered axes with default names such as YAxis 0 YAxisttl etc are assigned new default names that match their new position in the list A persistent custom name can be assigned to each Y axis Edit Background A button in the Properties dialog for editing attributes of the chart s drawing area To disable the background set its FilIType to NONE or set its Opacity to 0 Edit Grid A button in the Properties dialog for editing attributes of the chart s X and Y grid lines Use the chart s DrawGrid attribute to enable or disable the grid Edit Level Lines A button in the Properties dialog for editing the chart s level lines It activates the Level Line List dialog as well as the Properties dialog for the selected level line A level s Opacity attribute can be set to 1 or 0 to turn individual levels on or off The Level Line List dialog has buttons for adding deleting and reordering axes in the list GLG Objects 115 When level lines are reordered level lines
373. hat works with native buttons toggles and check box controls GlgNText A native text handler that takes advantage of native text input widget Works with both single and multi line text edit controls GlgNList A native list handler that handles native list widget in a cross platform way Works with both single and multiple selection list controls GIgNOption A native option menu handler that works with the native option menu and combo box controls Input Objects 193 GlgMenu Assembles buttons into a menu or a radio box GlgBrowser A specialized browser for selecting object resources tags and alarms GlgFontBrowser A specialized browser optimized for browsing X Windows fonts GlgClock Displays the time Can also be used as a stopwatch to record elapsed time GlgTimer Triggers periodic updates with a specified rate May be used to attach various blinking action to objects It is superseded by more flexible Timer transformation GlgPalette A specialized menu allowing a user to select arbitrary objects Attaching an Input Handler To make the widget sensitive to the input events an input handler is attached to the widget internally The input handler is a block of code that reacts to the incoming events changes the widget s appearance and calls the input callback when some event is translated into a change in the widget s state For example a slider widget reacts to mouse events by moving the graphical element
374. he Factor and the Distance attribute If the Direction attribute has the XYZ value there are three Distance Factor pairs one for each dimension Move The Move transformation like the MoveBy transformation is simply used to relocate a geometrical value The difference is in how the move is specified A MoveBy transformation moves a point a given distance in a predetermined direction A Move transformation specifies the direction explicitly by using two points in the drawing The Move object has the following attributes StartPoint The start point of the move vector specified with a geometrical value EndPoint The end point of the move vector specified with a geometrical value Factor Normalized move parameter The actual move vector is the product of the Factor and the vector defined by the Start and End points Rotate The Rotate transformation specifies a point in space to rotate about and a number of degrees to rotate Rotation Axis Specifies the axis around which the object rotates and is selected at the creation time The available values are X Y or Z Center The center point specified as a value Angle Rotation angle in degrees counter clockwise StartAngle Start angle of rotation in degrees measured counter clockwise The object is always rotated from its original position by the start angle even if the factor is 0 The start angle is convenient for defining the start position of rotation without actually rotating t
375. he GlgExportTags and GlgImportTags methods are provided in both C C ActiveX Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit s API The G g mportTags method may be used to load database connectivity information from an external tag file at run time An application may utilize the same drawing with different databases using the tag file to map the tags in the drawing to the database fields The GlgCreateTagList API method may be used in an application to query all tags defined in the drawing and obtain database mapping from the tag s TagSource attribute as shown in the Tags Example source code Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing 63 Custom Properties for Storing Application Specific Data Custom Properties may be attached to any graphical object to store application specific data related to the object The custom properties are attached using the Object Custom Properties Add Custom Property menu and are saved with the drawing The object s custom properties can be retrieved in a program as object s resources using their resource names Custom properties can be organized hierarchically using lists The 4dd Custom Property menu has options for adding custom properties of different data types as well as lists of custom properties Lists may be used to group large collections of custom properties for easier access Integrated Alarms for Value Monitoring Alarms may be attached to any data object to monitor its value For the D double dat
376. he alarm state changes from one alarm state to another for example from High to Low a message with the Reset action is generated for the previous alarm state then a message with the Set action is generated for the new alarm state Range2 Alarm This alarm is similar to the Range alarm but adds the following attributes that define second thresholds in addition to High and Low High High Defines the high high range of the value The alarm message with the HighHigh subaction is generated when the value reaches or exceeds the HighHigh range Low Low Defines the low low range of the value The alarm message with the LowLow subaction is generated when the value drops below or equal to the LowLow range The alarm generates the same messages as the Range alarm with the addition of the alarm messages with the HighHigh and LowLow subactions for the corresponding alarm states Change Alarm The Change alarm can be attached to an attribute of any type D S or G to monitor changes of its value The change alarm does not define any new attributes in addition to Alarm Label and Enabled The Change alarm generates an alarm message with the ValueChange action and NULL subaction every time the value is changed Action Object An action can be attached to a graphical object to perform a specified action when user interacts with the object at run time There are three types of actions that differ based on the activation conditions Mouse action
377. he dynamics alarms or tags attached to an object s attributes bypassing the Attribute dialog XfValue is an edit only text field that shows the transformed value of the attribute If the attribute does not have any transformation attached the transformed value will be the same as the attribute value otherwise it will show the transformed value of the attribute that reflects the combined effect of all transformations attached to the attribute For convenience all object attributes have default attributes names Therefore you can edit an attribute of an object by browsing its resource hierarchy and locating the attribute see page 245 For a complete list of the objects attributes and their default attribute names see the Appendix C GLG Objects Attribute Table chapter on page 369 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual If an attribute has a transformation attached that overrides the attribute s value the Value field will be read only Ifthe Edit Dynamics or Edit Alarm dialogs are open to edit a transformation or alarm attached to the attribute object the Attribute dialog is disabled for the duration of the editing This behavior may be changed using the ModalXformDialogs parameter of the glg config file Using the GLG Graphics Builder 233 Editing Control Points A control point is just a data attribute of an object containing the coordinates of one point However since the Builder uses a different technique for editing control poi
378. he effect of Traverse Hierarchy Down returning to a higher level of the object hierarchy It also undoes the effect of Traverse Transformation Down returning to a view of the transformed object Set Focus Set Focus enters a mode that makes a viewport s contents available for editing without filling the whole Builder window This lets you edit the contents of a viewport in the context of the surrounding drawing unlike Hierarchy Down which excludes from the drawing area any objects not within the selected branch of the object hierarchy When the focus is set to a viewport different from the main drawing area Traversing Down is disabled until the focus is returned to the main drawing To set the focus use this menu option or click on the Set Focus button on the Control Panel The Builder prompts you to select a viewport to focus on Ctrl Shift clicking on a viewport also moves focus into it acting as a convenient shortcut for Set Focus To return to the default editing mode use Traverse Main Focus or click on the Main Focus button GLG Graphics Builder Menus 315 Main Focus Main Focus returns focus to the main drawing area Ctrl Shift clicking on a top level viewport of the drawing area also moves focus into it Main Focus terminates the Set Focus mode To edit the contents of the selected viewport use Traverse Hierarchy Down This option is grayed until you use Traverse Set Focus to change the viewport editing mode Select
379. he object Factor Normalized rotation parameter Changing the factor from 0 to 1 changes the actual rotation angle from StartAngle to StartAngle Angle Shear The Shear transformation is like a rotation except that each point of the shape being sheared is constrained to stay on a line parallel with the shear direction 154 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Direction Specifies the direction of the shear and is selected at the creation time Possible values are X Y and Z Center The center point specified as a geometrical value Shear Scalar shear coefficients relative to the selected shearing axes Factor Normalized shear parameter The actual shearing coefficients are products of the Factor and the Shear coefficients Scale The Scale transformation defines a center point and a factor An input point is transformed by measuring its distance from the center point and moving it along the line defined by those two points to a point whose distance from the center point is the original distance times the Scale value Center The center point specified as a geometrical value Scale Scalar scale coefficient Start Scale Start scale coefficient Factor Normalized scale parameter Changing the factor from 0 to 1 changes the object s actual scale factor from Start Scale to Scale There is no separate Mirror transformation object You can create one in the editor but it is just a convenience like the rectangle A mirror transfo
380. he whole object is drawn If the value is less than 1 only a portion of the object s fill will be drawn as defined by the fill amount The object s fill type must have FILL enabled in order to be rendered The object s edge is not affected by the value of the Fill Amount For text objects only the text is clipped the text box is not affected ArrowType The type of arrow s attached to a polygon or any of its subclasses spline arc or connector The arrow type is a composite attribute that determines both the arrows type EDGE FILL or FILL amp EDGE and position START END START AND END or MIDDLE For arrows positioned in the middle of the polygon the arrow type also determines an arrow s direction DIRECT from start to end point or INVERSED pointing from end to start If the value is NONE no arrows are rendered The difference between FILL and FILL amp EDGE arrow types becomes visible for lines with line width greater than 1 The geometry of the arrowheads is controlled by the ArrowShape attribute and is adjusted to match the line width for thick lines The value of the attribute contains bytes the low order byte defines the arrow position and the high order byte defines the arrow fill type which may have the same values as the polygon fill type ArrowShape The shape of the arrow in pixels The X and Y coordinates of the arrow shape value are used The X coordinate defines the length of the arrow along the line the Y
381. he widget becomes a stopwatch measuring elapsed time instead of absolute time Used as a stopwatch the handler recognizes user input when the control buttons are operated All the resources are optional Hour Min Sec These resources indicate the time in its traditional format All scalar data types the hour ranges from 0 to 11 and the minute and second resources range from 0 to 59 ValueHour ValueMin ValueSec These resources are also used to indicate the time However instead of measuring hours minutes and seconds they indicate the proportion of the clock s circumference used to indicate the desired quantity For example six hours is indicated by the value 0 5 and 15 seconds by the value 0 25 These resources are generally used to drive the arms of a clock drawing TimeString This string resource contains a character string indicating the time TimerState If this resource is present the widget functions as a stopwatch If the clock is running the TimerState is 1 otherwise it equals 0 Start Stop Reset These three resources each indicate a button widget When the Start button is pushed the stopwatch begins timing The Stop button stops the clock and the Reset button resets the time to zero The GlgClock interaction handler with the TimerState resource 9stopwatch supports the following messages that can be sent using the GlgSendMessage method Start Starts the stopwatch The message has no parameters Stop
382. hed transformation s center points preserving their relative position This may be used when you want to preserve the original coordinates of an object s control points The MoveMode attribute is located in the Selected Object Properties dialog next to the HasResources flag Adding Attribute Dynamics Attribute dynamics are accomplished by adding a dynamic transformation to an attribute object Examples of commonly used attribute dynamics include visibility color and text dynamics 242 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The data type of the attribute controls the type of transformation you can apply to it For geometric values that represent points in the drawing the dialogs are similar to those for transforming objects For other attribute objects that represent scalar string or color values the transformation type is selected from a list displayed inside the Attribute dialog The Builder provides various types of dynamic transformations that can be used as building blocks for implementing elaborate dynamic behavior In addition to the stock transformation types the Builder also supplies easy to use predefined dynamics options for implementing the most common dynamic actions Custom predefined dynamics may be defined using the Enterprise version of the Builder started with the oem command line option see the Custom Predefined Dynamics section on page 284 Custom predefined dynamics may be used by the system integrators to exte
383. hen the Run mode was paused e Updates sec displays an average number of updates per seconds Clicking on this control changes it to Secs Update which displays an average number of seconds it takes to execute one update e Pause Resume button temporarily pauses drawing updates without quitting the Run mode Pressing the button the second time resumes updates e Stop button stops the Run mode e Update Speed controls the frequency of updates from 9 maximum to 1 minimum Many of the Builder s menu options and buttons become unavailable in the Run mode To terminate the animation use Run Stop Stop halts the animation of a drawing killing the process started with the Start command To restore the original appearance of the drawing use File Reset Drawing Restore Values on Stop Restore Values on Stop controls the behavior of the data generator If the option is checked the resource values animated with the data generator will be restored to the values they had before animation started This option does not restore the state of the graph s history reset the drawing using File Reset to reset the graphs Store Run Command Store Run Command stores the current animation command in the existing SDatagenString resource of the drawing The value of the resource is used to initialize the default animation command when a drawing containing S DatagenString resource is loaded 356 GLG User s Manual and Bu
384. hierarchy has been setup If no transformations are attached to the object the transformed value is the same as Value except for G attributes representing points For G attributes representing points the transformed value represents the screen coordinates of the point and includes the effect of the all transformations attached to the graphical object containing the point and all its parents as well as drawing transformation of the viewport The following example queries the transformed value of an object s attribute double xf value GlgGetDResource polygon LineWidth XfValue amp xf value TagObject An optional data tag object that may be attached to the attribute object to mark it as a global resource or to define database connectivity for its data value Ifa tag is attached the attribute object inherits all tags attributes such as TagName TagSource and TagEnabled ExportTag An optional export tag object that may be attached to the attribute object to mark it as an exported public property It is used by the OEM version of the Builder refer to the OEM Version of the Graphics Builder chapter on page 282 for details Data The base data object used for storing the attribute s value Tag The tag object may be attached to any attribute of an object to mark it as a global resource or specify the database field to use for updating the value of the attribute The tag object has three attributes TagType Defines the type
385. hildren viewports except for the Java Swing environment DepthSort The DepthSort attribute defines how to render overlapping objects inside the viewport by controlling hidden surface removal A hidden surface is one whose view is fully or partially blocked by another object For example a drawing might consist of two circles If you look at the circles from an angle where the position of one circle is between the viewer and the other circle the blocked circle will not appear to be drawn if the objects are depth sorted 90 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Ifa viewport with DepthSort NO contains several groups with different settings of the DepthSort attribute the groups themselves will be drawn in the natural order but the objects inside groups with DepthSort YES will be rendered using the hidden surface removal If the OpenGL driver is used setting the attribute to YES or SPECIAL activates the OpenGL depth buffer to perform hidden surface removal for objects in the viewport Setting the attribute to NO or any other value disables OpenGL hidden surface removal When hardware acceleration is provided by a graphics card the OpenGL based hidden surface removal yields real time 3D performance making it possible to render complex 3D drawings in real time The hidden surface removal works on the pixel basis and properly renders intersecting objects The OpenGL driver can be used for the GLG Graphics Builder the GLG HMI Configurator
386. ibute or press the ellipsis button next to the Path attribute to define the path using the Resource Browser The Up and Down buttons to the right of the alias list may be used to reorder aliases in the list when an object has more than one alias attached The Name field at the top of the dialog may be used to define a name of the alias object itself in case if an application needs to access the alias object programmatically The Mark Object and Mark List buttons in the Alias List dialog may be used to mark the currently selected alias object or the whole alias list for reuse To add marked aliases to a different object select the object and use Object Aliases Add Marked Aliases from the main menu To delete the currently selected alias from the alias list use the Delete button at the bottom of the dialog Edit Aliases Edit Aliases lets you change the attributes of an alias after it has been added as well as delete selected alias from a list When the Edit Alias option is used the Builder displays a list of aliases attached to the object Selecting an alias in the list shows its parameters The Alias parameter specifies the logical name to use and the Path parameter specifies the resource path The ellipsis button next to Path activates the Resource Browser for selecting the resource Refer to the previous section for a detailed description of the Alias List dialog Delete All Aliases Delete All Aliases destroys all aliases
387. idget contains two groups the PaletteObject group containing objects whose FillColor attribute defines the palette s colors and an optional Labels group that contains text labels used for annotating the color names To change the palette add or delete the objects in each group as needed and change their colors Refer to the GlgPalette section on page 212 for details of the GlgPalette input handler OEM Version of the Graphics Builder The OEM version of the GLG Graphics Builder provides additional functionality for defining and browsing public properties Since this functionality is used only for OEM customization it is provided only when requested via a command line option to avoid cluttering user interface for the rest of the users The OEM version may be started by using the oem command line option of the Enterprise Edition of the Graphics Builder GlgBuilder oem Export Tags Export tag is a special type of a tag object that can be attached to an object s attribute to mark it as an exported public property Public properties of an object may be displayed using the Object Public Properties menu option of the OEM version of the Graphics Builder Public properties are also displayed in the GLG HMI Configurator which allows creating custom components with user defined properties for use with the HMI Configurator Using the GLG Graphics Builder 283 Instead of a single button to add data tags the OEM version of the Builder provides two
388. iguration file also provides access to the GLG global configuration resources The variables in the configuration file whose name starts with the Glg prefix provide initial setting for the corresponding global configuration resource For example the G gPickResolution variable in the configuration file sets the value of the GlgPickResolution global configuration resource Refer to the Appendices chapter of the GLG Programming Reference Manual for a list of the global configuration resources Comment lines may be introduced by using the ff character at the beginning of the line Configuration Variables Configuration variables for the Graphics Builder and HMI Configurator are described in the self documented configuration files g g config and glg hmi_config respectively Custom Widget Palettes Custom widgets can be added to the existing palettes by editing pal palette files Custom palettes can also be integrated into the GLG Builder and HMI Configurator by adding them the palettes pls file refer to the Adding Custom Widgets and Custom Palettes chapter on page 303 for more information OEM Customization OEM Customization features allow extending GLG editors functionality with application specific features It may be applied to both the GLG Graphics Builder and GLG HMI Configurator The simplest customization includes defining a custom color palette and custom dynamics options for the OEM version of the GLG editor For more
389. ilder Using the GLG Graphics Builder 247 The first three symbols may also be displayed as entries in the Resource Browser to let you select a subset of resources for browsing These entries are available only in the Resource Browser and not in the API oe 99 The Resource Browser also contains the entry representing the previous level of the hierarchy relatively to the currently selected resource The resource browser provides three toggles which can be used to control which resources are displayed in the browser named resources default resources aliases or any combination or them By default all three resource categories are displayed Commonly used attributes of most objects may be accessed via their default resource names such as FillColor or LineWidth without requiring the user to name each resource If an object attribute such as Fil Color is named it may be accessed by both the user defined name and the default resource name The Filter field of the resource browser defines a regular expression to apply to the entries on one level of the hierarchy Only the entries matching the filter expression on the current level of the resource hierarchy will be displayed The any sequence of characters and any character wildcards may be used to construct the filter Guidelines for Naming Resources Although the resource hierarchy is totally flexible and should be organized to meet your requirements we suggest the following
390. ilder Reference Options Draw Grid Snap To Show Axis To create a SDatagenString resource in the drawing create a text object outside of the widget at the top of the drawing hierarchy and name it s String resource DatagenString The Options Menu provides options to let you customize the operation of the Builder The glg config Builder configuration file can be used to specify default values of various options The Draw Grid submenu provides options to let you display grid lines with a drawing The grid is displayed at a selected grid interval in the GLG world coordinates In addition to the constant grid spacing options two adaptive options are provided The Adaptive Constant Space option automatically selects a grid interval to maintain approximately constant visual grid spacing while Adaptive Constant Number maintains a constant number of grid lines The Custom option allows the user to specify a custom grid interval in world coordinates To disable grid use the No Grid option The grid is not saved as part of the drawing It is just a convenience for editing a drawing To save the grid as part of the drawing specifying a value for the viewport s GridValue attribute To position objects relative to the grid use Options Snap To Grid The Snap To submenu provides options to let you align objects Snapping places objects by rounding their coordinates as you draw them The options on the Snap To submenu sp
391. ill be used as is without scaling and must have a proper size and position to be displayed properly The icons of the drawings supplied with the Toolkit define icons in a separate small viewport so that they appear in the drawing the same way they will look like in the palette Alternatively a D custom property named G gScalelconToFit may be added to the icon and set to 1 to enable icon fitting in which case the icon will be automatically scaled and positioned inside its palette slot Icon scaling may not be very precise for icons that contain text objects since the text objects do not scale well If the con resource is absent the whole drawing will be used as an icon The drawing will be scaled to fit the icon area in the palette 304 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Drawing and Widget The Drawing or Widget resource may be defined in the drawing to annotate the object or part of the drawing to insert when the palette icon is selected If these resources are absent the content of the whole drawing will be inserted The Widget resource name is used for components that are contained in a viewport and may be used as a widget in a stand alone way Drawing is used for components without a viewport Such components must be placed in a viewport in order to be displayed Palette Description File Format The Palette Description File pal extension provides information about the palette and the objects it contains Each line
392. ill level 70 72 77 78 91 FillAmount 142 FillColor 71 FillDirection 142 FILLED CIRCLE marker type 78 FILLED SQUARE marker type 78 FILLED_DIAMOND marker type 78 FillType 71 FilterMarkers 121 367 FilterPrecision 121 FilterType 120 Fixed Scale 296 fixed text object 75 FIXED_IMAGE 79 FixedSize 107 FixLeapY ears 130 FLAT light type 150 flow transformation 174 Focus 205 font availability 331 font object 148 font sets 57 Font Table reuse 148 font table custom 54 147 font table object 147 font tables marking and replicating 259 FontName 149 Fonts 147 fonts custom 54 147 FontSize 76 Fonttable 96 fonttable use at run time 55 96 FonttableFile 55 95 FontType 76 Format 164 Format D transformation 164 Format S transformation 164 Format Type 165 Frame 112 Frame object using 270 frame object 112 270 to 271 338 358 FrameFactor 113 FrameType 112 Free Frame 112 free frame 112 free style shape 75 329 full clone 258 308 G GDI Renderer 18 GDI renderer 18 geometric transformations 151 geometrical data type 26 GetltemCount message 208 209 211 368 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference GetltemList message 207 209 GetltemState message 208 GetltemStateList message 208 209 GetSelectedItemList message 208 GIF image 79 GIS 80 zooming and panning 45 GIS coordinate system 42 GIS Edit Mode 46 GIS Editing Mode 47 81 GIS Object 42 46 80 GIS objec
393. illed with data The use of the RollBack limits the CPU intensive scrolling operation to be performed only once on every 40th data update compared with every data update in the regular scrolling graph with the SCROLLED scrolling type A special case of the rollback may be used to implement the graph which switches from the WRAPPED behavior to the SCROLLED behavior when the graph gets completely filled with data the first time For example for a graph with the WRAPPED scroll type 200 data samples 10 X axis major ticks and labels and 20 minor ticks per one major tick interval the following settings may be used DataGroup Rollback 1 and XLabelGroup Rollback 0 05 which corresponds to one minor tick 1 20 An alias object may be used to define logical names for arbitrary resource hierarchies For example it may define a logical ValueHighlight name for accessing the Group1 Object3 FillColor resource hierarchy The application can then access the resource using the alias instead of a complete path name The alias can also be used to create convenient shortcuts for long resource paths Aliases may be added in the Builder using the Add Alias button in the Object Menu The alias object has the following resources Alias Specifies a logical name to be assigned to the resource hierarchy pointed to by the alias Path Resource path to the aliased resource Rendering The rendering object is used to keep an extended set of optional
394. in zoom in in the X Time direction in the Chart Zoom Mode I zoom in in Y direction Chart Zoom Mode only o zoom out zoom out in the X Time direction in the Chart Zoom Mode O zoom out in Y direction Chart Zoom Mode only n reset Zoom In the GIS Zoom Mode with map in the ORTHOGRAPHIC projection resets zooming but keeps the GIS center unchanged In the RECTANGULAR projection resets zooming and paning but keeps the rotation angle unchanged In the Chart Zoom Mode resets the Y ranges to fit all chart plots in the visible area of the chart in Y direction N reset zoom In the Chart Zoom Mode resets the Y ranges and also changes the chart s X span to show all accumulated data samples in the visible area of the chart Shift click drag ZoomTo same as t see details below t start generic ZoomTo mode left click and drag the mouse to finish In the Chart Zoom Mode if the first point of the ZoomTo box is located within the X or Y axis area zooming will be performed only in the direction of the selected axis For example if the user defines the ZoomTo box in the X axis area the chart will be zoomed only in the X direction _ start ZoomToX mode which zooms only in the X direction and preserves the Y scale left click and drag the mouse to finish It is especially useful in the Chart Zoom Mode GLG Objects 87 start ZoomToY mode which zooms only in the Y direction preserves the X scale left click and
395. in E 134 Dalt catan a e le laa ai 134 8 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference VADs AA A AAA ADA dd 137 Histotias 139 AM is 140 Red td ir ii 140 BA O E A 143 Eme AD aca A A A A cn 144 Colortable ainia TITO DEA EAS EE ia is iS 144 Om tT abe ii A Aa aa ce ods 147 POMC ec tec cea etre hese sats a tad vgn dat eats vee eh it vlan eet Rebeca Se Wane ek Ie 148 Tet ht OD OC aci lc dabble dain tati 149 Transformaatio Objecte cra dt AA AA A di dd lis 151 Stock Transformations vs Predefined Dynamics ccccccccsseeseceteceeeceseeeseeesecntecneeseeenneennes 151 Geometrical Transformations ess os eiee e aa Ennsi ee Ea SEE EE e En EREE 151 Scalar Transformations sen aea erana oaa aeaa aar ra a a ae E n S e 158 String Transformations ii dia E EE EEE A E EEE EE 164 Common Attribute Transformations seessesssseseeesseseesestserstsstsesssesessestsreststtsessssesesseseesesese 166 Predefined Dynamics s s 22 eestee oobi bs oe a a a a a a a e E E a AS 168 ALAIOR 174 Acond dt a ida liada 176 Action Object Attribution dida 179 Command Object seieun e inoran e aR E E ETE Aaa A EA O e a TAERU L ERAR 184 Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time 188 Chapter 5 Input ObjectsS coooooonnnnnnncccccnnnononcnnncccnonnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnenenns 191 Input Handler sti a iia 192 Attaching an Input Handler caida dada 193 Common Input Handler Resources cccecccessessseeseceeceseeeeeessees
396. in directory also contains links for starting the Builder in the OEM mode GlgBuilder OEM_no opengl GlgBuilder OEM_no opengl Instead of using links command options listed below may be used to specify the OpenGL or OEM mode To load a specific drawing file on startup specify the drawing file name GlgBuilder filename For Windows users a GLG Editor may be started by choosing GLG Graphics Builder or GLG HMI Configurator from the Start Menu The Start menu contains two separate folders one for the OpenGL and another for the GDI version of the Toolkit Command line Options A number of command line options and environment variables are also supported The most common options are help Prints all available command line options on the terminal On Windows writes command line option information to the glg_error log file The location of the file is determined by the GLG_LOG_DIR and GLG_DIR environment variables as described in the Error Processing section on page 51 ofthe GLG Programming Reference Manual verbose Generates diagnostic output for troubleshooting the OpenGL driver editor setup loadable editor extension DLLs and other editor extensions On Windows the output is saved in the glg error log file The location of the file is determined by the GLG LOG DIR and GLG _DIR environment variables as described in the Error Processing section on page 51 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual config file lt filepath gt Specifie
397. in the resource path tells the history object where to add sequential numbers to form sequential resource names The numbers always start with 0 If the percent sign is omitted the history will add numbers at the end of the resource path template Edit History Edit History lets you change the attributes of a history object as well as delete selected history objects from the list of attached history objects When you use the Edit History option the Builder displays the History List dialog with a list of history objects attached to the selected object Selecting a history object in the list shows its attributes so you can edit them Refer to the History section on page 139 for information on the History object s attributes Delete All Histories Run Start Delete All Histories destroys all attached history objects The Delete button of the Edit History dialog may be used to delete individual history objects from the list If you explode an object with a history object the group that remains after exploding it retains the history object Exploding that group discards the history object The Run Menu provides options to let you test the animation of drawings The simplest way to test a drawing is by using the test data generated by the GLG datagen program Start invokes a process to animate a drawing The process executes the command or commands given it in the dialog presented when you select Start The default animation program is d
398. in the viewport by either going down into the viewport using the Hierarchy Down button 4 or by setting the editing focus by Ctrl Shift clicking on the viewport When finished use the use the Hierarchy Up button or the Main Focus button depending on the action used to set the focus inside the viewport Note If the focus was moved into the viewport the Hierarchy Down button will be disabled To traverse down into the viewport s objects use the Hierarchy Down button to get inside the viewport and then use it again to get inside the viewport s objects A widget is defined to be a viewport that has resources HasResources is YES and is named Widget When the GLG API reads a drawing from a file it looks for a widget definition to use The widget name should appear only once in a drawing All subsequent resource read and set operations implicitly refer to this object In an application a viewport could be used to define a graph or a control GLG Objects 85 A viewport s attributes may be divided into four categories The first group of attributes controls the appearance of the viewport s background rectangle and the second controls the display of its child objects A third group of attributes controls some aspects of event handling and viewport interactive behavior The last group is made up of window specific attributes and is embodied by the screen object described in the next section In addition to the two control poin
399. indow command line option or the Run Window configuration file variable can be used to start the Run mode in a separate window hiding the GLG editor s menus and toolbars The custom option DLL described in the next section may be used to add custom OEM menu options for the Run mode Since the module uses the GLG API supplied by the GLG editor s executable it may use both the GLG Standard and the Extended API with no additional GLG libraries required When the module is used with the GLG Graphics Builder or HMI Configurator the editors provide the module with the Run Time license for the Extended API The example is located in the editor _extensions custom proto example directory and works with both the GLG Graphics Builder and the GLG HMI Configurator The run_proto_example script in the example s directory may be used to run the GLG Builder with a custom data browser The script can be edited to define the version of the GLG editor to run The sample source code is self documented and provides an example of animating objects in the drawing via tags The code queries a list of all tags defined in the drawing and animates them with random data In a real application the code can animate the tags with real data from a process database based on the tags TagSource Tags based data access allows an application to animate an arbitrary drawing without any knowledge about its structure or resources The example also demonstrates the use of resources
400. ined Clone setting is used GLG Objects 97 Screen Transformation The screen transformation is used by the screen object to adjust the drawing when the screen size changes The parameters of the transformation are automatically set by the screen object but they may be used for constraining purposes to obtain offsets in screen pixels For example the top part of the resource browser in the Builder has constraints that make it non resizable keeping a constant pixel size when the resource browser window is resized To obtain such an effect a MoveX or MoveY transformation may be used with the Divide transformation attached to its Factor attribute The divisor of the Divide transformation is then constrained to the corresponding X or Y Scale of the screen transformation This annuls the result of the screen size changes making the move transformation maintain its offset in pixels rather then the world coordinates To get access to the parameters of the Screen Transformation edit the attributes of the viewport object and press the More button to access the screen s attributes then press Edit Dynamics to edit the screen s transformation Screen Name This resource may be used at runtime to supply a string to be displayed as a window title of top level viewports Advanced Graphical Objects Group The GLG advanced graphical objects are structures with which one can build complex relations between simpler objects Any three dimensional
401. ing itself and are saved with the viewport All the zooming options use the drawing s coordinate system The Builder s Control Panel also provides zooming controls GLG Graphics Builder Menus 313 Zoom In Zoom In increases the scale of the drawing so the objects look bigger Zooming into a drawing enlarges the objects in the center of the drawing but objects near the edges of the drawing may be clipped To control the degree of scaling use View Zooming Set Zoom Factor Zoom Out Zoom Out decreases the scale of the drawing so the objects look smaller To control the degree of scaling use View Zooming Set Zoom Factor Zoom To Zoom To zooms into a specified area of the drawing When you select this option the Builder prompts you to specify two points that define a bounding box for the zoom area To recover your view of the excluded area use View Zooming Zoom Out Set Zoom Factor Set Zoom Factor controls the scale factor to be applied when you zoom using the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons of the Control Panel or the menu options The Builder prompts you for a scaling factor for example 2 to scale up or 0 5 to scale down Reset Zoom Reset Zoom returns to the normal scale for the view 100 zoom and resets any changes in the projection Pan To Pan To moves the center of the view to another part of the drawing area After you select this option click on a spot to use as the new center of the view Scroll by Drag
402. ing that defines the type of an operation to perform The rest of the parameters differ depending on the command type The following lists all available command types the additional data each command contains as well as the suggested use of the data in an application code The suggested use is just an example of how the data could be used an application can decide to use the data in a different way if needed Each data element of a command includes its name and data type S for strings or D for double values GoTo PopupDialog CommandType S Command type is set to GoTo The command is used to navigate to a different drawing For example a drawing can contain Next and Previous buttons that are used to switch the the currently displayed drawing DrawingFile S The filename of the drawing to load Destination S The name or the resource name of the container used to display the drawing If a top level drawing contains a subwindow used to display different drawings Destination points to that subwindow It may be left empty to replace the top level drawing with a new drawing or to use a default destination Title S Specifies an optional title string to be used by an application as needed ParamS S An optional string parameter ParamD D An optional numerical parameter CommandType S Command type is set to PopupDialog The command displays a popup dialog DialogType S Specifies an optional dialog type in case
403. ing the Builder s Transform Object Points button or via the GLG API functions which move or transform an object CoordFlag This advanced attribute specifies the coordinate system used for rendering the object If set to GLG_INHERIT_ COORD SYSTEM INHERIT label the coordinate system used to interpret coordinates of the object s control points is inherited from the viewport in which the object is drawn When CoordFlag is set to GLG_ABS SCREEN COORD SYSTEM ABS_SCR label the screen coordinate system is used The GLG_ABS_ FLIPPED SCREEN COORD SYSTEM setting GLG_SCR label uses the GLG screen coordinate system which has the same upper left origin as the screen coordinate system but has the Y axis pointing up The screen coordinate systems may be used for rendering prompts and overlays which do not change their position when the drawing is zoomed or resized History A slot for attaching one or more optional History objects A group is used to attach a list of history objects The list is accessible by using the Edit History buttons on the Object Menu The attribute assumes the value of NULL if no History objects are attached 70 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Aliases A slot for attaching one or more optional Alias objects A group is used to attach a list of aliases The list is accessible by using the Edit Aliases buttons on the Object Menu The attribute assumes the value of NULL if no Alias objects are attached
404. input focus This handler is superseded with the G gN Text and is maintained for backward compatibility TextObject This resource indicates the scrolled text object where the text is to be typed TextString This optional resource indicates the string attribute of the text object Focus This resource changes when the widget is available for input It is normally 0 but changes to 1 when you click on the text widget with the mouse It is used to control the look of the widget when it is ready to accept typed input For example you could use a linear transformation to make a border around the widget appear when the widget is selected GlgSpinner A spinner displays a numerical value and contains two or more buttons to increase or decrease it A text edit box widget may be used to display and edit the value or the value may be presented as a display only text object which could only be altered by a predefined increment using the increase and decrease buttons Some of the spinner s resources may be inherited from the GlgText handler of the embedded text edit box used to display the spinner s value In this case aliases are used to redirect the resource by pointing to the corresponding resource of the embedded text widget An optional slider widget may be used to implement a sliding spinner which allows the user to change its value using either a text edit box a slider or increase and decrease buttons Value The spinner s value
405. integrated scrollbars This is done by setting the GlgVScrollbarRef and GlgHScrollbarRef global configuration resources to the filenames or URL when used on the web of the drawings that contain the widgets to be used as the vertical and horizontal scrollbars Integrated GIS Object GIS Rendering and GIS Editing Mode The GIS maps can be embedded into the GLG drawing via an integrated GIS Object The GIS Object displays a map image in a selected GIS projection and transparently handles all aspects of interaction with the GLG Map Server automatically issuing map requests every time the map is resized panned or zoomed Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing 47 The GIS Object can be used as a container that holds dynamic icons polylines and other graphical objects that need to be drawn on top of the map The objects are drawn on the map in the GIS Rendering Mode in which the coordinates of the objects control points are interpreted as lat lon coordinates This allows positioning of icons and lines on the map by defining their lat lon coordinates directly without any coordinate conversions When the map is zoomed or panned the objects on the map will be automatically adjusted to stay with the map with no application support required in the previous releases of the Toolkit The Graphics Builder supports the GIS Editing Mode for creating and editing objects to be drawn on top of the map In this mode dynamic icons polylines and other objects c
406. interval If set to NO the first major tick will be placed exactly at the start of the axis For example for a range axis with RoundedPlacement YES MajorInterval 10 and Low 8 the major ticks and labels will be positioned at the following values 10 20 30 and so on If RoundedPlacement is set to NO with the rest of the attributes unchanged the major ticks and labels will be positioned at 8 18 28 and so on 130 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference For a time axis with RoundedPlacement YES and MajorInterval 3600 the major ticks and labels will be placed at exact hourly positions regardless of the value of the axis s EndValue attribute The rounded placement is most useful when the major tick interval is explicitly defined by setting MajorInterval to a positive number When MajorInterval is negative the result of the rounded placement may look confusing since it defines a number of major ticks and labels displayed in the visible span of the chart In this case the actual major interval may be non integer and the result of the rounded placement may look confusing Fix Leap Years time axes only If set to YES activates a leap year adjustment that improves the year display accuracy for axes that span a large multi year period Major Tick Size Specifies the length of the major tick in pixels Minor Tick Size Specifies the length of the minor tick in pixels TickLabel Offset Specifies a pixel offset between a major tick and it
407. ion s State parameter to 1 or 0 It can also trace the state of the Control key if requested by the action s ProcessArmed parameter in which case the value of State will be set to 2 if the mouse activation condition specified by Trigger are met and the Control key is pressed See page 180 for more information SET STATE Sets the action s State attribute to 1 when the action s activation conditions are met RESET STATE Resets the action s State attribute to 0 when the action s activation conditions are met TOGGLE_STATE Toggle the action s State attribute every time the action is activated The TRACE _STATE feedback type is usually used to provide a visual feedback when the object is selected with a mouse click or a mouse over event The SET_STATE and RESET_STATE feedback types allow the application to use a graphical object as a button that sets or resets the state of some other object in the drawing without the use of button input objects while the TOGGLE_STATE allows the application to use an object as a toggle button Advanced Mouse feedback actions automatically update the viewport that contains the object to which the mouse feedback action is attached If the action s State attribute is constrained to an object in a different viewport that is not a child of the viewport containing the object with the action that viewport will not be updated The feedback actions generates an UpdateDrawing which can be processed in the
408. ion is set the object will appear in its untransformed state with dynamics disabled This is convenient for editing such objects as needles of dial controls so that the editing is performed in the object s initial state with the needle pointing along the X axis This makes it easier to stretch the object in X or Y direction as well as enter coordinate values or use snapping to the grid 358 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The option disables only the geometrical dynamics attached to the object It does not disable dynamics attached to the object s control points Selection Display Selection Display toggles between three modes of displaying the selection Resize and Reshape displays both the object s resize box and the object s control points This is the default mode Reshape shows only the control points e Resize shows only the resize box points This mode may be used to speed up editing groups with a lot of control points Control Points Display The Control Points Display toggles between three modes for displaying control points e Objects points display only control points of drawable objects polygons circles etc Objects and dynamics points display control points of drawable objects and control points of dynamics Start and End Points Rotate and Scale Centers etc This option helps to visualize dynamics attached to objects Objects dynamics and point dynamics points is similar
409. ion of the interaction handlers and input objects Using the GLG Graphics Builder An introduction to the use of the GLG Graphics Builder This program is used to create edit and test GLG drawings GLG Graphics Builder Menus A reference for the GLG Graphics Builder menus and dialogs Index This guide assumes that you are conversant with the basic concepts of computer graphics programming For a comprehensive discussion of three dimensional computer graphics we recommend Computer Graphics Principles and Practice Foley Van Dam Feiner and Hughes Second edition 1990 Addison Wesley Reading MA Please note that although the illustrations in this document represent the UNIX version of the GLG Graphics Builder the information it contains is equally relevant to Microsoft Windows users The two versions present the same functionality in equivalent user interfaces with minimal cosmetic differences caused by the different platforms 4 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Table GLG User s Manual and Builder of Reference Contents Chapter1 Introduction 10 GLG siii das 17 OI aaa 17 INNACIACACNTS 18 OpenGL or GDI Native Windowing System Renderer ceccecceessesseeseeseeeeeeeseeesseneeneeeeneenaes 18 The Application Program Interface cccccecscccscesseessecseceeeceeceeseeescenseceseceseeeseessecaaecseseeeseneeaaecsees 22 Displaying DTO don a A lied ed e 22 Amimatinga Dra WINE ca aa cb ds aii dei 23 Manipulating Objects in th
410. ion that handles input events The ability to build custom input widgets is a necessary attribute for creating an open interactive graphical environment The GLG Toolkit offers two options for creating input widgets e You can use GLG graphical objects to render the widget e You can use the WidgetType attribute of a viewport s screen object to select one of the avail able native widget types push button scrollbar etc to render the widget Native refers to the windowing environment in which GLG is running Windows X Windows Motif Java or NET For example a native button will appear as a Windows button if the drawing is dis played on Windows as a Motif button if the drawing is X Motif environment or as a Swing button if the drawing is displayed in Java In both cases the Handler attribute of a viewport object has to be used to specify a GLG input handler which accepts user input changing the widget s resources and visual appearance accordingly For example a slider widget reacts to mouse events by moving the graphical element that indicates its current position and updating the slider s Value resource The handler also generates messages passed to the application s input callback allowing the program to react to the input events Some input widgets such as a toggle or slider keep value or state information and change corresponding resources of the widget s drawing making it possible to constrain other elements of th
411. ior to 3 4 The Range transformation had the same parameters as Range Conversion except for Input Value instead it was using the attribute s Value as input The Range transformation was deprecated but it is still supported for backward compatibility with old drawings RangeCheck The range check transformation sets the attribute s transformed value XfValue depending on the input value being inside or outside of the specified range The transformation may be used to activate blinking when the value goes out of range The transformation ignores the attribute s Value and uses the transformation s Input Value parameter as input The attributes for this transformation are as follows High High The high high input data range High The high input data range 160 Timer GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Low The ow input data range Low Low The low low input data range Input Value The input value Equal Flag Controls how input values equal to the range limits are handled When set to ALARM_ON_EQUAL input values equal to the limits are handled as alarms When set to NO_ALARM_ON_EQUAL values equal to the limits are handled as normal If the input value is outside of the HighHigh LowLow range the output value is set to 2 If the input value is outside of the High Low range the output value is set to 1 If the input value is within the High Low range the output is set to 0 To disable the HighHigh LowLow check se
412. ire different fonts An application can define the drawing s font table at run time using a viewport s FonttableFile attribute described on page 95 the content of the default font table may also be supplied by an external font file specified by the GleDefaultFontFile global configuration resource see page 346 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual Internationalization Support in the Java and C NET Versions of the Toolkit Java and C use the UTF 16 version of the UNICODE for the internal representation of text strings which makes it possible to render character sets of any locale with no additional actions The only internationalization issue in the Java and C NET version of the Toolkit is related to proper string decoding when loading drawings saved in various system locales The GLG Java API provides versions of the LoadObject and LoadWidget methods that have a charset_name parameter which specifies the charset in which the drawing was saved The C NET version of the GLG API uses a similar encoding parameter for these methods When the drawing is loaded all strings in the drawing will be decoded from the specified charset and converted to the internal UTF 16 Java string format If the charset_name or encoding parameters are not supplied the platform s default charset will be used 56 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference In Java the G gBean GlgJBean and GleJLWBean components have the CharsetName property which specifies the
413. irectory glg custom _dll h An include file for using the GLG API in a custom DLL Using the GLG Graphics Builder 293 The Custom Run Mode and Custom Editor Options examples also provide the following files glg custom editor dll o Provides GLG Editor Extension API for the custom DLL Don t delete this file when cleaning up the project directory glg custom editor dll h An include file for using the GLG Editor Extension API in a custom DLL 294 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 295 Chapter 7 7 GLG Graphics Builder Menus File New This chapter presents descriptions of all the options of the GLG Graphics Builder s menus They are organized by menu name in the same order as they appear in the Builder s menu bar The File Menu provides options that mainly deal with saving and printing drawing files sav ing images and various exported files These options are described starting on page 295 The Palettes Menu provides access to palettes of widgets and other pre built objects These options are described starting on page 302 The Edit Menu provides options for selecting editing and copying objects as well as undo options These options are described starting on page 305 The View Menu provides options for controlling your view of the drawing These options are described starting on page 310 The Traverse Menu provides options for working with advanced objects These options are described sta
414. is activated when a user clicks on the object with the mouse or moves the mouse over the object Mouse actions may be attached to any graphical object in the drawing e Input action may be attached to an input object such as a button or a slider to perform a spec ified operation when the user interacts with the input object Input actions may be attached only to input objects and their activation conditions specify the exact input activity that trig gers the action Tooltip action is a special type of action that is used to define an object tooltip The type of an action is determined by its Trigger attribute which is set at the time the action is attached to an object The trigger attribute may be set to either MOUSE_CLICK or MOUSE_OVER for mouse actions and is always set to INPUT for input actions and TOOLTIP for tooltip actions A viewport s ProcessMouse attribute must be set to a value that includes a combination of Click Move and Tooltip masks to enable processing corresponding mouse actions GLG Objects 177 There are also several types of action objects based on the type of activity performed when the action is triggered Command action Command actions define an operation to be performed when the action is triggered and contain additional data needed to execute it For example a GoTo command may be attached to a button to navigate to another graphical page when a user clicks on the button The command will include a paramete
415. is already selected Use Traverse Hierarchy Down or the down arrow button in the hierarchy controls to go down into the viewport Inside the viewport create a polygon that looks like a valve handle to you and name it handle Use Object Create Polygon to create the polygon and use the mouse to specify the polygon s points Press the right mouse button when you are finished specifying points You can use the Selected Object Properties dialog to specify the polygon s name Select Traverse Up Open the resource browser with Object Resources or with the Resources toolbar button a and note that both the Widget name and the handle name are on the same level of the resource hierarchy Close the resource browser select the viewport bring up the Selected Object Properties dialog and set the viewport s HasResources flag to YES Now check the resources again Open up the resource browser again and note that while the Widget resource still appears at the top level of the hierarchy the handle resource is gone If you double click on the Widget name its subsidiary resources appear now including the missing handle resource This illustrates the use of the HasResources flag it defines where in the resource hierarchy an object s children appear Double click on the handle resource and observe the default polygon attributes LineWidth FillColor and so on below it Unlike named resources these default attributes appea
416. is created the Builder prompts the user to select a command from a list of several predefined command types and then displays the Properties dialog for the selected command Refer to the Command Object section on page 184 for the list of the predefined command types The set of predefined command types may be extended by adding custom commands to the list see the Custom Data Sets and Custom Commands section on page 287 for more information If ProcessArmed ARMED the command will be sent only if the Control key was held 180 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference down If ProcessArmed ARMED and UNARMED the command will be sent regardless of the state of the Control key but the SubAction resource of the message object will be set to Armed if the Control key was pressed Refer to the Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time section on page 188 for information on using command actions in the application code at run time TRACE STATE Traces the mouse events and sets the action s State attribute depending on the action s Trigger Trigger MOUSE CLICK If ProcessArmed NONE sets State to 1 when the object is clicked with the mouse button specified with the MouseButton attribute and resets State back to 0 when the mouse button is released If ProcessArmed ARMED the value of State is changed to 1 only if the Control key is pressed down when the mouse click occurs and is reset back to 0 if th
417. is held down Only the MOUSE_CLICK triggers are supported for TOGGLE_STATE GLG Objects 181 Trigger Specifies an action s activation condition may have one the following values MOUSE_CLICK Activates the action when the object is selected with the mouse button specified by the MouseButton attribute The ProcessArmed attribute may be used to handle the state of the Control key A viewport s ProcessMouse attribute must contain the Click mask for the action to be processed MOUSE OVER Activates the action when the mouse moves over the object The ProcessArmed attribute may be used to handle the state of the Control key A viewport s ProcessMouse attribute must contain the Move mask for the action to be processed INPUT for input actions only Activates an action attached to an input object when activity specified by the InputAction is detected For example InputAction ValueChanged may be used to activate the action attached to a slider every time the slider value is changed The value of the InputAction attribute is a string that matches the Action resource of a message object received in the input callback The action s InputSubAction attribute may be used to match the SubAction attribute of the message object is required Input actions may be used to effectively translate user interaction with input objects into encapsulated action commands that may also contain additional data needed for executing the command For example a
418. is missing the default increment is one tenth of the knob range Increase Decrease If buttons with these names are embedded into a knob viewport each press of a button changes the knob s value in the direction indicated by the button s name and by the amount defined by its Increment IncreaseKeys DecreaseKeys These S resources define a list of characters that will be used as keyboard accelerators for incrementing or decrementing the knob s value Pagelncrease PageDecrease If buttons with these names are embedded into a knob each press of a button moves the knob in the direction corresponding to the button s name and by the amount specified by the knob s Pagelncrement PagelncreaseKeys PageDecreaseKeys These S resources define a list of characters that will be used as keyboard accelerators for incrementing or decrementing the knob s value by Page ncrement Wrap If this resource is present and non zero the knob will wrap around when the value is incremented or decremented past its low or high values The G gKnob interaction handler supports the following messages that can be sent using the GlgSendMessage method Increase Increases the knob s value by its Increment The message has no parameters Decrease Decreases the knob s value by its Increment The message has no parameters Pagelncrease Increases the knob s value by its Pagelncrement The message has no parameters PageDecrease Decreases th
419. is more than the maximum a new row will be started even if the row fit into the legend s box and can accommodate more entries Edit Labels A button in the Properties dialog to access a text object that defines attributes of the legend s labels Edit Background A button in the Properties dialog to edit attributes of a background box drawn around the legend s content To disable the display of the background set its FillType to NONE or set its Opacity to 0 Line Length Specifies a length in pixels of the line element of a legend entry Min Line Width Specifies a minimum line width of the line element of a legend entry XOffset Y Offset Specifies horizontal and vertical pixel offsets between the edge of the legend s background box and the legend content XSpacing YSpacing Specifies horizontal and vertical pixel spacing between the elements of the legend Label XOffset Specifies a horizontal pixel offset between the line and label elements of a legend entry 134 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Label Max Width Specifies the maximum pixel width for scalable legend labels with TextType SCALED If a label does not fit it is scaled down Label Max Height Specifies the maximum pixel height for scalable legend labels with TextType SCALED If a label does not fit it is scaled down Non Graphical Objects Data While GLG non graphical objects are not visible in a GLG drawing they can control the position and a wid
420. jectPath Edit subdrawing s properties and enter palette object s resource path in the SourcePath attribute When you create a subdrawing the Builder places it at the current level of the hierarchy There are two resources within the subdrawing The first one called Instance is a copy of the original template or of it s subobject if ObjectPath is defined and is also visible in the resource hierarchy under its original name The second resource called Template is the original template object For GLG Graphics Builder Menus 335 containers the template is drawn directly and both objects refer to the template For file subdrawings the Template refers to a loaded instance of the subdrawing This instance is cached and is used by all instances of the subdrawing You can use a subdrawing to create a set of objects that refer to the same template but can be positioned independently To create additional subdrawing instances select and copy the first subdrawing object positioning created copies as desired All copies will share the same template object Subdrawing s bindings may be used to assign local values and change behavior of attributes of a particular instance Ifsubdrawing objects are used to represent connected nodes the subdrawing s control point may be used for constraining connecting lines that represent edges To edit the subdrawing s template object use Traverse Hierarchy Down When finished use Traverse Up to
421. jects at design time in the GLG Builder Enterprise Edition or HMI Configurator When an Input Action is attached to an input object the action object receives the default message generated by the input object and checks its Action and SubAction if they match the InputAction and InputSubAction of the action object the action is activated sending an action message to the input callback for SEND_EVENT or SEND_COMMAND actions Instead of processing the default message generated by an input object the input callback code can process the message generated by the Input Action attached to the input object This makes it possible to define various commands in the drawing at design time and to free the application code in the input callback from a dependency on hardcoded input object names An action may also contain additional data needed to execute the command which makes it easier to assign predefined commands to objects in the drawing especially for the users of the HMI Configurator At run time the ActionObject resource of the message received in the input callback will contain the action object that generated the message For command actions the command may be accessed via the ActionObject Command resource The command type may be accessed as the CommandType resource of the Command object for the Intermediate API or directly from the message via the ActionObject Command CommandType resource for the Standard API The rest of the command data
422. jects in that group It operates the same as the DepthSort attribute ofa viewport object page 89 except that a group may inherit the value of this attribute from its parent object The following list describes the values the DepthSort attribute may have NO GLG_NO Hidden surface removal is disabled YES GLG_YES Hidden surface removal is enabled If the GDI driver is used a group is sorted as a whole This means that if there are two intersecting groups one group is completely in front of another SPECIAL GLG_SPECIAL If the OpenGL driver is used same as YES activates hidden surface removal If the GDI driver is used activates hidden surface removal using a faster but less precise depth sorting algorithm which uses objects bounding boxes for determining the relative Z order of the objects INHERIT GLG_ INHERIT Inherit the value of the DepthSort attribute from the parent object If the DepthSort attribute of some parent was set to YES and there were no intervening parents with the attribute set to NO the inherited value of the attribute is YES otherwise it is NO The DepthSort attribute is not inherited across viewports so the parent from which the YES value must be in the same viewport or the viewport itself PARTS GLG BY PARENT If the OpenGL driver is used Keep the current hidden surface removal state If the GDI driver is used Activates hidden surface removal but instead of sorting a group as a whole elements o
423. junction with the corresponding interaction handler described earlier in this chapter which handles user interaction with the native widget On Windows the color of these widgets is defined by the system s color settings and the FillColor of the viewport is ignored In Java the color of these widgets is defined by the chosen Look and Fill scheme and the viewport s FillColor is ignored as well In UNIX X Windows environment the background color of the widgets is defined by the viewport s FillColor and the widgets forecolor is taken from the system s settings The CUSTOM BUTTOM widget is an exception it uses viewport s FillColor as a background color in X Windows and Java environments and system color on Windows 216 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The DIALOG_AREA widget may be used to provide a matching dialog background color for other native control widgets On Windows the color of the dialog widget is defined by the system color In X Windows and Java environments the color is defined either by the viewport s FillColor or by the GlgDefaultDialogColor global configuration resource which if set overrides the viewport s FillColor This provides a global way to define the background of all dialogs in the X Windows and Java environments in a way similar to that on Windows The default unset value of the GlgDefaultDialogColor global configuration resource is 1 1 1 When the DRAWING AREA CUSTOM BUTTOM BULLE
424. l resource or to define database connectivity for its data value Attribute Similar to the data object but used to hold an attribute value History Used to control scrolling behavior in graphs Alias Specifies an alternative application defined logical name for accessing arbitrary resource hierarchies Color Table Controls the selection of colors available for display in a drawing Font Table Controls the selection of fonts available for use in a drawing Font Specifies the font to use for a text object Rendering Specifies an extended set of rendering attributes Box Attributes Specifies attributes of a box drawn around the text object Line Attributes Specifies rendering attributes of plots grid and level lines cross hair cursors and backgrounds of chart objects as well as tick attributes of axis objects 68 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The last section of this chapter describes the variety of available transformations used to implement dynamic behavior as well as the alarm objects used to monitor data values Though these are in the same category as the other non graphical objects they are complex enough that they merit their own section Transformation Describes a transformation associated with the object Alarm Describes an alarm associated with the data or attribute object it is implemented as a special type of a transformation object The objects and their attributes are described in greater detail in
425. l settings for customizing the GLG Builder such as a number of colors in the color palette color RGB entries format modality of the Builder s dialogs and other options The configuration file is located in the GLG installation directory by default On Unix it may be named g g_ config and placed into the users home Using the GLG Graphics Builder 281 directory to allow per user customization The GLG_CONFIG_FILE environment variable described in the previous chapter may be set to point to a configuration file in a non standard location The Builder configuration file affects only the GLG Graphics Builder It does not affect GLG applications at run time which must use GLG Programming API for its customization To avoid conflicts between several versions ofthe GLG Toolkit installed on the same machine a version specific configuration file may be provided in the form glg config _X Y where X and Y are the major and minor GLG version numbers For the HMI Configurator the g g hmi_config configuration file and GLG_HMI_CONFIG_FILE environment variable are used Configuration File Syntax Each line of the configuration file contains a name of the configuration variable followed by the sign and the variable s value A string is expected as a value for variables of the S type a double value must be specified for variables of the D type and a triplet of three double values must be specified for variables of the G type The conf
426. lais AA A A A A di 39 ENG Vi War taa e o e a o e ese le eta bo bation 39 Coordinate System pr Shot A Does bdo caca a a 40 RETO 42 Input HandlerS a a atsends arcano bancan ici Leen dean deeduceidesvendust sgedesttancdetaateGa duns 43 Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing coocnocnonononoconnnonononnonnonononnnnnnncnnnconn conan nr ran rran cnn rra rrnnnninno 44 EE RAE A A Ad es Lo E A idad 44 Chapter 3 Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing oomcccooncinmmmmmmmmmnmmmo 45 Integrated Zooming and Panning cccccccesccesceescesseesseceaeceeceeeeseeecseecssensecseeceseeeseecseseseeneeseneensees 45 Chart Zooming and Scrolling cccccecesscesseesseseceeceeceeceeececsaecsaeeecseeeeseecseceseceseseneseneesaeeaeens 45 Zooming and Panning GIS Maps cccceccesscessessseesceeeceseceseeeseeesecaeceeseeeeeseeaecsseceeeseeeeeeeesaes 45 Integrated GIS Object GIS Rendering and GIS Editing Mode 0ooooonconinocconcconoconononcnnnonnnconoranonnnno 46 Integrated TOONS ici a A Esa A Ea A dunbav dias a adds 47 Object LOOPS rresia anaana dua bacdede ver a a a a a E Eaa a A AT a 47 Chart ad AS Tod ls eii 48 Custom Tooltip Formatters cccccccsesscsscessecssecseceeceseeseeeeseecsaenseceseceseeeseeesecnaeeeeeeeeseneeaaees 48 Tooltip Colors and Appearance cccecccecscessecsteeeecesceeseeeseceseceseeeseessecaaeseeseeeeseecsaeeaeeeessneeesees 49 Integrated MouseOver and MouseClick Actions cccccceccesscseseesseeseeseceeeceseeeseecsecesecn
427. lay only a subset of tags matching a regular expression that may contain the any character and any sequence of characters wild cards The regular expression will be applied to either the tag names or tag sources as controlled by the Source Names toggle on the right side of the Filter field The toggle also controls the Selection field allowing the user to select a tag by typing its TagName or TagSource 252 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Display Both One toggle switches the view to display both the Tag Name and TagSource or just one of them based on the current Sort By setting If tags are sorted by the tag name the TagName is shown in the Display One mode If tags are sorted by the tag source the TagSource is displayed The Unique Tag Sources Names toggle controls if multiple tags with identical tag sources when sorting by tag sources or tag names when sorting by tag names are shown in the list By default the toggle is unchecked and all instances of tags with the same tag source or tag name will be displayed in the Tag Browser If the toggle is checked only the first instance of tags with the same tag source or tag name will be displayed Editing the value of a single tag in the Builder will not affect the other entries with the same TagSource However when a tag value is supplied at runtime via its TagSource all value of all tags with the same TagSource will be updated To see all object s tags select the obje
428. le using faster hardware renderer for the main viewports As a result nice OpenGL anti aliased rendering may be used for all application s viewports without exceeding the limits of a graphics card and its OpenGL driver OpenGL Setup and Diagnostics To use hardware acceleration a graphics card that supports OpenGL must be present and appropriate drivers must be installed If the graphics card and or drivers with the OpenGL support are not installed a software OpenGL renderer will be used always on Windows and Linux and on other Unix systems if available To check the status of the OpenGL renderer in the GlgBuilder select the Options Display OpenGL Info option from the main menu In both the Builder and the application the verbose command line option may be used to display extended OpenGL diagnostic informations including the version of the used hardware and software renderers On Unix Linux the information will be printed to the terminal On both Windows and Unix Linux the information will also be logged into the GLG log file named glg_error log The location of the log file is determined by the GLG_LOG_DIR and GLG_DIR environment variables as described in the Error Processing section on page 51 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual The verbose mode can also be activated globally by setting the GLG_VERBOSE environment variable to True The glg debug opengl command line option and the GLG_DEBUG_OPENGL environment variable may be
429. lected component Custom Components with User Defined Properties Custom components are objects with public properties defined using export tags described in the previous chapter Custom components with user defined properties are used with the GLG HMI Configurator to provide end users with application specific building blocks with properties that are related to the application logic Refer to the previous chapter for more information on using custom components in the HMI Configurator To create a custom component for use with the GLG HMI Configurator 1 Start the OEM version of the Graphics Builder by using the oem command line option of the Enterprise Edition of the Graphics Builder 2 Create graphics to represent the component If the graphics contains several objects use a group or a container object to encapsulate the graphics as one object Add any required dynamics 3 Add export tags to the attributes of the graphics or dynamics to define public properties 4 Name the top level object Drawing to use it in the HMI Configurator s palettes and provide an optional con graphics if desired Refer to the Palettes chapter on page 302 for more information on palette drawing conventions 5 Save the drawing and copy it into one of the HMI Configurator s palettes directories Refer to the Adding Custom Widgets and Custom Palettes chapter on page 303 for more information Objects created in the HMI Configurator are marked with an i
430. ler may be modified by defining certain resource names it recognizes For example the G gButton handler searches for the resource named OnState If it finds this resource the handler implements a toggle otherwise it implements a push button The resources controlled by an input handler must be visible at the top level of the widget viewport Alias objects may be used to make resources defined inside the hierarchy to be visible at the top level If widget resources are changed in the Builder the widget s drawing has to be reset using the File Reset menu option to allow the handler to update resource information The handler s resources appear not only in the widget viewport but also in the message object passed by the handler to an input callback function In addition several of the input handlers define special resources that only appear in the message object These resources are described with the description of each message object in the Callback Events section on page 97 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual The handlers available are as follows GlgSlider Interprets linear mouse movement Used for scrollbars switches and sliders GlgNSlider A native slider handler that takes advantage of local window system graphical representations GlgKnob Interprets angular mouse movement Used to implement dials meters knobs and switches GlgButton Accepts mouse clicks for toggle and push buttons GlgNButton A native button handler t
431. lerators for incrementing or decrementing the slider s value Pagelncrease PageDecrease If buttons with these names are embedded into a one dimensional slider each press of a button moves the slider in the direction corresponding to the button s name and by the amount specified by the slider s Pagelncrement PagelncreaseKeys PageDecreaseKeys These S resources define a list of characters that will be used as keyboard accelerators for incrementing or decrementing the slider s value by Pagelncrement Wrap If this resource is present and non zero the slider will wrap around when the value is incremented or decremented past its low or high values SliderSize StartPosition EndPosition These resources are defined in most of the slider and scrollbar objects to control the size of the slider s ActiveElement and the extent of its movement These resources are used only to define the slider s geometry and are not used by the G gS ider interaction handler These resources are not present in the slider s message object and may be accessed only as resources of the slider s viewport The GlgSlider interaction handler supports the following messages that can be sent using the GlgSendMessage method Increase Increases the slider s value by its Increment The message has no parameters 198 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Decrease Decreases the slider s value by its Increment The message has no parameters Pagelncr
432. ll the constrained points to respond to the move transformation apply constrained copies of the transformation to the control points themselves as in the diagram below PY1 PY2 ESOS CP1 CP2 CP3 MOVE MOVE XFORM pe XFORM Now when PY2 is moved by the mean of changing move transformation s parameters as shown below it will drag along part of PY7 To move all of PY with PY2 the same transformation could be attached to the CP control point CP1 CP3 PY1 PY2 CP2 An alternative way to move both objects together would be to create a group containing the two polygons and apply the transformation to that group You could also attach a constrained copy of the PY transformation to the PY2 object A constrained transformation is a transformation of the same type as the original transformation and with all parameters constrained to the corresponding parameters of the original transformation object It may be created in the Builder by marking the original transformation with the Mark Object button of the transformation properties dialog and then using the Use Marked transformation option when attaching a new transformation The Builder s Attribute Clone Type option must be set to Constrained Clone which is the default value to create constrained transformations 38 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Static Transformations The simplest kin
433. logram object 73 327 parallelogram objects 73 parametric transformation 38 parametric transformation see dynamic transformation parent coordinates 40 parent object 25 Paste Clone Type 360 Pastel Colors 359 Path 154 path transformation 154 PathXform 101 PatternFactor 146 performance measuring update performance 355 Period 160 Persistent 100 102 pie pumpkin 74 Plane 196 200 Plot 119 plot visibility 114 122 Plot object 119 PlotT ype 119 pls file 303 PNG image 79 point control 34 dynamically created 34 point frame 112 POINT light type 150 Point List 72 Polygon 110 111 polygon attributes 71 polygon object 71 326 329 Polyline object using 270 polyline object 110 270 337 Polysurface object using 270 polysurface object 111 270 337 Postscript printing 69 142 predefined dynamics 151 168 242 284 display 359 PressedState 202 printing 299 ProcessArmed 179 180 182 ProcessMouse 88 ProcessMouse attribute 48 property same as attribute 26 property see attribute PSName 149 public properties 137 151 168 284 285 PushIn 94 R Radius 74 Radius 73 Radius2 73 RAINBOW color distribution 145 range alarm 175 range check transformation 159 range conversion transformation 159 RangeLock 121 122 Read Palette 303 Recreate Instances 101 102 Recta Linear Path 271 recta linear path 66 rectangle control points 34 rectangle objects 73 Reference Obje
434. low Additional custom data sets may be defined by customizing the Builder as described in the Custom Data Sets and Custom Commands 184 Command Object GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference section on page 287 If the action data are to be defined manually a list based interface for defining individual action parameters is displayed This interface is the same as the interface used to define custom data attached to an object see the Edit Custom Properties section on page 350 Refer to the Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time section on page 188 for information on accessing action data in the application code at run time GLG API note ActionData is a group object that contains action data If a custom data set was selected it contains public properties that represent action data Add Command Edit Command SEND_COMMAND actions only A button in the Action Properties dialog for accessing Command of the SEND COMMAND action The Command object contains the CommandType attribute as well as other data used to execute the command The command associated with a command action is selected from a predefined list of available commands at the time the action is attached to an object New custom command types can be added by customizing the Builder as described in the Custom Data Sets and Custom Commands section on page 287 The available command types and their parameters are listed in the Command Obj
435. lue is not zero var gt 0 True 1f the input value is positive var gt 0 5 True if the input value is greater than 0 5 164 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference ABS var gt 0 5 True if the absolute value of the input value is greater than 0 5 String Transformations There are four string transformations that can be applied only to string attributes All string transformations ignore the attribute s Value and assign the transformation s output to the attribute s transformed value XfValue String transformations cannot be concatenated only one string transformation can be attached to a string attribute However string transformations can be chained by attaching a string transformation to an attribute of another string transformation Refer to the Common Attribute Transformations section on page 166 for additional transformations that can be attached to string attributes String Formatting Format S The string formatting transformation formats the string value of the Data attribute according to the formatting instructions in the Format attribute Format A character string specifying how the Data attribute value is to be displayed The format is specified with the standard C language printf format for strings for example String 10s Using formats other than the variants of the s format is not allowed and may result in a crash Escape sequences may be used to define native platform specific formats for Windows a
436. ly to move to the lowest level of the hierarchy At this level you can select and edit each member of the group independently To return to the hierarchy level that shows the group object use Traverse Up This option is equivalent to the Select Bottom button in the Selected Object Properties dialog for a group object Select Bottom mode is aborted when an object outside of the group is selected Edit All First For a group object Edit All First starts editing the attributes of objects in the group by using the first object in the group to select a set of attributes for editing This is a convenient option for fast editing of groups that contain objects of the same type For groups that contain objects of different types the Edit All Select option allows you to select a set of attributes to edit For example if the group contains both the polygon and text objects the Edit All Select option allows you to select the polygon or text attributes to be edited Ifa Font Table Color Table Rendering Attributes or Box Attributes are added to an object in a group in the Edit 411 mode constrained copies are added Changing any attribute will affect all copies Individual or all attributes of added copies may be unconstrained Use the Unconstrain button in the Attribute dialog to unconstrain selected attributes of the constrained objects in Edit All mode the attribute will be unconstrained from all copies Edit All Select For a group
437. manent scrollbar in one direction and an automatic scrollbar in another direction The automatic scrollbar will appear as needed when the content extends outside of the visible area and may need to be scrolled 86 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference When the scrollbars are enabled they may be accessed as the GlgPanX and GlgPanY resources of the viewport When both scrollbars are enabled a viewport object named G gPanSpacer is also created to cover the lower right corner area between the scrollbars ActivePan Read only attribute contains a bit mask composed of the GLG PAN X andGLG PAN Y binary flags indicating which scrollbars are currently displayed ZoomEnabled The ZoomEnabled attribute enables keyboard accelerators for integrated zooming and panning When it is set to YES pressing an accelerator key performs a corresponding zooming or scrolling operation This setting is primarily used for quick interactive testing and prototyping in the Graphics Builder If the attribute is set to NO keyboard accelerators are disabled but zooming and panning operations can still be performed via the GlgSetZoom API function This is the preferred method for a run time application where zooming and panning operations are performed via the interface buttons while the keyboard accelerators are disabled to prevent accidental use The following accelerator keys are supported u pan up d pan down l pan left r pan right i zoom
438. mation is attached to the object and instead the transformation is used to recalculate coordinates of the objects control points For example when an object is moved stretched or rotated with the mouse in the Builder the corresponding transformation is used to change the object s points The Builder also provides the Transform Object Points option which may be used to change object s points by applying user defined transformations The GLG API also provides methods for transforming both an individual control point and all points of an object with a user supplied transformation The object s flag controls the way the transformation is applied using Transform Object Points If it is not set the coordinates of the object s control points are changed If the flag is set the transformation will be attached to the object instead of transforming it s point coordinates when the object is moved stretched or otherwise transformed both in the Builder and programmatically Dynamic Transformations In order to animate a transformation you must use a dynamic transformation This type of transformation stores various parameters used to generate the transformation matrix on the fly which are then used to transform the parent object For example the object that defines a rotation transformation contains the center of the rotation a geometrical value and an angle Before rendering the parent object the center and the angle are used to gener
439. mations see the GLG Objects chapter for transformation descriptions A viewing transformation does not affect the drawing s content it only adjusts the viewing projection used to present the drawing To return to one of the predefined projections select a view from the View Set submenu When the view is adjusted in the Builder the result of the adjustment is stored in the viewport s Zoom transformation If you want to transform the view from a program attach a parametric view transformation to the viewport object See the Viewport section of the GLG Objects chapter for more information on Zoom and View transformations Load View Transformation Load View Transformation applies a saved view transformation to the current drawing The transformation does not affect the drawing itself just the way it is presented When you select Load View Transformation the Builder prompts you to enter a file name using the standard file selection dialog To save a view projection use View Save View Transformation 312 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Save View Transformation Save View Transformation writes the definition for the current view projection to a file A saved view transformation is useful if you frequently use a particular projection that is not among the standard views You can configure your projection once save it and then load it whenever you want to view a drawing using that projection When you select Save View
440. me the group to have some more evocative name for example cube and forget that it is in fact nothing more than a collection of simple graphical objects Setting the fill_ color attribute of this cube will change the color of all its faces The Builder s Edit All group option provides an easy way to attach constraints to attributes of all objects in the group without repeating the constrain operation for each individual object This is a convenient way to constrain the fill color attributes of all faces of the three dimensional cube described above Constraints may be established between any two attribute objects of the same data type These constraints connect one branch to another within the object hierarchy Note that since GLG uses only three data types a number of surprising constraints are possible For example you can constrain a polygon fill color to the position of a polygon vertex in 3 D space since each is represented as a triple geometrical value Structure of a GLG Drawing 33 Since point positions are simply object attributes constraints may also tie one point of an object to another Each vertex of a polygon is an object whose value can be constrained to be the same as the value of a vertex of another polygon You can use this method to construct arbitrarily complex three dimensional shapes from the simplest components The constraints tracing option described in the Constraints Tracing section on page
441. multi byte or UTF 8 The attribute also controls the font usage as follows The UTES setting is used for rendering strings with the UTF 8 encoding In the X Windows environment it uses fonts with the UTF 8 encoding On Windows it causes the wide character Windows UNICODE version of the font to be used for rendering UTF 8 strings If the UTF8 setting of the font and the rendered text string do not match an appropriate encoding conversion will be automatically performed eIn the X Windows environment the attribute also controls the use of font sets If the value of the attribute is set to SINGLE BYTE the XFontName attribute specifies a single font to use Any other value causes the value of the XFontName attribute to be interpreted as a comma separated font set containing one or more fonts All the text objects that use the font will be rendered using the specified font set via the Xmb fam ily of the text rendering functions For all fonts in the default font table as well as fonts with the font charset attribute set to DEFAULT CHARSET on Windows the actual value of the flag is determined automatically based on the system locale The GlgMultibyteFlag global configuration variable may be used to specify the value of MultiByteFlag that overrides the automatic setting for these fonts GLG Objects 149 The attribute value is ignored in the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit Note The multi byte setting does not mean that each char
442. multiple parameters dynamic transformations may be chained by attaching additional transformations to the attributes of the first transformation When such recursive transformations are edited the title of the Edit Dynamics dialog reflects the current nesting level of the transformation Adding Dynamics to Control Points Control points are special attributes of an object that define its geometry A geometrical transformation can be added to a control point to move scale or rotate the point based on a value of a dynamic parameter Using the GLG Graphics Builder 243 To add a dynamic transformation to a control point Shift click on the point to show the Control Point dialog click on the Add Dynamics button then follow steps 2 5 described in the Creating a Transformation Object section on to add a transformation The Add Dynamics button in the Control Point dialog is activated only for real control points It is disabled for the object move point and resize points which are displayed only in the Builder for convenience of editing Several dynamic transformations can be attached to a point to move scale and rotate 1t depending on several dynamic parameters The order of transformations is important if the order is changed the resulting point position will be different The Edit Dynamics dialog provides controls for changing the order of transformations in the list Editing Transformations For each object or attribute with transf
443. n attributes of the marker s instances If an attribute s Global flag is set to GLOBAL in the template changing this attribute will change all instances If the flag is set to LOCAL the attribute of each instance may be set independently allowing for independent dynamics When the Segments mode is enabled the GLOBAL flag of the polygon template s attributes may be used to constrain attributes of the segment polygons in the same way The constraining behavior of the polyline is also controlled by its CloneType attribute Polysurface The polysurface object is a special type of series object used to create a surface made of a number of surface patches The number of patches is determined by the row and column factors of the polysurface A patch is a polygon connecting four neighboring points of a surface The polysurface is used in several three dimensional graphs in the GLG Widget Set In addition to the three control points defining the boundary parallelogram the polysurface also has the following attributes DepthSort Controls hidden surface removal Similar to the DepthSort attribute of a group page 98 except that the SPECIAL value uses a fast depth sorting algorithm optimized for polysurface objects when the GDI driver is used RowFactor and ColumnFactor Define a number of polygon patches used to form the surface DrawMarkers Controls the presence of markers at the vertices of the polysurface Markers are drawn only if the attribu
444. n axis object supports integrated tooltips that can be used to display an axis value corresponding to the current mouse position The content of the tooltip string is controlled by the axis s TooltipFormat attribute Axis attributes depend on the type of the axis some attributes are common for all axis types and other attributes are specific for a chosen axis type In the Builder the Property dialog displays only the attributes applicable to the selected axis type The following lists all attributes of the axis object Axis Type Defines the type of the axis The type is a combination of several constants that define the axis behavior RULER Controls scaling of the axis s tick intervals A ruler axis positions its minor and major ticks at pixel coordinates When the length of the axis is increased or decreased the axis keeps the pixel length of tick intervals constant and changes its displayed span to show a bigger or smaller number of ticks The RulerStart and RulerScale attributes control the origin and the scale of the ruler If the RULER modifier is not present and the axis s length is increased or decreased the axis preserves the visible span and proportionally changes the pixel length of tick intervals to maintain the number of displayed ticks constant RANGE Defines a value axis controlled by the Low and High attributes SCROLL Defines a scrollable axis with a visible span controlled by the EndValue and Span attributes TIME
445. n of the G gButton and GigNButton handlers The button messages are processed by the browser handler and do not require any additional handling Done Pushing this button indicates that the selection has been made Cancel Pushing this button sends a Cancel message which may be used to erase the browser without making a selection Reset This button resets the filter to its default value GlgPalette The palette widget is used to present a user with the opportunity to select one from a variety of objects This widget is designed to be used within a program using the GLG API A palette widget has only one resource an object named PaletteObject This is a container object with several members each corresponding to a different possible choice The user selects one of the presented objects with the left mouse button and the chosen object is returned to the calling program in the callback message object The returned object is indicated with the SelectedObject resource of the message object PaletteObject A container object presenting a variety of objects to be chosen by a user GlgClock Messages Input Objects 213 The clock input handler is used for two different timekeeping tasks measuring elapsed time and displaying the absolute time Unlike the other input handlers the clock widget is not primarily used for user input Rather it is used for updating a drawing with the current time If the TimerState resource is present t
446. n the choice of the GLG container used to load the drawing At design time the GLG Builder provides a Run mode and a data generating tool called datagen for prototyping the drawing right in the Builder A custom proto DLL can also be used to supply real time data for prototyping see the Custom Run Module DLL section on page 290 Use Run Start to prototype the drawing with test data and enter the run command for datagen When prototyping a widget drawing loaded from the palette the run command is usually preset to the correct value To animate a custom drawing or resource change the run command To animate tags use the tag option For the full syntax for datagen see the GLG Programming Tools and Utilities chapter For an example of using datagen to animate a drawing see the Drawing a Simple Example section of this chapter Refer to the The Data Generation Utility chapter of the GLG Programming Reference Manual for more details Reusing Objects Attributes and Transformations The Builder provides a variety of ways to replicate the elements of a drawing You can reuse entire objects attribute values or transformations Using the GLG Graphics Builder 257 Reusing an Object The Builder provides a variety of methods for making copies of the selected object These methods include e Saving objects to a drawing file and loading an object from a drawing file into the current drawing Cutting and pasting the object via the clipboard
447. n the subdrawing s Properties dialog The user can change the values of the attributes and add unique tags to each of the subdrawing instances The user can also change the names of the rebound attributes constrain them to attributes of other objects in the drawing or add dynamics to them to modify behavior of the subdrawing s instance These changes will affect only the instance of the subdrawing the Bindings are attached to If a name tag name or tag source of a rebound attribute is changed only the new values will be visible in the subdrawing s Instance while the old resource name and tag will still be visible in its Template To reset bindings press the Reset Bindings button This discards the old bindings and recreates the Bindings array with the initial values copied from the template so they may edited from scratch If an application uses several levels of nested subdrawings or subwindows a subdrawing may be used as a template by its parent subdrawing When a BOUND attribute is rebound to a local copy stored in the Bindings array the Global flag of the local copy is reset to LOCAL by default which disables further rebinding by any parent subdrawings or subwindows To enable attribute rebinding across several levels of nested subdrawings the Global flag of the local copy in the Bindings array can be set to BOUND again to enable rebinding by the parent subdrawing Origin The geometrical attribute that controls anchoring of the templat
448. n will be ignored at run time since only the Widget viewport will be used Some palette items such as viewportless dials define a collection of graphical objects without a viewport Such drawings do not define the Widget viewport and can not be displayed by themselves they need to be inserted into a viewport to be displayed When no optional palettes are installed the Palette Menu provides the Custom Objects HMI Editor Widget Samples Read Palette and Read Directory options Custom Objects The Custom Objects palette displays samples of pre built objects that can be used in a drawing It contains buttons sliders and other objects described in more detail in the GLG Builder and Animation Tutorial You can add your own objects to the Custom Object Palette To do so simply save it in the widgets custom_objects directory The object will be automatically added to the Custom Objects Palette when the builder is restarted or the palette is re opened HMI Editor Widget Samples The AMI Editor Widget Samples palette displays samples of HMI components that use application specific public properties These components are used with HMI Configurator where public properties are used for simplified editing of a component Click on a component in the palette to add it to the drawing then use Object Public Properties to display its public properties GLG Graphics Builder Menus 303 Read Palette The Read Palette option can be used to loa
449. nd Builder Reference Draw Order Defines the drawing order of the chart s elements can have the following values Edge Grid Plot Level Edge Grid Level Plot Grid Level Plot Edge Grid Plot Level Edge Edge Level Plot Grid Edge Plot Grid Level Level Plot Grid Edge Plot Grid Level Edge The Edge refers to the outline of chart s drawing area For example using the Edge Grid Plot Level setting will draw the outline and the grid first draw plot lines on top of the grid and then draw level lines on top of the plot lines The above DrawOrder values are shown in the Graphics Builder The GlgChartElemDrawOrder enum contains corresponding bit masks that can be used to set the value of the attribute via the GlgSetDResource method of the GLG API Draw Cross Hair Enables or disables the cross hair lines that follow the mouse when the mouse moves over the chart can have the following values NONE Disables the cross hair cursor X Enables the horizontal cross hair cursor Y Enables the vertical cross hair cursor XY Enables both the horizontal and vertical cross hair lines Edit Grid A button in the Properties dialog for editing attributes of the chart s cross hair cursor Edit SelectionMarker A button in the Properties dialog for editing attributes of the Marker object used to annotate the selected data sample The marker is displayed at the selected data sample when the sample is selected via the API call or by displaying a tooltip Use the marker
450. nd GLG editors with elaborate application specific dynamics To define a transformation object attached to an object s attribute 1 Select the graphical object that has the attribute you want to transform 2 Use Object Properties or click on the Properties button to show the Selected Object Properties dialog This dialog shows a list of attributes with a 4 for attributes that can be edited in a further dialog 3 Click on the for an attribute to see the Attribute dialog 4 Click on the Add Dynamics button in the Attribute dialog A list of transformation types appears The content of the transformation list depends on the data type of the attribute The predefined dynamics are listed first and the Show More button may be used to show all available stock transformation types See the Transformation Object chapter on page 151 for specifications of the transformations 5 Click on the transformation name to add the new transformation to the attribute then edit the transformation s parameters in the activated Edit Dynamics dialog Once the transformation has been defined you can edit it using the Edit Dynamics button in the Attribute dialog You can attach the same transformation definition to other attributes by using the Mark Object and Mark List buttons in the Edit Dynamics dialog see page 261 Only one transformation can be added to an attribute except for control points To create complex attribute dynamics that depend on
451. nd Unix platforms as well as Java and C NET environment as described in the the Scalar Formatting Format D section below Data The string data value to write into the text string Scalar Formatting Format D The scalar formatting transformation formats the scalar value of the Data attribute with the formatting instructions in the Format attribute If you constrain the Data attribute to the output value of a slider you can produce a real time display of the current slider value Format A character string specifying how the Data attribute is to be displayed The format is specified with the standard C language printf format The type of the format specification must match the Format Type attribute For example the following format can be used to display a double value Value 2f The following formats are supported double formats f F g G e E integer formats d x X 0 Using format types that do not match the Format Type attribute is not allowed and may result in a crash Escape sequences may be used to define native platform specific formats for Windows and Unix platforms as well as Java and C NET environment The platform specific formats may be specified by surrounding them with HTML style brackets GLG Objects 165 lt platform gt native format lt platform gt where platform may be one of the following java cf c_unix or c_windows One or more platform specific formats may be specified before the g
452. nd changes back to 1 when the mouse moves away Visually this will create a highlighting effect Various other types of highlighting may be used For example the object s color may be changed by attaching a color list transformation to the object s color attribute If more than two attributes need to be highlighted they may be constrained to change together 50 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference To enable processing of the MouseOver events the viewport s ProcessMouse attribute has to include the Move mask An action s ProcessArmed attribute may be used to activate the action only when the Control key is held down In the GLG Builder the Run mode may be used to prototype the MouseOver highlight At run time 1t will be handled automatically with no actions required in the program An old style prior to v 3 5 mouse over highlight implemented by naming an object s resource MouseOverState is also supported for backward compatibility The value of the object s MouseOverState resource is set to 1 when the mouse moves over the object and to 0 when it moves away The MouseOver State resource must be visible at the proper place in the object hierarchy If a polygon in the previous example has HasResources set to YES the MouseOverState resource will appear as a resource of the polygon and the polygon will be highlighted when the mouse moves over it If the polygon is part of a group and the group s HasResources is set to YES but the
453. ndent template The container draws its template directly without creating any additional instances of it 3 Containers may be used to implement node edge functionalities If a container is used as a node the container s single control point may be conveniently used for positioning or attaching connectors to Containers may also be used to preserve center of rotational dynamics when objects are moved To create a container 1 Select an object to use as a template 2 Select Object Properties to set the attributes of the template object so that its instance will inherit the appropriate settings Name the object 3 Click on the E button or select Object Create Container menu option to place the selected object n a container then click in the drawing to define the container s position When you create a container the Builder places it at the current level of the hierarchy The container s template appears in the resource hierarchy as the Template resource it is also visible in the resource hierarchy under its original name When you copy a container each copy will store its own copy of the template If containers are used to represent connected nodes a container s control point may be used for constraining connecting lines that represent edges To edit the container s template object use Traverse Hierarchy Down When finished use Traverse Up to go back to the top level GLG Graphics Builder Menus 333 Viewpor
454. ndex to refrain from using two separate row and column indexes GLG Objects 103 The Global flag of the template s attributes may be used to constrain attributes of its instances If an attribute s Global flag is set to GLOBAL in the template changing this attribute will change all instances If the flag is set to LOCAL the attribute of each instance may be set independently enabling independent dynamics The constraining behavior of the square series is also controlled by its CloneType attribute Reference A Reference object is a wrapper around a group of objects used as a template The Reference object may be used to replicate the same template in multiple places in one drawing or in multiple drawings It may also be used as a convenient wrapper for positioning a group of object using a single anchor point There are three flavors of the Reference object used to implement different functionality Container encapsulates a collection of objects in a single entity Unlike the group the con tainer also provides a single control point for positioning it in the drawing A container s Template holds the objects drawn in the container If the container is copied the con tained template object is copied as well so that each copy of the container has its own independent template A container draws its template directly without creating any addi tional instances of it Containers may be used to implement node edge functionalities
455. ndow objects Possible values are GLG_USE _FILE uses a template stored in an external drawing file specified by the SourcePath attribute GLG USE INCLUDED uses a template included in the drawing The template is stored as a part of the subdrawing When the subdrawing is copied in the same drawing the template is shared between all copies The template is not shared between subdrawings in different drawings GLG_USE_PALETTE a special case of the included template that allows embedding a palette of objects in the drawing for easy editing The palette object is specified by the SourcePath attribute which defines the palette s resource path in the drawing If the SourcePath is not set Palette is used as a default palette path which assumes an object named Palette at the top level of the drawing hierarchy An example of a palette is a viewport object containing several graphical objects used as icons in subdrawings Using a palette makes it easier to locate the template s icons when they need to be edited The Source attribute is set at the creation time depending on the way the object was created such as SubDrawing From File or SubDrawing From Object If the object is created using SubDrawing From File the value of its Source may be changed from GLG_USE FILE to GLG_USE_INCLUDED to permanently store the loaded template in the subdrawing as opposed to using an external file 106 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The
456. ng an Object to a File You can save the selected object to a file as a GLG drawing Loading the saved object adds it to the current drawing adding all its attributes to the object hierarchy of the current drawing With this method the object s availability persists across Builder sessions because the object is in an external file Use File Save Object to create a new file that contains the selected object and use File Load Object to add the object to the current drawing see page 298 258 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference When you load an object from a file the object is placed by using its coordinates in the coordinate system of the current level of the hierarchy For example if you select a viewport and then load a circle with a center at 0 0 0 the circle is drawn in the middle of the viewport Es Current coordinate system Cutting Copying and Pasting an Object You can cut or copy an object to a temporary storage area and then paste it into the drawing The clipboard holds a single object which stays on the clipboard until you cut or copy another object With this replicating method the object can be copied from one level of the traversal hierarchy to another Use Edit Cut and Edit Copy to copy the selected object to the clipboard cutting 1t deletes the original object while placing it on the clipboard but copying it leaves the original intact and places a copy on the clipboard Use Edit Past
457. ng global configuration resource GLG_ANTI ALIASING_OFF Disable antialiasing GLG_ANTI ALIASING_INT Enable antialiasing and map vertices to integer pixel boundaries This matches the coordinate mapping of the native non OpenGL renderer and makes the straight lines look sharper GLG_ANTI ALIASING_DBL Enables antialiasing and uses double vertex coordinates This setting makes the curved lines look better It is used as a default setting for arcs splines rounded rectangles and plot lines of a real time chart For the GDI driver in C C ActiveX the antialiasing is enabled only for the viewports that use the OpenGL renderer and have their OpenGLHint ON For Java the attribute is ignored and the anti aliasing is controlled globally by the GlgAntiAliasing global configuration resource The attribute is always used in C NET Point List A list of polygon s control point Allows you to change the order of points in the polygon as well as add and delete points from the polygon Rendering A slot for attaching an optional Rendering object to control an expanded set of rendering attributes such as gradient fill cast shadows fill level and arrow heads The rendering object is accessible by using the Add Edit Rendering buttons in the Object Properties dialog To delete the rendering object use the Delete Rendering button in the Rendering Object properties The attribute assumes the value of NULL if no rendering object is attached See the Renderin
458. nly on top level viewports since children viewports inherit the font table from a parent If a custom font table was defined using the Add Font Table button it takes priority over the font table defined by the FonttableFile attribute Alternatively an application can set a custom font table as a global Default Font Table by using the GleDefaultFontTableFile and GlgDefaultFontTable global configuration resources described on page 345 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual This custom font table will be inherited by all viewports that use a default font table FontTable A custom font table that lists the fonts available for use in the viewport If not defined the font table defined by the FonttableFile is used If the FonttableFile is not defined the font table is inherited from the parent viewport or the default GLG font table is used ifno parent exists The Add Edit Font Table button may be used to add a custom font table to the viewport or edit fonts in the font table if it already exists To delete the font table use the Delete Table button in the font table properties Refer to the Editing a Font Table section on page 147 for information on editing a font table When a font table is added to all viewports in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added font tables the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone
459. nning of the axis to its end For example setting Span 60 for a chart s time axis will display 60 seconds worth of data ending with the time specified by the EndValue attribute 126 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Low range axes only Specifies the value corresponding to the axis start High range axes only Specifies the value corresponding to the axis end Ruler Start ruler axes only Specifies the value corresponding to the axis start Ruler Scale ruler axes only Defines a scale factor for unit to pixel mapping For example if RulerScale 10 one unit of the ruler will be mapped to 10 pixel To display an inch ruler set RulerScale to the value of the monitor s DPI Dots Per Inch To display a metric centimeter ruler set RulerScale to the value of the monitor s DPI divided by 2 54 Time Format time axis only Specifies a format for displaying time labels The format string follows the convention of the POSIX strftime function and can contain ordinary characters as well as conversion specifications The conversion specifications are two character sequences that start with the character and are replaced by formatted time and date strings as described below The conversion specifications listed below are universally supported across Windows Linux Unix Java and C NET environments Escape sequences may be used to define native platform specific formats for Windows and Unix platforms as well as Java and C
460. no objects are selected display the viewport s properties and press the Add Dynamics button to add a viewing transformation Notice that selecting the viewport and adding dynamics adds a transformation to the viewport transforming its control points while adding dynamics with the focus inside the viewport adds a viewing transformation which affects the way the objects in the viewport are drawn After adding a viewing transformation the default zooming transformation of the viewport can also be accessed in the Builder This matrix transformation must always be present and the Builder prevents it from being deleted or reordered You can give this transformation a name to access it from a program as a named resource ZoomFactor A read only attribute of the viewport showing the current zoom factor may be used to implement custom decluttering turning layers on or off depending on the zoom factor or icons of constant size This attribute is not displayed in the viewport s Property dialog but is accessible as a resource XYRatio A read only attribute of the viewport showing the current X Y ratio of the viewport s window It may be used to implement icons of constant X Y ratio for a viewport with Stretch enabled so that the icons will keep their X Y ratio constant while other objects in the drawing will stretch This attribute is not displayed in the viewport s Property dialog but is accessible as a resource A viewport has a secondary s
461. ns describe the components of such an object For a complete list and description of all the available graphical objects see the GLG Objects chapter Note that while the set of atomic GLG objects consists of one and two dimensional objects such as lines and polygons they are placed in a three dimensional space within a GLG drawing This can be the source of what initially seems odd behavior For example when you move one of the control points of a circle object it may appear that the circle is being squashed into an ellipse This is not the case you are rotating it in space and an ellipse is what you see when you look at a circle from off center 34 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Attributes Any graphical object has a set of default attributes that let you see the object rendered on a computer screen A polygon s color the width and hue of its border its position in the drawing whether it appears to be in front of or behind other objects and whether it is open or closed are among the attributes necessary to render that polygon Most of the attributes in GLG are themselves objects and their editing dialogs in the Graphics Builder may be accessed by pressing the ellipsis button positioned next to an attribute name in the Object Properties dialog A special attribute of any graphical object is its Visibility This controls whether the object is rendered at all in the drawing The ability to create invisible objects is useful f
462. ns in the Edit Dynamics list see page 261 Several dynamic transformations can be attached to an object to move scale and rotate it depending on several dynamic parameters The order of transformations is important if the order is changed the result of applying several transformations to an object will be different The Edit Dynamics dialog provides controls for changing the order of transformations in the list The MoveMode Attribute The MoveMode attribute is used to preserve a relative position of centers of rotation and scale dynamics attached to the object from changing when the object is moved with the mouse If the MoveMove is set to STICKY MODE the center of rotate or scale transformation will be moved together with the object If it is set to MOVE POINTS the center of the transformation will not be moved with the object For example an object rotating around its center with MoveMode set to STICKY MODE will still rotate around its center after being moved With MoveMode set to MOVE POINTS the center of rotation will not move along with the object and the object will rotate around the old center position even after the object has been moved If the MoveMode is set to MOVE BY XFORM moving or transforming the object in some other way results in adding a static xform to the object instead of changing the coordinates of the object s control points The added transformation equally transforms the object s control points and the attac
463. nsformation used in computer graphics and the derivation is available in many texts on that subject To use the GLG Toolkit you need only understand that the matrix when multiplied by a point in three dimensional space produces the coordinates of another such point The mapping of input points onto output points by this matrix multiplication is a transformation The matrix itself is the only attribute of a matrix transformation object Its name is Matrix and it is aread only attribute This is to say that once the matrix object has been created it may not be edited directly although it may be replaced Partly because of the read only nature of the Matrix attribute and partly because of the unwieldy nature of a matrix value the matrix transformation is often called a static transformation All the other geometrical transformation objects are dynamic objects since they simply store the values necessary to create a transformation matrix on the fly These values may be edited and accessed as resources like any others The MoveBy transformation object moves the input geometrical value a given distance along the X Y or Z axis It has three attributes Direction Specifies the direction of the motion selected at the creation time The available values are X Y or Z or XYZ Distance A scalar double precision specifying the distance to move GLG Objects 153 Factor Normalized move parameter The actual distance moved is the product of t
464. nsformations attached to a single object This transformation object has only two attributes that point to the first transformation on the list and the second If more than two transformations must be attached to an object then multiple Concatenate objects can be used For example to hold a list of three transformation objects use two Concatenate transformations as in the following diagram Transformed Object Concatenate Transformation Transformation1 Concatenate Transformation Transformation2 Transformation3 Using the Concatenate Transformation Object To add another transformation to the list replace Transformation3 with another concatenate transformation object which holds Transformation3 as the first attribute and the new transformation as the second attribute Note that the GLG Graphics Builder does not explicitly manipulate concatenate transformation objects The Builder uses concatenate transformation to build and edit lists of transformations attached to an object but the overhead of keeping track of the concatenate objects is hidden from the user The concatenate transformation object has just two attributes Xform1 The first transformation object Xform2 The second transformation object World Offset The World Offset transformation may be attached to a point to maintain a constant offset from another point This transformation may be attached only
465. nt OD Sii Aaa 299 SV Object AAA A AA AAA Ed 299 PMA AS tn ad 299 Export POStScriptsa tesvs sherse stedeatshademstaten otale cacheazia E EE AR EEE A E E n 299 Print Configuration tapas 299 A a o a 300 Save Image Palla ii td Aa aa 301 Save Direct OpenGL Image 0 cceccccscesssesecseceseceeeeeseeesceseceseceeeeeeeeesecsaecaseneeeeneeesaeenseeeeses 301 Export SUID GS s s secs cid 301 TMPOrt Strings sosassssrsaisessescsta bac aeaGhenacbedeyots ann Das 301 Export Tags aril act ada Dead Dosis 301 Import Si dni i 301 OO FOTO TA ET 301 12 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Custo ODO Staind dd a A aid di 302 HMI Editor Widget Samples ccccccccccssecssesseceeeceseeeseeesecesecsseseeecseecssensecseeceseeeseeeeseeeeseeaes 302 Read Palena A od 303 AD 0 A RN 303 Adding Custom Widgets and Custom PalettesS ooocoonncnnnccnococonnoonnonnconcconnconocononancon no ro nonnronanannnos 303 Naming Conventions for Palette Drawings cccccccesseesceesceceeseceeeeeeceeeeeseecsaenseenseeeseennees 303 Palette Description File Format 0 cccccesccessessseeseceeceseeeseeeseesaecaeceeeseeeeesecaaecaeseeeseeeeeeeaaes 304 Adding Custom Palettes to the Builder cccccccceccccssesseceseceseeeeeeeseesaececseeseeecaeesseeneeneeennes 305 Edi da 305 O A A 305 Undo Histotias Ets 305 Select Multiple Objects usina dcir eee decdeeaseepensead daa sales cuadeveasbaedeacngedts 306 Select Rectan gular ATi da pica TR 306 Select Object Insi
466. nt moves the selected object in front of other objects in the drawing All overlapping objects appear to be behind the selected object Move Backward Move Backward changes the selected object s place in the rendering list moving the object back in the list by one position every time Move Backward is selected the Ctr accelerator may also be used Move Forward Move Forward changes the selected object s place in the rendering list moving the object forward in the list by one position every time Move Forward is selected the Ctrl accelerator may also be used Replace Viewport with SubWindow Replaces the currently selected viewport with a SubWindow object that uses the same control points as the original viewport The operation preserves any constraints on the control points The Source attribute of the subwindow is set to INCLUDED and the original viewport is assigned as the subwindow s template To use the subwindow for displaying viewports form drawing files change its Source to FILE and set the Source Path to the filename of a drawing to be displayed in the subwindow Polygon Points Contains options for reordering or adding points to a polygon Inverse Polygon Points Inverts the order of the polygon s control points This does not change the polygon s appearance but the first point in the list of the polygon s points annotated in the drawing with the small black square becomes the last point in the list The li
467. nternal AMIFlag flag to differentiate them from the custom components and objects created in the Graphics Builder The HMI Configurator imposes restrictions on editing objects created in the Graphics Builder For example the HMI Configurator allows to explode group objects only if they were created in the HMI Configurator The Options OEM Options Toggle Objects HMI Flag option may be used to change HMIFlag setting if required Custom Predefined Dynamics GLG editors provide two sets of dynamics options for object attributes the stock transformations and predefined dynamics The stock transformations are basic transformation types used as building blocks to implement dynamic behavior Predefined dynamics provide easy to use options for the most common dynamic actions in the GLG editors Predefined dynamics may also be used by system integrators to extend GLG editors with elaborate application specific dynamics Predefined dynamics are implemented using custom transformations which represent a collection of several stock transformations wired together to implement specific dynamic behavior Most of the parameters of the transformations used to implement the predefined dynamics are hidden from Using the GLG Graphics Builder 285 the user and only the essential parameters marked as public are presented to the user as a simple list of public properties The Options Dynamics Options menu of the Graphics Builder contains options that control how the pr
468. nting and export PostScript Level specifies which version of PostScript the Builder sends to the printer Level 3 is required for proper PostScript printing of images with transparent background PostScript Orientation For PostScript printing and export PostScript Orientation determines whether the drawing is printed in portrait mode across the width of the page or in landscape mode down the height of the page For Windows printing the page orientation is set in the Print dialog Orientation Drawing Drawing 0 Landscape Portrait Orientation e Portrait and Landscape Orientations Save Image Save Image saves the image of the visible part of the drawing area into a file in either the JPEG or PNG format The format of the image is defined by the SavelmageFormat variable in the glg config file Ifthe editing focus has been moved into a viewport the image of that viewport will be saved instead of the main drawing area GLG Graphics Builder Menus 301 Save Image Full Save Image Full saves an unclipped image of the whole drawing into a file in either the JPEG or PNG format The format of the image is defined by the SavelmageFormat variable in the gl config file If the editing focus has been moved into a viewport the image of that viewport will be saved instead of the main drawing area Save Direct OpenGL Image Save Direct OpenGL Image Windows only saves a visible part of the
469. nts they require extra attention A minimal number of control points defines the basic geometry of each object Depending on the shape additional points may be calculated dynamically For example three control points define a parallelogram and the last vertex is calculated dynamically However a free form polygon has a control point at each vertex A parallelogram and a polygon with their control points To see the attributes of a control point Shifi click over the point The Control Point dialog shows the attributes of the point with arrows for precise movement of the point and buttons for manipulating the point jo Jn Tag Add Tag Type G _ HasResources Local Value 2140 2400 XfValue 140 2400 Use House Use Position e ject ALI E gt y Constrain One Unconstrain Hark 140 240 0 Add Alarn Coord System DRAWING Dynamics Add Edil Berete _feply 0K Back e Use Mouse positions the point where you click in the drawing area Hove By Pixels Position e Use Position positions the point at the same place as another control point that you click on Resources or marked objects may also be used to define another control point e Use Object gives the point the same coordinate values as another control point that you click on Resources or marked objects may also be used to define another control point e Constrain One replaces the point s e
470. o other objects When custom properties are attached to objects in the GLG Builder 4dd Custom Property button of the Object Menu the data objects are used to keep the properties values The attribute object is a subclass of the data object used to specify an attribute value The attribute objects are used to keep values of attributes control points and values of list transformations Polygons store their control points as an array of attribute objects The attribute object differs from the data object by its transformational behavior Unlike the data object it is transformed not only by the transformation attached to the attribute itself but also by any related transformations attached to its parents For example consider a polygon s point with transformations attached to both the point and the polygon The point is an attribute object and is transformed by both transformations as well as by the drawing transformation of the viewport in which the polygon is contained To access attribute objects via resources use default attribute names instead of named object attributes For example my_polygon LineWidth may be used to access the LineWidth attribute vs my_polygon my_color For polygon points the GlgGetElement function can also be used to access point s attributes The attribute object s properties are similar to the properties of the data object Type Specifies the type of data stored Possible data types are G D
471. o position of the first instance s origin To create a series 1 Select an object to use as a template 2 Select Object Properties to name the object and to set the attributes of the template object so that its instances will inherit appropriate characteristics 3 Select Object Create Series to create the instance objects 268 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 4 Click on two points to specify a path on which to arrange the series instances 5 Enter a factor to specify the number of instances to create To edit the template object use Traverse Hierarchy Down When you finish editing use Traverse Up to see the instance objects The Square Series Object A square series is a series with its instances organized into rows and columns The number of rows and columns determines the number of instances in the square series A Square Series object consists of a template and a set of generated instances The instances are named using the template object name and an index for example a template named Rect with two rows and two columns creates four instances named Rect0 Rect1 Rect2 and Rect3 To create a square series 1 Select an object to use as a template 2 Select Object Properties to name the object and to set its attributes so that its instances will inherit appropriate characteristics 3 Select Object Create Square Series to create the instance objects 4 Click on the origin for the square s
472. object The source code of the GlgSCADA Viewer demo provides examples of handling custom events and commands in an application code Refer to the GLG Programming Reference Manual for information on using the Input callback for handling custom events Refer to the Custom Event Message Object section and the Command Message Object section of the GLG Programming Reference Manual on page 360 for more information on the message objects The old style prior to v 3 5 custom events implemented by naming an object s resource MouseClickEvent or MouseOverEvent are also supported for backward compatibility If an object have one of these resources an corresponding custom event will be generated when the object is selected with the mouse The EventLabel of the message object will contain the value of the named resource that triggered the message The menu options for adding the old style custom events are disabled by default in the Builder but may be enabled by changing the value of the DisablePre3 5Menus parameter in the glg_ config file If a drawing does not use the old style custom events mouse feedback and tooltips the GlgDisablePre35ObjectEvents global configuration variable described on page 179 may be used to disable them which may decrease CPU load when moving the mouse over a large drawings Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing 53 Input Object Events Low Level Input Object Events Low level input object events are generated automati
473. object in a GLG drawing for example is represented as an agglomeration of simple two dimensional shapes The advanced objects also provide a drawing designer with tools to designate an object to be a template for other objects This can be done for simple two dimensional objects as well as for complex compound objects A group is a container object used to keep a set of simpler objects together The group object does not have any control points nor any geometry The geometry of the group is completely defined by the objects it contains A group may contain any other objects including other groups Though its most common use is to collect graphical objects into composite objects the group is not really a graphical object It can be used to collect data objects into lists and arrays For example a group is used to keep an array of Custom Data Properties attached to an object The group object is included in this list because most users will encounter the group in trying to create composite graphical objects Groups may be used for creating layers in which case the group s Visibility attribute may be used to control the visibility of its layer rendering all objects in the group visible or invisible 98 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Aside from the name and other standard attributes like HasResources and Visibility the group object has only one attribute The DepthSort attribute controls hidden surface removal for the child ob
474. object is a group with attached transformations the transformations are copied to the resulting objects The Builder prompts you for the type of cloning used to copy the transformations Sub Objects Xform For objects that are contained in a group Sub Objects lets you explode the sub objects without affecting the group When you select this option the Builder prompts you to choose between transforming the points in each object or adding the transformation to each object s control points If you choose to add the transformation to the control points the Builder prompts you for the type of cloning used to copy the transformations This option is grayed if the selected group object has no transformations Sub Object Xforms Sub Object Xforms parallels the function of Xform affecting the sub objects in the group GLG Graphics Builder Menus 321 Reorder The Reorder submenu provides options to let you change the drawing order of objects Unless the parent viewport or group has the DepthSort attribute turned on the last object drawn appears to be in front of any other overlapping objects This is true regardless of the spatial positions of the objects with the exception of the viewports which are windows and always appear on top of graphical objects Move to Back Move to Back moves the selected object behind other objects in the drawing All overlapping objects appear to be in front of the selected object Bring to Front Bring to Fro
475. object or all alarms of the whole drawing if no object is selected Selecting a different object updates the Alarm Browser to display the object s alarms The Alarm Browser Dialog The Alarm Browser dialog displays a list of alarms attached to the attributes of the selected object to monitor their values If no object is selected all alarms defined in the whole drawing will be displayed Each alarm entry shows the alarm s AlarmLabel attribute Alarms are attached to object attributes to monitor their values When an alarm entry in the alarm browser is selected with the mouse two dialogs are displayed one to edit the attributes of the alarm object and another to edit the attribute the alarm is attached to The Filter field may be used to display only a subset of alarms whose AlarmLabel matches a regular expression that may contain the any character and any sequence of characters wild cards The Selection field may be used to select an alarm by typing its AlarmLabel For a discussion of the basics of attribute alarms see the Alarms chapter on page 39 and the Integrated Alarms for Value Monitoring chapter on page 63 Object Dynamics The Object Dynamics submenu provides options for adding and editing geometrical dynamics Add Dynamics Add Dynamics adds geometrical dynamics such as move scale or rotate to the selected object The dynamics are attached in the form of a dynamic transformation For an explanation of the differ
476. of points that describe its boundary For example a parallelogram consists of three control points defining the positions of three of its corners The fourth point is generated dynamically from the others Therefore a parallelogram cannot be constrained by the fourth corner Although you can constrain other objects to that fourth point Similarly a circle object has two control points which represent opposite ends of a vector perpendicular to the middle of the circle You can use these control points to rotate the circle into a different plane from the one in which it was created But what about the points that describe the circle s perimeter These points are created dynamically by GLG based on attributes of the circle object such as its radius and resolution as well as the positions of the control points That is they do not have a persistent existence as objects in the hierarchy Therefore it is impossible to constrain another object to them Structure of a GLG Drawing 35 Transformations By now you understand how objects in a GLG drawing are built and constrained to each other and how objects can be grouped together to make other objects We have also introduced the concept of resources by which object attributes are named and can be changed through the GLG editor or API Using just these concepts you can create and use sophisticated animated drawings GLG lets you control the shape of a graphical object not only by contr
477. of the palette description file contains a key word and a value separated with the sign The following keywords are supported title Specifies a mandatory title for the palette which is displayed in the Builder s Palettes Menu num columns Defines an optional number of columns displayed in the palette The default value is 4 num rows Defines an optional number of visible rows displayed in the palette By default the palettes height is extended to accommodate as many rows as required to display all palette objects If this parameter is set to a smaller value for example 4 the palette will show only 4 rows and will include a scroll bar to scroll the rest of the palette objects background color Specifies the palette s optional background color This color is defined by supplying an RGB value in the range from 0 to 1 For example use background color 1 1 1 to define a white background The default color is the color of the template directory An optional directory parameter If defined all drawing files from the directory are displayed in the palette Each drawing file defines one palette item and may contain the Icon Drawing or Widget resources as described in the Read Directory section to specify the icon to display and the object to insert in the drawing when the palette icon is selected If the directory is not defined the entries parameter is used The Builder s Custom Objects Palette uses the directory param
478. of the slider ranging from 0 to 1 If this resource is missing the default increment of the native slider widget is used Pagelncrement Specifies the amount the value changes when the user moves the slider by one page increment The page increment is expressed as a fraction of the total range of the slider ranging from 0 to 1 It can also be set to 1 in which case the slider size will be used as a page increment If the page increment is missing a default page increment is used In the C environment NET scrollbar controls do not allow setting the page increment and slider size independently If Pagelncrement is set to a positive value 1t will define both the page increment and the slider size otherwise SliderSize will be used to define both parameters Messages GlgKnob Input Objects 199 SliderSize Specifies the size of the moving part of a scrollbar The slider size is expressed as a fraction of the total range of the slider ranging from 0 to 1 If slider size is missing the default size is used This resource is applied only to the native scrollbar widget Granularity Specifies a number of possible positions the slider can take If the resource is absent the slider may take any value between the lower and upper limits DrawTicks Java only Activates display of the JSlider s major ticks if set to an integer value greater than 0 If the Granularity resource is not defined the number of ticks is defined by the v
479. oint in the resource hierarchy and by the History indicator in the Status Panel when the object is selected To animate the object containing the history object you provide input data to the EntryPoint resource To edit a history object select the object the history is attached to and use Object Edit History or click on the History button in the Status Panel The Add History Dialog The Add History dialog lets you specify the resource to animate It prompts you to enter the resource name that will be used as a template for accessing all sequential resources controlled by the history object Specify the constant part of the resource name substituting a percent sign for the variable part of the name You can specify a path to a child object using forward slashes as you would in a UNIX path specification For example for a series named Series with HasResources YES and a template named Triangle the instances are named Triangle0 Trianglel Triangle2 and Triangle3 To animate the fill color select Series and use Object Add History In the Add History dialog specify Triangle FillColor in the Resource Name text entry box The resulting EntryPoint object is defined at the same level as the Triangle object Widget Series1 EntryPoint 354 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The entered resource path is used as a template to access all sequential resources controlled by the history The location of the percent sign
480. oint which already contains a previously buffered value To add a single sample to a plot push a value into the ValueEntryPoint with the GigSetD Resource method push values into the TimeEntryPoint and ValidEntryPoint if necessary then invoke the GlgUpdate method to update the drawing To add multiple samples for example when filling the whole chart with data an application can repeatedly push values into the entry points and invoke the G gUpdate method once at the end A plot can be erased without losing the accumulated data points by setting its Opacity the Opacity of its Line Attributes to 0 To display the plot again set its Opacity to 1 Level Line The Level Line object annotates a chart threshold by drawing a horizontal line at a specified height A required number of Level Line objects is automatically created by the parent chart A level line does not have any control points since its geometry is completely defined by its parent chart A level line object inherits LineAttributes such as EdgeColor LineType Line Width Opacity and AntiAliasing and has the following additional attributes Level Specifies the threshold s value Y Low The low range of the level line If the chart s CommonRange is set to YES the range is shared with the chart s plots Y High The high range of the level line If the chart s CommonRange is set to YES the range is shared with the chart s plots Enabled Enables or disables the displa
481. ol a polyline you must name the control point of the template marker Use Traverse Hierarchy Down to edit the marker template This creates a third group of resources within the polyline called Points which contains the instances of the marker control point The coordinates of these points control the position of the polyline s points Polysurface A polysurface is a specialized three dimensional object that can be used to anchor a set of objects along its surfaces It is used primarily for patching of curved surfaces Like a square series object a polysurface consists of a template and a set of instances for the poly surface the instances are polygons arranged in rows and columns 338 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference To create a polysurface click on a point to define the center of the polysurface and click on two points to define two vectors from the center point The Builder prompts you for the number of rows and columns in the surface these values control the number of surface polygons By default the polysurface has a Marker and a Polygon resource that contain the template marker object and the template polygon from which the instance polygons characteristics are derived You only see the instances of the polysurface templates if those objects are named The template objects of a polysurface are named by default If the objects are named two groups Markers and Polygons appear among the resources of the polysurface The
482. olling its attributes but also by attaching a transformation to it This can provide a considerable savings in computation time and drawing complexity For example consider a rectangle defined by three control points To control the length of the rectangle using the rectangle resources you would have to directly control the position of at least one of the control points This involves editing and setting at least one geometrical value which consists of three spatial coordinates as illustrated in the following figure X1 Y1 24 X2 Y2 Z2 E X3 Y3 Zs Controlling the Length of a Rectangle A simpler way to control the length of a rectangle is to create a resource that directly controls the length of the rectangle and control that resource This can be done by defining a ScaleX transformation and attaching it to the rectangle The computational savings in this example may not seem great but the advantages become more apparent when you consider an operation like rotating a ten point polygon around its center Several simple geometric transformations that may be applied to graphical objects such as rotation move scale and shear can be defined with a matrix The points of a graphical object transformed with this matrix produce the points ofa new transformed graphical object The details of the matrix construction are not important here though they can be found in most introductory computer gra
483. om a subdrawing file if the file contains an object named Drawing or Widget ObjectPath is relative to that object otherwise it is relative to the whole template drawing The ObjectPath attribute makes it possible to implement subdrawing dynamics using just one template containing several objects instead of placing each object into a different GLG Objects 107 drawing file and loading a new template drawing every time the subdrawing changes its shape In other words the subdrawing dynamics implemented via the SourcePath attribute may now be replaced with more efficient object dynamics via the use of ObjectPath The the object dynamics also works with included subdrawings To implement object dynamics a list transformation is attached to the ObjectPath attribute to define a list of resource paths pointing to different objects in the template When the index of the list transformation changes a different object path is used and a different object from the template is displayed in the subdrawing Each value in the list may include an anchor path as described below The ObjectPath attribute may also contain two resource paths separated by a colon The second path specifies the anchor path a resource path to a control point to be used as an anchor when displaying the object The anchor path may point to a named control point of an object or to a control point of a marker outside of the object used to control object s position F
484. om properties attached to the object The Delete button of the Edit Custom Properties dialog may be used to delete individual properties Mark Custom Properties Marks all custom properties attached to the selected object Add Marked Properties Adds custom properties marked with Mark Custom Properties to the custom property list of the selected object Aliases This button pops up the Aliases sub menu with the options listed below Add Alias Add Alias creates an alias object An alias object provides a way to assign logical names to arbitrary resource hierarchies The resource can then be accessed using the alias instead of the hierarchical resource path 352 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference An alias object is not visible and does not appear in the drawing Its presence is indicated by the Alias indicator in the Status Panel when an object with aliases is selected To edit an alias select the object to which the alias is attached and use Object Edit Aliases or click on the Alias indicator in the Status Panel The Alias List Dialog Adding an alias opens an Alias List dialog The left part of the dialog contains a list of aliases attached to the object alias properties of the selected alias are displayed on the right A new alias is created with both Alias and Path attributes set to Alias Change the Alias attribute to the alias name you want to assign then enter the resource path to be aliased in the Path attr
485. on 158 Scale 154 scale transformation 154 scaled text object 75 148 SCALED_IMAGE 79 screen coordinate system 42 Screen Name 97 screen object subsidiary of viewport 93 screen offset transformation 157 screen offsets in pixels defining 97 screen scale transformation 158 374 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Screen Transformation 97 screen transformation 245 scripting 219 scroll by dragging the drawing with the mouse 313 scroll type 139 SCROLLBAR MS Windows control 215 SCROLLED 139 Scrolling 85 272 scrolling 45 Scrolling palettes 304 ScrollType 139 Sec 213 SECTOR 74 sector arc object 74 Segments 110 Select Object Inside Group 306 SelectedIndex 207 209 SelectedItem 207 209 Selection Display 358 selection marker disabling 118 semi global 70 series inverse order 100 Series Object using 267 series object 267 267 to 268 309 322 336 series objects 99 series template 99 Set action 175 Set message 203 SetInitItemList message 207 209 SetltemList message 207 209 SetItemState message 208 SetItemStateList message 208 Shading 72 shading 91 shadow adding 271 shadow transparency 142 ShadowColor 142 ShadowOffset 142 Shadow Width 85 95 Shear 154 shear transformation 153 ShellType 95 Show Frame Points 99 112 SINE timer update type 160 SizeConstraint 77 SliderSize 197 199 SList transformation 166 SortInput 115 Source 105 167 SourcePath
486. on attribute specifies the number of segments used to render each corner of the ellipse At low Resolution values the shape no longer resembles an ellipse for example an ellipse with a Resolution of 2 is a hexagon To create an ellipse click on two points to define the diagonal corners of the ellipse s bounding rectangle The Spline options let you create a multi point Bezier cubic spline used to render curves in 2D or 3D space e Spline Aj e Filled spline O9 To create a spline click in the drawing area to define the number of spline control points then click the middle or right mouse buttons or use the Esc key to complete the spline The spline will render a smooth curve defined by the control points The shape of the curve may be changed by moving the control points A marker is an object that indicates the position of a single point Markers are made by selecting one or more shapes from a set of predefined shapes such as squares crosses and circles Unlike other graphical objects marker objects do not change their size when the viewport is resized y To create a marker select Object Create Marker and then specify the point 330 Image Text GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Since markers are always drawn the same size they are not affected by transformations To change a marker s size change its Size attribute An image object may be used to display an image in GIF JPEG PNG or BMP on Windows only
487. on by clicking with the mouse in the Drawing Area C Constrain constrain to a control point selected with the mouse U Use use the position of a control point selected with the mouse V Value specify X Y and Z coordinates of the point using the keyboard The buttons become active for any operation that requires the user to define one or more points The Hierarchy and Focus Controls navigate through composite objects such as groups and viewports in order to edit their subobjects The Flip and Transform Controls may be used to flip rotate or scale the object by a precise value The Zoom and Rotate Controls let you control your view of the drawing area 224 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Status Panel contains two rows of controls The top row displays the name and type of the selected object it also contains controls for quick access to the geometrical dynamics actions custom data and aliases attached to the object ifany On the right of the top row there is a control that displays the cursor position in both the screen and world coordinates The bottom row of the Status Area contains the Prompt Area that displays messages and prompts for action Stopping the GLG Graphics Builder Use File Exit to close the Builder see page 301 Creating a Viewport A viewport is a GLG object that represents a cross platform window used as a backdrop and container for other objects The viewport also defines what
488. on on customizing the Builder to add new custom data sets Add Marked List Adds a marked list of custom properties to object s custom property list This is different from Add Marked Properties below which adds all properties of the list but not the list itself A custom property list may be marked by pressing the Mark List button in the list editing dialog Edit Custom Properties Edit Custom Properties lets you change the names and values of custom properties associated with the object as well as delete selected custom properties from a list When you use the Edit Custom Properties option the Builder displays a list of custom properties attached to the object Selecting a property in the list brings up the Attribute dialog for editing it The List Name field can be used to name the custom property list The HasResources toggle controls the corresponding flag of the list which may be used to make the named properties of the list to appear as resources of the list instead of resources of the object the list is attached to The Mark List buttons marks the list for reuse with the Object Custom Properties Add Marked List menu option GLG Graphics Builder Menus 351 The gt gt suffix is displayed if a property itself is a list that contains other properties Double clicking on such a property opens it for editing and displays a list of properties it contains When editing a list property List Name HasResources and Mark List cont
489. onsists of arbitrarily placed points A frame has two sets of points its own control points for controlling its geometry and the constrained frame points for use by other objects Use Options Show Frame Points to toggle between the control points and the frame points see page 358 Note that for the free frame and the point frame the frame points and the frame s own control points coincide Connecting Objects with a Path The Connector object can be used to connect other objects with a recta linear or arc path To create a connector select one of the Recta Linear Edge buttons or an Arc Edge button then click in the drawing to define the connector s points The connector connects its points with either a recta linear or arc path The end points of the connector can be constrained to other objects For example you can use reference objects as nodes and constrain the end points of a connector to the control points of references The connector will maintain the connecting path when the nodes are moved The recta linear connector also provides access to its constrained points These points can t be edited since their position is defined by the connector s control points However they may be used to constrain other objects to the middle point of a connecting path Use Options Show Frame Points to toggle the selection display between the control points and the constrained points Note that some constrained points at the start and end of ea
490. ont with the charset of the current system locale will be used otherwise the version of the font with the specified charset will be used If MultiByteFlag is set to UTF8 the UNICODE version of the font will be used and the value of the DEFAULT_CHARSET attribute is ignored In the X Windows environment the font s encoding is specified as a part of the font s name and the MultiByteF lag attribute determines how to handle the font name If it is set to SINGLE BYTE the font s XFontName attribute is handled as a single font name otherwise it is handled as a comma separated font set containing one or more fonts For all fonts of the default font table as well as fonts with the FontCharset attribute set to DEFAULT CHARSET on Windows the actual value of MultiByteFlag is determined automatically based on the system locale The G gMultibyteFlag global configuration variable may be used to specify the value of MultiByteFlag that overrides the automatic setting for these fonts UNICODE and UTF 8 Support The Unicode is supported via the UTF 8 character encoding which due to its ASCII compatibility is the version used the most across different platforms and on the web The unicode support provides a locale independent way to render text and also allows to mix characters from different language locales in one text string Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing 57 There are two parts related to UTF 8 support e Encoding used to store the st
491. onts 147 light attributes 149 Visibility attribute 34 68 W weak clone 258 308 wide characters 57 widget definition 84 fixed scale 296 native 214 resizable 296 types 214 WidgetType 95 WINDOW MS Windows control 215 WinFontName 149 world coordinate system 41 world offset transformation 156 Wrap 155 197 201 205 WRAPPED 139 X X axis visibility 114 123 X Offset 156 157 X Offset Type 157 X Windows widget 214 XEnd 196 Xform attribute 68 XformAttr 151 XfValue 135 137 query 135 137 XmArrowButton 215 XmBulletinBoard 215 XmDrawingArea 214 XmDrawnButton 214 XmPForm 215 XmLabel 215 XmList 215 XmOptionMenu 215 XmPushButton 214 XmScale 215 XmScrollBar 215 XmSeparator 215 XmText 215 XmToggleButton 214 XOffset 133 XSpacing 133 XY Ratio 92 Y y axis visibility 114 123 Y Offset 157 YAxesOffset 116 YEnd 196 YES WORLD 41 93 YHigh 119 122 YLow 119 122 Y Offset 133 YSpacing 133 Z Z Offset 157 ZoomEnabled 86 ZoomEnabled attribute 45 ZoomFactor 92 Zooming 92 zooming 45 86 zooming and panning accelerators 86 Zooming transformation 92 ZoomTo 86 377 378 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference
492. operation also changes the control points of any geometrical transformations attached to the object If the object s MoveMode is set to MOVE BY XFORM the operation adds a static transformation to the object instead of changing its coordinates see page 69 The Transform Points Dialog The Transform Points dialog lets you define the transformation to apply to the selected object s points Keep in mind that transforming an object s points irrevocably changes the object such a transformation cannot be edited or deleted To specify the transformation use the Transformation Type option which lists the transformations for geometric data See the GLG Objects chapter for specifications of these transformations When you select a transformation the content of the dialog changes providing appropriate text entry boxes and buttons for defining the transformation which are the same as in the Add Dynamics dialog described on page 343 To switch from transforming points to defining a static or dynamic transformation use the Action option For most transformations a Reverse button provides a way to undo a transformation It inverts the parameters of the last transformation you applied which has the effect of restoring the object to its untransformed state when the inverse transformation is applied The Variable Name InLow InHigh OutLow and OutHigh options are not available these options apply only to dynamic transformations Use the
493. operty of the predefined dynamics Refer to the OEM Version of the Graphics Builder section above for more information on export tags Once export tags are added to a transformation its Edit Dynamic dialog will list the transformation s exported public properties instead of its attributes The Options Dynamics Options Full Display of Predefined Dynamics menu option toggles the display of predefined dynamics between public properties and attributes This option can be used for getting access to the attributes of the transformation for editing To allow accessing the attribute via resources in the HMI Configurator the attribute is usually named the same way as the public property name specified by the ZagName attribute of the export tag Data tags may be added to the exported public properties for use with the HMI Configurator The name of a data tag is specified via the data tag s TagName attribute and usually matches the TagName of the attribute s export tag Predefined dynamics are usually constructed by wiring together several transformations with second level transformations added to the attributes of the top level transformation Public properties are global public properties defined by export tags of transformations on any level are listed as a flat list of public properties for the top level transformation If predefined dynamics are added to a transformation s attribute as a second level transformation instead of a stock transform
494. or a variety of tasks For example it is usually desirable for a path polygon which defines a track for another object to move along to be invisible to the user You can also use the visibility attribute to implement blinking objects or layers of objects that can be toggled on and off The visibility attribute may be given values of 1 or 0 to make the object visible or invisible It may also be set to a fractional value in the range of 0 to 1 to define transparency For example setting the visibility to 0 5 will result in an object which is half transparent On Windows transparency is supported only with the OpenGL renderer Control points A graphical object contains one or more control points that specify its shape and position For example a line is a polygon with two control points that specify the position of the line s ends A point marker has only one control point controlling its position More elaborate objects have more control points You can use these control points to vary the size and shape of the object By constraining the control points of one object to the control points of another you can construct complex drawings made up of many component objects but controlled by a small number of points The control points are themselves objects and their editing dialogs in the Graphics Builder may be accessed by Shift clicking on them with the left mouse button Note that an object s control points are sometimes distinct from the set
495. or example a template may contain a polygon object named Triangle with HasResources YES and one of it s control points named Anchor The Triangle Triangle Anchor setting of ObjectPath will display the polygon anchored at the Anchor point The template may also contain an arc object named Arc and a marker object named ArcAnchor used to control the are s display position The Arc ArcAnchor Point setting may be used to display the arc anchored at the position ofthe ArcAnchor marker the default Point attribute name is used to reference marker s point The anchor values may be accessed via the CoordOrigin resource of the SubDrawing object An object s anchoring is also affected by the value of the subdrawing s Origin attribute described below Set Origin to 0 0 0 to anchor the subdrawing at the exact position of the anchor object specified by the anchor path If ObjectPath is not set or if the portion of the string before the colon separator is empty the whole template object will be displayed CloneType The clone type used to create an instance when copying the template It may be Full Weak Strong or Constrained Refer to the Cloning an Object chapter on page 258 for details on using the clone type The default value is STRONG clone which constrains attributes with GLOBAL and SEMI GLOBAL settings of the Global flag CloneType has no effect if EnableCache is set to NO FixedSize Determines if a SubDrawing or Container object can be re
496. orary and permanent groups Use the following procedure 1 Select the group 2 Select Arrange Add Object to Group 3 Click on the first object to add to the group 4 Click on the next object to add to the group 5 When you have added all the objects to the group use the Esc key or the right mouse button to complete the operation The status bar at the bottom of the Builder window provides prompts to guide you through the procedure This option is equivalent to the 4dd Object button in the Selected Object Properties dialog for a group object Delete Object from Group Delete Object from Group removes a single object from the selected group The option may be used with both temporary and permanent groups Use the following procedure 1 Select the group 2 Select Arrange Delete Object from Group 3 Click on the first object to remove from the group 4 Click on the next object to remove from the group 5 When you have removed the objects from the group use the Esc key or the right mouse button to complete the operation The status bar at the bottom of the Builder window provides prompts to guide you through the procedure This option is equivalent to the Remove Object button in the Selected Object Properties dialog for a group object GLG Graphics Builder Menus 319 Add or Delete Object from Group Add or Delete Object from Group adds an object to the group if the object is not part of the group or dele
497. ordinate System a new transformation is added at the bottom of the list see page 264 244 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Up and Down buttons on the right side of the Transformation List may be used to reorder transformations by moving the selected transformation up or down The order of transformations is important reordering transformations changes the way the object is transformed The Delete button may be used to remove the selected transformation If you add several static matrix transformations consecutively they are merged into a single matrix transformation Deleting Transformations The Delete Dynamics toolbar icon can be used to delete the transformation that was added last displayed at the top of the list The Builder does not confirm the deletion of a transformation If the coordinate system is set to the Object Coordinate System Delete Dynamics deletes the transformation which was added first displayed at the bottom of the list see page 264 The Delete button of the Edit Dynamics dialog may be used to delete the currently selected transformation from any position in the list To remove the first transformation e For an object select it and use the Object Delete Dynamics menu option or click on the Delete Dynamics toolbar icon If the Properties dialog is open you can also use the Delete Dynamics button at the bottom of the dialog e For an attribute select the object use Object Properties to show
498. ormations the Builder maintains a list of attached transformations The list shows both the static and dynamic transformations but you can only edit parameters ofthe dynamic transformations To edit transformations 1 First display the transformation list a Fora graphical object use Object Edit Dynamics to see a list of transformations Alternatively click on the Edit Dynamics toolbar icon or click on the Xform button in the Status Panel below the drawing area If the Properties dialog is open you can also use the Edit Dynamics button at the bottom of the dialog b For an attribute use Object Properties to show the Selected Object Properties dialog and click on the to see the Attribute dialog Finally click on the Edit Dynamics button Alternatively click on the X button on the right side of the attribute row in the Properties dialog c Foracontrol point use Shift click to see the Control Point dialog and click on the Edit Dynamics button A list of transformations is displayed on the left side of the Edit Dynamics dialog 2 Inthe Edit Dynamics dialog select a transformation from a list on the left side of the dialog The transformation attributes appear on the right side of the dialog The transformations are listed in the order you created them with the first transformation at the bottom of the list The new transformations are added at the top of the list If the coordinate system is set to the Object Co
499. ort PostScript Windows only saves a PostScript image of the current drawing in its current state to a file On Unix Linux the Print option performs the same task Export PostScriptuses the print configuration set by the File Print Configuration options Ifediting focus is set it generates PostScript for the focus viewport instead of the whole drawing Print Configuration The Print Configuration submenu provides options to let you set up the printer Page Layout Page Layout specifies how to map the drawing to the printed page 300 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Page Layout presents a viewport that corresponds to the printed area The position and size of the viewport relatively to the Drawing Area define the position and size of the area in which the drawing will be printed relatively to the page Resize the page layout viewport with the mouse to define the printing area Delete the viewport when you have finished This option applies to both PostScript and Windows printing Stretch Stretch prints the drawing using the full area of the page The drawing is scaled to fill the printing area so the proportions of the printed drawing may not correspond to the drawings actual proportions Using the appropriate orientation portrait or landscape can help reduce distortion to preserve the drawing ratio turn Stretch off This option applies to both PostScript and Windows printing PostScript Level For PostScript pri
500. ote that a transformation may be attached to a control point or directly to a polygon or other drawable object The GLG rendering engine processes the transformations attached to the control points first using the transformations to convert the world coordinates of the control points into transformed values in the world coordinate system The next step of the rendering process calculates the effect of all transformations attached to the drawable object including any zooming transformations of the viewport and the world to screen transformation of the screen object The resulting combined transformation is then applied to the transformed world coordinates of each object s control point to calculate the screen coordinates used for rendering The transformation attached to an object does not change the coordinates of its control points but rather projects the object to appear in a place different from the position defined by the coordinates If the transformation is attached to the control point it also affects any other objects constrained to that point However if the transformation 1s attached to the object such as a polygon for example then the transformation is applied to the polygon after the point position has been read by the rendering routines While the transformation affects the polygon it does not affect anything constrained to its control points This means that if two polygons have a constrained point and a move transformation i
501. outline in the property dialogs such as Object Properties Object Dynamics Attribute Object and others If the attribute itself is constrained a solid outline is used If an attribute itself is not constrained but has a transformation whose parameters are constrained a dashed outline is used Stars are used to annotate constrained items in list dialogs such as Custom Properties or Object Dynamics List If an item is constrained it is annotated with two stars If the item itself is not constrained but has a transformation whose parameters are constrained it is annotated with one star In drawings with a large number of objects group multiple objects in a temporary group and check if Name and Type field in the Status Panel are highlighted Defining Transformations and Adding Dynamics In addition to changing values of object attributes directly dynamic behavior may be achieved by adding a dynamic transformation to an entire object or an object attribute For example a rotate transformation may be attached to an object to rotate it by changing a rotation angle or a Color List transformation may be attached to an object s Fil Color attribute to change the color depending on an input value Using the GLG Graphics Builder 239 A transformation is applied to change the value of an entity It operates on the actual value of the object producing an effective value which is used in rendering the drawing The GLG Graphics Builder provides thr
502. pLeft 198 UpRight 198 methods 25 MilliSecFormat 128 Min 213 Min Line Width 133 MinFontSize 77 minor ticks disabling 129 MinorInterval 129 MinorTickSize 130 MinRadius 74 MinRowSize 133 MinValue 161 204 205 Modal Dialogs 361 modelling transformation 39 Mouse actions 176 mouse event actions 348 Mouse Events 52 Mouse feedback actions 177 MouseClick Event 349 MouseClick feedback 50 MouseClick toggle 50 MouseClick visual feedback 50 MouseClickEvent 52 MouseClickState 51 MouseClickToggle 51 MouseOver Event 349 MouseOver highlight 49 MouseOverEvent 52 MouseOverState 50 move transformation 153 moveby transformation 152 MoveMode attribute 69 241 346 Moving Ants Dynamics 71 MS Windows native control 214 MSecFormat 165 multi byte characters 56 MultiByteFlag 148 multi line tooltips 49 371 N Name attribute 68 named resources 247 342 native widget 214 Native Windowing System Renderer 18 NO GLG SCREEN 41 94 NO SCREEN CENTER 41 94 NO SCREEN 41 93 node 103 110 332 335 NONE light type 150 non graphic objects 67 num columns palette 304 num rows palette 304 Number of Levels 113 Number of Plots 113 Number of Samples 121 Number of Y Axes 113 NumColors 146 NumGrades 146 NumLevels 113 NumPatterns 146 NumPlots 113 NumSamples 121 NumSizes 147 NumTypes 147 NumY Axes 113 NVidia 22 O object attribute 26 composite 66 definition
503. ped in the Builder by going down into it using the Hierarchy Down Y button The zoom and pan controls may be used to zoom and pan the map testing the automatic layer switching of the GLG Map Server and the map server setup Alternatively the GZS Zoom Mode may be set by using the Arrange GIS Zoom Mode Set as parent viewport s GIS Object menu option With the GIS Zoom Mode activated the map in a viewport can be zoomed and scrolled with the Builder s zoom and pan controls without going down into the GIS Object The viewport s Pan property may be set to Pan XY to use the viewport s integrated scrollbars for scrolling the map 84 Viewport GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The icons and other GLG objects drawn on the map in the GZS Rendering Mode are clipped to the visible area of the map which eliminates icons on the invisible part of the globe in the ORTHOGRAPHIC projection In the ORTHOGRAPHIC projection the polyline segments on the invisible part ofthe globe are also eliminated When rendering polylines that span the whole globe in the ORTHOGRAPHIC projection it is recommended to use a sufficient number of points for better rendering of polyline segments that cross the boundary between the visible and invisible parts of the globe Refer to the GLG Map Server Reference Manual for more information on the GLG Map Server its setup and usage A viewport object is a GLG encapsulation of a window and is rendered as a non transparent
504. penGL renderer is successfully initialized and is used for rendering objects in the screen s viewport the attribute will be set to the GLG HARDWARE OPENGL or GLG SOFTWARE OPENGL value depending on the type of the OpenGL renderer used by the screen s viewport If the GDI renderer is used the attribute value will be set to GLG_NO_OPENGL ShellType If this attribute is set to GLG_DIALOG_SHELL or GLG_APPLICATION_SHELL the viewport appears in its own window at the same level in the window hierarchy as the program operating it The difference between the two is that the GLG_ DIALOG SHELL value always appears on top of other windows The attribute may also be set to NONE GLG_NO_TOP_SHELL in which case the viewport is simply a child window of a larger drawing WidgetType The widget type may be selected from the list of possible widget types For more information about widget types see the Native Widgets chapter on page 214 ShadowWidth Defines the width of shadows If the value differs from 0 the shadow bevels are drawn around the borders of the viewport The sign of the ShadowWidth controls the type of the bevels raised shadows for positive values and depressed shadows for negative values ExactColor When using widget types besides Drawing Area on X Windows this boolean attribute instructs the native widget to use the exact value specified by the Fi Co or attribute rather than take the closest available entry from the color table Gri
505. phics texts There are two types of geometric transformations possible in a GLG drawing static and dynamic transformations They are sometimes called matrix transformations and parametric transformations respectively GLG also provides transformations that can be applied to scalar and string data objects The scalar transformations include various options for modifying a scalar double value such as multiplication division range conversion selecting a value from a list of values etc The string transformations are used for formatting the string text displaying a scalar value as a text string and selecting a string from a list of strings 36 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Transformations as Objects Like other GLG data transformations are stored as objects They are attached as child objects to the object they transform There are geometrical transformations used to transform data objects of G type such as control points containing XYZ coordinates or color values containing RGB triplets and non geometrical attribute transformations used to transform double D and string S values Several geometrical transformations can be attached to an object as a list of transformations Before rendering an object in a drawing GLG updates the coordinates of that object with whatever transformations are attached to it and this produces rotations shears translations and scale changes as specified in the list of transformations N
506. played as part of a menu widget TooltipString When the cursor enters the button viewport and is still briefly a small label appears displaying the string indicated by this resource The Button Tooltip event is generated when a button tooltip is activated or erased Refer to the Tooltip Message Object section on page 364 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual for more details RepeatTimeout Defines an interval in seconds after which the button starts generating repeated Activate messages if the button is held down If it is set to a value less or equal to 0 default value the button repeat is disabled Repeated action is enabled only for push buttons with ActOnPress activation RepeatInterval Defines an interval in seconds between repeated Activate messages generated when the button is held down The default value is 1 10 of a second ActOnPress If this resource is present and has a non zero value the button s action happens on the down click of the mouse button Otherwise the action is taken on the release of the button If this resource is not present and if the mouse cursor is moved out of the button viewport before the mouse button is released that no action is taken ArmedState If this resource is present and has a value different from 1 the button is enabled armed only when the Control key is pressed Without the Control key the button is locked This type of buttons is used in a process control applications whe
507. played in the GIS Object In the GIS Zoom Mode the zoom and pan operations zoom and pan the map displayed in the GIS object 46 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference and integrated scrollbars scroll the map vertically or horizontally The map can also be dragged with the mouse For example a globe displayed in the orthographic projection may be rotated by dragging it with the mouse Dragging complex maps may require a fast CPU The GIS Zoom Mode of a viewport can be set in the Builder by using the Arrange GIS Zoom Mode Set as Parent Viewport s Chart Zoom Object menu option while the GIS object is selected or by using the GlgSetZoomMode API method at run time The GIS Zoom Mode is persistent and is saved with the drawing Accessing Resources of Integrated Scrollbars When integrated scrollbars are activated they can be accessed as viewport resources using resource names GlgPanX and GlgPanY There is also an object named G gPanSpacer used in the lower right corner of the viewport when both scrollbars are enabled By default the colors of the scrollbars are constrained to the color of the viewport To change them to be different from the viewport s color unconstrain the Fi Color attribute of the viewport then set the scrollbar s FillColor to a different color value The integrated scrollbars automatically adjust the size and position of their knobs to indicate the portion of the drawing visible in the viewport window Since GLG has
508. polygon s HasResources is set to NO the MouseOverState resource will appear as a resource of the group and the polygon will be highlighted every time the mouse moves over any object in the group MouseClick Feedback and Toggle An object in the drawing may be set up to provide visual feedback when it is pressed with the mouse button for example to depress an object on a mouse click A mouse click toggle functionality may be used to alter the object s visual appearance every time it is pressed with the mouse button The mouse click feedback and toggle may be used to implement lightweight viewport less buttons and toggles which provide a visual feedback on a mouse click and using custom events feature described in the next section send a message to the program when the button is pressed In a regular button input object an input handler attached to the button s viewport handles the button s visual feedback The mouse click feedback is implemented by attaching an action with ActionType TRACE_STATE and Trigger MOUSE_CLICK to the object using the Object Actions Add Mouse Feedback menu option of Enterprise edition of the Builder The action will change the value of its State attribute to 1 when the object is clicked on with the mouse and resets it to 0 when the mouse button is released The action s MouseButton attribute defines the mouse button that activates the feedback The action s State attribute may be constrained to any at
509. ponding resource names Refer to the Command Message Object section on page 363 of the GLG User 5 Manual and Builder Reference for more information UpdateDrawing Message This message has Format UpdateDrawing and is generated by the TRACE STATE SET_STATE and RESET_STATE mouse feedback actions which may need to update the drawing after changing the value of their State attribute Mouse feedback actions automatically update the viewport that contains the object to which the mouse feedback action is attached If the action s State attribute is constrained to an object in a different viewport that is not a child of the viewport containing the object with the action that viewport will not be updated To handle this case a mouse feedback action generates the UpdateDrawing message with message s Action Update The application may choose to process this message in the input callback to update the top level or sibling viewport that contains the constrained object if needed Refer to the UpdateDrawing Message Object section on page 365 of the GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference for more information 190 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 191 Chapter 5 Input Objects 5 Widgets such as Sliders Dials Buttons and others that are capable of reacting to input events are called input widgets These can allow a user to control a GLG drawing either directly through constrained drawing attributes or indirectly through a user applicat
510. port In the Basic and Professional Editions create a dummy marker object to hold the resource name its MarkerSize attribute Granularity and set the marker s HasResources flag to NO to make the Granularity resource visible at the viewport s top level When editing is finished reset the drawing using the Reset toolbar button and run the drawing to check the slider s new behavior For more information on the internal design of the input widgets see page 216 Common Input Handler Resources All input handlers support the ActiveState resource ActiveState The value of this resource is set to 0 when the input handler is disabled by setting the viewport s DisableInput attribute to YES The ActiveState attribute may be attached to some resource in the drawing to alter widget s appearance in the inactive state Resources with the Param suffix The output resources of input handlers such as Value ValueX ValueY OnState and others have a corresponding resource whose name is formed by adding the Param suffix ValueParam ValueXParam OnStateParam and so on These resources are used only in the internal design of the input widgets and can be ignored in the application code For information on the internal design of the input widgets see page 216 GlgSlider A slider is used to convert a linear mouse position into a numeric value Sliders can be one or two dimensional returning one or two coordinates One dimensional sli
511. prior to v 3 5 tooltips defined as named TooltipString resources Delete Tooltip Delete Tooltip deletes a tooltip action attached to the selected object 348 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Use the Object Custom Properties Edit Custom Properties menu option to delete old style prior to v 3 5 tooltips defined as named TooltipString resources Actions The Actions submenu provides options for adding or editing actions and commands attached to objects in the drawing Add Command Add Command attaches a command action to the selected object It prompts the user to select a type of command from a list of available commands then opens a dialog for specifying values of the command s parameters The Back button may be used to return to the action s Properties dialog after the command data has been entered The action properties specify the event that triggers the command s execution Refer to the Action Object chapter on page 176 for more information Add Custom Mouse Event Add Custom Mouse Event attaches a custom event action to the selected object and opens the Properties dialog for editing the action s attributes The action s properties specify the type of the mouse event that triggers the custom event Refer to the Action Object chapter on page 176 for more information Add Mouse Feedback Add Mouse Feedback attaches a mouse feedback action to the selected object and opens the Properties dialog for editing the action
512. r False or programmatically by setting the value of the GlgOpenGLMode global configuration resource to 1 or 0 The global configuration resource takes precedent over the command line options while the command line options take precedent over the environment variable settings OpenGL Versions Compatibility and Core Profiles By default the OpenGL driver uses the Compatibility profile If the graphics card supports OpenGL version 3 00 and above a shader based Core profile may be used for rendering The Core profile uses VBO based retained mode and does not provide immediate mode rendering The retained rendering mode may provide performance improvements for drawings containing a large number of objects with static geometry The retained mode may also significantly increase update speed of drawings with background images and text objects by storing cached textures on the graphics card The retained mode is automatically activated when an OpenGL version 3 0 or higher is requested 20 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The G gOpenGL Version global configuration resource may be used to request a particular version of the OpenGL for the hardware based version of the GLG OpenGL driver For example it may be set to a value of 330 to request OpenGL version 3 3 Alternatively the GLG_OPENGL_VERSION environment variable and the g g opengl version command line option may be used to specify a desired OpenGL version The value of GlgOpenGLvVersion is
513. r below the polygon object whether or not the polygon s HasResources flag is set to YES Select Run Start and at the run prompt issue the command Sdatagen sin d 0 10 Widget handle LineWidth Select Run Stop to stop the line width animation Select the viewport then Traverse Hierarchy Down Select the handle polygon and bring up the Selected Object Properties dialog 276 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 10 11 12 13 Next to the LineWidth attribute there is a button labeled The button indicates that the attribute name refers to an object If you press it an object dialog appears where you can type a name for the object Give this the name handle_ width If you were to examine the resource hierarchy now you would see that the handle and handle_width resources are on the same level as each other To make the handle_width appear as the child of the handle resource use the Selected Object Properties dialog to set the HasResources flag of the handle polygon to YES Check the resource browser You can see there the Widget at the top level then the handle resource below it and the handle_width below that Select Run Start and at the run prompt change the default attribute name Line Width to the resource name handle width and issue the command Sdatagen sin d 0 10 Widget handle handle width Geometrical Transformation Animation Now that you have seen animating simple attributes and resources
514. r is used for mouse clicks outside of the knob s ActiveElement Each click moves the knob by its Pagelncrement in the direction of the mouse If the mouse button is held down the knob keeps moving until the button is released or the knob reaches the mouse position RepeatTimeout Defines a timeout in seconds after which the knob with IncrementOnClick starts moving when the mouse button is held down If the resource is not defined the default value of 250 ms is used RepeatInterval Defines how fast a knob with IncrementOnClick repeats the movement when the mouse button is held down If the resource is not defined the default value of 100 ms is used Stateless If this resource is present and non zero the knob has no state That is each time a move operation is completed the knob Value moves back to the center of the knob range and delivers the final move coordinates to the application program via the message object Plane The knob element appears to rotate on the plane defined by this polygon The points of the polygon must be co planar When you click on the knob widget the cursor position is projected onto this plane The resulting coordinates are used to set the knob position Increment Increment for changing the knob s value by using Increase and Decrease buttons The Messages GlgButton Input Objects 201 increment is expressed as a fraction of the total range of the knob ranging from 0 to 1 If this resource
515. r of frame s dimensions and can be 1D 2D 3D or FREE GLG Objects 113 FrameFactor Defines the number of intervals between frame points along each frame s axis The number of frame points is one more than the number of intervals Chart Objects Chart The Chart object is used to render real time charts with large number of data points and fast update rates A real time chart is highly optimized to handle hundreds of thousands of data points and update the display hundreds times per second The chart supports integrated zooming and scrolling chart tooltips cursor feedback and data sample selection A chart object has two control points that define the geometry of its data area The chart object is a composite object that contains a number of subcomponents such as plots axes and other auxiliary objects The chart creates a required number of plots and axes and manages their layout The chart object also handles chart tooltips point selection and cross hair cursor The AxisType attribute of the chart s X axis defines the type of the chart a scrolling strip chart or an XY scatter A chart object has the following attributes Number of Plots Specifies a number of plots in the chart The chart automatically adds or deletes plots when the value of the attribute is changed When plots are added or deleted via the G gAddPlot or GlgDeletePlot API methods the chart adjusts the value of the attribute to match the new number of plots When n
516. r other tasks such as accessing objects in the drawing programmatically resources provide a more flexible and powerful alternative In the Builder the user can browse resources of a drawing and add tags to resources that need to be updated from a process database For example consider a drawing that has an object named Valvel which has resource named Open controlling the valve s open state which needs to be updated from the process database field named valvel_ open The user can select the Open resource in the 32 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Resource Browser add a tag to it and set the valvel_ open string as the value of the tag s TagSource At run time the application will receive data change events from the database and will set the new value for the valvel_open tag every time the valvel_ open database field changes The Builder s Tag Browser may be used to examine tags attached to individual objects in the drawing as well as display a list of all tags defined in the drawing The Tag Browser has controls for sorting and filtering the tag list by either Tag Names or Tag Sources The Tag Browser s Unique Tag Sources Names toggle controls how tags with the same name are displayed If it is turned on only one tag will be displayed for each set of tags with the same TagSource or TagName otherwise all tag objects will be displayed including multiple tags with the same TagSource or TagName The Tag Export and Tag Import fea
517. r that specifies a filename of the page to be loaded When a command action is attached to an object in the Builder a list of commands is dis played in a dialog the selected command will be associated with the action Each com mand has a CommandType parameter as well as a number of other parameters depending on the command type By default the Builder uses a predefined list of commands new custom command types can be added by customizing the Builder as described in the Custom Data Sets and Cus tom Commands section on page 287 The available command types are listed in the Com mand Object section on page 184 At run time the input callback will be invoked with Format Command when the com mand is triggered Refer to the Handling Action Object Messages and Commands in Application Code at Run Time section on page 188 for information on using command actions in the application code at run time Custom event action These actions generate custom events and may be used by an application to trace specific types of events For example a custom event may be generated every time a mouse is moved over an object or an object is selected with the mouse click Unlike the command actions a custom event is generated on both action activation as well as reset the mouse moves away from the object or a mouse button is released Custom event actions are also backward compatible with the custom event handling code from previous releases of the Toolkit
518. rain One is enabled only if activated in the glg_config file 5 The Builder prompts you for the object to constrain to To do so click with the mouse on an object in the drawing With this method the Builder automatically applies the constraint to the appropriate attribute For example selecting the FillColor attribute of a yellow polygon and then selecting a green circle to constrain to creates a constraint between the Fi Color attributes of the two objects Merging Constraints If you use the Constrain One button any existing constraints are replaced by the one you create However you can add another constraint without removing the existing constraints use the Constrain All button instead of the Constrain One button Constrain One is enabled only if activated in the glg config file For example you can constrain the points C and D A C k F o gt D B oo Constraint of C and D Using the GLG Graphics Builder 237 If you then select C and use the Constrain One button to constrain it to E the constraint between C and D is lost A De ss B Constraint of C and E However if you select C and use the Constrain All button instead of the Constrain One button the constraint between C and D is preserved A Constraint of C D and E Constraining Different Attributes To constrain different attributes that have the same data type you can use the Builder s marking facility or refer to a named
519. range from 0 to 1 A light object may be reused by marking it with the Mark button at the top of the Properties dialog Use the Edit Add or Use Marked Object Light Object menu option to add the marked light object to another viewport When a light object is added to a group of viewports using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added light objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used When a marked light object is reused constraining of corresponding attributes of the new copy and the original light object is also controlled by the Builder s Attribute Clone Type option A polygon s Shading attribute provides additional control over shading of individual polygons in the drawing For more information about lighting see the Lighting section on page 42 of the Structure of a GLG Drawing chapter GLG Objects 151 Transformation Object The transformation object describes a transformation associated with a GLG object A special type of a transformation object is also used to implement alarms The lists in the following sections describe the attributes of the GLG transformation objects The default names of these attributes are XformAttr through XformAttr6 The attributes below are listed in the order given by their default names but we have used more descriptive names to help explain their use Th
520. raphical Zoom Mode 45 grid visibility 114 grid aligning objects with 356 GridValue 95 Group object creating 266 using 266 group object 97 266 331 creating 266 317 deleting 320 editing members 266 rearranging members 266 H Handler 89 Handlers 43 HasResources attribute 68 HasResources flag 29 hidden surface removal 89 hierarchy object 28 resource 28 High 126 159 175 High High 159 160 176 HighOffset 129 History attribute 69 History object attaching 272 273 history object 139 272 353 to 354 HMI configurator 137 HORIZONTAL connector 99 HORIZONTAL text 76 hot spot 49 Hour 213 I I18N 55 Identity 168 Identity transformation 217 illumination 42 defining 150 image formats 79 image object 79 ImageFile 79 ImageType 79 Import Strings 301 Import Tags 301 In High 159 In Low 159 Included SubDrawing 269 333 IncludeZero 121 Increase 197 201 205 Increase message 197 199 201 206 IncreaseKeys 197 201 206 Increment 197 198 200 205 IncrementOnClick 196 200 Index 166 infinite regression avoiding 136 InitItemList 207 208 InitSelectedIndex 208 Input actions 176 input events 193 input handler 192 GlgBrowser 211 GlgButton 201 GlgClock 213 GlgFontBrowser 211 GlgKnob 199 GlgMenu 209 GlgNButton 203 GlgNListText 206 GlgNOption 208 369 GlgNSlider 198 GlgNText 204 GlgPalette 212 GlgSlider 195 GlgSpinn
521. rce Browser may be used to browse resources of the drawing The Attribute Object An object is completely described by its attributes A unique set of attributes defines a unique object The particular set of attributes that make up an object is dependent on the type of the object For example a text object has a font a color a position an angle and so on while a polygon has a fill color a line width and vertex positions The term property is often used as a synonym for attribute Most of the attributes of a GLG object are themselves objects In the same way that a polygon is a collection of positions colors and line widths an attribute is also a collection of information The information contained in an attribute object includes the data value of the attribute object its data type and name The type indicates whether the data value is a double precision scalar number signified throughout the GLG documentation by a D a position in a three dimensional coordinate system G for geometrical or a character string S The color values use G data type as well since they represent coordinates in RGB color space The attribute s name is used to access the attribute as a resource Named attributes become resources which can be accessed at run time to supply dynamic data In the Graphics Builder the Resource Browser may be used to browse resources of individual objects or of the whole drawing Each attribute also has a default attribu
522. re it is important to prevent the user from triggering an action by accidentally pressing a button When the Control key is pressed the Messages Input Objects 203 resource changes to 1 returning to 0 when the Control key is released If the resource is set to 1 the ArmedState functionality is disabled and the button does not pay attention to the Control key This makes it possible to use a single button widget template and enable or disable the ArmedState functionality for individual button instances TokenValue The button s value is an arbitrary scalar value assigned to the button This resource is used when the button is part of a menu widget The G gButton interaction handler supports the following messages that can be sent using the GlgSendMessage method Set Sets the toggle toggle buttons only The message has no parameters Reset Resets the toggle toggle buttons only The message has no parameters Activate Generates an Activate event push buttons only The message has no parameters GlgNButton Messages The GLG Toolkit provides a native button input handler which may be attached to a viewport object with WidgetType of PUSH_BUTTON CUSTOM_BUTTON and TOGGLE_BUTTON The native button handler encapsulates the native push button toggle and checkbox widget s interface and allows to handle native buttons in a cross platform way Its only resources are PressedState OnState LabelString TooltipString
523. re not present in the Range Alert dynamics attached to the Visibility attribute since visibility has only two states ON and OFF Blinking Alert The Blinking Alert dynamics alternate the attribute s value when the monitored value goes out of the specified range It has the following properties 172 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference ActivateOnEqual If set to 1 True blinking starts when the input value is equal to or exceeds the specified range If set to 0 False blinking starts only when the value exceeds the range InputValue The monitored value Interval The blinking interval in seconds OnValue The value to use for blinking when the value goes outside of the range OffValue The default value to use when the value is inside the range RangeHigh The High range RangeLow The Low range VisibilityThreshold The Visibility Threshold dynamics compare an input scalar value with the specified threshold and sets the object visibility to a matching value It has the following properties InputValue This value is compared with the threshold and controls which attribute value to use Threshold The threshold VisState0 The visibility value to use when the input value is less than the threshold May be set to 0 or 1 VisState0 The visibility value to use when the input value is less than the threshold May be set to 0 or 1 Value Display The Value Display dynamics may be attached to the TextString attribute of text object
524. rea use File Load Object see page 298 Open URL Open URL loads a drawing from a URL In the Unix environment the GLG_WGET_PATH environment variable must be set to point to the wget utility executable to enable this option Recent Drawings Recent Drawings displays a list of the recently edited drawings Select one of the recent drawings from the list to load it If a drawing is already open loading a recent drawing discards the current drawing The Builder asks if you want to discard the current drawing but it does not prompt you to save the changes 298 Save SaveAs GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Save saves the current drawing to a file The first time you save a drawing the Builder prompts you for a file name using the standard file selection dialog If the drawing has been saved before it asks if you want to overwrite the existing file The Builder can save files in three different formats e Binary which loads quickly but is not portable across platforms that use different binary data representations e ASCII which is completely portable across platforms but loads more slowly than binary e Extended which is portable across platforms and across versions of the Builder but loads most slowly There is also an option for saving compressed drawings Compressed drawings are smaller but load slower The default format for saving drawings is compressed ASCII To change the format use Options Sav
525. resource To use marking you open and mark the attribute value that you want to reuse and then use it in the attribute whose value you want to replace Alternatively if the attribute already appears in the resource hierarchy you can just use its value without having to mark it As with constraints between similar attributes constraining an attribute that is already constrained replaces the existing constraint but you can add another constraint and preserve the existing ones by merging them To constrain two different attributes Open the Selected Object Properties dialog for the object 2 Open the Attribute dialog for the attribute that you want to reuse 3 Click on the Mark button and select a mark number to assign to the attribute value The attribute value is now marked 4 Open the other object s Selected Object Properties dialog 5 Open the Attribute dialog 6 Click on either the Constrain All button or the Constrain One button in the Attribute dialog The Builder prompts you to select either a resource or a marked value Constrain One is enabled only if activated in the glg_config file 238 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 7 Click on Use Marked and select the mark number you assigned earlier if only one mark was assigned it 11 be used automatically To use a named resource instead of a marked value click on Use Resource and select the resource from the Resource Browser dialog The value of
526. resource hierarchy which represents relationships between the names of objects in a drawing This hierarchy may or may not reflect the Structure of a GLG Drawing 29 underlying reality of the object hierarchy This can be quite useful when you wish to shield a user from a very complex object hierarchy or when it is conceptually simpler to address a drawing in terms defined by the resources You typically use resources to animate a drawing An example will illustrate the use of having two separate hierarchies to represent the same objects Using the objects in the drawing shown in the previous section there is another way to consider the relationship between the two FillColor attributes and the GRP object Suppose that the two polygons in the group are used to render two faces of a three dimensional object A cube created by joining two dimensional objects together at their edges is an example of this technique The object hierarchy would reflect the fact that this is a composite object but we can construct the resource hierarchy so that it will appear to be a single object In this case one would want to specify one color for the entire object rather than colors for each face and the names PY and PY2 would likely not be useful for such an object In this case to make the drawing act as you might expect the color should be an attribute of the group This way the cube s color may be changed by accessing a resource called GRP fill_color Of
527. ric transformations include a scaling factor with their most commonly used parameters This is to say that these parameters are actually the product of two attributes For example the distance moved in a MoveBy transformation object is the product of the Distance and the Factor attributes A user might want the actual distance to range between 0 and 500 units while the input data received is a number between 0 and 1 He or she could set the Distance attribute to 500 and use the resource setting mechanism to control the Factor attribute with the actual data received This also separates the input logic from the geometry of the drawing as the Distance may be changed without affecting the input data If the input data is in a range different from 0 to 1 a range transformation may be attached to the Factor attribute to handle input data in an arbitrary range Note that though the following sections describe the entire set of GLG transformation objects a program can create more specialized or elaborate transformations simply by querying a drawing s control points calculating new values within the program and changing those resources It is best to think of the list of transformations that follow as a list of those transformations for which additional programming is not necessary rather than as a complete list of what is possible The Matrix transformation stores a 4x4 matrix with which to transform a geometrical value This is the standard matrix tra
528. ring All strings stored in S data objects such as the TextString attribute of a text object tooltip or custom property of S type may be stored in either the encoding of the system locale or the UTF 8 encoding Any string may be stored in the UTF 8 encoding even if it is rendered with the non UTF8 font in which case an automatic conversion will be performed at the rendering time Font used to render the string Any string UTF8 or non UTF8 may be rendered with either UTF8 or non UTF8 font If the string s encoding does not match the encoding of the font an automatic conversion will be automatically performed If the string contains characters that are not present in the font they are replaced with a default character e To enable this feature in the X Windows environment the font objects and the text rendering drivers support the use of both the individual fonts as well as the font sets On Windows fonts with MultiByteFlag set to UTF8 use the UNICODE version of the font performing an automatic conversion to the wide character representation and rendering using the wide character version of the text drawing functions Using UTF 8 Locale on Linux Unix In the Linux Unix environment the UTF8 based system locale such as en_US UTF 8 may be used The fonts in the default font table as well as the default Motif fonts used by the native widgets in the drawing and by the Motif controls in the GLG Editor support the ISO Latinl extended ASC
529. rings defined in the drawing may be stored in the system locale s encoding and rendered using fonts with locale specific character sets Both single byte and multi byte locales are supported The text strings may also be stored in the UTF 8 encoding and rendered using fonts with UTF 8 encoding This ensures proper string rendering regardless of the system locale and also allows mixing different character sets in the same string Text strings defined in the drawing are rendered using fonts defined in the drawing s font table A default font table is used unless the user defines a custom font table see page 96 An application can use a single font table for all drawings or define different font tables for each drawing or even for each individual viewport in the drawing Each font table can define a mix of locale dependent and UTF 8 fonts Each font in the font table has attributes that define the font names to be used in different programming environments such as Windows X Windows and Java This makes it possible to create drawings that may be shared between various platforms and different programming environments A drawing may be localized using the String Export and Import features described below which are used to translate all text strings defined in a drawing into a different language The drawing may be localized and saved in the Builder or localized dynamically at run time Displaying a localized version of the drawing may requ
530. rmation is simply a scale transformation with the Scale attribute set to 1 In addition to the simple scale transformation object there are corresponding ScaleX ScaleY and ScaleZ transformation objects each of which act only upon the indicated dimension The type of the scale transformation is selected at the creation time Path The Path transformation moves a point along a predefined path polygon Path Array of the path points This is a group object that contains points of the path The points may be edited added or deleted Factor This is a scalar value specifying the current position as a distance along the polygon s perimeter The first defined point on the polygon is at Factor 0 and the last is at Factor 1 Rotate Flag Controls the way object rotates as it follows the path The flag may have the following values DON T ROTATE Object does not rotate GLG Objects 155 ROTATE Object rotates to match the tangent of the path in the current position This setting may be used to create an object that will rotate as it moves along a curved path ROTATE NO ORIGIN Advanced setting same as rotate but the origin parameter is ignored The object is not moved to the beginning of the path as defined by the origin parameter The effect of this setting is visible only if the origin was moved to a position different from the beginning of the path Origin A point that defines how the object must to be moved to the beginning of the path
531. rol the attributes of the list property itself instead of the attributes of the custom property list attached to an object The buttons at the bottom of the Custom Properties dialog may be used to delete or add properties to the list The Delete button deletes the currently selected property while the 4dd button adds a new property to the list An option menu to the right of the 4dd button defines the type of the custom property to add By default Default option it adds a property of the same type as the currently selected property inheriting the selected property s name and value change the name of the newly added property to avoid name conflicts The option menu also has options for adding new custom properties of D S and G data types as well as adding lists of properties containing D S and G properties inside them The last option Marked may be used to add a previously marked list of properties When a list of properties is added double click on it to get access to the properties inside it The added list becomes the sublist of the object s custom property list The sublist may contain other sublists inside with no restrictions on the sublist depth When editing sublists the level of the sublist is displayed in the title ofthe Custom Properties dialog NOTE Programmatically attached custom properties other then data properties can t be edited in the Builder Delete All Custom Properties Delete All Aliases destroys all cust
532. rting on page 313 The Arrange Menu provides options for working with groups as well as other miscellaneous options described starting on page 317 The Layout menu provides options for aligning and positioning objects e The Object Menu provides options for creating and manipulating objects These options are described starting on page 326 The Run Menu provides options that let you animate a drawing These options are described starting on page 354 e The Options Menu provides options that control the appearance and function of the GLG Graphics Builder These options are described starting on page 356 This chapter describes all menu options available in the Enterprise Edition of the Graphics Builder Some options are not present in the Basic and Professional Editions The toolbar below the menu bar provides convenient shortcuts for accessing the most often used menu choices To see the tooltip showing the function of a toolbar s button hold the mouse inside the button until the tooltip appears The File menu provides options to let you load and save drawing files export import strings and tags print drawings generate images and close the GLG Graphics Builder The New submenu provides options to create widgets and subdrawings with various resize policies The entries with the Resizable option use the world coordinate system they stretch or change the size of objects in the drawing accordingly when the drawing is resized
533. rue if the input value is positive var gt 0 5 True if the input value is greater than 0 5 ABS var gt 0 5 True if the absolute value of the input value is greater than 0 5 A Bitmask transformation ignores the attribute s Value and sets the attribute s transformed value XfValue to the value formed by interpreting the states of four input parameters as bits of a 4 bit integer from 0 to 15 A value of each input parameter is converted to a boolean True or False if the result is True the corresponding bit in the 4 bit integer output is activated For example the following combination of input parameters yields the output value of 13 Bit3 1 Bit2 1 Bit1 0 Bit0 1 If input parameters are binary signals that represent a state of a device a bitmask transformation can be used to change an object s color depending on the combination of the input signals This can be accomplished by attaching a bitmask transformation to an the Index attribute ofa list transformation attached to an object s FillColor and arranging a list of colors to handle all combinations of inputs depending on the number of used input parameters 2 3 or 4 The transformation has the following attributes Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 The input parameters of the transformation Boolean Converter Bool var The type of boolean conversion function used to convert double input values to boolean may be one of the following var 0 True 1f the input va
534. s The parent coordinate system defines the position of the origin relative to the object s parent and the orientation of the parent in three dimensional space The parent coordinate system includes a combined effect of all transformations attached to the object s parent as well all its grand parents In the editor the parent coordinate system is used by default when the object is created Consider an example when a circle centered about the origin 0 0 0 is created inside of a group If the group is transformed by a move transformation with a move vector 100 100 100 the origin of the circle will appear at 100 100 100 instead of 0 0 0 If none of the object s parents have transformations attached to them the parent coordinate system coincides with the drawing coordinate system Object Coordinates Since any GLG object can have a transformation attached to it its coordinate system may be different from its parent coordinate system The object coordinate system includes a combined effect of all transformations attached to the object as well as all transformations attached to all of its parents If the object does not have any transformations attached to it its object coordinate system coincides with its parent coordinate system In the Builder the coordinate values of the object s control points are entered with respect to the object coordinate system The rendered position of each control point in the drawing is then defined
535. s Local Value 0 547707 0 774594 0 77459 E XfValue 0 547707 0 774594 0 77459 Use Mouse Use Position Use Object Constrain ALL Constrain One Unconstrain Hark Add Alarn Dynamics Add Edit Beiere Apply OK Back 232 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference For color attributes the colored boxes on the right side of the Value and XfValue fields show both the color and transformed color of the attribute The Options Color Options 235 Color Display option may be checked to display color RGB value in the range 0 255 By default RGB values use the range from 0 to 1 The ColorDisplay255 parameter in the g g config file may be set to 1 to permanently use the 255 color range In addition to a color palette shown in the picture the Builder provides a custom color palette To switch color palettes use Options Color Options Swap Color Palettes or simply Ctrl click on the color palette Refer to the OEM Customization chapter for information on how to supply your own custom color palette You can also Shift click in the color palette or select Options Color Options Pastel Colors to switch between pastel and regular colors If an attribute object has transformations alarm or tag attached it will be annotated with X A or T buttons on the right side of the attribute row in the object s Properties dialog These buttons may also be used as shortcuts for accessing t
536. s For example if MinValue 1 and Max Value 0 the timer will start from 1 and will also stay at this value when disabled When the timer is enabled again it will continue updating in sync with the other timers that have the same period and are not disabled This synchronizes blinking of objects with the same timer intervals after the timer was disabled and then enabled again For timers with a negative Period the timer keeps its current state when disabled instead of resetting to the minimum value When the timer is enabled again it will continue from the state where it was stopped which may not match the state of other timers with the same period value The Divide transformation divides the attribute s Value by the value of a scalar divisor and assigns the result to the attribute s transformed value XfValue Its only attribute is the divisor itself called D Parameter The Linear transformation has six attributes called M 4 X B Y and D The transformation ignores the attribute s Value and sets the attribute s transformed value XfValue to the result of the following expression M A X B Y D where M A X B Y and D are the value of the six transformation attributes 162 Compare Boolean GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference A Compare transformation ignores the attribute s Value and sets the attribute s transformed value Value to the result of the comparison of two input parameters of the transformation I
537. s sliders scrollbars text field list and option menu widgets For complete control over a native widget s resources in both C C Java and C NET use the windowing environment s native API The Builder s graphical interface is still quite useful for application design tasks such as arranging windows and graphical controls The Widget ID of the native widget used for rendering the viewport may be obtained by querying the Widget resource of the viewport using the GlgGetL Resource method of the GLG API similar to the GlgGetDResource method but uses long return value type GetResource method returning Object is the Java and C NET equivalent The Widget ID must be queried after setting up the drawing hierarchy at which time the native widgetis created and may be used in any further native API calls The widget types are listed in the table below with their X Windows Motif Windows Java and NET equivalents To learn how to control these widgets refer to the documentation for the appropriate windowing environment Widget Types and Their Equivalences Drawing Area XmDrawingArea WINDOW AWT Panel UserControl Swing JPanel Push Button XmPushButton Push style BUTTON AWT Button Button Swing JButton Toggle Button XmToggleButton Toggle Style AWT Checkbox CheckBox BUTTON Swing JCheckBox Custom Button XmDrawnButton WINDOW AWT Panel UserControl Swing JPanel Input Objects Widget Types
538. s Visibility attribute to enable or disable the display of the selection marker The chart can be zoomed and scrolled in the X direction by setting the Span and End Value attributes ofits X axis Zooming and panning in the Y direction is done by changing the Y ranges of the chart s plots and Y axes The GlgSetZoom function provides a simplified interface to the integrated zooming and scrolling in the Chart Zoom Mode which is the default for charts in the Real Time Charts palette Refer to the GlgSetZoom section on page 89 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual for details The chart can also be scrolled using integrated scrollbars The scrollbars are activated by setting the Pan attribute of the chart s parent viewport see page 85 Plot GLG Objects 119 All charts in the RealTime Charts palette have chart tooltips enabled The chart tooltips display information about the data sample selected by the current cursor position The type of the information displayed in the tooltips is defined by the chart s TooltipFormat attribute The TooltipMode attribute controls the criterion for the data sample selection The chart generates messages when its cross hair cursor is drawn or erased see the Chart Message Object section on page 367 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual The Plot object is used to render individual lines in a chart A required number of plot objects is automatically created by the parent chart A plot object does not hav
539. s a Resource Browser that shows resources of the selected object If no object is selected resources of the whole drawing at the current level of the hierarchy are shown Selecting a different object updates the Resource Browser to display the object s resources For a discussion of the basics of object resources see the Structure of a GLG Drawing chapter The Resource Browser Dialog The Resource Browser dialog lists resources of the drawing Clicking on any resource entry activates dialogs for editing attributes of the selected resource All resources are organized hierarchically in a way similar to a file and directory structure You can navigate between the levels by double clicking on the entries Composite resources that contain other resources are annotated with the gt gt suffix after a resource name Double clicking on such a resource enters another level of hierarchy listing all resources inside the selected composite resource 342 Tags GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The following special entries may also be present in the Resource Browser dialog and may be used for navigation represents the top level viewport Drawing Area of the Builder represents the object which is currently selected in the Builder if any represents the viewport with the editing focus if it is different from the Drawing Area represents the previous level relatively to the currently selected resource The resource browser
540. s a Server Data File sdf which describes the dataset to be used by the Map Server to generate the map image It may be specified using either a relative or absolute path This attribute is used only by the C C and ActiveX version of the Toolkit as well as the Graphics Builder which use the Map Server in the form of a C library Cross Platform Use Note Use a relative path instead of an absolute path to allow the application to be moved to a different directory or a different environment web or Java without adjusting the paths For cross platform deployment use as a path delimiter even on Windows On Windows the Builder converts to V automatically when necessary GISMapServerURL Specifies the Map Server URL to be used by the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit The URL has to have a web server based GLG Map Server setup as described in the GLG Map Server Reference Manual This attribute only affects the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit which connects to a web based GLG Map Server to retrieve the map image The GIS Object handles all aspects of connecting to the Map Server URL with proper parameters GISLayers Defines a list of layers to be displayed in the generated image The value of this attribute is a comma separated list of layer names defined in the Server Data File sdf The default string may be used to enable the layers whose DEFAULT ON attribute is set to YES in the Layer s Information
541. s a value axis with a range supplied by the Low and High attributes this axis type is used for the Y axes of a chart A RULER axis type defines a ruler The RulerScale attribute defines the ruler s unit to pixel mapping If RulerScale is set to the DPI Dots Per Inch value of the monitor and the axis s MajorInterval 1 the axis will display major ticks at 1 inch intervals Axis Position Specifies the axis placement relatively to a rectangle defined by the axis s two control points and may have the following values HTOP UP HTOP_DOWN A horizontal axis is positioned along the top edge of the rectangle defined by the control points with ticks drawn in the direction specified by the UP or DOWN keyword HCENTER UP HCENTER DOWN A horizontal axis is positioned in the center of the rectangle defined by the control points with ticks drawn in the direction specified by the UP or DOWN keyword HBOTTOM UP HBOTTOM DOWN A horizontal axis is positioned along the bottom edge of the rectangle defined by the control points with ticks drawn in the direction specified by the UP or DOWN keyword GLG Objects 125 VLEFT LEFT VLEFT RIGHT A vertical axis is positioned along the left edge of the rectangle defined by the control points with ticks drawn in the direction specified by the trailing LEFT or RIGHT keyword VCENTER LEFT VCENTER RIGHT A vertical axis is positioned in the center of the rectangle defined by the control points with
542. s an alternative g g config file to use oem Starts the Enterprise Edition of the Graphics Builder in the OEM mode 222 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference widget editing mode In this mode widgets loaded from the palettes with Ctrl click can be saved into the original drawing files facilitating convenient editing of widgets in the custom widget palettes Without this option a copy ofa modified widget is saved in the current directory by default to avoid permanently overwriting widgets in the GLG Builder palettes 1g disable opengl Disables OpenGL renderer in favor of the native windowing renderer lg enable opengl Enables OpenGL renderer if present The OpenGL renderer will be used only for the viewports which have their OpenGLHint attribute set to ON lg opengl version lt NNN gt Specifies the value of GlgOpenGLVersion which requests the specified OpenGL version The shader based Core OpenGL profile is used for OpenGL versions higher than 3 00 and the Compatibility profile is used for older OpenGL versions The Compatibility profile is used by default an OpenGL version needs to be explicitly specified to use the Core profile glg opengl hardware threshold lt N gt Specifies the value of GlgOpenGLHardwareThreshold All viewports with a non zero value of the OpenGLHint attribute less than or equal to GlgOpenGLHardwareThreshold will be rendered using the hardware OpenGL renderer if available Viewports wit
543. s an arc with a start angle of 0 and an end angle of 360 Radius Defines a radius of an arc s curved edge MinRadius Defines the inner radius of an arc band for arcs of the GLG_BAND type GLG Objects 75 Resolution The arc s resolution is the number of line segments used to render its perimeter A circle drawn with a resolution of 5 is simply a regular pentagon The default value for this is 100 A smaller value may be used for small arcs and circles to increase performance As with the parallelogram an arc may be exploded in the Builder into its constituent polygon The center and vector control points disappear and simple polygon control points are shown on the arc s perimeter Spline A spline is a multi point Bezier or Catmull Rom cubic spline used to render curves in 2D or 3D space A one segment spline is a parametrically represented curve controlled by 4 control points The shape of the segment may be changed by dragging the control points The multi point spline is a blending of one or more spline segments with a variable number of points The spline starts and ends at the first and last control points respectively The intermediate control points control the curvature and shape of the spline Like the parallelogram the spline is a special case of the polygon so it has the usual polygon attributes like LineType and FillColor The spline has two additional attributes SplineType Defines the type of a
544. s attached to one of polygons only the transformed polygon moves as the transformation projects it into a different position The transformation doesn t change the coordinates of the constrained control point that is the child of both polygons and the other polygon remains in place Any changes to the constrained point will still affect both polygons if the constrained point is moved by the mouse for example both polygons will move but each in its own projected space The following diagrams illustrate the situation In the figure below two polygons are constrained at a control point CP2 A move transformation is applied to PY2 which moves it somewhere PY1 PY2 eae CP1 CP2 CP3 XFORM Structure of a GLG Drawing 37 When the move transformation is applied Polygon PY2 moves but Polygon PY does not even though one of its control points is constrained to a point of PY2 since the coordinates of the control point are unaffected by the transformation see Fig and Fig 2 below The transformation affects only PY2 by projecting it into a different position without changing the control point If the control point CP2 moves Fig 3 both polygons move each in its own space CP1 CP3 CP PY1 PY2 PY1 CP2 CP2 CP2 Fig 1 Original position Fig 2 Attaching transformation Fig 3 Moving constrained point To apply a move transformation to a polygon in a way that will make a
545. s attributes The action s properties specify the type of the feedback as well as the mouse event that triggers it Refer to the Action Object chapter on page 176 for more information Add Input Command Add Input Command attaches an input command action to the selected input object It uses the same user interface as the Add Command option described above but is active only when an input object such as a button a toggle or a slider is selected Add Input Action Add Input Action attaches an input action such as a custom event to the selected input object It uses the same user interface as the Add Custom Event option described above but is active only when an input object such as a button a toggle or a slider is selected Edit Actions Edit Actions opens an Action List dialog for editing actions attached to the selected object The dialog provides an interface for editing attributes reordering or deleting individual actions Refer to the Action Object chapter on page 176 for more information The Actions button in the Status Panel at the bottom of the drawing area may be used as a shortcut GLG Graphics Builder Menus 349 Delete All Actions Delete All Actions deletes all actions attached to the selected object To delete individual actions use the Edit Actions option select an action to be deleted then press the Delete button Mark Actions Mark Actions stores a copy of the selected object s actions in the clipboard to subs
546. s edges and is the same as the AntiAliasing attribute of a polygon In the OpenGL environment the GLG_ANTI_ALIASING_DBL setting may be used for smoother scrolling of plots with markers in a real time chart Rendering A slot for attaching an optional Rendering object to control an expanded set of rendering attributes such as gradient fill cast shadows fill level and arrow heads The rendering object is accessible by using the Add Edit Rendering buttons in the Object Properties dialog To delete the rendering object use the Delete Rendering button in the Rendering Image GLG Objects 79 Object properties The attribute assumes the value of NULL if no rendering object is attached See the Rendering section on page 140 for details When a rendering object is added to all objects in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added rendering objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used The image object is used to represent graphical images in GIF JPEG PNG and BMP formats The GIF JPEG and PNG formats are supported across all platforms while the BMP format is supported only in the C C on Windows as well as in the Java and C NET versions TIFF images are also supported in the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit Transparent colors are supported via the TransparentColor attribute and ima
547. s environment in the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit and for fonts with MultiByteFlag set to UTF8 on Windows JavaFontName Holds the name of the font to use when the drawing is displayed in the Java environment FontName A cross platform alias for the font name attribute It is dynamically mapped to one of the above attributes at run time depending on the environment For example if the Java environment is used the FontName resource name may be used at run time to access the JavaFontName attribute PSName Specifies the name of the PostScript font to use in place of the font when producing PostScript output By default the PostScript Font Name attribute is set to match the Font Name attribute which is sufficient for Times Courier and Helvetica families of fonts For other fonts or if a different font mapping is desired it has to be set manually Light Object The light object is used by a viewport to hold the viewport s lighting attributes The light object has the following attributes 150 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference LightType Specifies a type of shading to be used in rendering three dimensional objects Currently available values are NONE GLG_NO_LIGHT All polygons will be rendered in their original colors regardless of the orientation as long as the LightCoef and AmbientCoef attributes add to one The coloration of a polygon surface always depends on the total light intensity sum of the LightCoef and
548. s in the menu The message has no parameters GlgBrowser and GlgFontBrowser The browsers are an arrangement of menus buttons and lists designed to facilitate the selection of some item Typical arrangements include a filter or string containing wildcard characters a list of objects that match that string and a text widget into which a user can type the selection Often the filter string will be reproduced in the selection text widget to save typing by the user Different browsers include optimizations designed for the objects being browsed A font browser designed for making selections from fonts that use the X font naming conventions has a menu of buttons designed to make the construction of a filter string easy The font browser is only supported on X Windows The browser handler is designed to be used for browsing resources of GLG drawings and objects a example of which can be seen as the resource browser in the GLG Graphics Builder The browser handler may also be used to browse tags tag browser and custom data sources custom data browser Menu The menu from which selections may be made For a resource browser the menu presents the resources on the chosen level of the hierarchy For a tag browser the menu displays a list of tags of the selected object For a custom data browser the menu displays a list of data sources For a font browser it displays either fonts matching the filter string or a list of available entries for a
549. s label Label Extent Relative advanced Specifies an extent of a major tick label in the direction parallel to the axis It is used for scaling tick labels with TextType set to SCALED The extent is relative to the major tick interval the value of 0 8 would allow tick labels to use 80 of the major tick interval If a label does not fit it is scaled down Label Extent Absolute advanced Specifies a pixel extent of a major tick label in the direction perpendicular to the axis It is used for scaling tick labels with TextType set to SCALED Ifa label does not fit it is scaled down Major Offset Specifies an additional offset for positioning major ticks and labels For example for a range axis with RoundedPlacement YES Low 8 MajorInterval 10 setting MajorOffset 5 will position major ticks and labels at 15 25 35 and so on instead of 10 20 30 and so on If the value of MajorOffset exceeds major tick interval a remainder of an integer division of MajorOffset by MajorInterval is used as the offset value Time Origin relative time axis only Specifies the start time to be subtracted from the sample s time stamps For example if a relative time chart is used to display data of an experiment it may be desirable to display the start time of the experiment as 00 00 00 and the time 12 minutes and 5 seconds after the start of the experiment as 00 12 05 There are two ways to accomplish this An application can set TimeOrigin to 0 and supply r
550. s not affect the content of the drawing To reattach the palettes to the Builder window select Detach Palettes again Scrollbars Scrollbars shows or hides the scrollbars in the GLG Graphics Builder window Toolbar Toolbar shows or hides the toolbar at the top of the GLG Graphics Builder window Modal Dialogs This option controls modality of the dialogs If dialogs aren t modal clicking in the drawing selects an object and may close the currently displayed dialog This option enables fast navigation and is intended for expert users If dialogs are modal clicking in the drawing area is allowed only for some operations This setting helps learning the Builder and is recommended for novice users Display OpenGL Info This option displays diagnostic information about the status of the OpenGL driver If the driver has been successfully initialized it also displays the OpenGL renderer and vendor information to assist in troubleshooting the OpenGL driver setup problems 362 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The verbose command line option may be used to display extended diagnostic information on Linux Unix or to record the information in the g g error log file on Windows The location of the file is determined by the GLG_LOG_DIR and GLG_DIR environment variables as described in the Error Processing section on page 51 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual Save Layout Save Layout saves the drawing that defines the layou
551. s precise movements just drag the object with the mouse An 8 point resize box appears around an object Use its points to resize the object You can also flip the object by dragging any of the resize points to the other side of the object s box Objects with only one control point marker fixed text etc can t be resized and resize points for these objects appear desensitized in a gray color A rotate point appears on the right side on the resize box To rotate an object precisely by a specified angle Shift click on the rotate point and use the arrows in the Object Rotation Point dialog For quicker or less precise rotation drag the rotate point with the mouse Control points appear at the vertices or other important points To change the shape of the object drag its control points with the mouse You can also edit a control point precisely by Shift clicking on it see page 233 Using the GLG Graphics Builder 227 If an object has geometrical dynamics attached the control points of the dynamics will also be displayed The object dynamics points may be positioned the same way as other control points Resize Box Handle Rotate Point Move Point Control Point Object Dynamics Point ps a Object Selection Control Points The Options Selection Options Selection Display menu Ctrl N accelerator can be used to change the selection display to show just the resize box just the control points or both for convenience
552. s represents the drawing view before the slider is activated This means that wherever you move the slider it returns to the middle of its range when you release the mouse button ready for the next move Customizing the View Projection If you want to switch between several projections you may want to save the transformation for the projections into files When you want to view a drawing using a particular projection you load the view projection Use View Save Viewing Transformation and View Load Viewing Transformation to create and load a projection file see page 312 Because the Builder saves the current view projection along with the drawing you only need this option if you switch projections frequently To save or load a viewing transformation of a particular viewport move editing focus into it using the Set Focus button or go down into it using the Hierarchy Down button To transform a viewport dynamically from a program add a parametric transformation to the viewport as a view transformation Changing parameters of the transformation will change the view projection Alternatively the program may use the GlgSetZoom method Viewing Using Different Coordinate Systems By default the Builder uses the coordinate system of the entire drawing for specifying points and transformations However you can view the drawing using the coordinate system of any object in the drawing to clarify the relationships between the objects For example c
553. s resized The transformation is used by some of the graphs for implementing desired layout behavior and has the following attributes Center The center point specified as a geometrical value Factor Scalar scale coefficient The actual scale factor is a product of the Factor and the automatically adjusted scale factor used to compensate the change of the window size To add the screen scale transformation use ScaleScrX ScaleScrY or ScaleScrZ scale type options in the Add Dynamics dialog Scalar Transformations There are several transformation objects designed to apply to simple scalar D values these transformations can be attached to attributes of D type such as LineWidth or Visibility A scalar transformation takes an input value transforms it according to the type of the transformation and assigns the resulting output to the attribute s transformed value What is used as the input value depends on the type of the transformation Some scalar transformations use the value of the attribute they are attached to as the input value and set the transformed value of the attribute to the output For example the Divide transformation takes the value of the attribute divides it by the transformation s Divisor parameter and sets the transformed value of the attribute to the resulting output In the Graphics Builder the attribute s value and the transformed value are shown in the Attribute dialog as Value and XfValue the attribute s t
554. s skipped and is not updated when the SetTag methods are used Output tags may be used in an application to keep IDs of tags to be updated in the process database when user enters a new tag value INIT Same as INPUT used to indicate that an application needs to set the tag just once when the drawing is initially displayed TagEnabled This D attribute may be set to FALSE at runtime to temporarily disable updates of the tag with the SetTag methods The attribute may be used by an application to disable updates of a text input object from an attached tag while the user enters a new value Disabling a tag does not affect other enabled tags with the same TagSource they will still be updated with new values when the SetTag methods are invoked TagComment A string used to hold user defined information related to the tag The Data Tag dialog in the Builder also shows the JnLow and InHigh attributes These attributes do not belong to the tag object itself but to the attribute object the tag is attached to If the tag is attached to a D attribute with a range transformation the JnLow and InHigh fields allow the user to edit the input range of the range transformation right in the tag editing dialog These fields are disabled otherwise The Browse button of the Data Tag dialog allows the user to browse custom data sources and select tag sources from a list of available choices A custom data DLL may be provided to connect to the application specific data so
555. s to be edited Connector Series GLG Objects 99 The rest of the buttons perform the same functions as the corresponding options of the Arrange menu described on page 317 The connector object may be used to connect other objects in the drawing It is useful when implementing node and edge functionalities or connecting objects in a diagram There are two types of connectors A recta linear connector connects objects with linear segments maintaining right angles between adjacent segments and an arc connector connects objects with an arc path The connector has a set of control points which define its geometry When the positions of its control points change the connecting path changes as well maintaining its recta linear or arc shape The end points of the connector can be constrained to the control points of other objects so that the connector adjusts its geometry when the objects move A Reference and Container objects may be used as containers to hold objects providing a control point for constraining the connector s end points to A Diagram Editor demo shows examples of using different connector objects to connect nodes in a diagram The recta linear connector also has a set of constrained points These points can t be moved since their position is defined by the connector s control points but they may be used to constrain other objects to them staying attached to the middle point of the connecting path When the connector
556. s to display a numerical value using the specified format It has the following properties InputValue The value to be displayed Label The label used to annotate the value MinLength The minimum number of characters used to display the value If the number of characters is less than MinLength the value is padded with spaces on the left Precision The number of digits after the decimal point in the value display Separator The string used as a separator between the label and the value GLG Objects 173 Units The unit string displayed after the value Text Display The Text Display dynamics may be attached to the TextString attribute of text objects to display a string using the specified format It has the following properties InputString The string to be displayed Label The label used to annotate the string value MinLength The minimum number of characters used to display the string If the number of characters is less than MinLength the string is padded with spaces on the left Separator The string used as a separator between the label and the string Suffix The second annotation displayed after the string Time Display The Time Display dynamics may be attached to the TextString attribute of text objects to display the current time It has the following properties Enabled Enables or disables time updates In the Builder use the Run mode to see updates of the time display TimeFormat A character string specifying a d
557. scaled to fit the area outlined by the parallelogram The viewport frame of the template is mapped to the size of one slot of the square series The square series object has the following attributes 102 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Template The object used as a template replicated in the series It can be accessed for editing by traversing the hierarchy of the series object Traverse Down or the Hierarchy Down button When finished use Hierarchy Up to return back to the top level The Template resource is not visible in the Resource Browser by default but will appear in the Resource Browser if it is named DepthSort Controls hidden surface removal Similar to the DepthSort attribute of a group page 98 except that the SPECIAL value uses a fast depth sorting algorithm optimized for series objects when the GDI driver is used RowFactor Defines a number of rows of template instances ColumnF actor Defines a number of columns of template instances ColumnsFirst Controls how instances of the template are numbered If set to YES they are numbered by the columns or by the rows otherwise CloneType The clone type used to create instances of the template It may be Full Weak Strong or Constrained Refer to the Cloning an Object section of the Using the GLG Graphics Builder for details on using the clone type KeepEditRatio If set to YES preserves the X Y ratio of the template drawing while editing its content in the
558. se contain the instances of the template objects In order to control a polysurface the control point of the template marker must also be named The default name is Point Use Traverse Hierarchy Down to edit the marker template if you want to change its name or other characteristics The instances of the marker control point are found in a third group of resources within the polysurface called Points The coordinates of these points control the position of the polysurface s points Frame A frame object organizes other objects in a specified arrangement The points on the frame act as anchors so other objects can be constrained to them These are the frame points There are five frame types e Point Frame allows anchoring to a single point Click once to define the point e Line Frame allows anchoring to points along a line Click twice to define the start and end of the line The Builder prompts you for the factor which controls the number of anchor points along the line frame 2D Frame allows anchoring to points inside a parallelogram defined by three control points Click on a point and click on two points to define two vectors from the first point The Builder prompts you for the factor which controls the number of anchor points on each segment of the frame 3D Frame allowing anchoring to points inside a parallel prism defined by four control points Click on the center point and click three times to define three vectors for
559. se objects is not convenient as a subdrawing has only one control point while it is easier to define a button s position using two points Using a subwindow for buttons allows to change the button appearance in all drawings by editing a single template Series A one dimensional collection of objects defined by a template object a number of repetitions and a path on which to repeat them The path need not be a straight line Square Series A two dimensional collection of objects defined by a template object a number of repetitions and a grid on which to repeat them Polyline A collection of points and connecting lines Polysurface A two dimensional collection of points and connecting faces Frame Provides an array of control points to which other objects may be constrained GLG Objects 67 Chart objects are specialized objects used to render real time charts and their subobjects Chart A specialized object used to render real time charts Plot Represents individual plot lines in a chart Level Line Displays a horizontal line representing a threshold value in a chart Axis A specialized object for rendering axes in a chart as well as stand alone ruler objects Legend A specialized object for displaying chart legends GLG non graphical objects are used to control the appearance and behavior of graphical objects They are as follows Data Used to hold a data value Tag May be attached to a data object to mark it as a globa
560. set setting If you specified a transformation using Edit Define Clone Transformation it is applied before the clone is drawn GLG Graphics Builder Menus 309 Constrained Clone Constrained Clone creates a copy of the selected object All the copy s attributes are constrained to the original object so 1t has the same characteristics of the original including transformations attributes and resources The copy is created in the position specified by the current clone offset setting If you specified a transformation using Edit Define Clone Transformation it is applied before the clone is drawn Because of the constraint the offset and transformation are attached to the copy as static transformations When Constrained Clone is used the control points of the clone are constrained to the points of the original object and Transform Points would transform both the clone and the original To avoid that Constrained Clone attaches a static matrix transformation to the cloned object to position it and sets the clone s MoveMode to MoveByXform When you create a constrained clone all the clone s attributes are constrained to the original object regardless of the Global attribute settings See page 258 for more information on the Global attribute Reset Scaling Xform For a reference object Reset Scaling Xform resets the internal transformation the reference object uses to stretch its instance when the bounding box is stretched with th
561. simple objects into a complex one The groups may be used to hold collections of graphical or non graphical objects Connector A recta linear or arc path for connecting objects Reference A Reference object is a wrapper around a group of objects used as a template The Reference object may be used to replicate the same template in multiple places in one drawing or in multiple drawings It may also be used as a convenient wrapper for positioning a group of objects using a single anchor point There are three flavors of the Reference object Container Encapsulates a collection of other objects and provides a single control point for positioning it in the drawing Each container has its own independent copy of the template SubDrawing Replicates copies of a template object in a drawing When the template is changed all subdrawings that use the template will change as well The template may be included in the same drawing or stored in a separate drawing file Subdrawing dynamics may be used to alter the SubDrawing s appearance at runtime SubWindow Used to switch drawings displayed in the SubWindow object The SubWindow has two control points that define an area in which the template drawing is displayed The template must be a viewport object containing the drawing to be displayed The SubWindow may also be used as a subdrawing for interface objects that require two control points such as buttons or menus Using a subdrawing for the
562. sing Marked Attributes There are two ways to use a marked attribute value you can constrain the attributes or set the second attribute s value to the marked value To use a marked attribute 1 Show the list of attributes for the object a For an attribute use Object Properties to show the Selected Object Properties dialog and click on the to see the Attribute dialog b Fora control point use Shift click to see the Control Point dialog 2 Click on either the Constrain One Constrain All or the Use Object button The Builder prompts you with Use Resource and Use Marked buttons If Constrain Allis used not only the attribute itself but also all attributes constrained to it will be constrained to a new object Constrain One is enabled only if activated in the glg_config file 3 Click on Use Marked The Builder prompts you with a list of marks ranging from Mark0 to Mark4 4 Click on the mark to use for the new attribute value The attribute value from the mark is applied to the current attribute When the drawing is reloaded the marked attributes point to the attributes of the old drawing Therefore you can still reuse their values but can t use them for constraining Unconstraining an Attribute To unconstrain an attribute 1 Show the list of attributes for the object a Foran attribute use Object Properties to show the Selected Object Properties dialog and click on the i to see the Attribute dialog
563. sing the GLG Graphics Builder to create and animate a GLG drawing and it only scratches the surface of what is possible You may find it profitable to work out some similar simple exercises before starting in on a large project Builder Setup and Customization Environment Variables Environment variables may be used to define the location of the GLG installation directory and other GLG components All environment variables have two forms a generic form i e GLG_DIR and a version specific form i e GLG_DIR_X Y where X and Y are the major and minor GLG version numbers The version specific form may be used to prevent conflicts when one machine has more than one version of the GLG Builder installed The following environment variables are supported GLG_DIR Defines the location of the GLG installation directory is set by default on Windows GLG_CONFIG_FILE GLG_HMI_CONFIG_FILE Defines the location of the configuration files for the Graphics Builder and HMI Configurator if it is different from the default GLG_PALETTES_LOCATION GLG_HMI PALETTES LOCATION Defines the location of the GLG widgets directory for the Graphics Builder and HMI Configurator if it is different from the default GLG_LOG_DIR Defines the directory of the GLG error log file if it is different from the default GLM_LOG_DIR Defines the directory of the error log file for the Builder s Map Server component if it is different from the default GLG_VERBO
564. sitive value may be used to specify an interval in axis units A negative value may be used to specify a fixed number of major ticks instead of an interval which may be convenient for automatic tick positioning in cases when the axis range may change A zero value may be used to disable major ticks and labels For example if MajorInterval 3600 for a time axis the major ticks and labels will be GLG Objects 129 placed at 1 hour intervals If the axis s Span is increased to display 7 days worth of data the axis will display an excessive number of major ticks and labels If MajorInterval 5 the axis will always display 5 major ticks and labels regardless of the axis s Span Minor Interval Specifies an interval between minor ticks A positive value may be used to specify an interval in axis units A negative value may be used to specify the number of minor ticks per one major tick interval A zero value may be used to disable minor ticks AxisLabel String Specifies an axis label that may be used to identify the axis for example in a chart with multiple Y axes Edit Ticks amp Outline A button in the Properties dialog to access the LineAttributes object that defines rendering attributes of the ticks and the outline Edit Ticks Labels A button in the Properties dialog to access a text object that defines attributes of the major tick labels Low Offset non time axes only High Offset non time axes only Decrease the visible part
565. sized If set to YES the object does not resize when the drawing is resized or zoomed in otherwise it is resized with the drawing The size of a SubDrawing or Container object of a fixed size may be changed only by editing its template If the FixedSize is set to YES the point coordinates of the object s template are interpreted as GLG screen coordinates If the FixedSize is set to NO the point coordinates of the object s template are interpreted as world coordinates of the drawing Subdrawing and container objects are created with the FixedSize initially set to NO and the template s coordinates are interpreted in the world coordinate space When the FixedSize is changed to YES the visible size of the object changes since the template is now drawn in the screen coordinate space The size of the fixed size subdrawings and containers may be adjusted by traversing down into the object s template using the Hierarchy Down button and changing the template s size 108 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference EnableCache Enables or disables template cache for subdrawings and subwindows that use template stored in an external file If set to YES template is cached for reuse by subdrawings that use the same template file Instead of loading the template multiple times each subdrawing creates a copy of the cached template If set to NO template caching is disabled each subdrawing loads its own copy of the template and the CloneType at
566. some properties of GLG objects as public properties When an object with public properties is used in the HMI Configurator the Public Properties dialog displays only the properties of the object that are marked as public This feature is used by system integrators to create custom components with a predefined set of properties to be edited by the user Using public properties the components can expose only certain properties of a component for easy editing while hiding the rest of internal properties to protect them from being changed 64 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 65 Chapter 4 GLG Objects 4 In addition to being familiar with the overall structure ofa GLG drawing it is useful to know about the variety of objects you are liable to see in such a drawing This chapter contains a description of most of the objects that make up a drawing Note that there are some objects that are not described here Some of these are never seen by the user and others are seen but may not be available to the user The objects can be easily divided into the graphical and the non graphical objects The graphical objects are those objects that are readily visible to a user looking at a GLG drawing They may be divided into two groups the simple and the advanced objects The simple objects are as follows Polygon The basic graphical object used for lines and shapes Parallelogram Another sub class of polygon for parallelograms and rectangles
567. source and one of the SelectedIndex SelectedString or SelectedValue menu resources are defined the menu will behave as a radio menu allowing the user to select only one toggle button In this case the SelectedIndex resource may be set to a value of a zero based button index to select the corresponding button If none of the selection state resources are defined the menu will behave as a multiple selection menu Menu button labels may be assigned dynamically by changing the String attribute of a button s label Button labels may also be applied with the LabelList resource If present this resource identifies a list of data properties of S type specifying labels to use usually attached to the menu s viewport as a Custom Property list The buttons in the menu will be assigned the labels taken from these objects If there are more buttons then the labels in the LabelList the LabelString of the button itself is used If there are more labels in the group than there are buttons in the menu the menu may be scrolled an explicitly defined scrollbar named ScrollObject must be provided to facilitate scrolling Button lt n gt The menu buttons The first button is called Button0 and must be present for any menu widget The other buttons in the menu must follow this first button in sequence The numeric suffix is the index of the button and is returned with the SelectedIndex resource of the message object LabelList An optional group object
568. specified filter field The menu object uses a native list widget a viewport with WidgetType LIST Filter This text widget displays the filter string used to display the entries in the menu Only entries that match the filter are displayed 212 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Selection This text widget displays the selection that will be made To save typing the browser usually echoes the filter string into this widget FontName Font Browser only This is a string resource containing the name of the font chosen FontSampleName Font Browser only This text object is used to display a sample of the chosen font Its String resource is usually some sample sentence Field Menu Font Browser only This resource indicates a menu used to specify the field of the font filter string a user wishes to edit That is if you want to change the font family you push the Family button in this menu The browser then presents you with the available options When you choose one of them the filter is modified accordingly TypeObject This resource is a string value defining the type of the browser for the G gBrowser input handler not used by the G gFontBrowser The value of the string must be Resource for the resource browser Tag for the tag browser and Data for the custom data browser The browser has three buttons to signal the action to take For details of the messages these buttons send see the descriptio
569. spline GLG_B_ SPLINE Bezier or GLG_C SPLINE Catmull Rom The Catmull Rom spline passes through the control points while the Bezier spline yields a smoother curve due to its continuous second derivative SplineResolution The spline s resolution is the number of line segments used to render each spline segment The default value for this is 10 A larger value may be used to increase the rendering quality of splines with large segments or high curvature Text The text object is used to place labels and legends in a GLG drawing There are three types of text object which differ both in their behavior and in the number of control points FIXED Has one control point defining its position The text font size is defined by the FontSize attribute and is not controlled by a bounding rectangle SCALED Text has two control points defining a rectangle in which to fit the text The FontSize attribute defines the maximum and the MinFontSize attribute controls the minimum size allowed The actual size of the font is determined dynamically by constraining the text to the rectangle Note that the scaling done is not infinitely variable different sizes of text are selected from the fonts in the font table according to the size of the bounding rectangle Setting MinFontSize to 1 may be used for automatic text label decluttering in which case the text will disappear if the drawing is zoomed out of and there is not enough space to draw the text inside th
570. ssure Plant3 Tank2 Pressure The first line of the file contains version information and should not be modified Any characters between the string s terminating separator and the separator at the beginning of the next string are ignored allowing for comments and blank lines to annotate the tag file The example assigns new values to the TagSource attributes of two tags with the AlarmState and Pressure tag names changing their tag sources from the undefined string to Plant3 Tank2 Alarm and Plant3 Tank2 Pressure respectively The tags TagName attributes remain unchanged If some tags should be not translated their entries may be left unchanged or even better removed from the file Only the tags defined in the translation file will be replaced Builder Features The File menu of the Graphics Builder contains Export Tags and Import Tags options to export or import all tags defined in the drawing When editing focus is inside a viewport only that viewport s tags are exported or imported providing a way to export or import tags for only a part of the loaded drawing After the file has been modified it can be imported back and the new drawing may be saved Drawing Conversion Utility Options The drawing conversion utility gconvert supports export_tags lt filename gt and import tags lt filename gt options for exporting and importing the tags in batch mode GLG API Methods and Run Time Tag Mapping T
571. st of the polygon points may be edited by pressing the Point List button in polygon s Properties dialog Inverting the points order may be convenient when merging polygons 322 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Add Polygon Points This submenu provides options for merging polygons To merge polygons all points of one polygon are first marked and then added to another polygon To mark polygon s points for merging select the polygon display its Properties dialog press the Point List button to display its point list and press Mark List Add To Beginning Adds the marked list of points at the beginning of the point list of the selected polygon Add To Beginning Reversed Adds the marked list of points at the beginning of the point list of the selected polygon reversing the order of points of the marked point list so that the first point is added last Add To End Adds the marked list of points at the end of the point list of the selected polygon Add To End Reversed Adds the marked list of points at the end of the point list of the selected polygon reversing the order of points of the marked point list so that the first point is added last Template Provides options for managing templates of subdrawings subwindows and series objects Mark Template Stores a template of the selected SubDrawing or SubWindow object to be reused The option is enabled only for SubDrawing and SubWindow objects that use included templates
572. stamp The number of samples kept in the chart s buffer can still be controlled by the chart s BufferSize attribute The value of the attribute is ignored for non scrollable XY Scatter charts For non time based scrolling charts BufferXSpan is defined in the units of the X axis Buffer Size Controls the maximum number of samples per plot stored in the chart s data history buffer When new samples are pushed into the chart and the size of the data buffer is exceeded the oldest samples are discarded to maintain the requested maximum number of samples in the buffer The BufferSize may be used to limit the size of the data buffer with or without BufferXSpan For example if the BufferXSpan is set to 3600 to keep all samples for the last hour the number of data samples in the buffer may exceed 3600 if new samples are pushed into the chart faster than once per second BufferSize may be set to let s say 7200 to limit the maximum number of samples kept in the buffer If BufferSize is set to 0 the chart will not limit the maximum number of samples in the data buffer and the number of samples in the buffer will be limited only by the settings of the BufferXSpan attribute If BufferSize set to 0 and BufferXSpan is set to 1 the data buffer will accumulate an unlimited number of samples which can cause an application to run out of memory and should be used with caution The samples accumulated in the chart s data buffer are discarded when
573. subject to the following thresholds e 100 OpenGL version 1 0 uses gl Vertex e 110 OpenGL version 1 1 uses vertex arrays e 300 OpenGL version 3 0 uses shaders vertex arrays as well as textures for text glyphs and images 330 OpenGL version 3 3 uses shaders VBOs as well as textures for text glyphs and images If the requested OpenGL version is not supported by the graphics card an error message is generated and the driver is automatically downgraded to the highest supported OpenGL version Hardware and Software Renderers OpenGL Priority Graphics cards that provide hardware accelerated OpenGL rendering have limitations on the maximum number of OpenGL windows an application can create the exact number varies depending on a graphics card To get around this limitation GLG allows an application to combine both the hardware accelerated and the software based OpenGL renderer A fast hardware accelerated renderer may be used for main windows with lots of objects and fast update rates while a slower software renderer may be used for icon buttons and other windows with small number of objects or with infrequent updates As a result applications with a large number of viewports can use OpenGL for all viewports without exceeding the limits of a graphics card At the design time the application prioritizes viewports by setting the viewport s OpenGLHint attribute to one of several OpenGL priorities from the highest 1 to the
574. system depends on the settings of the Resizable attribute of the viewport s screen If the viewport s Resizable attribute is set to YES WORLD the world coordinate system s origin is always positioned at the center of the viewport regardless of any scrolling and panning and the extent of the visible portion of the viewport in the world coordinates is 1000 1000 by default The default extent may be changed by using the SpanX and SpanY attributes of the viewport s screen object The exact coordinate mapping is also affected by the settings of the screen s Stretch and Pushin attributes The X axis points to the right the Y axis points up and the Z axis points to the viewer When the viewport is resized objects in the drawing are resized with the drawing area If the Resizable attribute is set to NO SCREEN the world coordinate system is the same as the screen coordinate system with the origin at the upper left corner of the viewport s window and the X and Y axes pointing to the right and down respectively The Z axis points away from the viewer to maintain a right hand coordinate system used for 3D rendering The coordinate mapping does not change when the viewport s window is resized keeping the size of the objects in the drawing constant If the Resizable attribute is set to NO GLG SCREEN the world coordinate system has the origin at the upper left corner of the viewport s window as well but the X and Y axes are directed to
575. t A viewportis a rectangular object that acts as a container for other objects The viewport represents the final stage in the visualization ofa drawing object it presents the objects within the drawing area and may be used as a widget in different run time environments To create a viewport object click on two points to define the diagonal corners of the viewport To place objects inside the viewport use Traverse Hierarchy Down to open the viewport or use View Set Focus see page 314 A drawing can contain multiple viewports viewports nested within viewports or no viewports at all However to use the drawing as a widget the drawing must contain a viewport named Widget that contains all the objects in the drawing see the Details ofusing GLG Standard API for C and C chapter Note Due to features of the Windows graphical environment there could be an inconsistency when moving or resizing a viewport with a native widget type such as a button or scrollbar The native widgets may intercept mouse events so an extra mouse click may be required to finish when dragging the viewport with the mouse Also Microsoft Windows does not report mouse events which happen on the window s border To handle this situation the Builder allows you to create an offset between the actual mouse position and the position of the control point being moved You can choose a position in the center of the control point the default slightly below and to the ri
576. t s font table This limits a text object s ability to react appropriately to shear and scale transformations for example but greatly improves real time update performance by eliminating multiple instances of similar fonts scaled slightly differently A viewport s font table can be modified to add custom fonts as well as increase the number of available font sizes to expand text scaling limits Refer to the Editing a Font Table section on page 147 for details The marker object is used to mark a position in space For example a point graph might be presented as a collection of marker objects arranged on a graph It has a fixed size and does not change when a window is resized Markers have only one control point defining their position A marker object also has the following attributes MarkerType Defines the shape of the marker When drawn a marker consists of components like cross rectangle filled rectangle circle filled circle diamond and dot Any mix of components can be chosen to represent a marker as defined by the marker type The components are chosen from the following list CROSS SQUARE FILLED SQUARE CIRCLE FILLED CIRCLE DOT DIAMOND FILLED_DIAMOND The marker drawn is a superposition Logical OR of the set chosen by the MarkerType value MarkerSize Defines the size of the marker in pixels FillColor and EdgeColor Define colors used to draw marker s components AntiAliasing Controls antialiasing of the marker
577. t 331 GIS Object prototyping 83 GIS Rendering Mode 42 46 GIS rendering mode 47 81 83 GIS Zoom Mode 45 81 GISAngle 82 GISArray 83 GISCenter 82 GISDataFile 83 GISDisabled 82 GISDiscardData 83 GISExtent 82 GISLayers 83 GISMapServerURL 83 GISProjection 82 GISStretch 82 GISUsedCenter 82 GISUsedExtent 82 GISVerbosity 83 GLG FLIPPED SCREEN COORD SYSTEM 94 GLG OPENGL_MODE environment variable 95 GLG RELATIVE UNITS 73 GLG SCREEN CENTER COORD SYSTEM 94 GLG SCREEN COORD SYSTEM 93 GLG_SCREEN_UNITS 73 GLG STRING SEPARATOR 58 62 GLG WORLD COORD SYSTEM 93 GLG_WORLD_UNITS 73 GlgArrowShape 143 GlgBrowser 193 211 GlgButton 192 201 GlgClock 193 213 GlgFontBrowser 193 211 GlgFontCharset 149 GlgKnob 192 GlgMenu 193 209 GlgMultibyteFlag 56 148 GlgNButton 192 203 GlgNList 192 206 GlgNOption 192 208 GlgNSlider 192 GlgNText 192 204 GlgOpenGL DepthOffset global configuration resource 90 GlgOpenGLMode global configuration resource 95 GlgOpenGLZSort global configuration resource 90 GlgPalette 193 212 GlgSetAlarmHandler 174 GlgSetZoom 81 88 GlgSlider 192 GlgText 192 193 205 GlgTimer 193 Global attribute 70 258 global resources using tags 60 GradeHint 146 Gradient Center 141 Gradient Fill adding 271 gradient fill 70 72 77 78 91 228 GradientAngle 141 GradientColor 141 GradientLength 141 GradientType 140 141 Granularity 196 199 200 graphic objects 26 G
578. t then select an option that matches the type of the marked object The Options Attribute Clone Type menu controls constraints of the new instance s attributes if it is set to Constrained Clone all attributes will be constrained to the corresponding attributes of the original object For example to add constrained copies of rendering attributes to several objects add Rendering Attributes to one object mark the Rendering Attributes object create a temporary group containing the objects select Options Attribute Clone Type Constrained Clone then select Using the GLG Graphics Builder 263 Edit Add or Use Marked Object Rendering Attributes It will attach constrained copies of rendering attributes to all objects in the group changing a rendering attribute of one object will affect rendering of all these objects Marking Aliases Marking aliases is a convenient way of copying a list of aliases from one object to another For marking aliases attached to an object select the object then select Aliases Mark Aliases from the Object pull down menu To add marked aliases to another object select a new object then choose Aliases Add Marked Aliases from the same pull down menu Marking Custom Properties Marking custom properties provides a way to copy a list of custom properties from one object to another For marking custom properties attached to an object select the object then select Custom Properties Mark Custom Properties
579. t and appearance of the of the Builder This drawing can be edited like any other drawing When you select this option the layout drawing is saved in a file The objects in the drawing correspond to the entities in the Builder window You can now load and edit the drawing like you would any other Although you can freely change all the objects in the Builder s drawing you should exercise caution because drastic changes can prevent the Builder from working properly To use the modified layout drawing set the GLG_EDITOR LAYOUT environment variable to the name of the file you saved Ifthe Builder does not work properly and you want to revert to the previous layout unset the GLG_EDITOR LAYOUT environment variable This option is not available in the Basic Edition of the Builder Save HMI Layout Help Save HMI Layout is similar to Save Layout but is available only in the OEM version of the Builder and saves the drawing that defines the layout and appearance of the of the HMI Configurator To use the layout drawing set the GLG_HMI EDITOR LAYOUT environment variable to the name of the HMI layout file Online Reference On Windows Online Reference starts a browser with the GLG Online Documentation page On Linux Unix it displays a dialog with information on how to access GLG Documentation About GLG Toolkit About GLG Toolkit displays a dialog with the GLG Toolkit version information Drawing 106 use in a palette drawing 304
580. t and shows the Edit Alarm dialog for editing the alarms s attributes as well as the Attribute dialog for editing the attribute object the alarm is attached to Selected i Alarn Filter al TankLevelAlarm TemperatureAlarm Select Clear The Filter field may be used to display only a subset of alarms matching a regular expression that may contain the any character and any sequence of characters wild cards To see all alarms attached to an object select the object and use either Object Alarms or the Alarms toolbar button to bring the Alarm Browser dialog see page 343 To see alarms of the whole drawing unselect the object by pressing the Esc key Selecting another object while the Alarm Browser is up will show its alarms in the Alarm Browser Using the GLG Graphics Builder 255 Refer to the Alarm Object chapter on page 174 for description of all available alarm types Adding and Deleting Alarms Adding an Alarm To add an alarm to an object s attribute 1 5 Select an object Use Object Properties or use the Properties button to see the attributes of the object Select an object s attribute by clicking on the attribute s ellipsis button Click on the Add Alarm button Enter values for the alarm s attributes in the Edit Alarm dialog To add an alarm to a resource 1 4 Editing an Alarm Use Object Resources or click on the Resources button 8 to see the resource hierarchy
581. t both of these attributes to 0 The Timer transformation periodically changes a value of a scalar attribute which can be used to implement various types of blinking or to perform run time animation The output value of the timer transformation is multiplied by the attribute s Value before being assigned to the attribute s transformed value XfValue The timer transformation has the following attributes Update Type The type of periodic updates to perform may have one of the following values SAWTOOTH A linear update type where the value gradually increases from the minimum to maximum value and then jumps back to the minimum TRIANGLE WN A linear update type where the value gradually increases from the minimum to maximum value and then gradually decreases back to the minimum CIRCULAR An update type for animating rotating objects It is similar to the SAWTOOTH update type except that the maximum value is never reached instead the value jumps back to the minimum value This is used for animating rotational angles with the 0 360 degrees interval and makes sure that the rotating object does not stutter at the beginning and end of each of the rotational revolution where the angle value of 360 degrees produces the same result as the value of 0 degrees SINE A update using sine function Period The number of value intervals it takes to change the value from the minimum to maximum value and back The actual number of iterations
582. t in pixels The X and Y coordinates of the offset value define the shadow pixel offset in the corresponding direction Negative values may be used to inverse the offset s direction If the value is 0 0 no shadow is rendered The Z component of the offset value is interpreted as the shadow transparency If the Z value is between 0 and 1 the shadow is rendered as transparent with a greater transparency for the Z values closer to 0 For environments with the OpenGL support as well as the Java and C NET versions of the Toolkit the transparency is rendered as true alpha blending For the GDI versions of the Toolkit the transparency is supported only in the Unix environment where it is simulated using dithering patterns Transparency is not supported in the Postscript output ShadowColor The color of the cast shadow FillDirection The angle defining the direction of the fill dynamics The angle is measured counter clock wise relative to the X axis For example a value of 0 results in a horizontal fill from left to right In the Builder the angle value may be entered in the Attribute dialog ellipsis button or one of the predefined values UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT may be selected from the option menu FillAmount The relative value in the range of 0 to 1 defining the percentage of the object filled with the object s FillColor or TextColor for text objects The Fi Direction attribute defines the fill direction If the value is 1 t
583. taching constrained transformations or rendering attributes to several objects The marking mechanism parallels the copy and paste mechanism but its clipboard is entirely independent The marking of attributes transformations aliases custom properties and other objects are completely independent but have similar uses Marking an attribute transformation or other object for copying is similar to cutting and pasting with a clipboard the marked entity stays marked until you mark another Marking an Attribute The Builder lets you make the value of an attribute available for constraint or reuse with another attribute if the two attributes use the same data type You can mark up to five separate attribute values for reuse To mark an attribute value for reuse 1 Select the object with the value you want to mark 2 Use Object Properties or click on the Properties button in the toolbar to show the Selected Object Properties dialog This dialog shows a list of attributes with a for attributes that can be modified 3 Click on the to see the Attribute dialog 260 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 4 Select the Mark button The Builder prompts you with a list of marks ranging from Mark0 to Mark4 Make a note of the marks you assign they are not named 5 Click on the mark to which you want to assign the attribute s current value The attribute value has been marked and assigned to the mark number you specified U
584. te is set to YES Markers always appear on top of the surface patches Polygon A template defining attributes of the polygon patches Marker A template marker object defining attributes of the markers To access the marker template traverse the hierarchy of the polysurface the Hierarchy Down button y When finished use Traverse Up to return back to the top level 112 Frame GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference CloneType The clone type used to create an instance of the polygon and marker templates It may be Full Weak Strong or Constrained Refer to the Cloning an Object section of the Using the GLG Graphics Builder for details on using the clone type The naming of instances of template markers and polygon patches is analogous to the naming of the comparable objects for a polyline See page 111 The Global flag of a marker template s attributes may be used to constrain attributes of the marker s instances Ifan attribute s Global flag is set to GLOBAL in the template changing this attribute will change all instances If the flag is set to LOCAL the attribute of each instance may be set independently allowing for independent dynamics The GLOBAL flag of the polygon template s attributes may be used to constrain attributes of the polygon patches in the same way The constraining behavior of the polysurface is also controlled by its CloneType attribute The frame object is used to constrain the geometry of other objects
585. te name which depends on the attribute type and may be used to access unnamed attributes For example the default attribute name of the polygon s line width is LineWidth While attributes can always be accessed using their default attribute names attribute names may be used to assign custom application specific names to some attributes For example the LineWidth attribute may be given a custom name box_width Attribute names take precedence over default attribute names so it is a good idea to use names different from the default attribute names Note that there are several multi valued data values used in a GLG drawing Data flags line types font selections and so forth are all displayed as selections from a list of options Internally these are all D values stored as the simple index to the table of choices For binary attributes where the value is TRUE or FALSE or YES or NO a zero value indicates false NO and any other value usually Resources Structure of a GLG Drawing 27 one indicates true YES One exception to this rule is the Visibility attribute of an object This attribute is a floating point value that can range from 0 to 1 and defines not only the object visibility 1 visible 0 invisible but also its transparency To avoid an infinite regression the type name and data values and some other attributes of the attribute object are not objects themselves Among other such attributes are the HasResources flag the Glo
586. te object loaded from a file or palette To edit the template of any reference object Container SubDrawing or SubWindow use Traverse Hierarchy Down or Y If the template is stored in a separate drawing file traversing down loads the template drawing If the template uses a palette traversing down traverses down the palette object When finished use Traverse Up or 4 to return back to the top level The options in the Options Subdrawing Traversal menu control the Builder s verbosity settings when returning to the subdrawing level after editing the subdrawing s template The default Verbose option presents a prompt before saving the modified template drawing providing the user with options for saving the drawing in a different file or discarding the changes The Silent Auto Save option automatically saves the modified drawing into the same file without displaying a prompt GLG Objects 105 When a template is modified the changes take effect when the drawing containing subdrawings is loaded and set up causing subdrawings to create their Instances from the Template In the GLG Builder it happens automatically when the drawing is reloaded on Hierarchy Up after the template editing is finished If the template drawing in an external file that was changed outside of the GLG Builder use the Reset Mm toolbar button to update the drawing An application can reset drawing hierarchy at runtime to reload the template Instance For th
587. terations makes it work regardless of the used renderer A predefined Flow dynamics may be attached to the LineType attribute for the line type pattern animation see page 174 FillType Defines how a polygon is rendered The choices are formed by combining the three possible choices by ORing together their binary constants GLG _FILL enables rendering of the polygon s fill using Fil Color 72 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference GLG_ EDGE enables rendering of the polygon s edge using EdgeColor GLG_LINE_FILL used with the GLG_EDGE to render the outer edges of thick lines using EdgeColor and the middle part using Fil Color OpenType Defines whether or not the line connecting the first and the last points of the polygon is drawn It does not have any effect on polygons with fewer than three points Shading Controls shading for an individual polygon Shading is enabled for the viewport if it has a Light object added to it The attribute may have the following values GLG_NO_SHADING disables polygon shading GLG_FILL_SHADING enables shading of the polygon fill only default GLG FILL EDGE SHADING enables shading of both the polygon s fill and edges AntiAliasing Controls antialiasing of the polygon s edges and may have the following values GLG_ANTL_ALIASING_ INHERIT Inherit antialiasing settings from the global setting which is GLG_ANTI ALIASING INT by default The default can be changed globally by using the GlgAntiAliasi
588. tes section on page 143 for details When a box attributes object is added to all text objects in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added box attribute objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used Rendering A slot for attaching an optional Rendering object to control an expanded set of rendering attributes such as gradient fill cast shadows fill level and arrowheads The rendering object is accessible by using the Add Edit Rendering buttons in the Object Properties dialog To delete the rendering object use the Delete Rendering button in the Rendering Object properties The attribute assumes the value of NULL if no rendering object is attached See the Rendering section on page 140 for details When a rendering object is added to all objects in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added rendering objects the attributes are constrained if the default Constrained Clone setting is used 78 Marker GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Note that a text object s behavior under various graphical transformations is limited by the availability of suitable fonts For reasons of efficiency GLG text objects contain text displayed in un transformed fonts taken from the viewpor
589. tes the object from the group if the object is a part of the group The option may be used with both temporary and permanent groups Use the following procedure 1 Select the group Select Arrange Add or Delete Object from Group Click on the first object to add or delete from the group Click on the next object to add or delete from the group When you have removed the objects from the group use the Esc key or the right mouse button to complete the operation The status bar at the bottom of the Builder window provides prompts to guide you through the procedure For temporary groups the same action can be accomplished by Ctr clicking on the object with the mouse Select Next Select Next is equivalent to Select Next on page 315 Select Bottom Select Bottom is equivalent to Select Bottom on page 315 Edit All First Same as the corresponding option of the Traverse menu EditAll Select Same as the corresponding option of the Traverse menu Permanent Group Permanent Group toggles the type of the selected group object between temporary and permanent The current group type is displayed as the state of this toggle button 320 Explode Object GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Explode submenu provides options to let you separate the objects in a composite object such as a group or series so that they become independent objects The effect of Explode depends on what kind of object is selecte
590. the MouseClick events the viewport s ProcessMouse attribute has to include the Click mask An action s ProcessArmed attribute may be used to activate the action only when the Control key is held down In the Builder the Run mode may be used to prototype the MouseClick feedback and toggle behavior At run time they will be handled automatically with no actions required in the program An old style prior to v 3 5 mouse click feedback and toggle functionality implemented by naming an object s resource MouseClickState or MouseClickToggle is also supported for backward compatibility The value of the object s MouseClickState resource is set to 1 when the object is clicked on with the mouse and to 0 when the mouse button is released The value of the MouseClickToggle resource is alternated between 0 and 1 every time the object is clicked on The MouseClickState and MouseClickToggle resources must be visible at the proper place in the object hierarchy If an object has HasResources set to YES the MouseOverState resource will appear as a resource of the object and the object will move every time its is clicked on with the mouse If the object is part of a group and the groups HasResources is set to YES but the object s HasResources is set to NO the MouseClickState resource will appear as a resource of the group and the object will move every time the mouse clicks on any object in the group Integrated Events Object Selection Events Lo
591. the axes of the frame The Builder prompts you for the factor which controls the number of anchor points on each dimension of the frame e Free Frame allows anchoring of points to a free form polygon Click on each point in the poly gon and click the right mouse button to finish drawing Because the control points of the frame coincide with the anchor points use Options Show Frame Points to get access to the anchor points of the frame You can move the anchor points of the frame by moving its control points Edit Toolbox This option activates the Edit Toolbox for fast access to the selected objects properties Refer to the Edit Toolbox chapter on page 229 for more information GLG Graphics Builder Menus 339 Properties Properties displays a dialog that lists the attributes of the selected object and provides access to their transformations alarms and tags Note that within the context of the GLG Toolkit properties and attributes are synonymous The generic properties common for all GLG objects such as object name or HasResources are displayed at the top of the dialog and the properties that depend on the type of an object are listed below For explanations of the generic object properties and attributes of specific object types see the GLG Objects chapter The buttons at the bottom of the dialog provide access to adding and editing geometrical dynamics attached to the object such as move scale or rotate The Custom Props
592. the characteristics of the instances The instances are created dynamically from the template The number and positioning of the instances depends on the object type To create a series square series or reference object you first create and select an object to act as the template When you create the instances the Builder moves the template and the instances into a new object You can get access to the template using the Traverse Hierarchy Down menu option The attributes of the template override any changes you make to an instance To customize the instances explode the series using Arrange Explode Object see page 320 Then edit the attributes of the members of the resulting group The Series Object A series presents a set of instances arranged along a line The number of instances is controlled by a factor and their positions are determined by distributing them along a line or path The instances are named using the template object name and an index for example a template named Rect with a factor of 3 creates three instances named Rect0 Rectl and Rect2 A Series object has four control points Two points control the location of the line along which the series instances are distributed A third point controls the position of the first instance s origin it is constrained to one of the path points A fourth point is visible only if you use Traverse Hierarchy Down to see the series template this point provides an alternative way t
593. the conversion is non reversible and UTF8Encoding flag is restored to its original state Shift click on the UTF8 toggle to proceed with a non reversible conversion that results in a loss of information If the string contains invalid multi byte characters for the system locale the conversion fails and the flag is restored to its original value as well Ctrl click on the UTF8 toggle may be used to change the flag without converting the string this may result in an invalid character string and should be used only to fix UTF8 encoded strings in old drawings which did not have the UTF8Encoding flag When setting values of string resources at run time it is an application s responsibility to set the UTF8Encoding flag to a state matching the encoding of the string passed to the G gSetSResource method Setting the value of the flag at run time using the G gSetDResource method does not re encode the string 136 Attribute GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Note that unlike most GLG objects attributes the Value of the data object is not stored as an object This avoids the infinite regression that might exist if an object s attribute was represented as a data object whose data value was represented as another data object whose data value was represented by still another data object and so on The same is true for the Name and the flags Global HasResources etc Data objects may be used programmatically for attaching custom properties t
594. the drawing and drag the cursor to display a box Any objects within or touching the box will be placed into the new group Use this to group the handle polygon and the new polygon for the base Display the Selected Object Properties dialog for the group name it valvel and set its HasResources flag to YES Set the valvel group s MoveMode to STICKY MODE This setting is important when the object is moved by dragging it with the mouse When the valve group s MoveMode is set to MOVE POINTS moving the group moves all objects in the group by changing coordinates of their points but it does not move the center point of the rotation transformation together with the rest of the objects This means that after the valve is moved it will still rotate around the original point in the drawing If MoveMode is set to STICKY MODE the center of rotation will move with the object and the handle will rotate around the same position relatively to the valve Create a copy of the valvel group You can use Edit Cut and Edit Paste or just Edit Full Clone Move the copy somewhere that doesn t obscure the original 278 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference 10 Use the Selected Object Properties dialog to rename the new group valve2 Animate the valve use Run Start with the command Sdatagen sin d 0 90 SWidget valvel handle rotate angle Stop the animation and try it again with Sdatagen sin d 0 90 Widget valve2 handle rotate angl
595. the elements of the chart If set to YES all plots and level lines in the chart as well as the first Y axis share the same Low High range If set to NO each plot and level line may have a different set of High Low ranges Auto Scroll scrolling charts only Controls the automatic scrolling mode If set to YES every time a new sample is pushed into the chart the chart will automatically scroll to accommodate the new sample at the end of the chart If set to NO the chart can be scrolled as needed by changing EndValue of its X axis Draw Grid Enables or disables the X and Y grid lines Possible values are NONE X Y and XY Edit Plots A button in the Properties dialog for editing the chart s plots It activates the Plot List dialog as well as the Properties dialog for the selected plot A plot s Opacity attribute can be set to lor 0 to turn individual plots on or off without losing accumulated samples The Plot List dialog has buttons for adding deleting and reordering plots in the list When plots are reordered plots with default names such as Plot 0 PlotHI etc are assigned new default names that match their new position in the list A persistent custom name can be assigned to each plot Edit X Axis A button in the Properties dialog for editing properties of the chart s X axis The AxisType attribute of the X axis determines the scrolling behavior of the chart setting it to RANGE changes the chart type from a scrolling c
596. the following order attempting to load the file relative to the directory of the drawing trying to locate the file in one of the directories defined by the GLG_PATH environment variable or the G gSearchPath global configuration resource attempting to load the file relative to the current directory as the last resort 80 GIS Object GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference A List transformation may be attached to the JmageFile attribute to specify a list of image files for implementing image dynamics Cross Platform Use Note For cross platform Java and web based deployment use as a path delimiter even on Windows On Windows the Builder converts to V automatically when necessary Anchor Defines the vertical and horizontal alignments of the fixed size image relative to its control point The choices are CENTER LEFT or RIGHT for horizontal alignment and CENTER TOP or BOTTOM for the vertical The corresponding defined constants are GLG_HCENTER GLG_HLEFT GLG_HRIGHT and GLG_VCENTER GLG_VTOP GLG_VBOTTOM The two choices are combined logical OR to define the resource value The attribute has no effect for scalable images TransparentColor Defines the image color to be rendered as transparent This may be used for rendering icons with transparent background The color RGB values are specified using the default 0 1 range or using 0 255 range if the 255 Color Display option is activated All image pixels
597. the group by selecting the group and using Arrange Explode Object See the Associating Objects Together chapter on page 266 for information on how to perform an action on objects in a group Editing Objects Creating an object adds a graphical object to the drawing and another branch to the object hierarchy The object is created with default attributes that control its appearance The Builder lets you change the object You can e To change its appearance edit its attributes e To change its size move its box points e To change its geometry move or edit its control points To flip the object click on one of the Flip Object icons in the Control Panel on the left of the Drawing Area e To rotate the object move its rotate point e To scale or rotate the object by a precise amount click on the Transform Object icon in the Control Panel on the left of the Drawing Area then select a desired transformation type and define its parameters e Constrain the object or any of its attributes to another object or attribute see page 235 Define and attach dynamic transformations to the object or to its attributes see page 238 e For gradient fill cast shadows arrowheads and fill dynamics attach Rendering to the selected object see page 271 Attach Box Attributes to the selected text object see page 271 Attach Custom Properties Aliases and History objects to the selected object see page 273 page 274 and page 272
598. the map display Then enter the dataset file which tells the Map Server what GIS data to render The GIS Object provides attributes to control the projection center and extent of the map as well as the layers to be displayed on the map To set the GIS Zoom Mode select the GIS Object and use the Arrange GIS Zoom Mode Set as parent viewport s GIS Object menu option In the GIS Zoom Mode the zoom and pan controls of the Builder zoom and scroll the map displayed in the GIS Object instead of zooming and scrolling the drawing Refer to the Integrated Zooming and Panning chapter on page 45 and the Integrated GIS Object GIS Rendering and GIS Editing Mode chapter on page 46 for more information Adding Custom Properties to Objects Custom Data Properties may be used to associate application specific information with an object This information is persistent and may be saved with the drawing or accessed using the resource access functions The available data types of custom properties D S and G match the data types of object attributes and may be used to keep information in the form of numerical values or strings To add custom data properties to an object e Select an object to which you want to attach the custom data properties to e Select Object Add Custom Property and select a D S or G property type e The Builder adds a custom property displays a Custom Properties List and a dialog for editing the property Enter the property name and
599. the rest of this chapter NOTE All attributes of GLG objects are stored as S string G geometrical or D double precision scalar value data values Where an attribute is described below as having a limited number of values it is actually stored as a scalar D value often as the index into an array of possible values Common Attributes All GLG objects share a basic structure That is they are all sub classes of the basic object class This means that most objects share a few basic attribute types Most of the common attributes are displayed in the separate area at the top of the respective property dialogs in the Graphics Builder Some of the most commonly encountered types are described in the list below Common Attributes Name An object s name is its entry in the resource hierarchy An object need not have a name HasResources Controls where in the resource hierarchy the names of an object s children appear For more information about this flag and the subject of resource transparency see the Hierarchy of Resources section in Structure of a GLG Drawing Xform A slot for attaching an optional transformation object A Concatenate transformation type may be used to attach a list of several transformations The list is accessed by using the Edit Dynamics buttons in the Builder The Xform attribute assumes the value of NULL if no transformation is attached Common Attributes of Graphical Objects Visibility The Visibility
600. the type of input activity that triggers the action Input object actions are always processed and do not require any settings of the viewport s ProcessMouse attribute Custom Fonts and Font Tables GLG applications have multiple options for customizing fonts used to render text objects in GLG drawings A list of fonts used by the drawing is defined in a GLG FontTable a font table can be customized to provide custom fonts Ifa custom font table is not provided GLG drawings use a default font table A custom font table can be specified in one of the following ways e A custom font table for a GLG drawing can be defined and stored in the drawing using More Add Font Table in the viewport s Properties dialog e Multiple drawings can share a custom font table stored in an external file using the viewport s FonttableFile attribute e A custom font table stored in a file can be set as a global default using the GleDefaultFontTableFile global configuration resource All drawings that use the default font table will inherit this global default Refer to the description of the FontTable object on page 147 for more information Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing 55 Internationalization and Localization Support Cross Platform I18N Support There are several features of the GLG Toolkit that support deployment of the GLG drawings in different language locales There are two options for supporting different system locales e The text st
601. these two attributes The Factor attribute is usually used as a normalized value while the Angle is usually the maximum angle in degrees You can animate the transformation with either 10 11 Using the GLG Graphics Builder 277 attribute Note that if you press the button next to the Factor attribute name you can see a dialog that says that this attribute is named rotate_factor the name you typed in the previous step Use Traverse Up to go to the top level of the drawing and open the resource browser You can see that rotate_factor is now a resource of the handle object which is a resource of the Widget viewport Select Run Start and at the run prompt issue the command datagen sin d 0 1 Widget handle rotate factor Stop the animation select the viewport Traverse Hierarchy Down select the polygon bring up the Selected Object Properties dialog and press Edit Dynamics Set Factor to 1 Press the button next to the Angle attribute and give it the name rotate_angle Select Run Start and at the run prompt issue the command Sdatagen sin d 0 90 SWidget handle rotate angle Notice that the data range is from 0 to 90 now Creating Copies and Animating Them Now we will add a base to the valve handle and reproduce it so we have two valves 1 Stop the animation select the viewport Traverse Hierarchy Down and draw another polygon to represent the base of a valve Select Arrange Group Click in
602. this special case see page 333 Multiple Selection To select more than one object click and drag the mouse in the drawing to define a rectangular area all objects that intersect this area will be selected A temporary group is created to hold all selected objects the group will be discarded when the objects are unselected The temporary group is named STempGroup and this name is displayed in the Status Panel when temporary group is created 228 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference To add or delete objects from the selection Ctr click on the objects with the left mouse button For example you could select multiple objects by Ctr clicking on them with the mouse Ctrl clicking on an object which is already selected deletes 1t from the selection The Edit menu provides more selection options Select All Select Multiple Objects and Select Rectangular Area which may be used when the drawing has no empty space making it impossible to define the selection rectangle with the mouse without selecting an object The Arrange Permanent Group option changes the group type from temporary to permanent and back The Arrange menu also provides explicit options for creating both temporary and permanent groups as well as selecting multiple objects A permanent group can also be created by using Object Create Group and drawing a rectangle that touches or encloses all the objects you want to include in the group Release the objects from
603. tiByteFlag attribute will be set to an appropriate value automatically The fonts defined in the file will override the fonts defined in the default font table The GlgDefaultPSFontFile global configuration resource may be used to specify the location of the file that contains the list of the PostScript fonts for the default font table This method is inferior compared to the use of the GlgDefaultFontTableFile resource and is provided for compatibility with previous releases ADVANCED the GlgDefaultFontTable global configuration resource can be used in a program to set the global font table default to an object ID of a loaded or created font table Editing a Font Table A font table can be edited by changing the number of font types and font sizes and editing the fonts defined in the font table The dialog for editing fonts presents two lists the list on the left displays font families and the list on the right displays font sizes of the selected font family The font Properties dialog on the far right displays properties of the selected font A font browser for 148 Font GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference selecting a font can be started by clicking on the ellipsis button for the font name attribute WinFontName on Windows and XFontName on X Windows Refer to the Font section below for more information It is the user s responsibility when editing fonts in a table to arrange them in such a way that all fonts in a font family h
604. tion The object must also define an S type resource named XformLabel which defines a custom transformation type shown in the Edit Dynamics dialog The XformLabel resource is usually defined as a custom object property accessible via the Data button in the status panel Some transformation such as Flow in the LineTypeXform group may have InitFromObject custom property attached to the object Setting the value of InitFromObject to 0 ensures that the transformation is not modified when it is attached to an object By default the first element of a list transformation is initialized to the value of the attribute the list transformation is attached to This preserves the color of the object when a list transformation is attached to its color attributes or preserves the text string when a list is attached to the TextString attribute For some transformations such as Flow such initialization would interfere with the transformation s logic and setting InitFromObject to 0 prevents the transformation from being modified when it is attached to an attribute The XformObject transformation uses export tags to define public properties visible in the Edit Dynamics dialog Export tags are attached to the attributes of the transformation that need to be visible to the user The export tag s TagName defines the property name that will be shown in the Edit Dynamics dialog The export tag s Tag Type must be set to EXPORT DYN to export the attribute as a public pr
605. tion Some advanced editing operations such as exploding constraining and some others cannot be undone Undo History Undo History displays a list of recent editing actions and allows selecting individual actions to undo or redo Some geometry editing actions require the drawing s viewing state pan and zoom to be unchanged in order to be reverted properly The changes to the drawing s viewing state are listed in the Undo History list and can be undone as well 306 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Select Multiple Objects Select Multiple Objects is equivalent to using Ctrl click It starts multiple object selection without the need to hold the Ctrl key After the option is selected click on the objects in the drawing to add or delete them from the selection Select Rectangular Area Select Rectangular Area is equivalent to clicking and dragging the mouse in the drawing to define the selection rectangle It provides a convenient option for starting a rectangular selection for cases when all drawing area is covered with objects and there is no free space to click and drag the mouse without selecting some object After the option is selected click and drag the mouse anywhere in the drawing area to define the selection rectangle All objects that are either completely or partially enclosed by the rectangle will be selected Select Object Inside Group Select All Cut Copy Select Object Inside Group is used to select an
606. tipFormat attribute is then used to format the tooltip If the value of TooltipFormat is not set the following value is used as a default lt axis_string s gt axis value lt axis_value_string s gt 132 Legend GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference AxisLabel Offset Specifies additional X and Y offsets for the axis label The Z offset is ignored AxisLabel Position Specifies the anchoring of the axis label s control point relatively to the axis s bounding box AxisLabel Anchor Specifies the anchoring of the axis label s string relatively to the label s control point Edit Axis Label A button in the Properties dialog to access a text object that defines attributes of the axis label The Legend object provides information that helps identify data displayed in a chart For each plot the legend displays a label and a line that shows an example of the plot appearance A label displays a string specified by the plot s Annotation attribute if an annotation is not supplied the plot name is used While the legend is tightly coupled with its chart it is implemented as a separate object to allow developers to control its location and layout A legend is attached to a chart by selecting it marking it with the Arrange Legend Mark Legend menu option then selecting a chart and using the Arrange Legend Set Chart Legend menu option The Arrange Legend Reset Chart Legend menu option can be used to disconnect the legend from the
607. tomizing layout Builder 362 HMI 362 366 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference D Data 164 165 data generation utility 256 Data object 67 137 data object 134 data supply 28 data tag 137 Data Type 134 Data Value 134 database connectivity 31 60 Decrease 197 201 205 Decrease message 198 199 201 206 DecreaseKeys 197 201 206 default attribute name 26 default attribute names 30 default font table overriding fonts 147 default resource name 248 default resource names 247 248 default resources 247 342 Deleteltem message 207 209 deleting aliases 352 custom properties 351 group object 320 history object 354 object 307 transformation 345 Deleting box attributes 143 Deleting rendering 143 depth buffer 89 depth sorting 98 DepthSort 89 98 100 102 111 DIAMOND marker type 78 DIRECT 139 Direction 76 152 Direction of a connector 99 directory palette 304 Disable Dynamics For Editing 357 Disabled action 175 DisableInput 89 DisableMotion 196 200 Disarm action 175 Discrete 155 Distance 152 dithering 146 divide transformation 161 DON T ROTATE path rotate type 154 DOT marker type 78 double buffering 93 Down 197 Down message 198 DownLeft message 198 DownRight message 198 DrawCrossHair 118 DrawGrid 114 drawing creating 224 296 customizing 356 printing 299 saving 224 298 357 drawing coordinate system 41 DrawLines 110 DrawMarkers 1
608. tribute has no effect attributes are not constrained EnableCache may be set to NO to increase performance for SubWindows that are used to switch drawings since only one copy of the drawing is loaded into the Sub Window it is more efficient to load it directly instead of loading it in the cache and then copying it to create a local copy of the template EnableCache has no effect for subdrawings and subwindows that use included or palette template KeepEditRatio If set to YES preserves the X Y ratio of the template drawing while editing its content in the Builder by going down into it using the Hierarchy Down button If set to NO the template drawing may appear stretched Bindings A slot for attaching an optional array of rebound attributes bindings which enable the user to define local settings for instances of subdrawings and subwindows Resource settings of bound attributes are persistent and are saved with the drawing which allows the user to customize each instance by assigning unique resource settings in the GLG Builder For example bindings may be used to assign unique data tags to individual subdrawing instances to animate them with data from different sources SubDrawing and Sub Window objects instantiate a copy of their template which means that all instances of a SubDrawings or SubWindow with the same template will use the same initial attribute values taken from the template For example ifa subdrawing represents a tank
609. tribute of an object to a control point or to the entire drawing Ifa composite object such as a group has a static or dynamic transformation added to it the transformation transforms all objects inside the group In other words an object in a drawing inherits the combined effect of all transformations attached to it or its parents Adding Geometrical Dynamics and Transforming an Object You can define a geometrical transformation by using a dialog to set the parameters of the transformation When you transform an object you can use one of three methods Transform object points to make a permanent change to the object s definition Add a static transformation to make a one time reversible change to the object s geometry The transformation may be later deleted to restore the object s original appearance Add a dynamic transformation to control an object s geometry or position using dynamic parameters which may be animated with input data 240 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Transforming Objects Points To transform the points of an object making a permanent change to their coordinates 1 Select the object and use Object Transform Points Alternatively click on the Transform Object Points toolbar icon or Transform Object button in the Control Panel The Transform Points dialog appears Select the transformation type using the Transformation Type option The content of the Transform Points dialog changes
610. tribute of the object or any of the transformations attached to it For example State may be constrained to the Factor attribute of a move transformation attached to the object When the object is clicked on with the mouse the value of the transformation s Factor will be set to 1 and the object will move showing visual feedback When the mouse button is released the Factor will be reset to 0 and the object will move back To toggle the object s state on a mouse click an action with ActionType TOGGLE_STATE and Trigger MOUSE_CLICK may be used The action will toggle the value of its State attribute every time the object is clicked with the mouse If the State is constrained to the Visibility of an object in the drawing the object s visibility will alternate every time it is pressed with the mouse It is easy to imagine many various ways to implement a custom toggle object using this functionality Integrated Features of the GLG Drawing 51 The SET STATE and RESET STATE values of the action s ActionType attribute may be used to set the value of the action s State attribute to 1 or reset it to 0 For example two objects in a drawing may be used to start or stop animation attaching an action with ActionType SET_ STATE to one object and an action with ActionType SET STATE to another object The State attribute of both actions may be constrained to the Enabled attribute of a timer that drives animation in the drawing To enable processing of
611. trolled by the Builder s Attribute Clone Type option BoxAttributes The Box Attributes object is used to keep attributes of an optional box drawn around text object The box is drawn only if the Box Attributes object is attached to a text object The size of the box is determined by the text object and is expanded automatically to fit the text s string The box attributes object inherits most polygon attributes like FillColor EdgeColor and FillType and has the following additional attributes BoxOffset Pixel offset between the text and the box s edge Only the X and Y coordinates of the G type offset value are used defining the pixel offset in the corresponding direction BoxEdgeColor Box s edge color a more specific name for accessing box s edge color BoxFillColor Box s fill color a more specific name for accessing box s fill color Delete Box Attributes This button is present only in the Builder it deletes the Box Attributes object A Box Attributes object may be reused by marking it with the Mark button at the top of the Properties dialog Use the Edit Add or Use Marked Object Text Box menu option to add the marked box attributes to another text object When a Box Attributes object is added to all text objects in a group using the group s Edit All option the Attribute Clone Type option of the Builder controls constraining of corresponding attributes of the added box attribute objects the attributes are constraine
612. ts the viewport backing rectangle has the following attributes FillColor Defines a background color of the viewport EdgeColor Defines a border color for the viewport rectangle LineWidth Defines the viewport rectangle s border width ShadowWidth Defines the width of shadows If the value differs from 0 the shadow bevels are drawn around the borders of the viewport The sign of the ShadowWidth controls the type of the bevels raised shadows for positive values and depressed shadows for negative values This attribute is inherited from the viewport s screen object described below Pan The Pan attribute controls integrated scrolling If panning is activated the viewport displays scrollbars and handles scrolling when the drawing extends beyond the viewport s visible area In the GIS Zoom Mode the scrollbars control scrolling of the map displayed in the viewport s GIS Object and in the Chart Zoom Mode they control chart scrolling Possible values are NONE Disables pan scrollbars PAN X PAN Y PAN XY Enables either X or Y scrollbar or both X and Y scrollbars AUTO PAN X AUTO PAN Y AUTO PAN XY Automatically enables either X or Y scrollbar or both X and Y scrollbars The scrollbars will automatically appear only when the content of the viewport or content of the chart in the Chart Zoom Mode extends outside of the visible area and may need to be scrolled PAN X amp AUTO PAN Y PAN Y amp AUTO PAN X Enables a per
613. ttes and menus To apply a new attribute value entered in the text entry box press either the Enter key or Apply button This picture shows the Edit Toolbox with a color palette for editing TextColor attribute ABC 2 GM co E mw YAP ABC ABC ABC mA TextColor 000 The buttons in the toolbox have tooltips that show names of attributes associated with buttons icons Only the attribute buttons that are applicable to the currently selected object or group of objects are highlighted and active 230 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Properties Dialog The properties dialog provides access to the object attributes for more specific editing In addition to changing attribute values it also enables assigning resource names to attribute objects editing constraints and attaching attribute transformations To edit an attribute of a graphical object 1 Select the object 2 Use Object Properties or click on the Properties button on the toolbar to show the Selected Object Properties dialog This dialog shows a list of attributes with the current values The list of attributes differs according to the object type This example shows the properties of an unnamed parallelogram Hame 1 1 P Type PARALLELOGRAM a 4 HasResources STICKY MODE INHERIT Visibility m oN Custon Props FillColor 0 547707 0 774594 0 774594 EdgeColor t2 io o o LineWidth ME LineType o Fi lIType 0
614. tures described in the Tag Export and Import Features for Run Time Tag Mapping chapter on page 61 may be used for modifying all tags defined in the drawing The tag import file may be used for run time mapping of all tags defined in the drawing to a specific database by using the GlglmportTags API method The GlgCreateTagList API method may be used in an application to query all tags defined in the drawing as shown in the Tags Example source code Constraints After you have made both the polygons in the diagram on page 28 resource transparent the colors of the faces are still accessed individually True we can now refer to the colors as attributes of the GRP object but there are still two different polygons with two different colors Worse if the names have not been chosen well there may exist name conflicts where two different attributes have the same name Our goal is to create a complex object with a single color attribute which may be accessed as a single resource so the natural next step is to constrain the fill colors of the two polygons to be the same This way whenever the color of one is changed the other one automatically changes as well A constraint on some object s attribute is simply a requirement that the value of that attribute is always the same as the attribute of the other object We now have a group object called GRP that contains a single resource controlling the color of the entire complex object You can now rena
615. type to use when multiple copies of an attribute object are added For example when a Rendering object is added to all objects in a group using the group s Edit All option with the default Constrained Clone setting of the clone type all attributes of rendering objects attached to objects in the group will be constrained If a rendering attribute of one object is changed all objects will change If the clone type is set to Full Clone each object will have its own unconstrained copy of the rendering attributes If the clone type is changed to Strong Clone all attributes that are Global or SemiGlobal will be constrained to the corresponding attributes of the original Rendering object Attribute Clone Type controls adding Rendering Box Attributes Light Font Table and Color Table objects to all objects in a group using the Edit All option It also controls constraining of attributes of an attribute transformation when the attribute the transformation is attached to is unconstrained If the clone type is set to Constrained Clone the attribute itself will be unconstrained but the attributes of the transformation attached to it will still be constrained The Attribute Clone Type also controls constraints of the transformations added to an object s control points when the object s transformation is exploded using the Add Copy To Points option Refer to the GlgCloneObject method on page 137 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual for more details on
616. uage cross platform API for writing applications that produce 2D and 3D computer graphics OpenGL is often used by 3D games and advanced graphical applications as an interface to the hardware accelerated graphics provided by modern graphics cards The OpenGL renderer is available for the GLG C C applications on both Unix Linux and Windows On Windows it is also available for the GLG ActiveX Control Both the Graphics Builder and the GLG C C ActiveX applications have a choice between the OpenGL renderer or a native windowing system GDI renderer where GDI stands for Graphical Device Interface Introduction to GLG 19 The OpenGL renderer uses hardware acceleration and enables such rendering features as antialiasing true transparency and alpha blending native linear color gradients and hidden surface removal The native windowing system renderer may be used as an alternative in cases when an application needs a greater consistency for rendering individual pixels regardless of the installed graphics cards It may also be used as a fallback if the OpenGL renderer is not available The OpenGL renderer is used by the Toolkit in a transparent way and the user does not need to know the low level details of OpenGL graphics in order to benefit from the OpenGL s hardware acceleration and an extended set of rendering features The same application executable may switch between using the OpenGL or native windowing renderer at run time without any chang
617. ull Clone creates a copy of the selected object The copy has all the characteristics of the original object including transformations attributes resources and internal constraints between its attributes The Full Clone removes any attribute constraints to external objects The copy is created in the position specified by the current clone offset setting If you specified a transformation using Edit Define Clone Transformation it 1s applied before the clone is drawn Weak Clone Weak Clone creates a copy of the selected object preserving any internal constraints between the object s attributes The Weak Clone also handles global attributes The attributes of the object whose Global flag is set to GLOBAL are considered to be global attributes and the corresponding attributes of the copy are constrained to the attributes of the original object The copy is created in the position specified by the current clone offset setting If you specified a transformation using Edit Define Clone Transformation it 1s applied before the clone is drawn Strong Clone Strong Clone creates a copy of the selected object It also handles global attributes but unlike the weak clone any attribute whose Global attribute is set to either GLOBAL or SEMI GLOBAL is considered to be a global and the corresponding attributes of the clone are constrained to the attributes of the original object The copy is created in the position specified by the current clone off
618. urces such as a process database or PLC controller Refer to the Tag Based Data Access and Database Connectivity chapter on page 60 for details of using tag objects for data access Using Output Tags and Disabled Tags in a Program The SetTag and GetTag methods of the GLG API skip tags that have TagEnabled FALSE generating an error ifno enabled tags with the requested TagSource were found in the drawing The SetTag method also generates an error if the only found tag with the requested TagSource is an OUTPUT tag When the QueryTags and GetTagObject methods are used in a single tag or unique tags modes they return the best available tag s enabled INPUT and INIT tags have priority over the disabled and OUTPUT tags History GLG Objects 139 The history object is used to control the scrolling behavior of numbered resources This is most useful for controlling series behavior in graphs but is general enough to be useful in a variety of situations The history object uses an input resource name mask a scroll type and an entry point The scroll type determines the precise behavior of the object Using the WRAPPED scroll type each time the entry point attribute is changed its value is written to the next resource that matches the input mask The mask uses a percent symbol as a wildcard character Suppose the input mask is GraphBar Height The first time the entry point is changed the change is written to the resource GraphBar0 Height
619. urces flag to control the organization of objects in the resource hierarchy For example consider a group object named Group with the members Circle Triangle and Rectangle If the group object s HasResources flag is set to NO the hierarchy is flat and the Resource Browser dialog shows all four objects at the same level Selection Filter F Haned F Default F Aliases Circle gt gt EdgeColor FillColor Group gt gt Line Width MMa xisicon gt gt Rectangle gt gt Triangle gt gt Visibility XvYRatio ZoomF actor Setting the group object s HasResources flag to YES defines an additional level of a hierarchy and makes the three objects into child objects of the group The Resource Browser dialog shows Group as having child objects Below the picture on the left shows resources of the group while the picture on the right shows resources of the Drawing Area Selection Filter F Haned F Default F Aliases i Circle gt gt Rectangle gt gt Triangle gt gt Visibility Selection y Filter i F Naned F Default F Aliases EdgeColor FillColor Group gt gt LineWidth MMa xisicon gt gt Visibility XYRatio ZoomF actor Close Select Clear Close Select Clear 250 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Setting the HasResources flag also changes the path for locating an object In this example setting the group object s HasResources
620. urns green Using the GLG Graphics Builder 235 The first two buttons in the lower row of the area are highlighted with red color as well and can be used to switch between two layout modes the control points and bounding box mode In the control points mode the object s control points are aligned In the bounding box mode the bounding box of objects is used for alignment The difference can easily be seen by trying to align text objects with just one control point but different text extents There are situations though where either one or the other alignment mode may be useful When an object is selected the bottom panel of the Layout Toolbox may be used to display its width or height in either the world or screen coordinates by clicking on the Set Width or Set Height buttons in the bottom panel When an anchor is selected clicking on the buttons displays the width and height of the selected anchor object For example selecting a group object with the Set Width button active will display the width of the whole group Clicking on the Set Anchor Object button and selecting an object inside the group as an anchor will display the width of the anchor The bottom panel of the toolbox contain a row of icons for operations that need a numerical parameter For example setting the width of an object requires the width parameter These operations may be applied to a single object or to a group of objects When a group is selected the Group Editing Mo
621. used to generate extended information from the OpenGL driver The output is logged into the g g_error log file in the GLG installation directory and is also printed in the command window on Unix Linux OpenGL Libraries The hardware renderer on Unix Linux systems uses the ibGL and ibGLU libraries These libraries are usually provided by the graphics card vendor On Linux the ibGL library from the libgl1 mesa glx package provides support for hardware acceleration The ibGL library from the libgl1 mesa swx11 package supports only the software renderer For the low priority software renderer on Unix Linux GLG uses the ibOSMesa library provided by the libosmesa6 package on Linux as well as the ibGLU library which provides some utility functions On Linux the GLG editor uses the ibOSMesa library provided by the GLG installation in the g g lib directory for the software renderer If the ibGLU library is not provided by the hardware renderer the editor also uses the libtess_util library from the g g lib directory instead of the ibGLU library Ifa GLG application wants to use ibOSMesa library from the g g lib directory for the software renderer it should include g g lib in LDD_LOAD_ PATH or copy the libraries to a place where they will be found by the linker An application can also set the GlgOpenGLMesaLibPath environment variable to point to the ibOSMesa library to be used In this case the ibtess_util library will be searched in the dire
622. ustom Event Message Object section on page 360 of the GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference for more information The message object of the SEND_EVENT action is the same as the CustomEvent message used in the previous releases of the Toolkit prior to v 3 5 with the only difference of the new ActionObject parameter Command Message This message has Format Command and is generated by the SEND_COMMAND actions A different value of the Format parameter allows to easily differentiate between custom event and command messages The EventLabel resource of the message object contains EventLabel of the action object and the ActionObject resource contains the action that generated the message The command message is processed in the application code by using command type and other command data contained in the command object The command object can be accessed as a Command resource of the action object and may be accessed directly from the message object of the input callback via the ActionObject Command resource The command object contains the command s data such as CommandType and other resources depending on command type These resources may be accessed as resources of the command object or directly from the message object For example to query a command type directly from the message object the following resource may be used ActionObject Command CommandType GLG Objects 189 The rest of the command data can be accessed via their corres
623. ustom event to be triggered when the object is selected with either MouseClick and MouseOver and contains any command data needed to execute the command The use of integrated actions attached to objects at design time simplifies the application code that handles object selection at run time Instead of processing a list of selected objects and relying on hard coded object names for determining the type of action to be performed the application code receives and processes an action message containing detailed action data Integrated actions make it possible to process commands associated with the selected object in a generic fashion and handle arbitrary drawings created by the user For example one object may issue a GoTo command when it is selected with the mouse while another object may issue a PopupDialog command Both mouse click and mouse over selections are supported depending on the setting of the action s Trigger attribute MOUSE CLICK or MOUSE OVER An action s ProcessArmed attribute may be used to activate the action only when the Control key is held down To enable processing of custom mouse events the viewport s ProcessMouse attribute has to include a combination of Click and Move masks depending on the desired selection type At run time the custom object selection message is processed in an application s Input callback which executes the action defined by the command or custom event using the data contained in the action
624. ustom transformations may be used by the system integrators to extend GLG editors with elaborate application specific dynamics The Export Property feature of the OEM version of the Graphics Builder is used to define custom transformations The dynamics are attached to the object attributes and edited the same way as any other dynamic transformation Predefined dynamics available in the Builder are listed below The Color List dynamics use an integer index to select a color from a list It works the same way as the List transformation and differs only in the way it lists 1ts properties It has the following properties ColorN Colors to be used where N is a zero based color index ColorIndex The zero based index controlling which color to use Color Threshold The Color Threshold dynamics compare an input scalar value with the list of thresholds and selects a corresponding color from a list of colors It works the same way as the Threshold transformation and differs only in the way it lists its properties It has the following properties GLG Objects 169 ColorN Colors to be used where N is a zero based color index ThresholdN Thresholds to be used where N is a zero based threshold index Threshold values must be specified in the increasing order InputValue This value is compared with the thresholds and controls which color to use The color corresponding to the first threshold smaller than the input value is used Color Blinking
625. ute to NO and click on the ellipsis button for Fonts to see the attributes of the Fonttable object In the Selected Object Properties dialog for the Fonttable object use the buttons to set the attributes for the Fonttable object This object refers to a font table which is an array of data that includes the font specification and available sizes To see the fonts in the selected font table click on the ellipsis button for the Fonts attribute and edit Font objects in the font table Each font object allows defining fonts for both Windows Unix and Java run time environments as well as for PostScript printing A GIS Object provides a way to embed GIS maps generated with the GLG Map Server into GLG drawings It automatically handles all aspects of the low level interaction with the Map Server to display zoom and pan GIS map data The GIS Object h provides attributes to control projection center and extent of the map To create a GIS Object 1 3 Select Object Create GIS Object and choose rectangular or orthographic projection to create the GIS Object Click on two points to define a rectangular area to use for the map display When prompted select a dataset file that describes the GIS data to render The GIS Object will display the map specified by the dataset file The map may be positioned by changing the G SCenter and GISExtent attributes of the object The GIS Zoom mode of the drawing s Integrated Zoom feature may
626. utes object that defines the plot s rendering attributes such as EdgeColor and Line Width These line attributes are inherited by the plot object and are visible as resources of the plot in the resource browser Edit Marker A button in the Properties dialog to access a marker object that defines rendering attributes of the plot s markers The marker s Visibility attribute may be used as an entry point to switch visibility of individual markers on or off by supplying 0 or 1 Visibility values for 122 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference each data sample to annotate selected data samples with markers If the Visibility value is not supplied the current value of the attribute will be stored as the marker visibility of the data sample Array A resource of a plot that provides programmatic access to the list of data samples in the plot s history buffer This attribute is not visible in the Builder but can be used in a program via the GLG API The GlgRTChartMarkers coding example provides an example of using this resource to toggle marker visibility of the data sample selected with the mouse A data sample value pushed into one of the entry points for example a value entry point is buffered in order to wait for data to be supplied for other entry points such as time or valid entry points The buffered data sample is flushed and added to the plot when either the G gUpdate method is called or when data is repeatedly pushed into an entry p
627. utes of two copied objects are constrained to each other For example if a polygon has a global Fil Color attribute any copies made of it using a copy operation other than a Full Copy will have their FillColor attributes constrained to that of the original The G obal attribute has three possible values for controlling such attribute constraints GLOBAL LOCAL and SEMI GLOBAL The last value is used by specialized copy operations see for example GlgCloneObject method on page 137 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual The Global attribute also has two special values BOUND and NONE The BOUND value is used for rebinding attributes or reference objects subdrawings and subwindows refer to the Bindings section on page 108 for more information NONE is used for some special attributes to prevent them from ever being constrained refer to the GlgCloneObject method on page 137 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual for more details Though most of the objects described in this chapter use these attributes they are not separately described in the lists that follow The control points of objects are also omitted Objects may have either a fixed marker text etc or variable polygon number of control points For objects with a fixed number of points the points can be accessed using the Pointl Point2 PointN default attribute names For objects with a variable number of points the points can be accessed using functions which access a cont
628. values specify the number of instances to create When you create a square series object the Builder names the instances using the template object name and an index The names are ordered in a simple sequence even though there are two dimensions to the series For example a template named Rect with two rows and two columns creates four instances named Rect0 Rect1 Rect2 and Rect3 To edit the template object use Traverse Hierarchy Down When you finish editing use Traverse Up to see the instance objects A polyline is a specialized series that can be used to draw line graphs Like a series object a polyline consists of templates and a set of instances For the polyline the instances are the line and the markers at each point of the line A polyline can rendered as a single polygon or as a collection of individual segments depending on the value of the Segments attribute To create a polyline click on two points to define the beginning and end of the polyline The Builder prompts you for the factor which controls the number of data points along the line By default the polyline has Marker and Polygon resources that contain the template marker object and the template polygon from which the line segment characteristics are derived If the DrawMarkers and Segments attributes are turned on two groups Markers and Polygons appear among the resources of the polyline These contain the instances of the template objects In order to contr
629. w Level Object Selection Events Low level object selection events are processed automatically and do not require any setup in the drawing for individual objects The viewport s ProcessMouse attribute has to include a combination of the Click and Move masks to receive selection events on MouseClick and or MouseOver events At run time the program s Input callback will receive an object selection message containing the mouse action that triggered the selection The message will contain a list of all selected objects on the lowest level of the object hierarchy Refer to the GLG Programming Reference Manual for more details of the Input callback and custom event handling The Object Selection Message Object is described on page 366 of the GLG Programming Reference Manual The Select callback provides a simple name based alternative that supplies a list of names of all objects selected with the mouse click and does not depend on the settings of the ProcessMouse attribute 52 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Custom Object Selection Events and Commands A targeted per object selection event can be defined by attaching an action with ActionType SEND_EVENT or SEND_COMMAND to an object in the drawing using the Object Actions Add Custom Mouse Event or Object Actions Add Command menu options of the Enterprise Edition of the GLG Builder The HMI Configurator also allows users to add SEND COMMAND actions An action defines a command or a c
630. we will add a geometrical transformation and animate that Most valve handles turn so we will add a rotation transformation 1 If it is still going stop the animation with Run Stop Select the viewport select Traverse Hierarchy Down and select the handle polygon Open the Selected Object Properties dialog and press the Add Dynamics button in it or just click the Add Dynamics toolbar button This opens the Add Dynamics dialog In the transformation dialog click on the Transformation Type pulldown list and select Rotate The Rotation Axis pulldown list appears Select Z from that list to make the rotation happen in the plane of the drawing Press Center In Drawing and notice a prompt at the bottom of the screen Select a point around which the polygon will rotate A round red marker with a cross appears at that spot Set the Variable Name field to read rotate_ factor and press the Apply button at the bottom of the dialog This will attach the transformation and opens the Edit Dynamics dialog for editing its parameters The dialog may later be accessed by using the Edit Dynamics button of the Properties dialog or using the Edit Dynamics toolbar button The attributes of the rotation transformation are displayed in the dialog The center point around which the object is rotated is there as well as two other attributes Factor and Angle The angle circumscribed by a rotation transformation is given by the product of
631. when an attribute value changes and a range alarm generates a message when the value goes outside of the specified range At runtime the application code receives alarm messages and processes them according to the application logic An alarm label may be defined in the Builder to help identify the alarm source at runtime 254 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference The Builder provides an Alarm Browser which shows alarms attached to the selected object if no object is selected the Alarm Browser shows all alarms defined in of the drawing If no object is selected and the editing focus is in a child viewport the alarms of that viewport will be shown in the Alarm Browser An alarm may be added to any attribute or resource object by clicking on the Add Alarm button in the Attribute dialog and selecting an alarm type The alarms s AlarmLabel attribute may be set to any custom string that will help the user identify the alarm when browsing alarms in the Builder as well as at runtime The alarm s Enabled attribute may be used to enable or disable the alarm When an alarm is added its AlarmLabel is initially set to the string undefined and may be edited in the Edit Alarm dialog To edit an existing alarm click on the Edit Alarm button of the Attribute dialog All added alarms are shown in the alarm browser The Alarm Browser dialog shows a list of alarms Each alarm s entry shows its AlarmLabel Clicking on an alarm entry selects i
632. when the path factor is 0 The object is moved by the vector defined by the Origin as the start point and the first point of the path as the end point By default the Origin is constrained to the first point of the path and the object is not moved to the beginning of the path To move the object unconstrain the Origin and then define it s new value For example placing the origin in the center of the object will cause the object s center to be aligned with the path as the object moves along it You can also constrain the Origin to some point of the object which will permanently align that object s point to the path Discrete Ifset to YES changes the behavior of the transformation by interpreting the value of Factor as an integer 0 based point index Setting Factor to 1 moves the object from the first to the second point of the path setting it to 2 moves the object to the third point and so on The factor value of 0 corresponds to the first point and returns the object to the beginning of the path Offset Defines an initial path offset which is added to the value of the Factor Wrap If set to YES the values of the Factor outside of the range 0 1 for non discrete path transformations or from 0 to the number of path points for discrete paths get wrapped around instead of being truncated 156 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Concatenate The Concatenate transformation is used to build a list of geometrical tra
633. when the mouse is moved over the object The object highlight on mouse over may be used to create a hot spot Moving the mouse over such a hot spot highlights the object and using either custom events or commands described below sends a message to the program to perform application defined actions The mouse over highlight is implemented by attaching an action to the object using the Object Actions Add Mouse Feedback menu option of the Enterprise edition of the Builder then setting the actions ActionType TRACE_STATE and Trigger MOUSE_OVER The action will change the value of its State attribute to 1 when the mouse moves over the object and resets it to 0 when the mouse moves away The action s State attribute may be constrained to any attribute of the object or any of the transformations attached to it For example State is constrained to the LineWidth attribute or a polygon the line width of the polygon will be set to 1 when the mouse moves over it displaying the polygon s edge When the mouse moves away from the polygon the polygon s line width will be reset to 0 and the polygon s edge will disappear Consider another example with a list transformation attached to the polygon s Line Width attribute If the list contains two elements with values 1 and 3 and State is constrained to the Valuelndex parameter of the list transformation then the polygon s line width changes from 1 to 3 when the mouse moves over the polygon a
634. which value from the list of attribute values is displayed Equal Flag A flag that controls the threshold comparison mode It may have values of LESS use i attribute of the List of Values if the value is less than ith threshold or LESS OR EQUAL Transfer The Transfer transformation is used to transfer a value from one attribute object to another It can be used to implement a one way constraint where changes in one object affect another but not vice versa The transfer transformation may be attached to an attribute of any type D S or G The transfer transformation has the following attributes Source Constrain this attribute to the source attribute Its value is passed into the Buffer attribute Buffer Ifyou want to attach a transformation to this transfer attach it to this attribute The transformation will alter the transferred value without affecting the source value 168 Identity GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference Use Value If set to Value the Value of the Source attribute before applying any attribute transformations is used If set to XfValue default the transformed value of the Source attribute is used The transformed value includes an effect of all transformations if any attached to the attribute An example of a transfer s use will make it clear You can use a transfer transformation to set the line width of one polygon equal to a half of the line width of another Name the first polygon
635. with default names such as Level 0 Level 1 etc are assigned new default names that match their new position in the list A persistent custom name can be assigned to each level line Sort Input If set to YES the chart will find the proper insertion place for the new sample based on its time stamp to ensure that all time stamps are in the increasing order It may be useful when data samples have time stamps but some samples may be delayed in transmission and arrive out of sequence If set to NO the chart will always insert the new sample at the end Buffer X Span scrollable charts only Controls the time span in seconds of the chart s data history buffer and is used to define a data buffer larger than the chart s visible span on the X axis For example if Span of a scrolling time chart is set to 600 and its Buffer X Span is set to 3600 the chart will show data for the last 10 minutes but will keep all samples for the last hour in the data buffer allowing the user to scroll the chart Samples older than one hour will be automatically discarded when the new samples come in If BufferXSpan is set to 0 default the chart will maintain all samples visible in the chart s Span and will discard samples which scroll out and become invisible This is equivalent to BufferXSpan having a value equal to the value of the chart s Span attribute If BufferXSpan is set to 1 the chart will not discard samples based on their time
636. xisting constraints with a constraint to the point you click on see page 235 Resources or marked objects may also be used to define the control point to constrain to Constrain One is enabled only if activated in the glg_ config file e Constrain All is similar to Constrain One except that it constrains not only the point itself but also all points constrained to it see page 235 234 GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference e Unconstrain removes all constraints from the point as well as all other points constrained to it e Mark stores the point on the Builder s clipboard You can mark up to five objects see page 259 Add or Edit Alarm adds a new alarm object to monitor the points value or edits an existing alarm Add Dynamics Edit Dynamics and Delete Dynamics manipulate transformations of the con trol point see page 241 The directional arrows may be used to move the point precisely by one or more screen pixels as defined by the Move By Pixels field A fractional amount such as 0 5 may be used for even more precise positioning which might be required in the OpenGL version of the Builder The Position field may be used to position the control point by specifying its coordinates in the currently selected coordinate system The current coordinate system may be changed by the Coordinate System option of the View menu If more than one control point is located at the same spot the Builder prompts you to select the
637. y Down button is used to go down into the viewport to edit its content the viewport is extended to the entire drawing area which stretches its content due to the different X Y ratio of the drawing area If KeepEditRatio YES the X Y ratio of the viewport is maintained for the duration of editing by temporarily changing the SpanX and SpanY attributes of the viewport s screen The span attributes are restored when going back up The extent of the viewport s span is annotated by the round red markers in the corners of the default span area OwnsInputCB Controls how the input callback is invoked for the input events occurring in the viewport In an application code an input callback is often attached to a top level viewport When an event occurs in a child viewport the input callback is invoked with the viewport parameter set to the top level viewport the callback is attached to However the application may need to receive information about the actual viewport where the event occurred In this case the Owns nputCB parameter of the child viewport may be set to YES causing the input callback to be invoked with the viewport parameter set to the child viewport instead of the top level viewport the input callback is attached to This makes it easier to handle commands in the application code for example commands that display popup dialogs These commands contain resource path to the dialog to be shown and this path may be relative to the currently
638. y a set of three dimensional control points these transformations can by extension be applied to entire three dimensional graphical objects For information about the distinction between attaching a transformation to an object and to the object s points see the Transformations as Objects section on page 36 Several geometrical transformations can be concatenated together into a list with each transformation applied to the output of the previous transformation in the list When the rendering routines are attempting to draw a graphical object they first look to see what transformations are attached to the object If there are any they are applied to the object before it is displayed The set of transformation objects available in GLG can be divided into matrix and parametric The matrix stored by a matrix transformation may be directly applied to the graphical objects while the parameters in a parametric transformation must first be used to create the transformation matrix before it can be applied While the matrix transformations store information in a more compact way 152 Matrix MoveBy GLG User s Manual and Builder Reference they are static and can not be easily changed The parametric transformations can be changed dynamically by changing the transformation s parameters For more information about the structure of GLG transformations refer to the Transformations section on page 35 As a convenience most of the paramet
639. y of the level line Range Lock If set to YES prevents the level line s range from being changed when the chart is zoomed or scrolled It may be used for locking the vertical position of level lines corresponding to the locked plots that display boolean data If a level line is locked its position does not change when the chart is scrolled or zoomed in the Y direction Axis GLG Objects 123 Linked Y Axis This button is used in the Graphics Builder to associate the level with a specified Y axis in a chart with multiple Y axes and CommonRange set to NO The range of the level line will be automatically changed to correspond to the range of the associated Y axis when the range of the axis changes and vice versa The text box next to the button shows the label string of the associated Y axis The GlgSetLinkedAxis method of the GLG API may be used at run time to associate a level line with a Y axis programmatically Line attributes ofa level line can be reused the same way as described in the Line Attributes section on page 144 The Axis object is used by a chart to draw X and Y axes It may also be used as a stand alone axis or ruler object An axis object is defined by two points For an axis that is a part of a Chart object the axis s points are controlled by the chart and positioned in the diagonal corners of the chart s data area The Visibility attribute of an integrated chart axis can be used to turn individual axes on or off A
640. ygon template use Object Resources lt The Polysurface Object A polysurface is a specialized three dimensional series object It defines a set of surface patches To create a polysurface click on a point to specify the center of the polysurface and click on two points to specify two vectors from the center point The Builder prompts you for the number ofrows and columns in the surface these values control the number of surface polygons To edit the Marker template object use Traverse Hierarchy Down When you finish editing use Traverse Up to see the instance objects To edit the Polygon template use Object Resources Attaching Objects to a Frame A frame is a configuration of points that can be adjusted and positioned as a single object Each segment of the frame is populated with frame points that let you use the frame s geometry to position objects by constraining them to the frame points The Reference object may be used as a container to hold several objects connected to a frame in which case the Reference 5 control point is attached to the frame There are five types of frames which provide different configurations of frame points e A point frame allows anchoring to a single point A line frame allows anchoring to points along a line A 2D frame allows anchoring to points inside a parallelogram Using the GLG Graphics Builder 271 e A 3D frame allows anchoring to points inside a parallel prism A free frame c

Page 123 - GLG Toolkit

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents